JP2015165961A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine characterized in a performance display.SOLUTION: The game machine includes operation means, and display means. When receiving an operation of the operation means, the display means can display a first-type display as a display related to the operation means, including a first display and a third display. The third display can change a display mode from a start position to an end position according to a lapse of time. Further, the display means can display a performance display including a second display and, in a state where the display mode is continuously changed towards the end position in the third display due to non-operation of the operation means, when the second display is overlapped with a partial display in the third display, deletes the partial display.

Description

  The present invention relates to a game table represented by a spinning machine (slot machine), a ball game machine (pachinko machine), and the like.

  A conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine is configured to arouse interest in games by providing various effects to the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2008-200302 A

However, the conventional game stand has room for improvement in the effect display.
An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine characterized by an effect display.

  A gaming table according to the present invention is a gaming table comprising operating means provided at a position where a player can operate, and display means capable of executing a plurality of types of display, wherein the plurality of types of displays are provided. At least one of them is a first type of display, at least one of the plurality of types of display is a second type of display, and the first type of display is the operation of the operation The first type display is configured to be displayable when an operation of the operation unit is accepted, and the first type display includes the first display. The first type display is a display including a third display, and the third display changes the display mode from the start position to the end position as time elapses. The second type of display is a second display. The display of the second type is an effect display and the change of the display mode toward the end position in the third display is continued because the operation means is not operated. A gaming table characterized in that, when the second display overlaps with a partial display in the third display in a state, the partial display is erased. .

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the game stand with the characteristic in effect display can be provided.

It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board from the front. The circuit block diagram of a control part is shown. (A) An example of the stop symbol form of the special figure is shown. (B) An example of a stop symbol form of a decorative symbol is shown. (C) An example of a usual stop display symbol is shown. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a special figure prefetch process. The prefetch result information etc. are illustrated in the state where the prefetch result memory | storage part was memorize | stored. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure 1 related lottery process. (A) It is an example of the table used for the decision | availability determination of special figure 1 when a special figure probability is a special figure low probability state. (B) It is an example of the table used for the success / failure determination of the special figure 1 when the special figure probability is in the special figure high probability state. (C) It is an example of the table used for the success / failure determination of special figure 2 when the special figure probability is in a special figure low probability state. (D) It is an example of the table used for the decision | availability determination of special figure 2 when a special figure probability is a special figure low probability state. (A) Special figure 1 It is an example of a special figure determination table in the variable game. (B) Special figure 2 It is an example of a special figure determination table in the variable game. It is an example of the special figure 1 fluctuation | variation display time determination table used in order to determine the fluctuation | variation time of special figure 1. FIG. It is an example of the special figure 2 fluctuation display time determination table used in order to determine the fluctuation time of special figure 2. FIG. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU of a 1st sub control part performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of a 1st sub control part. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of a 1st sub control part. (D) It is a flowchart of the image control process of the 1st sub control part 400. FIG. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU of a 2nd sub control part performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of a 2nd sub control part. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of a 2nd sub control part. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of an operation means image display process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a notice lottery process. It is an example of a notice lottery table. (A)-(d) It is an example of a notice table. (A)-(b) It is an example of a notice table. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 1 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 2 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 3 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 4 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 5 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 6 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 7 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 8 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 9 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 10 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 11 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 12 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of the modification of Example 12 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 13 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 13 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of the modification of Example 13 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 14 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 15 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 16 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 17 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 18 in time series. It is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 19 in time series. It is the figure which showed the modification of the operation means image, the elapsed time alert image, and the remaining time alert image. It is the appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention from the back side. 1 is a schematic front view of a game board according to an embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the symbol aspect which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention, Comprising: (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of a special figure, (b) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of a decoration symbol, (c) Shows an example of a stop symbol form of a normal symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of the main control part which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process of the main control part which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the process of the 1st sub control part which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention, Comprising: (a) is a flowchart of a main process, (b) is a flowchart of a command reception interruption process, (c) is a timer interruption The flowchart of a process and (d) are the flowcharts of an image control process. It is a flowchart which shows the process of the 2nd sub control part which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention, Comprising: (a) is a flowchart of a main process, (b) is a flowchart of a command reception interruption process, (c) is a timer interruption It is a flowchart of a process. It is a change time determination table used by the special figure related lottery process of the main control part concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the notice lottery process of the 1st sub control part which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is an alerting | reporting mode determination table used by the notice lottery process which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a time chart which shows the button reception period of Example 1 of the notification mode of the remaining time of this invention, the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period, and the time change of a notice. It is a schematic diagram which shows the effect image displayed on a decoration symbol display apparatus at each time of FIG. It is a time chart which shows the button reception period of Example 2 of the notification aspect of the remaining time of this invention, the notification aspect of the remaining time of the button reception period, and the time change of a notice. It is a schematic diagram which shows the effect image displayed on a decoration symbol display apparatus in each time of FIG. It is a time chart which shows the time change of the button reception period of Example 3 of the notification aspect of the remaining time of this invention, and the notification aspect of the remaining time of the button reception period. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of effect image displayed on a decoration symbol display apparatus at each time of FIG. It is a time chart which shows the time change of the button reception period of Example 4 of the notification aspect of the remaining time of this invention, and the notification aspect of the remaining time of the button reception period. It is a schematic diagram which shows a part of effect image displayed on a decoration symbol display apparatus at each time of FIG. It is a time chart which shows the time change of the button reception period of Example 5 of the notification aspect of the remaining time of this invention, and the notification aspect of the remaining time of the button reception period. FIG. 66 is a schematic diagram showing a part of an effect image displayed on the decorative symbol display device at each point in FIG. 65. It is a time chart which shows the time change of the button reception period of Example 6 of the notification aspect of the remaining time of this invention, and the notification aspect of the remaining time of the button reception period. FIG. 68 is a schematic diagram showing effect images displayed on the decorative symbol display device at each point in FIG. 67. It is a time chart which shows the time change of the button reception period of Example 7 of the notification aspect of the remaining time of this invention, and the notification aspect of the remaining time of the button reception period. FIG. 70 is a schematic diagram showing effect images displayed on the decorative symbol display device at each point in FIG. 69. It is a table which determines the content of the production | presentation which concerns on the notification aspect of the remaining time of a button reception period, and the notification performed before and behind a button reception period used in Example 7 of the notification aspect of the remaining time of this invention. It is a time chart which shows the time change of the button reception period of Example 8 of the notification aspect of the remaining time of this invention, and the notification aspect of the remaining time of the button reception period. FIG. 73 is a schematic diagram showing an effect image displayed on the decorative symbol display device when the chance button is not operated at each time point in FIG. 72. FIG. 73 is a schematic diagram showing effect images after the time of (j) in FIG. 72 displayed on the decorative symbol display device when the chance button is operated at the time of (j) and (k) in FIG. 72. It is a table which determines the alerting | reporting aspect of the remaining time of each button reception period used in Example 8 of the alerting | reporting aspect of the remaining time of this invention. It is a figure which concerns on Example 9 of the alerting | reporting aspect of the remaining time of this invention, Comprising: It is a schematic diagram which shows the detail of the alerting | reporting aspect of the remaining time of the button reception period displayed on a decoration symbol display apparatus at each time. FIG. 10 is a schematic front view showing an example in which the gaming machine of the present invention is a slot machine. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 from the front side (player side). The circuit block diagram of a control part is shown. (A) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect (second symbol aspect) of the special figure, and (b) is a table summarizing the characteristics of the special figure shown in (a). (A) shows an example of the stop symbol mode (first symbol mode) of the usual figure, and (b) shows an example of the usual figure decoration symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. (A) is a figure which shows the table | surface which put together the operation | movement aspect of the common figure electric accessory 252, (b) is a figure which shows the low probability table for a common figure decision | availability determination, (c) is a figure for a common figure decision decision. It is a figure which shows a high probability table. (A) is a figure which shows the low probability per unit table for usual figure change period determination, (b) is a figure which shows the low probability lose table for usual figure change period determination, (c) is for figure change period decision. It is a figure which shows the losing table per high probability, (d) is a figure which shows the high probability losing table for usual figure change period determination. (A) is a figure which shows the low probability table for special figure success / failure determination, (b) is a figure which shows the high probability table for special figure success / failure determination, (c) is a figure which shows the special figure determination table for big hits It is. (A) is a figure which shows the jackpot table for determining the special figure fluctuation period at the time of normal figure high probability, (b) is a figure which shows the jackpot table for determining the special figure fluctuation period at the time of low figure probability, (c) It is a figure which shows the special figure fluctuation | variation period determination loss table at the time of a usual high probability, (d) is a figure which shows the special figure fluctuation | variation period determination loss table at the time of a usual low probability. (A) is a flowchart of the main process which CPU404 of the 1st sub control part 400 performs, (b) is a flowchart which shows the flow of the presentation control process shown to the same figure (a), (c). 4 is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400, and (d) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400. 4 is a flowchart showing a part of the game flow in the pachinko machine 100. It is a figure which shows the screen of the decoration symbol display apparatus in the flow of the game shown in FIG. 91 in steps. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the game flow shown in FIG. 91. FIG. It is a figure which shows the screen of the decoration symbol display apparatus in case a first hit is a big hit without a probability change in steps. It is a figure which shows the modification of the extra chance shown in FIG.94 (c). It is a time chart of regular symbol variation production and award ball appearance. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a usual symbol change production and a prize ball payment appearance. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a common figure reservation increase production | presentation and a prize ball paying appearance in the state in which the regular symbol fluctuation production | generation is performed. It is a time chart in which the usual symbol variation effect changes to a prize ball appearance. It is a figure which shows the specific example which changes from a usual symbol change effect to a prize ball payment appearance. It is a figure which shows the specific example in which a general figure holding | maintenance increase production changes in the state in which the general symbol change production is performed. It is a figure which shows the example which returns to a usual figure hold increase production after a production change from a usual figure hold increase production to a prize ball payment appearance. It is a figure which shows the example in which a prize ball payout appearance is started a little behind from the timing when the game ball passed through the central general winning opening 226. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of 2nd Embodiment from the front. (A) shows an example of a special symbol stop symbol (second symbol), (b) shows an example of a special symbol decorative symbol, and (c) shows an ordinary symbol. An example of the stop symbol pattern (first symbol pattern) is shown, and (d) shows an example of the usual decorative pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interruption process in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart which shows the flow of the special figure prefetching process which CPU304 of the main-control part 300 performs, (b) is a figure which shows the table for special figure appropriateness prior determination, (c) is a special figure. It is a figure which shows the table for figure prior determination. (A) is a figure which shows the table set selection table memorize | stored in ROM306 of the main control part 300, (b) is a figure which shows the timer number determination table memorize | stored in ROM306 of the main control part 300. (C) is a diagram showing the relationship between the timer number and the symbol variation display time. (A) is a figure which shows the table for normality determination determination memorize | stored in ROM306 of the main control part 300, (b) is a figure which shows the table for common figure determination memorize | stored in ROM306 of the main control part 300 It is. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a normal symbol change effect, a special symbol change effect, and a prefetch notice effect. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a general symbol change effect and a prefetch notice effect. It is a figure which shows the specific example of a general symbol fluctuation production and a special figure reservation increase production. It is a figure which shows the specific example in which a normal symbol change effect itself changes. It is the simplified front view which looked at the game board 200 of 3rd Embodiment from the front. (A) shows an example of a stop symbol mode (second symbol mode) of a special symbol that is stopped and displayed after the symbol variation display in the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214. (B) is a diagram showing an example of a decorative figure of a special figure, and (c) is a figure of a common figure that is stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display of the symbol in the common figure display device 210. It is the figure which showed an example of the stop symbol aspect (1st symbol aspect), (d) is the figure which showed the stop symbol aspect of the usual decoration pattern. (A) is a figure which shows the low probability table for a normal figure determination, (b) is a figure which shows the high probability table for a normal figure determination, (c) shows the low probability table for a common figure determination. It is a figure and (d) is a figure which shows the high probability table for common figure determination. (A) is a figure for demonstrating the opening / closing pattern of the electric chew in the pachinko machine of 3rd Embodiment, (b) is the illustration of the usual drawing in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating a few examples. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a usual drawing effect determination process. (A) is a figure which shows the high probability table for the success / failure determination of the special figure, (b) is a figure which shows the low probability table for the success / failure judgment of the special figure, and (c) is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. It is a figure which shows the table for the small hits determination memorize | stored, (d) is a figure which shows the special figure determination table memorize | stored in ROM306 of the main-control part 300. FIG. It is a figure showing the 1/5 part of the specific example of the effect in this embodiment. It is a figure showing 2/5 part of the specific example of the effect in this embodiment. It is a figure showing the 3/5 part of the specific example of the effect in this embodiment. It is a figure showing the 4/5 part of the specific example of the effect in this embodiment. It is a figure showing 5/5 part of the specific example of the effect in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect which mixed the prefetch effect in this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the production | presentation in which the jackpot notice was mixed in the common drawing production | production in this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows in steps the example in which the usual drawing effect of the fluctuation | variation display pattern shown to (f) of FIG. 117 (b) is performed. It is a figure showing an example of other productions. (A) is a figure which shows the success / failure determination table of the special figure 1 in 4th Embodiment, The same figure (b) is a figure which shows the success / failure determination table of the special figure 2. FIG. (A) is a figure which shows the special figure 1 non-presence judgment table used when pre-determining by pre-reading the starting information of special figure 1, (b) is a figure which shows the starting information of special figure 2 It is a figure which shows the special figure 2 non-presence judgment table used when pre-reading and making a prior judgment, (c) is a figure which shows the special figure prior judgment table. (A) is a figure which shows the table for determining whether or not a common figure is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, (b) is a figure showing a table for determining a common figure, and (c) is a figure showing a universal figure determination table. It is a figure which shows a figure timer table. (A) is a figure which shows the table for a common figure pre-judgment prior judgment used when pre-determining by pre-reading the starting information of a common figure, (b) is a figure which shows the table for a common figure advance judgment It is. (A) is a flowchart which shows the flow of the general-purpose effect determination process in 4th Embodiment, (b) is a flowchart which shows the flow of the predetermined area | region notice effect determination process in 4th Embodiment. It is a time chart showing a flow of an example of production in a 4th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the mode of the decoration symbol display apparatus etc. for every important point in the time chart shown in FIG. FIG. 135 is a time chart showing a continuation of the example shown in FIG. 134. FIG. It is a figure which shows the mode of the decoration symbol display apparatus etc. for every important point in the time chart shown in FIG. It is a time chart which shows the modification of a 2nd general drawing effect. It is a time chart which shows the example when a predetermined condition turns into a non-established state from an established state. It is a figure which shows an example of a common figure prefetch notice. It is a figure which shows the example which performs the jackpot notice effect of a special figure in the common figure effect area | region 283 of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example which performs the advance notice effect to the specific effect of a special figure in the general drawing effect area | region 283 of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example in which the common figure production | presentation area | region 283 of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 functions as a display area | region of a reserved digest production | presentation. 1 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable.

  <Embodiment 1>

Hereinafter, the gaming machine (for example, a ball game machine such as the pachinko machine 100 or a spinning game machine such as a slot machine) according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
<Overall configuration>

  First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface. The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so that the inner side of the front frame door 106 can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a front frame door opening sensor 109 that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage tray is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and is provided with a door-side ball passage unit that guides the game balls to the launching device. An upper plate 126, a lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, and a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by a player's operation. , A ball discharge lever 132 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 by the player's operation to a game ball collecting container (common name, dollar box), and a game guided to the launching device 110 by the player's operation The ball launching handle 134 that launches the ball to the game area 124 of the game board 200, the chance button 136 that changes the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 by the player's operation, and the chance button 136 are illuminated. Provided that the chance button lamp 138, a. In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The setting operation unit 137 is a push button type switch that can be pressed by a setting person (for example, a player or the like), a confirmation (OK) button, an upper button located above the confirmation button, and a lower part of the confirmation button. , A right button located to the right of the confirm button, a left button located to the left of the confirm button, and a cancel (C) button located further to the right of the right button. Yes. In addition, the setting operation unit 137 includes an operation unit sensor 427 (see FIG. 4) that detects the pressing operation of each button. The setting operation unit 137 of the present embodiment has a unit structure in which buttons and operation unit sensors are integrated. It should be noted that at least one of the buttons of the setting operation unit 137 may be configured to have the same function as the chance button 136 described above.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. . The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.
<Back of the pachinko machine>

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is positioned below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. To pay out the ball to the player.

On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300 The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-board that performs control processing related to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. An error release switch that constitutes a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls, and that releases an error by the operation of a game clerk Discharge board case 172 storing the payout board 170 having 168, launch base constituting the launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of the game ball A launch board case 176 that houses 174, a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines, and a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game store clerk and an RWM clear by being operated when the power is turned on A power board case 184 that houses a power board 182 that includes an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs a signal to the main controller 300, and a CR interface 186 that transmits and receives signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit are provided. ing.
<Front of game board>

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially in the center, and around the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, and the ordinary device. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”. The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In this embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7 segment LEDs in this embodiment.

  The multi-purpose hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general-purpose variable games (details will be described later) that are on hold. In this embodiment, the general-purpose variable games are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games (details will be described later) that are being held. In this embodiment, the special figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, there are predetermined ball entrances, for example, a general prize opening 226, a general start port 228, a first special view start port 230, a second special view start port 232, around the effect device 206. A variable winning opening 234 is provided.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detecting sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning is sometimes referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player is sometimes referred to as “rental ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 228 is constituted by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, a payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball for the upper plate 126. The special figure changing game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric Chu). In the present embodiment, only one second special figure starting port 232 is disposed directly below the first special figure starting port 230. The second special figure starting port 232 includes a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the wing member 232a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. When 210 hits and stops and displays the symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a large winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is disposed below the center of the game board 200. The variable winning opening 234 includes a door member 234a that can be opened and closed. When the door member 234a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball, and the special figure display device stops the jackpot symbol when the special figure variable game is won. When displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds) and at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, After guiding a ball that has not won any prize opening or start opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out opening is provided for discharging to the game island side.

This pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches 146 Further, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 148 and driven into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or start opening (Outside the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232), winning out any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal start port 228, the out port 240 To reach.
<Directing device 206>

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball carried on by a nail of the game board 200, or the like, and the passed ball is a first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry into the golf course.

  In this embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b imitating the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor and an elbow (not shown) that rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm 224b at a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding means shields the inner end portions thereof so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.
<Control unit>

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the game ball payout, the launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and the power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 are configured. Yes.
<Main control unit>

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time and frequency, and WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing are mounted. . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a counter circuit 318 used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes two circuits). And a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each start port, winning port, variable winning port, front frame door opening sensor, and inner frame opening sensor. And a sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a lower plate full sensor and outputting a comparison result with an amplification result or a reference voltage to the counter circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device For example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, a predetermined symbol display device, A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the general-purpose display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, a general-purpose reservation lamp 216, a first special figure reservation lamp 218, a second special figure reservation lamp 220, a high-probability medium) A driving circuit 330 for performing display control of the lamp 222 and the like, and various solenoids 332 for opening and closing a predetermined movable member, for example, the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232, the door member 234a of the variable winning port 234, and the like. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the above is connected.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the counter circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the counter circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the counter circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the second special figure starting port 232 has won a ball, the counter circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control section main processing described later is started).

The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300.
<Sub control unit>

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effects data, RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and for measuring time, frequency, etc. The counter timer 412 is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246. A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button detection sensor 426 for detecting depression of the chance button 136, and pressing of each button of the setting operation unit 137 An operation unit sensor 427 that detects an operation, a sensor circuit 428 that outputs detection signals from the shielding device sensor 430, chance button detection sensor 426, and operation unit sensor 427 to the basic circuit 402, and a ROM 406 based on a signal from the CPU 404. Read stored image data, etc. It is connected to generate a display image using the rear for displaying an image on the decorative pattern display apparatus 208 VDP434 a (video display processor), a.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and frequency 512 is installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, and an image display A ROM 506 storing data and the like is provided.

The basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, and a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. Is output to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table frame lamp drive for controlling the game table frame lamp 542 The circuit 540 is connected to a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.
<Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control unit are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.
<Type of design>

  Next, using FIGS. 5A to 5C, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special maps and general maps to be described will be described. FIG. 4A shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special figure.

  The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the ball has entered the second special figure start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start port sensor has detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” by repeating all lighting of seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 displays “fluctuation display of special figure 2” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Do. These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display according to the present invention.

  Then, when the variation time determined before the variation start of the special figure 1 (corresponding to the variation time referred to in the present invention) elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the special symbol form of the special figure 1. When the variation time determined before the start of variation 2 (this also corresponds to the variation time according to the present invention) has elapsed, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special diagram 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display referred to in the present invention, hereinafter, after the “variable display of special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed. The series of displays up to is referred to as symbol variation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. In FIG. 10A, 10 types of special figures from “Special figure A” to “Special figure F” and “Special figure a” to “Special figure d” are shown as the stop symbol forms in the symbol fluctuation stop display. In the figure, the white portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  “Special Figure A” is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, the determination as to whether or not the big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the decision as to whether or not it is a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state. Moreover, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, both shift to the time-saving state. Although the time reduction will be described in detail later, the state that shifts to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal high probability state, and the state that does not shift to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal low probability state. “Special figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and “Special figure B”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state. These “special chart A” and “special chart B” are symbols that give a relatively large profit amount to the player.

  “Special figure a” is a 16R special jackpot symbol and “Special figure b” is an 8R special jackpot symbol, both of which are in a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. “Special figure c” is an 8R jackpot symbol, which is a special figure high probability ordinary figure low probability state. "Special figure C" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. "Special figure D" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden time reduction, and is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure D” is 2R compared to “Special Figure B” which is 15R. “Special figure E” is a small hit symbol, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. In addition, “special drawing F” and “special drawing d” are out-of-order symbols, and are the symbols in which the profit amount given to the player is relatively small.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, symbols other than “Special Figure A” are prepared as 15R special jackpot symbols, and the same applies to other symbols such as 15R jackpot symbols.

  FIG. 5B shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure start port 230 or the second special view start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special view start port 230; or On the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special symbol start port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Displayed in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →... “Decoration display of decorative pattern” is performed.

  For example, when the 15R jackpot of “special drawing B” is notified, a symbol combination (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration”) corresponding to the 15R jackpot corresponding to the 15R jackpot in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. 1 ”or“ decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2 ”). When the 15R special jackpot of “special drawing A” is notified, a combination of three symbols of the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” or “decoration 7—decoration 7—decoration 7”). Etc.) is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when notifying of the difference between “special drawing F” and “special drawing d”, symbol combinations other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. 5B are stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

FIG.5 (c) shows an example of the usual stop display symbol. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes for ordinary maps: “general diagram A” which is a winning symbol and “general symbol B” which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that a sphere has passed through the general-purpose start opening 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the usual figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 6C, the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.
<Main control unit main processing>

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal is input executes a main control unit main process according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306 after resetting by a reset interrupt.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, to the WDT 314 The operation is permitted and the initial value is set. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value. In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 9v), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), the step is performed. The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312 and a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption), and the state before power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to an initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of an amusement store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is turned on (indicates that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

In step S115, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the ordinary figure winning random number counter and the special figure random value counter, the ordinary figure timer random number value, and the special figure timer, respectively. Two random number counters for generating each random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a normal timer random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal timer random value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. Note that the initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.
<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>

  Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle. In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT is periodically updated (so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the ordinary drawing starting port 228. Is determined to have passed.

  In other words, it is determined that a prize has been awarded to the winning ports 226 and 234 and the starting ports 230, 232, and 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal winning random number value used in the main control unit 300, Two random number counters for generating the special figure 1 random value and the special figure 2 random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next time, in addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the random number value of FIG. 1 and the counter for acquiring the random value of FIG. 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 are timed. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed and stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215, winning prize counter update processing is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when winning holes 226, 234 and starting holes 230, 232, 228 are won, the RAM 308 stores the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value is read out, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, and the variable winning port 234. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S203. When a winning is made at the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is stored in the special counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318. And a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random value as a special figure 1 random value and storing it in the corresponding random value storage area. When a winning is made to the second special figure starting port 232 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is sent from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318 to the special figure 2 winning random number value. And a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random value as a special figure 2 random value and storing it in the corresponding random value storage area. If there is a win at the general figure starting port 228 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is obtained as a normal figure winning random number value from the random number counter for generating the normal figure winning random number value. Store in the corresponding random value storage area. When there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening.

  In step S219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing when the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the win symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be in the off symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines the symbol of either the winning symbol (the common symbol A shown in FIG. 5C) or the off symbol (the common symbol B shown in FIG. 5C). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 232a is opened to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is out, the usual figure out flag is turned on as will be described later. When the off-normal flag is on, the normal state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing at which the normal stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  In step S224, special figure prefetch processing is performed for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 (details will be described later). Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed in accordance with the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on. Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game).

  In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  In addition, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 controls the turning on / off of the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214, and then confirms the special diagram 2 using the second special symbol display device 214. Display. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not (details will be described later), the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state).

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, the special figure 2 is in operation and waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Alternatively, the door member 234a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234 until a winning of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the variable prize opening 234. In addition to outputting a signal to be held at the same time, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234, and a closing period is stored in a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment) and finished, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) In other words, the effect standby period is stored in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for a period during which an image for informing the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Set the information indicating. Also, if the normal probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the jackpot game, the time reduction number 100 is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. If the usual time probability variation flag is set to OFF, the time reduction number is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned ON. The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is a normal high probability state. There is a higher probability of hitting a general-purpose variable game in the high-probability state than in the low-probability state. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal figure variable game and the fluctuation time of the special figure variable game are shorter in the normal figure high probability state than in the normal figure low probability state. Further, in the normal high probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special start port 232 tends to be longer than in the normal low probability state. In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the jackpot game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a jackpot game, a large number of games will be placed in the second special figure start port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls are entered during the jackpot game. There is a problem that a ball enters and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the jackpot increases, resulting in an increase in euphoria. This is to solve this problem. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of the way, the off flag is turned on as will be described later. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. Further, the notification of the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the second special figure starting port 232 is notified. However, it is performed in preference to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the first special figure starting port 230.

  In step S233, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (In this embodiment, command types such as basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command are specified. Possible information), bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol change start command, the command data includes the big hit flag and small hit flag values, the special figure probability fluctuation flag value, the special figure stop symbol selected in the special drawing related lottery process, and the timer number. In the case of a symbol variation stop command, including a value for a special symbol variation time, including a value of a big hit flag, a small hit flag, a value of a special symbol probability variation flag, etc., a winning effect command and an end effect start In the case of a command, the value of a special figure probability variation flag is included, and in the case of a jackpot round number designation command, the value of a special figure probability variation flag, the number of big hit rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 232, winning of the variable winning port 234 Includes presence or absence.

  In the above rotation start setting transmission process, the big hit flag and the small hit flag value, the special figure probability variation flag value, the special figure 1 related lottery process, and the special figure 2 related lottery stored in the RAM 308 as command data. Information indicating the timer number selected in the process, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the big hit flag, the small hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described large winning opening release setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In the above-mentioned big winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a full tray error is monitored. When the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the normal symbol display device 210 and the first special symbol display via the display circuits 324, 326 and 330. Display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S239, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241.

  In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to.

On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. Then, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit.
<Special figure look-ahead processing>

  FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure prefetch process (step S224) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 prefetches the start information increased in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, predetermines the stop symbol before the success / failure judgment process, and obtains a predetermination result (special The figure prefetching result) is stored in the prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308 (see FIGS. 9A to 9C).

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 1 prefetch result and the number of special figure 1 prefetch results stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit are specially displayed. A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area for storing as one pre-reading number is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 1 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 1 prefetching result with the highest rank (first) is erased and the remaining special figure 1 prefetching result Are processed so that the rank of the data is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 1 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 1 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 1 prefetch result data of the lowest rank (last).

  Also, in the RAM 308, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 2 prefetch result and the number of special figure 2 prefetch results stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit are shown in FIG. A special figure 2 prefetch number storage area for storing the prefetch number is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 2 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 prefetching result having the highest rank is deleted and the order of the remaining special figure 2 prefetching result data Are processed so that they are incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 2 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 2 prefetch data having the lowest rank.

  In the special figure prefetching process, first, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the starting information of the special figure 2 has increased (step S251). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased is stored in, for example, the special figure 2 hold number stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. Special figure 2 Compared with the number of pre-reads. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 has increased when the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, and the special figure 2 hold number is the special figure 2 prefetch number. If they are equal, it is determined that the starting information in FIG. 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the start information of FIG. 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S252, and if it is determined that the start information of FIG. 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S254.

  In step S252, the increased special figure 2 starting information (a special figure 2 winning random value and a pair of special figure 2 random value) is obtained before the success / failure determination process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). FIG. 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information and the determination table for special determination 2 and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 2 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S229). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S253 following step S252, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S254.

  In step S254, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information in FIG. 1 has increased. Whether or not the starting information of the special figure 1 has increased is determined by, for example, the special figure 1 holding number stored in the special figure 1 holding number storage area and the special figure 1 pre-reading number storage as in the special figure 2. The comparison is made with the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the area. If it is determined that the starting information of FIG. 1 is increasing, the process proceeds to step S255, and if it is determined that the starting information of FIG. Return to timer interrupt processing.

  In step S255, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not non-electric support is being performed. If it is determined that the non-electric support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S256, and if it is determined that the non-electric support is not being performed (the electric support is being performed (ordinary high probability state)), the process proceeds to step S258. In this example, it is determined whether or not non-electric support is being performed, but it may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 prefetch notice is satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-electric support.

  In step S256, the increased special figure 1 starting information (special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random value pair) is processed before the success determination process in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231). FIG. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information and the determination table for special determination and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 1 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected as the special figure 1 related lottery. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S231). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S257 following step S256, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In step S258, the pre-read result for pre-Fig. 1 is stored in the RAM 308 in place of the stop symbol information instead of pre-reading the start-up information without pre-reading the increased special-Fig. 1 start information. Stored in the earliest free area of the copy. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined. However, all start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-read result of the starting information for the increase may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-read result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 All the prefetching results in the section may be transmitted to the first sub-control section 400.

In addition, pre-reading is always executed for the starting information of the increased special figure 2, and pre-reading is always executed for the increased starting information of the special figure 1 except during the electric support. It may be determined by lottery whether or not to pre-read the starting information in FIG. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the prefetch result from the main control unit 300, for example, it may be determined by lottery whether to perform prefetch notification for each hold. Regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not non-electric support is in progress), when the start information increases, prefetching is always executed and the prefetching result is stored in the prefetching result storage unit. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether or not to perform lottery and presentation using the pre-read result. Further, the start information and the prefetch result of each special figure may be stored in one start information and the prefetch result storage unit without providing an area for storing the start information and the prefetch result for each special figure. good.
<Prefetch result information>

  FIG. 9 illustrates a state in which prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 6A shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 6A, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 1 variable game holdable number. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of Special Figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 5A, the storage area “hold 1” stores “special drawing E” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage area “hold 2” stores “special drawing E” as stop symbol information. ”(Out of line) is stored,“ Special Figure D ”(small hit) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area“ Hold 3 ”, and“ Special Figure A ”is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area“ Hold 4 ”. (15R special jackpot) is stored.

  FIG. 5B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 6B, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (4 in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 2 variable game holdable number. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 5B, the storage area “hold 1” stores “special drawing d” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4” have stop symbols. Information is not stored. In FIG. 5B, the state where the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is expressed as “none”.

  FIG. 6C shows an example of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 during the electric support. As shown in FIG. 5C, “undecided” information is stored in the storage area “hold 1” instead of the stopped symbol information. In the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4”, neither stop symbol information nor “undecided” information is stored.

In the above description, an example is given in which only stop symbols are pre-determined and only stop symbol information is stored in the pre-read result storage unit. However, the determination result, variable timer number (variable time), timer group to be described later, etc. The information may be determined and stored in the prefetch result storage unit, and may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 as prefetch result information.
<Special drawing 1 related lottery processing>

  Next, the special drawing 1 related lottery process in the main control unit timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure 1 related lottery process.

  In step S281, it is determined whether or not the special symbol or special electric accessory is in operation, that is, whether or not the special figure 1 variable game or big hit game is in progress, and if applicable, the process is terminated. If not, the process proceeds to step S282. In step S282, it is determined whether or not there is a special figure 1 variable game on hold. If there is no special figure 1 variable game on hold, the process ends. If there is a hold, the process proceeds to step S283.

  In step S283, it is determined whether the above-mentioned special figure probability variation flag is ON or OFF. If the special figure probability variation flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S284, and a high probability table for success / failure determination to be described later [see FIG. ] Using the lottery data, the big hit determination (big hit determination) and the small hit determination (small hit determination) are performed, and if the special figure probability variation flag is OFF, the process proceeds to step S285 to determine the success described later. Using the lottery data of the determination low probability table [special figure 1], big hit determination (big hit determination) and small hit determination (small hit determination) are performed.

  In step S286, it is determined whether or not the big hit determination result is a big win. If yes, the process proceeds to step S287, and if not, the process proceeds to step S288. In step S287, a symbol lottery is performed based on the jackpot success / failure determination result and the symbol random number value, and the jackpot symbol (in this embodiment, in the case of Special Figure 1, any one of Special Figure A to Special Figure D, Special Figure 2). In this case, after any of the special drawings a to c is determined, the process proceeds to step S291.

  In step S288, it is determined whether or not the small hitting result is a small hit. If yes, the process proceeds to step S289, and if not, the process proceeds to step S290. In step S 289, a symbol lottery is performed based on the above-described small hit / no-go determination result and the symbol random number value, and the small hit symbol (in this embodiment, in the case of special figure 1, special figure E and special figure 2 are small hits). After determining (none), the process proceeds to step S291.

  In step S290, a symbol lottery is performed based on the random number value of the symbol, and after determining the off symbol (in this embodiment, the special symbol F in the case of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol d in the case of the special symbol 2), Proceed to step S291. In step S291, a variation type lottery is performed on the basis of the type of special figure stop symbol determined in steps S286 to S290 and the number of currently stored memory (at the start of fluctuation of special figure 2) to determine the fluctuation pattern and special figure fluctuation time. To do.

In the above-described special figure 2 related lottery process, the lottery process related to special figure 2 is performed. Of the special figure 1 related lottery processes shown in FIG. The table [Special Figure 1] is replaced with a high probability table for determination of success / failure [Special Figure 2], and the low probability table for determination of success / failure [Special Figure 1] is replaced with a low probability table for determination of success / failure [Special Figure 2]. Since the process is the same as the process without the determination, the description thereof is omitted.
<Data table of main control unit>

Next, a data table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.
<Win / fail judgment table>

  11A is an example of a table used for the determination of whether or not the special figure is in a special figure probability state when the special figure probability is in the special figure low probability state. It is the table which linked | related and memorize | stored the numerical value range and the success / failure result of FIG. Moreover, the high probability table for success / failure determination [Special Figure 1] shown in FIG. 5B is an example of a table used for the success / failure determination of Special Figure 1 when the special figure probability is in the special figure high probability state. It is the table which linked | related and stored the range of the winning random number value, and the success / failure result of FIG.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 refers to the success / failure determination low probability table [Special Figure 1] when the special figure probability is in the special figure low probability state, and based on the acquired special figure winning random number value, Judgment whether special figure 1 variable game is won (big hit), special figure 1 variable game is won (small hit), or wrong (missed) In the case where the special figure 1 is in the special figure high probability state, the special figure winning random number value (details will be described later) is obtained by referring to the high probability table for success / failure determination [special figure 1]. The big hit judgment or the small hit judgment of FIG. 1 is performed.

  For example, when the special figure probability is in the special figure low probability state and the acquired special figure winning random number value is 10001 to 10219, it is determined that the special figure 1 variable game is won (big hit) and the big hit provided in the RAM 308 Information indicating that it is a big hit in the flag storage area is set (hereinafter, setting the big hit information in the big hit flag storage area is referred to as “setting the big hit flag on”).

  Further, when the special figure probability is in the special figure low probability state and the acquired special figure winning random number value is 10220 to 10383, it is determined that the special figure 1 variable game is won (small hit) and is provided in the RAM 308. Information indicating that the small hit flag is stored in the small hit flag storage area is set (hereinafter, the setting of the small hit information in the small hit flag storage area is referred to as “setting the small hit flag ON”).

  In the case where the special figure probability is in the special figure low probability state, if the acquired special figure winning random number value is 0 to 10000 or 10384 to 65535, it is determined that the special figure 1 variable game is lost, and The information indicating that there is a shift in the storage area for the big hit flag and the small hit flag is set (hereinafter referred to as setting the big hit flag to OFF) Setting the deviation information in the small hit flag storage area is referred to as “setting the small hit flag off”).

  The failure determination low probability table [Special Figure 2] shown in FIG. 6C is an example of a table used for the determination of special figure 2 when the special figure probability is in the special figure low probability state. It is the table which linked | related and memorize | stored the numerical value range and the success / failure result of FIG. Further, the high / bad determination probability table [Special Figure 2] shown in FIG. 4D is an example of a table used for the determination of special figure 2 when the special figure probability is in the special figure high probability state. It is the table which linked | related and stored the range of the winning random number value, and the success / failure result of FIG.

When the special figure probability is in the special figure low probability state, the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 refers to the low probability table for special determination [Special figure 2], and acquires the special figure winning random number value (details will be described later). ) To determine whether the special figure 2 variable game is won (big hit) or wrong (missed) (special figure 2 big hit judgment). In such a case, the jackpot determination of special figure 2 is performed based on the acquired special figure winning random number value (details will be described later) with reference to the high probability table for determination of success / failure [special figure 2]. Note that the special figure 2 variable game is configured not to win a small hit.
<Special figure determination table>

  The special figure determination table [Special Figure 1] and the special figure determination table [Special Figure 2] shown in FIGS. It is the data table which linked | related and stored the random value and the kind of special figure stop symbol by the 1st, 2nd special figure display apparatuses 212 and 214. FIG.

  The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table, the above jackpot determination result (the value of the big hit flag), the small hit determination result (the value of the small hit flag), and the acquired symbol random number value. Based on this, a special symbol lottery for determining the type of the special symbol stop symbol is performed. When the big hit flag is on, the obtained big hit symbol random number value is used as the symbol random number value, and when the big hit flag is on, the small bonus symbol generated from the above special figure winning random number value is used. Use the random number value as the design random number value, and if the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off (when the big hit judgment result and the small hit judgment result are out of date), use the acquired off-set design random number value as the design random number value. To do.

  In the present embodiment, in the special figure 1 variable game, referring to the special figure determination table [special figure 1] in FIG. 10A, when the big hit flag is on (when the determination result is a big hit), When the acquired symbol random number value is 0-24, the special symbol A has a probability of 25/100, and when the acquired symbol random number value is 25-49, the special symbol B has the probability of 25 /. Is 50 to 54, the special figure C is selected with a probability of 5/100, and when the acquired symbol random number is 55 to 99, the special figure D is selected with a probability of 45/100. In addition, when the small hit flag is on (when the determination result is a small hit), the special figure E (small hit) is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the design random number, and the big hit flag and the small hit flag are set. When it is off (when the determination result is out of date), the special figure F (out) is selected with a probability of 100/100 (100%) regardless of the design random number value.

Also, in the special figure 2 variable game, when the big hit flag is on (when the determination result is a big hit), the special figure a has a probability of 70/100 when the acquired symbol random number is 0 to 69. When the acquired symbol random value is 70 to 74, the special symbol b is selected with a probability of 5/100, and when the acquired symbol random value is 75 to 99, the special symbol c is selected with a probability of 25/100. In the special figure 2 variable game, when the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off (when the result of the determination is wrong), the special figure d (missed) is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the design random number value. To do. In the special figure 2 variable game, unlike the special figure 1 variable game, the probability that the small hit is selected is set to 0%.
<Variable display time determination table>

  FIG. 13 is an example of the special figure 1 fluctuation display time determination table used for determining the fluctuation time of the special figure 1, and FIG. 14 is a special figure 2 fluctuation used for determining the fluctuation time of the special figure 2. It is an example of a display time determination table.

  The variable display time determination table is a table in which the above-described special figure stop symbol type, special symbol variable time, the effect performed using the decorative symbol display device 208 at the time of special graphic variation, and a random value are stored in association with each other. It is. The basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 performs a variation pattern lottery for determining the variation time of the special figure and the effect of the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the variation display time determination table and the acquired random value.

For example, when determining the fluctuation time of special figure 1, refer to the special figure 1 fluctuation display time determination table shown in FIG. 13, and the type of special figure stop symbol is special figure A or special figure B. When the numerical value range is 1001 to 20000, the variation time is 45000 ms, and the decoration design display device 208 is selected as per super reach A. In addition, when determining the fluctuation time of the special figure 2, the special figure stop symbol type is the special figure a to the special figure c with reference to the special figure 2 fluctuation display time determination table shown in FIG. When the numerical value range is 20001 to 65535, the fluctuation time is 65000 ms, and the decoration pattern display device 208 is selected as per super reach B.
<Processing of First Sub-Control Unit 400>

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 4D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S301 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is substituted into the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading effect data corresponding to the command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when update of the effect data is necessary, effect data update processing is performed. In step S311, when the pressing of the operation means such as the chance button 136 or the setting operation unit 137 is detected, the effect data updated in step S309 is changed to effect data corresponding to the pressing of the operation means. In step S313, if there is a command to VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S315, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416. In step S317, if there is a command to the various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 420. In step S319, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 432. In step S321, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S303.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). Execute in the cycle.

  In step S501 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-control unit main process, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. To do. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S503 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, a control command is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 set in step S319, an effect random number value is updated, and the like.

  Next, the image control process in step S313 in the main process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605. If not, a transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it. In step S605, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 sets parameters according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

In step S607, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404. In step S609, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611. If not, the generation end interrupt signal is determined. Wait for input. In step S611, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.
<Processing of Second Sub-Control Unit 500>

  Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 8C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

  First, in step S701 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S701. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed. In step S703, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705.

  In step S705, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S709, an effect control process is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S707, the effect data corresponding to this command is read from the ROM 506, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. In step S <b> 711, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520. In step S713, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to step S703.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and a timer interrupt process is performed in response to this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle.

In step S901 of the second sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 in the second sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S903 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, an effect random number update process is performed.
<Operation means image display processing>

  Next, the operation unit image display process executed in the image control process (step S313) of the first sub control unit main process described above will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the operation means image display process.

  In step S1001, it is determined whether the start timing of the reception period of the operation means (for example, the chance button 136 or the setting operation unit 137) has arrived. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S1002, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1002. The process proceeds to S1004. The operation means according to the present invention is not limited to the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137, and includes, for example, a ball launch handle 134 and the like as long as it can be operated by the player. The “operation means reception period” is a period during which an operation of the operation means is detected and it is determined that the operation is valid and processing corresponding to the operation can be executed.

  In addition, the condition for determining that “the start timing of the acceptance period of the operation means has arrived” is not particularly limited. For example, when winning a big hit or a small win of a special figure variable game in the special figure prefetching process, a predetermined number of games When a ball is paid out, if the gaming state transitions from the first gaming state to the second gaming state advantageous to the player (or the third gaming state disadvantageous to the player), after the big hit game For example, when a special figure variation game is performed a predetermined number of times, or when a predetermined lottery is won.

  In step S1002, in order to display the operation means image (details will be described later, for example, an image imitating the chance button 136) on the decorative symbol display device 208, effect data corresponding to the operation means image is read from the ROM 406. The process proceeds to step S1003. In step S1003, an elapsed time notification image for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation means (including an elapsed time notification image that also serves as an operation means image to be described later, and an elapsed time notification image accompanied by display of the operation means image is included. In the same manner, the effect data corresponding to the elapsed time notification image is read from the ROM 406 and the effect data is updated when the effect data needs to be updated. To finish the process.

  For example, when an elapsed time notification image that also serves as an operation means image (an operation means image that can be understood that some operation is necessary for the operation means. For example, a progress information notification image that simulates the operation means) is displayed. The effect data corresponding to the elapsed time notification image is read from the ROM 406, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. Also, an elapsed time notification image that does not include information related to the operation means (an elapsed time notification image in which it is not possible to grasp that the operation of the operation means is necessary. For example, an elapsed time notification image consisting only of a number representing the elapsed time) is displayed. If there is, the effect data corresponding to the operation means image is read from the ROM 406, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. In this embodiment, an example in which an elapsed time notification image (for example, an image of a meter scale) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in each of the examples to be described later, but the elapsed time notification image is not displayed. May be. If not displayed, the process ends without performing the process of step S1003.

  In step S1004, it is determined whether or not the operation means image is being displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. If not, the process ends. If it is being displayed, the process proceeds to step S1005. In this step S1005, it is determined whether or not the operation of the operation means corresponding to the operation means image (for example, the chance button 136 when the operation means image is an image imitating the chance button 136) is accepted, and the operation is accepted. If YES in step S1007, the process advances to step S1007. If no operation is accepted, the process advances to step S1006.

  In step S1006, it is determined whether the display end timing of the operation means image has arrived. If applicable, the process proceeds to step S1007, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1008. Here, the condition for determining that “the display end timing of the operation means image has arrived” is not particularly limited. For example, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the operation means in step S1002, the gaming state is different. The case where it transfers to a gaming state etc. is mentioned.

  In step S1007, the operation means images displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 (including an operation means image that also serves as an elapsed time notification image and an operation means image that accompanies the display of the elapsed time notification image. The display of the operation means image is terminated. In step S1008, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation means coincides with a predetermined time (T seconds) set in advance, the process proceeds to step S1009 if applicable, and to step S1010 if not applicable. move on.

  In step S1009, in order to switch the operation means image to a specific image when the elapsed time of the operation means reception period coincides with a predetermined time (T seconds) set in advance, the effect data corresponding to the specific image is changed. Processing such as reading from the ROM 406 is performed. On the other hand, in step S1010, in order to continue the display of the operation means image, processing such as reading effect data corresponding to the operation means image is read from the ROM 406. If the effect data needs to be updated, image data update processing is performed. I do.

For example, an operation unit image that also serves as an elapsed time notification image (an operation unit image that can grasp the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation unit. For example, display mode (color, size, shape, font of characters according to the elapsed time) In order to continue the display of the operation means image, processing such as reading effect data corresponding to the operation means image from the ROM 406 is performed. When the data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. In addition, an operation unit image that does not include information related to the elapsed time (an operation unit image in which the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation unit cannot be grasped. For example, an operation unit image including only an image imitating the operation unit, When an operation means image consisting only of character information representing a name (for example, a chance button) is displayed, the effect data corresponding to the operation means image is stored in the ROM 406 in order to continue displaying the operation means image. When the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated.
<Notice lottery processing>

  Next, the notice lottery process executed in the image control process (step S313) of the first sub control unit main process described above will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the notice lottery process.

  In step S1101, with reference to the value of the big hit flag included in the command received from the main control unit 300 (for example, symbol variation start command), if the value of the big hit flag is on, it is determined that the big hit is won, step S1102 If the value of the big hit flag is OFF, it is determined that the big hit is not won, and the flow advances to step S1103. In step S1102, after performing a lottery using a lottery value corresponding to “big hit (15R series)”, “big hit (sudden probability change)” or “big hit (latency probability change)” in a later-described notice lottery table, step S1106 is performed. Proceed to

In step S1103, the value of the small hit flag included in the command received from the main control unit 300 (for example, the symbol variation start command) is referred to. In step S1104, if the value of the small hit flag is OFF, it is determined that the small hit is not won, and the flow advances to step S1105. In step S1104, the lottery value corresponding to “small hit” in the notice lottery table, which will be described later, is used, and then the process proceeds to step S1106. In step S1105, the lottery value corresponding to “miss” in the notice lottery table, which will be described later, is used, and then the process proceeds to step S1106. In step S1106, the process is terminated after a command including information on the lottery result of the advance notice lottery is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500.
<Data table of first sub-control unit>

Next, a data table stored in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS.
<Notice lottery table>

  The notice lottery table shown in FIG. 19 is an example of a table used for the notice lottery performed in the notice lottery process described above. The special symbol design type (result of success / failure), the fluctuation time of the special figure, the notice table number, and the lottery value It is a table in which numerical ranges are associated and stored.

  In the basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400, when the big hit flag is on, the item of “symbol type” in the notice lottery table is “big hit (15R series)”, “big hit (sudden probability change)”, or “big hit ( With reference to the lottery value corresponding to “latency probability change”, a lottery (preliminary lottery) for selecting any one of the notice tables 1 to 5 is performed based on the acquired random number value for the notice lottery.

  For example, when the jackpot flag is on, the symbol type of special figure 1 is special figure A or special figure B, and the fluctuation time of special figure 1 is 15000 ms, the item of “symbol type” in the notice lottery table is “big hit (15R System) ”and“ variation time ”items refer to the lottery value corresponding to“ 15000 ms ”, and when the obtained random number for preliminary lottery is 0 to 9, the preliminary announcement table 2 is selected and the preliminary lottery randomness acquired When the numerical value is 10 to 29, the advance notice table 3 is selected, when the obtained advance notice lottery random number value is 30 to 94, the advance notice table 4 is selected, and when the obtained advance notice lottery random number value is 95 to 99, The notice table 5 is selected.

In the present embodiment, when the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off (disconnected) and the fluctuation time of the special figure is 1500 ms, 3000 ms, or 8000 ms, the notice table 1 is stored regardless of the random number value for the notice lottery. select. The notice table 5 is selected when the jackpot flag is on and the symbol type of special figure 1 is special figure A or special figure B (or the special symbol type of special figure 2 is special figure a to special figure c). Only if. Further, the lottery value when the big hit flag is on and the symbol type of special figure 1 is special figure D (latency probability change) and the lottery value when the small hit flag is on are set to be the same. In the present embodiment, the lottery is a lottery with a table for small hits, but the lottery may be performed with the same table as the table for big hits.
<Notice table>

  The notice table shown in FIG. 20A is an example of the notice table 4 in the notice table described above, and is a table that stores the notice mode and the numerical value range of the lottery value in association with each other.

  The basic circuit 402 of the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the notice table 4 when the notice table 4 is selected in the notice lottery described above, and determines the notice mode of the notice table 4 based on the acquired random number value. The notice mode lottery is performed. For example, when the acquired random number value is 0 to 9, “button press (one time) notice” is selected, the acquired mode is determined, and when the acquired random number value is 10 to 24, “button press (two times) ) Select "Notice", select "Conversation notice" when the acquired random number is 25-39, select "Open door" when the acquired random value is 40-59, When the numerical value is 60 to 74, “Treasure box selection notice” is selected. When the obtained random number value is 75 to 89, “Step up notice” is selected. When the obtained random number value is 90 to 99, “Title box notice” is selected. Select "Notice".

  20 (b) to 20 (d) and FIGS. 21 (a) to 21 (b) are subdivided contents of “open the door notice”, for example, the first notice. When “open door notice” is selected in the lottery, the table corresponding to “open door notice” shown in FIG. 20B is referred to, and the meter color is changed based on the obtained random number value. The lottery for the second notice mode to be decided is performed. Next, in the second notice mode lottery, for example, when “meter color blue → red” is selected, the table corresponding to “meter color blue → red” shown in FIG. Based on the acquired random number value, the third notice mode lottery for determining the mode of the character (princess) is performed.

Next, in the third notice mode lottery, for example, when “Princess“ Chance! ”” Is selected, the table corresponding to “Princess“ Chance! ”” Shown in FIG. Based on the random number value, the fourth notice mode lottery for determining the next notice mode is performed. Next, in the fourth notice mode lottery, for example, when “signboard“ reach might ”” is selected, the table corresponding to “signboard“ reach might ”” shown in FIG. Based on the random number value, the fifth notice mode lottery for determining the next notice mode is performed. Next, in the fifth notice mode lottery, for example, when “Hime no Ogi (Hanamaru)” is selected, a table corresponding to “Hime no Osamu (Hanamaru)” shown in FIG. With reference to the obtained random number value, the sixth notice mode lottery for determining the next notice mode is performed.
<Example 1 of operation means image display>

  Next, Embodiment 1 of the operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 1 in time series.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6A corresponds to the first operation of the chance button 136 when the start timing of the first operation acceptance period (6 seconds in this example) of the chance button 136 has arrived. The first operating means image BG1 (in this example, an image simulating a chance button) is displayed in the left display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, at the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1, the second operation means image BG2 (in this example, an image imitating the chance button) corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136 is displayed as a decoration pattern. It is displayed in the right display area of the display device 208.

  Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 9A, the start timing of the second operation acceptance period of the chance button 136 (6 seconds in this example) has not arrived, but two operations on the chance button 136 are performed. In order to prompt the player, the second operation means image BG2 is displayed at the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1, and the display of the character information “Press the chance button!” Is displayed in the lower center. doing.

  Also, a first elapsed time notification image TG1 (in this example, for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. An image in which the scale of the meter (filled portion) gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136 is displayed below the first operation means image BG1.

  Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 9A, the start timing of the second operation acceptance period of the chance button 136 has not arrived, but the same image TG2 ′ as the initial image of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is displayed. The second operation means image BG2 is displayed below.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5B has passed a predetermined time (2 seconds in this example) from the timing shown in FIG. 5A, and the start timing of the acceptance period for the second operation of the chance button 136 has arrived. Timing is shown. At this timing, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continued, but a predetermined time (2 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136. As the first elapsed time notification image TG1, an image for displaying that the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has passed 2 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 4 seconds) is displayed.

  At this timing, since the start timing of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has arrived, the image TG2 ′ displayed below the second operation means image BG2 at the timing shown in FIG. To the second elapsed time notification image TG2 for notifying the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 (in this example, according to the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136) The scale of the meter (filled area) is gradually reduced).

  The timing shown in FIG. 7C shows the timing when a predetermined time (4 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continued, but a predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136. As the first elapsed time notification image TG1, a moving image for displaying that the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has passed 4 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 2 seconds) is displayed. . At this timing, the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continuously displayed, but a predetermined time (2 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136. Then, as the second elapsed time notification image TG2, an image for notifying that the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has passed 2 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 4 seconds) is displayed. Yes.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D shows the timing when a predetermined time (in this example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continued, but since a predetermined time (5 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136, As the first elapsed time notification image TG1, an image for displaying that the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 5 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 1 second) is displayed. Further, at this timing, the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continuously displayed, but a predetermined time (3 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136. Then, as the second elapsed time notification image TG2, an image for notifying that the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 3 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 3 seconds) is displayed. Yes.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continued, but since a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136, As the first elapsed time notification image TG1, an image for displaying that the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 6 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 seconds) is displayed. Further, at this timing, the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continuously displayed, but a predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136. Then, as the second elapsed time notification image TG2, an image for notifying that the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 4 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 2 seconds) is displayed. Yes.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5F shows the timing when a predetermined time (8 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since the predetermined time (8 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the first operation acceptance period of the chance button 136, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are displayed. Erasing. Further, at this timing, the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continuously displayed, but a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136. Then, as the second elapsed time notification image TG2, an image notifying that the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 6 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 seconds) is displayed. Yes. In this example, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased at the timing shown in FIG. 5F, but the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time are deleted. The display of the notification image TG1 may be continued.

  According to the operation means image display according to the first embodiment, it may be possible to strongly encourage the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from losing the operation timing of the operation means and improve the interest of the game. Further, there are cases where the interest of the game can be improved by increasing the choices of the players.

  In this embodiment, the timing shown in FIG. 5A is the start timing of the first operation acceptance period (6 seconds in this example) of the chance button 136, and the timing shown in FIG. ) Is the start timing of the second operation acceptance period of the chance button 136 (in this example, 6 seconds), but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, FIG. The timing shown in a) is the start timing of the first operation reception period (for example, 6 seconds) of the chance button 136, and the start timing of the second operation reception period (for example, 8 seconds) of the chance button 136. It is good. That is, the start timings of the N-th operation (N is a positive integer) operation reception period of the operation means may be set to the same timing (the same applies to other embodiments).

In addition, when the start timing of the first operation reception period (for example, 6 seconds) of the chance button 136 and the start timing of the second operation reception period (for example, 8 seconds) of the chance button 136 are set to the same timing. Even when each reception time is different, the notification start timing of the elapsed time may be different. In this example, the reception time of the second operation of the chance button 136 after two seconds have elapsed from the start of the operation reception. The elapsed time may be notified.
<Example 2 of operation means image display>

  Next, a second embodiment of the operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 2 in time series. In addition, since the display shown to the same figure (a)-the same figure (f) is the same as the display example shown to the said FIG. 22 (a)-(f), the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 23 (g) shows the state shown in FIGS. 23 (a) to (d), that is, the state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136. The timing at which the first operation of the chance button 136 is performed is shown. At this timing, since the first operation of the chance button 136 has been performed, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, and instead of the image display, a decorative symbol display device A character image (donor) is displayed in the left display area 208.

  The timing shown in (h) of the figure shows the timing when a predetermined time (8 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in (a) of the figure. At this timing, the display of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continued, but a predetermined time (6 seconds) from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. Has elapsed, the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is notified that the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 6 seconds (the remaining time of the acceptance period is 0 seconds). The image to be displayed is displayed.

  The timing shown in (i) of the figure shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in (b) of the figure. At this timing, since the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the second operation acceptance period of the chance button 136, the second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2 are displayed. Erasing. When a predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses from the start timing of the reception period for the second operation of the chance button 136, the second operation means image BG2 and the second operation means image BG2 are displayed as shown in FIG. A character image (時間) may be displayed instead of the display of the elapsed time notification image TG2. In the state where the first operation of the chance button 136 is performed, the operation of the chance button 136 is performed during the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 ((g) in this example). In addition, as shown in FIG. 6J, a character image (爺) may be displayed instead of displaying the second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2. The timing shown in FIG. 10 (k) shows the timing when the second operation of the chance button 136 is accepted immediately after a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has passed since the timing shown in FIG. Yes. At this timing, since the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the first operation acceptance period of the chance button 136, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are displayed. Since the second operation of the chance button 136 has been performed, the character image (爺) is displayed instead of the display of the second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2. doing. In the state where the first operation of the chance button 136 is not performed, the operation of the chance button 136 is performed during the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 ((g) in this example). In addition, as shown in FIG. 8J, a character image (don and niece) may be displayed instead of displaying the second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2.

  The timing shown in (l) of FIG. 4 indicates the timing immediately after a predetermined time (8 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in (a) of FIG. At this timing, a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136, and the first and second operations of the chance button 136 have not been performed. The second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2 are deleted.

According to the operation means image display according to the second embodiment, it may be possible to strongly encourage the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from losing the operation timing of the operation means and improve the interest of the game. Further, there are cases where the interest of the game can be improved by increasing the choices of the players.
<Third embodiment of operation means image display>

  Next, a third embodiment of the operation unit image display performed by the above-described operation unit image display process will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 3 in time series.

  In the third embodiment, a third elapsed time notification image TG3 is applied instead of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 in the first embodiment. The third progress information notification image TG3 is an image for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136, and also an image suggesting the success / failure result of the special figure variation game. . With such a configuration, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the progress information notification image, and thus it may be possible to prompt the operation of the operation means.

  In this example, the result of the success / failure determination is suggested using an elapsed time notification image that notifies the elapsed time of the first operation acceptance period of the chance button 136, but in addition to this (or in addition to this) Instead, the result of the determination of success / failure may be suggested using an elapsed time notification image that notifies the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136, and there may be three or more progress information notification images. In this case, the determination result may be suggested using at least one progress information notification image.

  Further, in addition to suggesting the result of the success / failure determination using the progress information notification image, the result of the determination of the success / failure may be suggested in another display area. Further, in this example, the display of the third elapsed time notification image TG3 is started when the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has come, but the display is performed at other timings. For example, the display of the third elapsed time notification image TG3 may be started after the elapse of a predetermined time after the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has arrived. The display of the third elapsed time notification image TG3 may be started at the timing when the operation of the chance button 136 is performed (for example, the timing when the first or second operation is performed).

According to the operation means image display according to the third embodiment, it may be possible to strongly encourage the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from losing the operation timing of the operation means and improve the interest of the game. Further, there are cases where the interest of the game can be improved by increasing the choices of the players.
<Example 4 of operation means image display>

  Next, a fourth embodiment of the operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 4 in time series.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 6A, the first operation corresponding to the first operation of the chance button 136 is triggered by the arrival timing of the first and second operation acceptance periods of the chance button 136. The means image BG1 (in this example, an image simulating a chance button) and the second operation means image BG2 (in this example, an image simulating a chance button) corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136 are displayed at the same timing. It is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Also, a first elapsed time notification for notifying the elapsed time (in this example, 6 seconds) of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. An image TG1 (in this example, an image in which the scale of the meter (filled portion) gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the first operation acceptance period of the chance button 136) is displayed on the first operation means image BG1. Shown below.

  Further, a second elapsed time notification for notifying the elapsed time (6 seconds in this example) of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the second operation means image BG2. An image TG2 (in this example, an image in which the scale of the meter (filled portion) gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the second operation means image BG2. Shown below.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5B shows the timing when a predetermined time (4 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continued, but a predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136. As the first elapsed time notification image TG1, an image for displaying that the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 4 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 2 seconds) is displayed.

  Further, at this timing, the display of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is also continued, but a predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136. Then, as the second elapsed time notification image TG2, an image for notifying that the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 4 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 2 seconds) is displayed. Yes.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7C shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continued, but since a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136, As the first elapsed time notification image TG1, an image for displaying that the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 6 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 seconds) is displayed.

  Further, at this timing, the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continuously displayed, but a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136. Then, as the second elapsed time notification image TG2, an image notifying that the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 6 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 seconds) is displayed. Yes.

  The timing shown in FIG. 4D shows the timing when a predetermined time (8 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (8 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the first operation reception period of the chance button 136, the predetermined time from the start timing of the first operation reception period of the chance button 136. Immediately after (6 seconds) have elapsed, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, and the state continues.

  At this timing, since a predetermined time (8 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the second operation reception period of the chance button 136, the start timing of the second operation reception period of the chance button 136 is Immediately after the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed, the second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2 are deleted, and the state is continued.

  FIG. 8E shows the state shown in FIG. 7B, that is, the state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the first and second operation acceptance periods of the chance button 136. The timing at which the first operation of the chance button 136 is performed is shown. At this timing, since the first operation of the chance button 136 has been performed, after the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, a decorative symbol display is displayed instead of the image display. A character image (donor) is displayed in the left display area of the device 208.

  FIG. 5F shows the state of the chance button 136 in the state shown in FIG. 5E, that is, in a state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the second operation acceptance period of the chance button 136. The timing at which the second operation is performed is shown. At this timing, since the second operation of the chance button 136 has been performed, after the second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2 are erased, a decorative symbol display is displayed instead of the image display. In the right display area of the device 208, a character image (爺) different from the character image (donor) is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 5E, the second operation of the chance button 136 is not performed and the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation. The display shown in f) may be performed.

  FIG. 4G shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation without the second operation of the chance button 136 being performed. At this timing, since the second operation of the chance button 136 is not performed and a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation, the second operation means image BG2 and the second operation means image BG2 The elapsed time notification image TG2 is deleted.

According to the operation means image display according to the fourth embodiment, it may be possible to strongly encourage the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from losing the operation timing of the operation means and improve the interest of the game. Further, there are cases where the interest of the game can be improved by increasing the choices of the players.
<Example 5 of operation means image display>

  Next, a fifth embodiment of the operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 5 in time series.

  In the fifth embodiment, a fourth elapsed time notification image TG4 is applied instead of the second elapsed time notification image TG2 in the fourth embodiment. The fourth progress information notification image TG4 is an image for notifying the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136, and also an image suggesting the success / failure result of the special figure variation game. . With such a configuration, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the progress information notification image, and thus it may be possible to prompt the operation of the operation means.

  In this example, the result of the success / failure determination is suggested using an elapsed time notification image that notifies the elapsed time of the first operation acceptance period of the chance button 136, but in addition to this (or in addition to this) Instead, the result of the determination of success / failure may be suggested using an elapsed time notification image that notifies the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136, and there may be three or more progress information notification images. In this case, the determination result may be suggested using at least one progress information notification image.

  Further, in addition to suggesting the result of the success / failure determination using the progress information notification image, the result of the determination of the success / failure may be suggested in another display area. In this example, the display of the fourth elapsed time notification image TG4 is started when the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has arrived. For example, the display of the fourth elapsed time notification image TG4 may be started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has arrived. The display of the fourth elapsed time notification image TG4 may be started at the timing when the operation of the chance button 136 is performed (for example, the timing when the first or second operation is performed).

According to the operation means image display according to the fifth embodiment, it may be possible to strongly encourage the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from losing the operation timing of the operation means and improve the interest of the game. Further, there are cases where the interest of the game can be improved by increasing the choices of the players.
<Operation Means Image Display Example 6>

  Next, a sixth embodiment of the operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 6 in time series.

  In this embodiment, in addition to the operation means image display, a notice effect by the notice lottery process described above is performed. For example, in the case of hitting special figure 1 by big hit determination, special figure stop figure of special figure 1 is decided to special figure A by special figure lottery, and the fluctuation time of special figure is decided to be 45000 ms by fluctuation pattern lottery, The first sub-control unit 400 receives the command from the main control unit 300 based on the fact that the jackpot flag value is ON, the special figure stop symbol is special figure A, and the special figure variation time is 45000 ms. The notice lottery is performed using the lottery value corresponding to the fluctuation time of 45,000 ms of the “big hit (15R system)” in the notice lottery table shown in FIG. In this notice lottery, if it is assumed that the acquired random number value is in the numerical range of 30 to 94, the notice table 4 is selected.

  Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the notice table 4 shown in FIG. 20A and performs the first notice mode lottery for determining the notice mode of the notice table 4 based on the acquired random number value. For example, if it is assumed that the acquired random number value is in a numerical value range of 40 to 59, “open door notice” is selected. Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the notice table corresponding to the “open door notice” shown in FIG. 20B, and determines the color of the meter based on the obtained random number value for the second time. For example, assuming that the obtained random number value is in a numerical value range of 50 to 64, “meter color blue → red” is selected.

  Subsequently, the first sub-control unit 400 refers to the notice table corresponding to “meter color blue → red” shown in FIG. 20C, and based on the acquired random number value, the character (princess) mode For example, if it is assumed that the acquired random number value is in a numerical range of 30 to 59, the princess “chance!” Is selected. In the sixth embodiment, the notice effect is executed according to the notice effect form determined by the notice lottery or the notice form lottery.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 27A, the first operation means corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 is triggered by the arrival timing of the operation period for the operation of the chance button 136 (6 seconds in this example). An image BG1 (in this example, an image simulating a chance button) is displayed in the right display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 5A, in order to prompt the player to perform an operation on the chance button 136, the display of the character information “Open the door !!” is displayed above the left display area.

  In addition, a first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 (in this example, a chance opportunity) for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 at almost the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. An image in which the scale of the meter (filled portion) gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the operation period for the operation of the button 136) is displayed in the first operation means image BG1 in the first color (blue in this example). It is displayed below.

  In addition, at the same timing as the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1, an image corresponding to the notice effect of the above-mentioned "open the door notice" (in this example, the characters "open the door !!") A display and an image simulating a door) are displayed in the right display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the present embodiment, the first elapsed time notification for notifying the elapsed time of the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136 for a part of the image of the notice effect (in this example, an image simulating a door). It also serves as the image TG1-2.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7B shows the timing when a predetermined time (1 second in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (1 second) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is used as the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1. Displays an image for notifying that 1 second has passed (the remaining time of the reception period is 5 seconds). On the other hand, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-2 also serving as a notice effect is not changed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7C shows the timing when a predetermined time (4 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is used as the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1. Displays an image for informing that 1 second has elapsed (that the remaining time of the reception period is 2 seconds). At this timing, the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 is set to the first color (in this example, blue) as the image corresponding to the notice effect of “meter color (blue → red)”. ) To the second color (in this example, red).

  Further, at this timing, the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 is changed, and at the same time, the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-2 is changed from the third color (in this example, white) to the first. The color is changed to 4 (red in this example). With such a configuration, it may be possible to strongly urge the player to perform an operation.

  Here, by changing the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 and the color of the second elapsed time notification image TG1-2, a predetermined time from the start timing of the operation button reception period of the chance button 136 is obtained. Although it is informed that (4 seconds) has elapsed, the change in the color may be configured to suggest, for example, the result of the special figure variation game.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is used as the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1. Displays an image for informing that 6 seconds have elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 seconds). On the other hand, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-2 also serving as a notice effect is not changed.

  FIG. 5E shows the timing when the chance button 136 is operated in a state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136. At this timing, since the chance button 136 is operated, after the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification images TG1-1 and TG-2 are erased, the above-mentioned princess “chance!” The image corresponding to the notice effect (in this example, the character display of “chance!” And the character image (princess)) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. This notice effect may be displayed when a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation acceptance period without the operation of the chance button 136 being performed.

  FIG. 5F shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation acceptance period without the operation of the chance button 136 being performed. At this timing, since the operation of the chance button 136 is not performed and a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the first operation reception period, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification After erasing the images TG 1-1 and TG-2, the decorative symbol variation display is performed in the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The display may be performed after the display shown in FIG. FIG. 5G is a diagram showing an example of reach display in the decorative symbol variation display, and the reach display is performed after any of the states shown in FIGS. Is displayed.

According to the operation means image display according to the sixth embodiment, it may be possible to strongly encourage the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from losing the operation timing of the operation means and improve the interest of the game. Further, there are cases where the interest of the game can be improved by increasing the choices of the players. In the present embodiment, the lottery is also performed for the display of the elapsed time notification image (meter color) in the notice table, but the lottery may not be performed in the notice table for the elapsed time notice image. In this case, the elapsed time notification image notifies only the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation means, and changes the display mode after a predetermined time (for example, the color of the meter changes when T seconds elapse). There may be. Further, the elapsed time notification image may be a notification that only notifies the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation means and does not change the display mode (color, size, shape, character font, etc.) with the passage of time. .
<Operating Means Image Display Example 7>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 28, a seventh embodiment of the operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described. In addition, the same figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 7 in time series. In this embodiment, in addition to the operation means image display, a notice effect by the notice lottery process described above is performed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 6A, the first operation corresponding to the first operation of the chance button 136 is triggered by the arrival timing of the operation period for the operation of the chance button 136 (in this example, 6 seconds). The operation means image BG1 (in this example, an image simulating a chance button) is displayed in the central display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In addition, a first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 (in this example, a chance opportunity) for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 at almost the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. An image in which the scale of the meter (filled portion) gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the operation period for the operation of the button 136) is displayed in the first operation means image BG1 in the first color (blue in this example). It is displayed below.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7B shows the timing when a predetermined time (1 second in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (1 second) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is used as the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1. Displays an image for notifying that 1 second has passed (the remaining time of the reception period is 5 seconds).

  The timing shown in FIG. 5C shows the timing when a predetermined time (3 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (3 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the first operation of the chance button 136 is performed as the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1. An image for informing that 3 seconds have passed has been displayed. Further, at this timing, the remaining time notification image TG1-2 (not shown) for notifying the remaining time (3 seconds in this example) of the operation button reception period of the chance button 136 above the first operation means image BG1. In the example, an image of numerical information) is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D shows the timing when a predetermined time (in this example, 5 seconds) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (5 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is used as the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1. Is displaying an image notifying that 5 seconds have elapsed. Further, at this timing, an image for notifying that the remaining time of the operation of the chance button 136 is 1 second is displayed as the remaining time notification image TG1-2.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is used as the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1. Is displaying an image notifying that 6 seconds have elapsed. At this timing, as the remaining time notification image TG1-2, the remaining operation time of the chance button 136 is 0 seconds (a predetermined time (6 seconds from the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136). ) Has been displayed.

  FIG. 5F is a diagram showing an example of a failure display when the result of the special figure variable game is out of play, and FIG. 8G is a jackpot display when the result of the special figure variable game is a big hit. It is the figure which showed an example. In these missed display or jackpot display, the operation of the chance button 136 is performed in a state (during the operation reception period) before a predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136. Or when a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation acceptance period without the operation of the chance button 136 being performed.

According to the operation means image display according to the seventh embodiment, it may be possible to strongly encourage the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from losing the operation timing of the operation means and improve the interest of the game. Further, there are cases where the interest of the game can be improved by increasing the choices of the players.
<Operation Means Image Display Example 8>

  Next, an eighth embodiment of operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 8 in time series. In this embodiment, in addition to the operation means image display, a notice effect by the notice lottery process described above is performed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 6A, the right of the setting operation unit 137 is triggered by the start timing of the right button and left button operation reception period (in this example, 6 seconds). The first operation means image BG1 corresponding to the button operation (in this example, an image imitating a treasure box; white) is used for the right display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and for the left button operation of the setting operation unit 137. The corresponding second operation means image BG2 (in this example, an image imitating a treasure box, white) is displayed in the left display area. At the timing shown in FIG. 6A, the left side of the character information display “Select a treasure chest that can be opened with the direction key!” Is displayed to prompt the player to operate the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137. It is displayed above the area.

  Further, at the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1 and the second operation means image BG2, the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137 is notified. First elapsed time notification image TG1 (in this example, an image in which the scale (filled portion) of the meter gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137) Are displayed in the central display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the first color (blue in this example).

  The timing shown in FIG. 7B shows the timing when a predetermined time (1 second in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since the predetermined time (1 second) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation period for the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137, the setting operation unit TG1 is used as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image notifying that the reception period of the operation of the right button and the left button of 137 has passed 1 second (the remaining time of the reception period is 5 seconds) is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7C shows the timing when a predetermined time (4 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since the predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the right button and left button operation reception period of the setting operation unit 137, the setting operation unit TG1 is used as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image notifying that the reception period of the operation of the right button and the left button of 137 has elapsed for 1 second (the remaining time of the reception period is 2 seconds) is displayed. At this timing, the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is changed from the first color (blue in this example) to the second as the image corresponding to the notice effect of “treasure box color (blue → red)”. (In this example, it is red).

  At this timing, the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 is changed, and at the same time, the color of the second operation means image BG2 is changed from the third color (white in this example) to the fourth color. (In this example, it is red). Here, by changing the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 and the color of the second operation means image BG2, the start timing of the reception period of the operation of the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137 is changed. Although it is informed that the predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed, for example, it may be configured to suggest a result of the special figure variation game.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation period for the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137, the setting operation unit TG1 is used as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image notifying that the reception period of the operation of the right button and the left button of 137 has elapsed for 6 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 second) is displayed. On the other hand, the display of the second operation means image BG2 that also serves as a notice effect is not changed.

  FIG. 6E shows that the right button of the setting operation unit 137 is operated in a state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation period for the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137. The timing performed is shown. At this timing, since the right button of the setting operation unit 137 has been operated, the first operation unit image BG1, the second operation unit image BG2, and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are deleted. An image corresponding to the next notice effect (in this example, an image showing a book popping out from the treasure chest) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  On the other hand, FIG. 6F shows the left button of the setting operation unit 137 in a state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period for the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137. The timing at which the operation was performed is shown. At this timing, since the left button of the setting operation unit 137 has been operated, the first operation unit image BG1, the second operation unit image BG2, and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are deleted. An image corresponding to the next notice effect (in this example, an image showing a book popping out from the treasure chest) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that the notice effects shown in (e) and (f) of FIG. Further, when the determination result of the special figure variable game is a big hit, as shown in FIG. 6G, a notice effect with higher reliability and expectation is performed than the notice effect shown in FIG. It may be configured.

  FIG. 11H shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period without the operation of the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137 being performed. At this timing, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is erased since a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period without the operation of the right button and the left button of the setting operation unit 137 being performed. ing. Note that the first operation means image BG1 and the second operation means image BG2 may be deleted in accordance with the deletion of the first elapsed time notification image TG1.

According to the operation means image display according to the seventh embodiment, it may be possible to strongly encourage the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from losing the operation timing of the operation means and improve the interest of the game. Further, there are cases where the interest of the game can be improved by increasing the choices of the players.
<Example 9 of operation means image display>

  Next, a ninth embodiment of the operation unit image display performed by the above-described operation unit image display process will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 9 in time series. In this embodiment, in addition to the operation means image display, a hold icon and a change icon are displayed.

  Here, the hold icon refers to an animation of a texture image representing the number of hold of the special figure variable game. As an animation related to the hold icon, for example, when the hold increases and a new hold icon is displayed. The animation to be executed (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “pending icon increase animation”), the order of the hold changes due to the digestion of the previous hold, and the hold icon changes to another display position (for example, the position on the left side) ) Animation executed when moving to () (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “pending icon movement animation”), animation executed when the display state of the holding icon changes based on the pre-read result, etc. (hereinafter “ Hold icon change animation ”), the hold is consumed and the hold icon Animation to be executed when left (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “pending icon erasing animation”), non-priority side special icon hold icon when priority side special figure hold increases in priority change aircraft There is an animation (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “pending icon save animation”) executed when the icon is saved. In addition to the above animation, an animation that can be executed independently during a period other than the execution of the animation (for example, a period in which there is no increase / decrease of the hold or change of the hold icon) and that can be executed redundantly with the animation ( Hereinafter, it may be referred to as “standby icon standby animation”. There may be a case where a plurality of animations for increasing, moving, changing, erasing, saving, and waiting for the hold icon are executed in duplicate.

  In addition, after the suspension is digested and the special figure variable game is started, one variable icon corresponding to the special figure variable game may be displayed. The variation icon has a display mode related to the display mode of the hold icon, for example, and is displayed as a texture image animation in the same manner as the hold icon. Depending on the display mode, the change icon can be notified about the validity of the change (the change notice), and is basically erased at the timing when the result of the change is notified. Therefore, the change icon can be considered as a kind of hold icon in the sense that the notification of the result of the special figure change game is held.

  For animations related to both the hold icon and the variable icon, the earliest hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area is moved to a different area from the hold icon display area when the hold is consumed. Animation that moves as a fluctuation icon (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “moving animation between hold and change icons”) and animation that changes from the hold icon display form to the change icon display form (hereinafter “between hold and change icons” Sometimes called “change animation”. These animations may be combined and executed at the same time. When the display mode of the hold icon and the display mode of the change icon are the same, the execution of the change animation between the hold / change icon can be omitted.

  Examples of the animation related to the fluctuation icon include an animation executed during execution of the special figure variable game (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “variable icon standby animation”), and a fluctuation icon after the special figure variable game ends. Animation that is executed when the icon is deleted (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “variable icon deletion animation”), animation that is executed when the display mode of the variable icon is changed in the middle (hereinafter referred to as “variable icon change”) There are cases where it is called “animation”). These animations may be executed at the same time in combination with each other. In addition, the variation icon standby animation may be executed at the same time in combination with the movement animation or the change animation between the hold / variation icons.

  FIG. 5A shows the timing when the special figure variable game is finished and the decorative symbols are stopped. At this timing, four hold icons (circular images in this example) PI1 to PI4 are displayed below the decorative symbol display device 208 to indicate that there are four special figure variable games on hold.

  FIG. 4B shows the timing when the reserved special figure variable game is started and the special figure variable game hold is reduced from 4 to 3. At this timing, after the change animation for changing the first (first) hold icon PI1 displayed in the hold icon display area to the change icon CI is performed, the change icon is displayed in the central display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. CI is stopped and displayed. The variation icon CI is a variation icon for suggesting the success / failure result of the special figure variation display corresponding to the earliest hold icon PI1. In this example, the variation icon CI is represented by character information “chance” and a star-shaped figure. It is composed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 6C, the first operation means corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 is triggered by the arrival timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136 (in this example, 6 seconds). An image BG1 (in this example, an image simulating a chance button) is displayed behind the variation icon CI. That is, in this example, at least a part of the first operation means image BG1 is covered with the change icon CI, so that at least a part of the first operation means image BG1 is invisible or difficult to see. .

  Also, a first elapsed time notification image TG1 (in this example, the chance button 136 for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. The scale of the meter (filled portion) gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the operation reception period of the first operation) in the first color (blue in this example) below the first operation means image BG1. And displayed behind the variation icon CI. That is, in this example, at least a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the variation icon CI, so that at least a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible or difficult to view. ing.

  The timing shown in FIG. 4D shows the timing when a predetermined time (3 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (3 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is 3 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image notifying that the second has elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 3 seconds) is displayed. However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the variation icon CI, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible or difficult to view.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is 6 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image notifying that the second has elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 second) is displayed. However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the variation icon CI, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible or difficult to view.

  FIG. 5F shows the state in which the operation of the chance button 136 is performed in the state shown in FIG. 5C, that is, in a state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136. The timing performed is shown. At this timing, since the chance button 136 has been operated, after the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, the information indicating the success / failure result of the special figure change (this In the example, “Leach is!” Is displayed behind the variation icon CI. That is, in this example, a part of the information that suggests whether or not the special figure change is correct is covered with the change icon CI, so that a part of the information is invisible or difficult to see.

  If the operation of the chance button 136 is performed before a predetermined time has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the first operation means image is displayed as shown in FIG. After erasing BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1, information suggesting whether or not the special figure change is correct may be displayed in front of the change icon CI. Although not shown in the figure, after the change icon CI is erased in addition to the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1, information indicating the result of the special figure change is displayed. Good.

  Further, when the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period without the operation of the chance button 136, the display of FIG. FIG. 11H is a diagram showing an example of the variation display of the decorative symbol. The variation display is displayed after any of the states (e), (f), and (g). Also good.

According to the operation means image display of the ninth embodiment, it may be possible to further prompt the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where the display mode hidden by the player can be focused and concentrated on the game.
<Example 10 of operation means image display>

  Next, a tenth embodiment of the operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the same figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 10 in time series. In this embodiment, in addition to the operation means image display, a hold icon and a notice effect are displayed.

  FIG. 5A shows the timing when the special figure variable game is finished and the decorative symbols are stopped. At this timing, four hold icons (circular images in this example) PI1 to PI4 are displayed below the decorative symbol display device 208 to indicate that there are four special figure variable games on hold.

  FIG. 4B shows the timing when the reserved special figure variable game is started and the special figure variable game hold is reduced from 4 to 3. At this timing, an erase animation for erasing the earliest hold icon PI1 displayed in the hold icon display area is performed, and the first operation means image BG1 corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 (chance in this example) Button).

  Also, a first elapsed time notification image TG1 (in this example, the chance button 136 for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. The scale of the meter (filled portion) gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the operation reception period of the first operation) in the first color (blue in this example) below the first operation means image BG1. Is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7C shows the timing when a predetermined time (3 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, based on the result of whether or not the special figure variation game is successful, a notice effect is displayed (in this example, an image in which an upside-down character image (dono) has a signboard with “Leach may”) is displayed). Yes.

  At this timing, since a predetermined time (3 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is used as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. Is displayed on the screen to notify that 3 seconds have elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 3 seconds). However, since all of the first operation means image BG1 and all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are covered with the image of the notice effect, all of the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image are displayed. All of TG1 is invisible. Note that at least a part of the first operation means image BG1 or at least a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 may be invisible or difficult to view.

  The timing shown in FIG. 4D shows the timing when a predetermined time (4 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is 4 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image notifying that the second has elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 2 seconds) is displayed. However, since all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the image of the notice effect, all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is 6 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image notifying that the second has elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 second) is displayed. However, since all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the image of the notice effect, all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible.

  FIG. 5F shows the timing when the chance button 136 is operated in a state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136. At this timing, since the chance button 136 has been operated, after the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, the information indicating the success / failure result of the special figure change (this In the example, “character information“ It's super hot !! ”) is displayed behind the fluctuation icon CI. In other words, in this example, a part of the information that suggests whether or not the special figure change is correct is covered with the image of the notice effect, so that a part of the information is invisible.

  If the operation of the chance button 136 is performed before a predetermined time has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the first operation means image is displayed as shown in FIG. After erasing BG1, the first elapsed time notification image TG1, and the notice effect, information suggesting whether or not the special figure has changed may be displayed.

  Further, when the predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period without the operation of the chance button 136, the display of FIG. FIG. 11H is a diagram showing an example of the variation display of the decorative symbol. The variation display is displayed after any of the states (e), (f), and (g). Also good.

According to the operation means image display of the tenth embodiment, it may be possible to prompt the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where the display mode hidden by the player can be focused and concentrated on the game.
<Example 11 of operation means image display>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, an eleventh embodiment of operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described. In addition, the same figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 11 in time series. In the present embodiment, in addition to the operation means image display, it is configured to display the notice change effect based on the normal map change display and the determination of whether or not the normal figure change display is correct.

  FIG. 4A shows the timing when the general map variation display is started during the special map variation display, and the production accompanying the general map variation display is started. At this timing, the base map change display is started in the base map change display area 208s, the notice effect is performed based on the determination of whether or not the base map change display is appropriate, and the first operation means image BG1 corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 is performed. (In this example, an image simulating a chance button) is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, whether or not the common figure variable game is successful is determined using the common figure determination table shown in FIG. 109 described later, and the random number value obtained is 90 to 99 with a low probability of the common figure control state. Therefore, an example in which the symbol 2 per ordinary figure (the ordinary decoration 2 shown in FIG. 105 (d) described later) is selected is shown. Note that details of the determination of whether or not the common figure variation game is successful using the common figure determination table of FIG. 109 will be described in the third embodiment.

  Also, a first elapsed time notification image TG1 (in this example, the chance button 136 for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. The scale of the meter (filled portion) gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the operation reception period of the first operation) in the first color (blue in this example) below the first operation means image BG1. Is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7B shows the timing when a predetermined time (1 second in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, a notice effect (in this example, a character image (princess) appears from below) is performed based on the normal map change display and whether or not the normal map change game is successful.

  At this timing, since a predetermined time (1 second) has elapsed since the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is used as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. Displays an image for notifying that 1 second has passed (the remaining time of the reception period is 5 seconds). However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the character image (princess) of the notice effect, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is not visible. In addition to this (or in place of it), at least a part of the first operation means image BG1 may be invisible or difficult to visually recognize (the same applies to the following in this embodiment).

  The timing shown in FIG. 7C shows the timing when a predetermined time (3 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, the announcement effect based on the result of the normal-game variable game is continued, and, as the first elapsed time notification image TG1, the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 has passed 3 seconds (the remaining period of the reception period) An image informing that the time is 3 seconds) is displayed. However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the character image (princess) of the notice effect, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is not visible.

  The timing shown in FIG. 4D shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is 6 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image notifying that the second has elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 second) is displayed. However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the character image (princess) of the notice effect, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible.

  FIG. 4E shows the timing when the usual stop display is performed. At this timing, after erasing the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1, information indicating the result of the normal fluctuation (in this example, the character image (princess) has a fan) Image). Further, as described above, since the symbol 2 per universal symbol is selected in the common variable game, the universal symbol decorative symbol corresponding to the “general symbol decoration 2” is displayed in the general symbol variation display area 208s.

  FIG. 5F shows the timing when the chance button 136 is operated in a state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136. At this timing, since the chance button 136 has been operated, after the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, the information indicating the success / failure result of the special figure change (this In the example, the text information “is it a chance?” Is displayed. When a predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses from the start timing of the operation reception period without the operation of the chance button 136, the display shown in FIG.

According to the operation means image display of the eleventh embodiment, it may be possible to further prompt the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where the display mode hidden by the player can be focused and concentrated on the game.
<Example 12 of operation means image display>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, a description will be given of a twelfth example of operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing. In addition, the same figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 12 in time series. In this embodiment, in addition to the operation means image display, a hold icon and a notice effect are displayed.

  FIG. 5A shows the timing when the special figure variable game is finished and the decorative symbols are stopped. At this timing, three hold icons PI1 to PI3 are displayed below the decorative symbol display device 208 to indicate that there are three special figure variable games on hold. In this example, by displaying a character image (savohani) as the third hold icon PI3, the result of the prefetch of the third special figure variable game is suggested.

  FIG. 4B shows the timing when the reserved special figure variable game is started and the special figure variable game hold is reduced from 3 to 2. At this timing, an erase animation for erasing the first hold icon PI1 displayed in the hold icon display area is performed, and the second hold icon PI2 and the third hold icon PI3 are moved to the positions of the adjacent hold icons. There is a moving animation to move to.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5C shows the timing when the moving animation of the hold icons PI2 and PI3 is completed. At this timing, the first operation means image BG1 corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 (in this example, an image imitating the chance button) is displayed.

  Also, a first elapsed time notification image TG1 (in this example, the chance button 136 for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. The scale of the meter (filled portion) gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the operation reception period of the first operation) in the first color (blue in this example) below the first operation means image BG1. Is displayed. However, since the first operation means image BG1 is displayed behind the hold icon PI3, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the hold icon PI3 and cannot be seen. In addition to this (or in place of it), at least a part of the first operation means image BG1 may be invisible or difficult to view with the hold icon PI3 (the same applies in the present embodiment).

  The timing shown in FIG. 4D shows the timing when a predetermined time (3 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (3 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is 3 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image notifying that the second has elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 3 seconds) is displayed. However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the hold icon PI3, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is not visible.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is 6 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image notifying that the second has elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 second) is displayed. However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the hold icon PI3, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is not visible.

  FIG. 5F shows the state in which the operation of the chance button 136 is performed in the state shown in FIG. 5B, that is, in a state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136. The timing performed is shown. At this timing, since the chance button 136 is operated, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, and then the special figure change after the special figure change (in this example, A notice (in this example, the character information “After two revolutions is hot!”) Indicating the success / failure result of the special figure fluctuation after two revolutions is displayed. Note that the advance notice is an example of a “prefetching advance notice” that indicates the result of the special figure change after the special figure change.

  In this example, the display of the hold icons PI2 and PI3 is not erased, but it may be erased simultaneously with the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1. Further, when a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation acceptance period without the operation of the chance button 136, the display of FIG. FIG. 5G is a diagram showing an example of the decorative symbol variation display, and the variation display may be displayed after any of the states shown in FIGS.

  According to the operation means image display of the twelfth embodiment, it may be possible to prompt the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where the display mode hidden by the player can be focused and concentrated on the game.

  FIG. 34 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the modified example of the twelfth example in time series. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 3C to 3E, the first operation means image BG1 is displayed in front of the hold icon PI3, so that all of the first elapsed time notification images TG1 are held icons PI3. It is in a visible state without being covered with.

According to the operation means image display of the modified example of the twelfth embodiment, the player may be further prompted to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where the display mode hidden by the player can be focused and concentrated on the game.
<Example 13 of operation means image display>

  Next, a thirteenth embodiment of operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 36 are diagrams showing the operation means image display of the thirteenth embodiment in time series. In the present embodiment, a part of one of the two operation means images is configured to be covered with the variation icon.

  FIG. 35 (a) shows the timing when the special figure variation game is finished and the decorative symbols are stopped. At this timing, four hold icons (circular images in this example) PI1 to PI4 are displayed below the decorative symbol display device 208 to indicate that there are four special figure variable games on hold.

  FIG. 4B shows the timing when the reserved special figure variable game is started and the special figure variable game hold is reduced from 4 to 3. At this timing, after performing a change animation for changing the first (first) hold icon PI1 displayed in the hold icon display area to the change icon CI, the change icon is displayed in the left display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. CI is stopped and displayed. The variation icon CI is a variation icon for suggesting the success / failure result of the special figure variation display corresponding to the earliest hold icon PI1. In this example, the variation icon CI is represented by character information “chance” and a star-shaped figure. It is composed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 5C, the first operation corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 is triggered by the arrival timing of the first operation acceptance period (6 seconds in this example) of the chance button 136. The operation means image BG1 (in this example, an image simulating a chance button) is displayed behind the variation icon CI in the left display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, in this example, at least a part of the first operation means image BG1 is covered with the change icon CI, so that at least a part of the first operation means image BG1 is invisible or difficult to see. .

  Further, at the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1, the second operation means image BG2 (in this example, an image imitating the chance button) corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136 is displayed as a decoration pattern. It is displayed in the right display area of the display device 208. In this example, the second operation means image BG2 is not covered with the change icon CI, and all of the second operation means image BG2 is visible.

  Also, a first elapsed time notification image TG1 (in this example, the chance button 136 for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 at substantially the same timing as the display of the first operation means image BG1. The scale of the meter (filled portion) gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the operation reception period of the first operation) in the first color (blue in this example) below the first operation means image BG1. , And behind the change icon CI. That is, in this example, at least a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the variation icon CI, so that at least a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible or difficult to view. ing.

  At this timing, the start timing of the second operation acceptance period of the chance button 136 has not arrived, but the same image TG2 ′ as the initial image of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is displayed as the second operation means. It is displayed below the image BG2.

  The timing shown in FIG. 4D is a predetermined time (2 seconds in this example) from the timing shown in FIG. 4C, and the start timing of the acceptance period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has arrived. Timing is shown. At this timing, since a predetermined time (2 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, the operation reception period of the chance button 136 is 2 as the first elapsed time notification image TG1. An image notifying that the second has elapsed (the remaining time of the reception period is 4 seconds) is displayed. However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the variation icon CI, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible or difficult to view.

  At this timing, since the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has arrived, the still image TG2 displayed below the second operation means image BG2 at the timing shown in FIG. 'Is a second elapsed time notification image TG2 for notifying the elapsed time of the second operation reception period of the chance button 136 (in this example, the elapsed time of the second operation reception period of the chance button 136 At the same time, the scale of the meter (filled part) is switched to an image that gradually decreases).

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E shows the timing when a predetermined time (4 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continued, but a predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136. As the first elapsed time notification image TG1, an image for displaying that the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 4 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 2 seconds) is displayed. However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the variation icon CI, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible or difficult to view.

  At this timing, the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continuously displayed, but a predetermined time (2 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136. Then, as the second elapsed time notification image TG2, an image for notifying that the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has passed 2 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 4 seconds) is displayed. Yes.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5F shows the timing when a predetermined time (6 seconds in this example) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, the display of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is continued, but since a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136, As the first elapsed time notification image TG1, an image for displaying that the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 6 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 seconds) is displayed. However, since a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is covered with the variation icon CI, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible or difficult to view.

  Further, at this timing, the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continuously displayed, but a predetermined time (4 seconds) has elapsed since the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136. Then, as the second elapsed time notification image TG2, an image for notifying that the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 4 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 2 seconds) is displayed. Yes.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6G shows the timing when a predetermined time (in this example, 8 seconds) has elapsed from the timing shown in FIG. At this timing, since the predetermined time (8 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the first operation acceptance period of the chance button 136, the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are displayed. Erasing. Further, at this timing, the second elapsed time notification image TG2 is continuously displayed, but a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136. Then, as the second elapsed time notification image TG2, an image notifying that the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 has elapsed for 6 seconds (the remaining time of the reception period is 0 seconds) is displayed. Yes.

  The timing shown in (h) of the figure shows the timing when a predetermined time (in this example, 10 seconds) has elapsed from the timing shown in (c) of the figure. At this timing, since a predetermined time (8 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the second operation acceptance period of the chance button 136, the second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG1 are displayed. Erasing.

  FIG. 36I shows the timing at which the first operation of the chance button 136 is performed in a state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136. Show. At this timing, since the first operation of the chance button 136 has been performed, after the first operation means image BG1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1 are erased, a decorative symbol display is displayed instead of the image display. A character image (donor) is displayed in the left display area of the device 208. However, since a part of the character image (dono) is covered with the change icon CI, a part of the character image (dono) is invisible or difficult to see. (J) to (k) in FIG. 6 are the chance buttons before the predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 after the display in FIG. A display example when the second operation of 136 is not performed is shown.

  FIG. 11 (l) shows the timing when the second operation of the chance button 136 is performed in a state before a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136. Show. At this timing, since the second operation of the chance button 136 has been performed, after the second operation means image BG2 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2 are erased, a decorative symbol display is displayed instead of the image display. A character image (爺) is displayed in the right display area of the device 208. Even when the second operation of the chance button 136 is not performed and a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed from the start timing of the reception period of the second operation, the display shown in FIG. Good. FIG. 6 (m) shows a display example after the character image (donor) is deleted after a predetermined time has elapsed after the display of FIG. 1 (l).

  FIG. 37 is a diagram showing the operation means image display of the modified example of Example 13 in time series. In this example, similar to the fourth embodiment, the chance button 136 is triggered by the arrival timing of the first and second operation acceptance periods of the chance button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. The first operation means image BG1 corresponding to the first operation and the second operation means image BG2 corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136 are displayed on the decorative design display device 208 at the same timing.

  In addition, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the first operation of the chance button 136 at the same timing as the first operation means image BG1 and the second operation means image BG2. A second elapsed time notification image TG2 for displaying the elapsed time of the reception period of the second operation of the chance button 136 is displayed. And it comprises so that a part of 1st elapsed time alerting | reporting image TG1 may be covered with the fluctuation | variation icon CI.

  That is, one of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 and the second elapsed time notification image TG2 that notifies the same elapsed time (in this example, the first elapsed time notification image TG1) is displayed by the variation icon CI. Since it is covered, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 is invisible or difficult to view.

  According to the operation means image display of the thirteenth embodiment, it may be possible to prompt the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where the display mode hidden by the player can be focused and concentrated on the game.

  Note that the position at which the variation icon CI is displayed is not limited to the above, and is at least one of the first operation means image, the second operation means image, the first progress notification image, and the second progress notification image. May be displayed at a position covered by the change icon, and only one of the first operation means image, the second operation means image, the first progress notification image, and the second progress notification image is displayed. May be displayed at a position covered by the change icon, and at least two or more of the first operation means image, the second operation means image, the first progress notification image, and the second progress notification image. The image may be displayed at a position covered by the variation icon.

  Further, only two images of the first operation means image, the second operation means image, the first progress notification image, and the second progress notification image are displayed at the positions covered with the change icons. Well, at least one of the first operation means image, the second operation means image, the first progress notification image, and the second progress notification image is displayed at a position not covered by the variation icon. Alternatively, only one of the first operation means image, the second operation means image, the first progress notification image, and the second progress notification image is displayed at a position that is not covered by the variation icon. Alternatively, the first operation means image, the second operation means image, the first progress notification image, and the second progress notification image may be displayed at a position covered by the variation icon.

Further, the image displayed at the position covered by the variation icon may be at least partly covered, only partly covered, or all covered. .
<Embodiment 14 of operation means image display>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38, a description will be given of a fourteenth embodiment of operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing. In addition, the figure is a figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 14 in time series.

In this embodiment, one of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 and the first elapsed time notification image TG1-2 in the sixth embodiment (see FIG. 27) (in this example, the first By covering the elapsed time notification image TG1-1) with images of the notice effect shown in FIGS. 11B to 11D, a part of the one image (first elapsed time notification image TG1-1) is obtained. It is configured so as to be invisible or difficult to view. Further, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-2 is covered with the character image (dono) at the timing shown in FIG. 5B, and the character image (princess) is covered with the timing shown in FIG. A part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 is covered. In the present embodiment, the notice lottery process using FIGS. 19 to 21 is performed in the same manner as in the sixth embodiment (see FIG. 27). Since other displays are the same as those in the sixth embodiment (see FIG. 27), description thereof is omitted.
<Embodiment 15 of operation means image display>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39, a description will be given of a fifteenth embodiment of operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing. In addition, the same figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 15 in time series.

In the present embodiment, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 and the remaining time notification TG1-2 in the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 28) and all of the first operation means image BG1 are shown in FIG. By covering with the image of the notice effect shown in (d), all of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 and the remaining time notification image TG1-2 and the first operation means image BG1 are not visible or visible. It is configured to be in a difficult state. Since other displays are the same as those in the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 28), the description thereof is omitted.
<Example 16 of operation means image display>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, a description will be given of a sixteenth embodiment of operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing. In addition, the same figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 16 in time series.

In this embodiment, a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 in Embodiment 8 (see FIG. 29), as shown in FIGS. The first elapsed time notification image TG1 is partly invisible or difficult to view by covering with an image of a notice effect that suggests. Since other displays are the same as those in the eighth embodiment (see FIG. 29), description thereof is omitted.
<Example 17 of operation means image display>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, a description will be given of a seventeenth embodiment of operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing. In addition, the same figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 17 in time series.

  In the present embodiment, the first timing corresponding to the first operation of the chance button 136 is triggered by the arrival timing of the acceptance period of the first operation of the chance button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. The operation means image BG1 (in this example, an image simulating a chance button) is displayed above the left display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 5B, a second operation means image BG2 (in this example, an image simulating a chance button) corresponding to the second operation of the chance button 136, a part of which is the first. Are displayed so as to overlap the operation means image BG1. That is, in this embodiment, a part of the first operation means image BG1 is covered with the second operation means image BG2, so that a part of the first operation means image BG1 becomes invisible or difficult to see. It is configured.

  Further, in the state shown in FIG. 5B, when the first operation and the second operation of the chance button 136 are not performed and a predetermined time (6 seconds) elapses from the start timing of the operation reception period, When the decorative symbol variation display shown in (c) is performed and the first operation of the chance button 136 is performed, the first operation means image BG1 is used instead of the first operation means image BG1 as shown in FIG. When the character image (dono) is displayed and the second operation of the chance button 136 is performed, the character image (ｅ) is replaced with the second operation means image BG2 as shown in FIG. Is displayed.

In the present embodiment, when two operations are urged, two operation means images that are the same as the number of operations are displayed. However, for example, when three or more operations are urged, the operation is performed. The same number of operation means images as the number of times may be displayed. When prompting one operation, a larger number of operation means images than the number of operations may be displayed. In this case, the player may be strongly urged to perform one operation.
<Example 18 of Operation Means Image Display>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, a description will be given of Embodiment 18 of operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing. In addition, the same figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 18 in time series.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 6D, an increase animation of the hold icon is triggered when a new hold of the special figure variable game occurs, and the second hold icon PI2 after the increase (in this example, the chance icon A part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1 and a part of the adjacent first hold icon PI1 are covered with an icon imitating the button 136 and a star-shaped figure). . That is, in the present embodiment, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 and a part of the hold icon PI1 are not visible by covering the first elapsed time notification image TG1 and the hold icon PI1 with the hold icon PI2. It is configured to be in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize.

  With such a configuration, since it is possible to attract the player's attention to the elapsed time notification image or the hold icon that has become invisible or difficult to visually recognize, the player can be prompted to operate the operation means, Since the game will be more concentrated than before, there may be a case where the operating rate of the game table can be increased.

  The hold icon PI2 also serves as an operation means image corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136. When the chance button 136 is operated within a predetermined reception time, as shown in FIG. The display mode of the hold icon PI2 is an image that suggests whether or not the special figure variable game corresponding to the hold icon PI2 is successful from the operation means image (an icon that imitates the chance button 136 and a star-shaped figure). In this example, it is configured to change to a character image (savohani) that suggests that the success / failure result by prefetching the special figure variable game is a big hit.

  With such a configuration, the game information can be obtained by the hold icon that is changed by the operation of the operation means, so that the operation of the operation means can be further promoted and the interest of the game can be enhanced. is there.

  In this example, both the image before the change of the hold icon PI2 (the image imitating the chance button 136 and the icon combining the star-shaped figure) and the image after the change (character image (savohani)) are the first. Although it is configured so as to cover a part of the elapsed time notification image TG1, the image after the change may be configured not to cover a part of the first elapsed time notification image TG1.

  With such a configuration, there is a case where the second operation of the operation means can be surely performed after prompting the first operation of the operation means, and a decrease in game motivation can be prevented.

Further, in the first operation of the chance button 136, as shown in (f) of the figure, a notice effect regarding the change is started, and in the second operation of the chance button 136, as shown in (g) of the same figure. By configuring the display mode of the hold icon to be changed, the display related to the change may be given priority over the display related to the hold. In this case, the roles of the first operation and the second operation of the chance button 136 may be reversed. Further, at least one of the first operation and the second operation of the chance button 136 may be changed to an operation by another operation means (for example, the setting operation unit 137). Moreover, you may comprise so that both the notice effect regarding the said change and the display aspect of a hold icon may be changed by operating the chance button 136 once.
<Embodiment 19 of operation means image display>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, a nineteenth embodiment of operation means image display performed by the above-described operation means image display processing will be described. In addition, the figure is the figure which showed the operation means image display of Example 19 in time series.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 4A and 4B, a special symbol 1 and a fourth symbol display area 208e and a special symbol 2 and a fourth symbol display area 208f are provided in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. Provided. The special figure 1 4th symbol display area 208e displays the result of special figure 1 variable game, and the special figure 2 4th symbol display area 208f displays the result of special figure 2 variable game. For example, during a special figure change game (during special figure change), a diamond-shaped figure is displayed blinking.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5C shows the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the reception start timing of the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. At this timing, the right door 246b of the shielding device 246 is moved in the closing direction, and the first operation means image BG1, the first elapsed time notification image TG1, and a part of the hold icon are displayed on the right door 246b. By covering all of the decorative designs in the inside, the first operating means image BG1, the first elapsed time notification image TG1, and a part of the hold icon, and all of the changing decorative designs are invisible or difficult to see. It is configured to be in a state.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the operation means image, the elapsed time notification image, the hold icon, and the decorative symbol that are invisible or difficult to see, and thus prompt the operation of the operation means. In addition, since the player is more concentrated on the game than before, the operating rate of the game table may be increased. The shielding device 246 may cover all of the first operation means image BG1, the first elapsed time notification image TG1, and the hold icon, or may cover a part of the decorative pattern that is changing. Also good.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4D, the display position of the decorative symbol may be changed to a visible position in conjunction with the movement of the right door 246b of the shielding device 246, or the shielding device A notch part may be formed in a part of 246, and the special figure 1 4th symbol display area 208e and the special figure 2 4th symbol display area 208f may be visible through the notch part. .

With such a configuration, it is possible to surely grasp game information important to the player as in the decorative symbol and the fourth symbol, and therefore, it may be possible to prevent a decrease in game motivation.
<Modifications of operation means image, elapsed time notification image, and remaining time notification image>

  FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a modification of the operation means image, the elapsed time notification image, and the remaining time notification image. In the figure, as an example of the operation means image, the elapsed time notification image, and the remaining time notification image, the reception start image displayed when the reception start timing of the operation means arrives and the reception time of the operation means are halved. An image for the passage of half of the acceptance period displayed when it has elapsed, and an image for completion of acceptance displayed when the acceptance end timing of the operating means has arrived.

  The figure (a) employs an image imitating the design of the operation means as the operation means image, and displays an elapsed time notification image (or remaining time notification image) according to the elapsed time of the operation reception period. An image is used in which the scale (filled part) gradually decreases. Further, FIG. 5B employs an image obtained by simplifying the operation means as the operation means image, and matches the elapsed time of the operation reception period as the elapsed time notification image (or remaining time notification image). The image that the scale (filled part) of the meter divided into plurals gradually decreases is adopted. Further, FIG. 4C adopts an image obtained by simplifying the operation means as the operation means image, and matches the elapsed time of the operation reception period as the elapsed time notification image (or remaining time notification image). An image representing a state in which lamps (including those by light emitting means such as LEDs and those by display means such as LCD) are gradually turned off is adopted.

  FIG. 4D is configured to count down the remaining time of the operation reception period as the remaining time notification image, and FIG. 4E illustrates the elapsed time notification image (or remaining time notification image). The color of the image is gradually lightened in accordance with the elapsed time (or remaining time) of the operation reception period, and the image is erased immediately before the reception period. FIG. The notification image (or remaining time notification image) is configured to gradually darken the color of the image in accordance with the elapsed time (or remaining time) of the operation reception period. These operation means images, elapsed time notification images, and remaining time notification images may be applied to any of the above embodiments.

  As described above, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the first embodiment has at least operating means (for example, the chance button 136 and the setting operation unit 137) provided at a position where the player can operate. And a display unit capable of executing at least a plurality of displays (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, the first sub-control unit 400), wherein at least one of the plurality of displays is , A first display (for example, a first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 shown in FIGS. 28A to 28E), and at least one of the plurality of displays is a second display ( For example, the remaining time notification image TG1-2 shown in FIGS. 28C to 28E), and the first display is a display related to the operation of the operation means (for example, the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136). elapsed time The second display is a display related to the operation of the operation means (for example, a remaining time notification image for notifying the remaining time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136). The display means is capable of displaying at least the second display during the display of the first display, and the display means displays at least one of the plurality of displays. The mode can be changed (for example, an image in which the scale (filled portion) of the meter gradually decreases in accordance with the elapsed time of the operation reception period of the chance button 136, and the rest of the operation period of the operation of the chance button 136 is displayed. Count down the time and display (display related to operation means, notice effect, normal symbol fluctuation display, hold icon, etc.) Those that hide some) even without, it is the amusement machine according to claim.

  According to the gaming machine according to the first embodiment, the player may be strongly urged to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from losing the operation timing of the operation means and improve the interest of the game. Further, there are cases where the interest of the game can be improved by increasing the choices of the players.

  Further, the first display is a notification according to the elapsed time from the start timing of the reception period for accepting the operation of the operation means (for example, a meter scale (e.g., a meter scale corresponding to the elapsed time of the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136) The second display is a notification according to an elapsed time from the start timing of the reception period (for example, an operation of the chance button 136). The remaining time of the reception period may be counted down).

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to strongly encourage the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from losing the operation timing of the operation means and improve the interest of the game. Further, there are cases where the interest of the game can be improved by increasing the choices of the players.

  In addition, at least one of the first and second displays changes to a different display mode when a specific time has elapsed since the start of acceptance of the operation of the operation means (for example, FIG. 27). As shown in (c), the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-1 may be changed from the first color (blue) to the second color (red).

  With such a configuration, various displays can be performed, and the player may be prevented from getting bored. Further, since the player can determine the operation timing by looking at the display, it may be easy for the player to participate in the game.

  The first display (for example, a meter) may be a display mode different from the second display (for example, a number).

  With such a configuration, there are cases where the player can be more strongly urged to operate the operation means by various display notifications. Further, there are cases where the player can be entertained by notification with various displays.

  In addition, the first and second displays may be terminated (for example, the elapsed time notification image or the remaining time notification image is deleted) when at least the reception period ends.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to strongly encourage the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where it is possible to prevent the player from losing the operation timing of the operation means and improve the interest of the game. Further, there are cases where the interest of the game can be improved by increasing the choices of the players.

  In addition, it is provided with an appropriateness determination means (for example, special drawing related lottery processing, general drawing related lottery processing) capable of executing the determination of the validity when the determination condition is satisfied, and at least one of the first and second displays. One may indicate the result of the determination (for example, a third elapsed time notification image TG3 shown in FIG. 24).

  With such a configuration, there are cases where various displays can be performed. In addition, there are cases where the choice of how to play by the player increases and the interest of the game can be further improved.

  Further, a third display (for example, a first operation means image BG1 (chance button shown in FIGS. 28A to 28E) for notifying that the operation acceptance period of the operation means is displayed on the plurality of displays. The third display does not notify the elapsed time from the start timing of the reception period for accepting the operation of the operating means, and the third display is during the reception period, It may be executable at least during execution of at least one of the first and second displays.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game by encouraging the player to operate more than necessary. In addition, the display may be sharpened to make the player more entertaining.

  Note that a third display for notifying only that it is the operation acceptance period for the operation means may be displayed, or that at least a third display for notifying that the operation means is being accepted for operation is displayed. Good.

  The third display may not notify only the elapsed time from the start timing of the reception period during the reception period, or at least the elapsed time from the start timing of the reception period during the reception period. It may be one that does not notify, may notify at least the elapsed time after a specific time from the start of the reception period, and only notifies the elapsed time after a specific time from the start of the reception period It may be a thing.

  The third display may be at least executable during execution of the first display, may be at least executable only during execution of the first display, It may be at least executable during execution of the second display, or may be at least executable only during execution of the second display. The third display may be at least executable during the execution of both the first and second displays, or only during the execution of both the first and second displays. It may be executable.

  In addition, the third display is displayed on at least one of the first display and the second display when at least part (or only part or all) of the operation reception period overlaps ( Alternatively, the operation reception result may be reflected in only one display or both displays.

  The third display is at least the third display when at least a part (or only a part or all) of the operation acceptance period overlaps at least one of the first and second displays. The operation reception result may be reflected on (or only the third display or all the first to third displays).

  The plurality of displays include a fourth display (for example, a first elapsed time notification image TG1-2 shown in FIG. 27C) displayed when a specific time has elapsed, and the fourth display Is displayed in accordance with the elapsed time from the start timing of the reception period (for example, the color of the first elapsed time notification image TG1-2 is changed from the third color (white) to the fourth color (red). ) At least. With such a configuration, it may be possible to strongly urge the player to perform an operation.

  Note that the fourth display may be a notification only according to the elapsed time from the start timing of the reception period, or at least a notification (or only a notification) indicating the result of the determination of success / failure. It is also possible that at least (or only the advance notice) is not made to suggest the result of the determination.

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the first embodiment includes an operation unit (for example, a chance button 136 and a setting operation unit 137) provided at least at a position where the player can perform an operation. A game machine including display means capable of executing at least display (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first sub-control unit 400), wherein at least one of the plurality of displays is a first And at least one of the plurality of displays is a second display, and the first display is a display related to the operation means (first operation means image BG1, second operation means image). BG2, elapsed time notification images TG1, TG2, TG1-1.TG1-2), and the display means displays a third display (for example, an elapse of an acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 30). At least a part of the elapsed time notification image TG1 for reporting the interval), and the display means displays at least a fourth display (for example, a part of the variation icon CI shown in FIG. 30). The display means gives priority to the fourth display over the third display when the display position of the third display matches the display position of the fourth display. The third display is at least part of one of the first display and the second display, and the fourth display. Is a gaming table that is at least a part of the other display of the first display and the second display.

  According to the gaming machine according to the first embodiment, it may be possible to further encourage the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where the display mode hidden by the player can be focused and concentrated on the game.

  Further, the first display is a notification according to the elapsed time from the start timing of the reception period for accepting the operation of the operation means (for example, a meter scale (e.g., a meter scale corresponding to the elapsed time of the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136) It is also possible to display at least an image in which the filled portion) gradually decreases.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to further prompt the player to operate the operation means. Further, there are cases where the display mode hidden by the player can be focused and concentrated on the game.

  In addition, the third display (for example, part or all of the elapsed time notification image TG1 for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 30, the first operation shown in FIG. 41) The means image BG1 (part or all of the image imitating the chance button) is at least a part of the first display, and the fourth display (for example, the change icon CI shown in FIG. 30 and FIG. 41). The second operation means image BG2 (a part or the whole of the image imitating the chance button) shown may be at least a part of the second display.

  With such a configuration, it may be difficult to see the notification of the reception period, and the player's operation may be further urged.

  In addition, the display means may display a fifth display (for example, the first operation means image BG1 (chance button shown in FIG. 30) when a specific time has elapsed since the start of acceptance of the operation of the operation means. At least when the display position of the fourth display and the display position of the fifth display coincide with each other. The fourth display is preferentially displayed (for example, displayed in front), and the fifth display is at least a part of one of the first display and the second display. It may be.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to further prompt the player to operate the operation means. In some cases, the player can focus more on the display mode hidden by the player and concentrate on the game.

  Further, the third display (for example, the elapsed time notification image TG1 shown in FIG. 30) may have a display mode different from the fourth display (for example, the change icon CI shown in FIG. 30). Note that different display modes may indicate different shapes, may indicate different transmittances, may indicate different colors, or may indicate different sizes. In addition, at least one of the third displays (shape, color, transparency, size, etc.) may be used as long as they have the same shape or different display forms as long as they have different colors. The display mode may be different as long as a part (at least one of shape, color, transparency, size, etc.) of the first display and the fourth display is different.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to focus attention on the display mode hidden by the player and concentrate on the game.

  In addition, a part of the third display (at least one of shape, color, transmissivity, size, etc.) so that the colors may be different or the same shape and the same display mode may be used. And a portion of the fourth display (at least one of shape, color, transparency, size, etc., that matches a portion of the third display) The same display mode may be used.

  Further, the third display (for example, the elapsed time notification image TG1 for notifying the elapsed time of the reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 30) is at least a part of the second display. The fourth display (for example, the change icon CI shown in FIG. 30) may be at least a part of the first display.

  With such a configuration, it may be easy to see the notification of the reception period and allow the player to perform the operation reliably. In some cases, the player may be urged to press a button. In some cases, the player can concentrate on the game to prevent the player from getting bored.

  (A) In addition, it is provided with a go / no-go determination means (for example, special drawing related lottery processing, general drawing related lottery processing) capable of executing the go / no-go determination when the pass / fail determination condition is satisfied, and a second display (for example, notice) The display of the effect) may be a notice that suggests the result of the determination.

  With such a configuration, there are cases where various displays can be performed. Further, there are cases where the player can be made to pay more attention to the reception period of the operation means.

  (B) Further, it is provided with a go / no-go determination means (for example, special drawing related lottery processing, general drawing related lottery processing) capable of executing the go / no-go determination when the pass / fail determination condition is satisfied, and a first display (related to the operation means). The display) may be a notice suggesting the result of the determination.

  With such a configuration, there are cases where various displays can be performed. In some cases, the player can be more focused on the notice.

  In the case of (A) and (B) above, at least one of the first display and the second display (or only one display, or both displays) suggests the result of the determination. A notice may be included, and the first display and the second display may be the same (or different) notice showing the result of the determination. For example, both of them may be the determination results of special drawings, or both may be the determination results of ordinary drawings. In addition, one may be a result of whether or not a special figure is determined, and the other may be a result of normal or not, or one may be a result of determining whether or not the change is correct and the other is a result of determining whether or not the next time is correct (special / standard map). (Prefetching) may be used, or both may be the determination results of the different fluctuations (special / standard prefetching).

  (C) Further, if at least a part of at least one of the first, second, and third displays is hidden by a plurality of other displays, the hidden display is made more noticeable. May be possible. Note that only a part (or all) of at least one of the first, second, and third displays may be hidden by a plurality of other displays.

  (D) Further, if at least one of the first, second, and third displays hides a plurality of other displays, the hidden display may be more noticed. In some cases, the hidden display can be more noticed. In addition, at least one part (or only part or all) of one of the plurality of other displays is hidden by the one display, and the other display is at least partly ( Alternatively, only a part or all) may be hidden.

In the case of (C) and (D) above, the third display may be a notice that at least suggests the result of the determination (or only a notification that suggests the result of the determination), The third display may be a notification of at least the reception period of the operation means (or only the notification of the reception period of the operation means), a notice that suggests the result of the determination, and the reception period of the operation means. At least one of the notifications (or only one of the two, or at least both, or both) may be performed. The display means may be a notification means, and the display may be a notification.
<Embodiment 2>

Hereinafter, a gaming machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a spinning game machine such as a slot machine) according to Embodiment 2 of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. The reference numerals shown in FIGS. 44 to 77 are used only in the description of the second embodiment in principle, and even in the case where overlapping numerals are shown in other drawings, the description of the present embodiment is not used. The reference numerals shown in FIGS. 44 to 77 are given priority.
<Overall configuration>

  First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface. The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a game machine installation business store.

  The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a vertical rectangular gaming table base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so that the inner side of the front frame door 106 can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player 200 ball launching handles 134 for launching into the game area 124, chance buttons 136 for changing the effects of the various effects devices 206 by the player's operation, and the chance button 136 to emit light. Sub button lamp 138, ball lending operation button 140 for instructing ball lending to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store, and return operation button for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance 142, and a ball rental display unit 144 for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit. In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. .

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 46 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is positioned below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. To pay out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300 The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-board that performs control processing related to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. An error release switch that constitutes a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls, and that releases an error by the operation of a game clerk Discharge board case 172 storing the payout board 170 having 168, launch base constituting the launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of the game ball A launch board case 176 that houses 174, a power control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines, and a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game store clerk and an RWM clear by being operated when the power is turned on A power board case 184 that houses a power board 182 that includes an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs a signal to the main controller 300, and a CR interface 186 that transmits and receives signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit are provided. ing.

  FIG. 47 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially in the center, and around the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, and the ordinary device. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”. The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In this embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7 segment LEDs in this embodiment.

  The multi-purpose hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general-purpose variable games (details will be described later) that are on hold. In this embodiment, the general-purpose variable games are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games (details will be described later) that are being held. In this embodiment, the special figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, there are predetermined ball entrances, for example, a general prize opening 226, a general start port 228, a first special view start port 230, a second special view start port 232, around the effect device 206. A variable winning opening 234 is provided.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detecting sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning is sometimes referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player is sometimes referred to as “rental ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 228 is constituted by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, a payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball for the upper plate 126. The special figure changing game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric Chu). In the present embodiment, only one second special figure starting port 232 is disposed directly below the first special figure starting port 230. The second special figure starting port 232 includes a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the wing member 232a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. When 210 hits and stops and displays the symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a large winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is disposed below the center of the game board 200. This variable winning opening 234 includes a door member 234a that can be opened and closed. When the door member 234a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball, and the special figure display device stops the big hit symbol when the special figure variable game is won. When displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds) and at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, After guiding a ball that has not won any prize opening or start opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out opening is provided for discharging to the game island side.

This pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches 146 Further, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 148 and driven into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or start opening (Outside the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232), winning out any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal start port 228, the out port 240 To reach.
<Directing device 206>

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball carried on by a nail of the game board 200, or the like, and the passed ball is a first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry into the golf course.

  In this embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b imitating the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor and an elbow (not shown) that rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm 224b at a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding means shields the inner end portions thereof so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.
<Control unit>

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the game ball payout, the launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and the power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 are configured. Yes.
<Main control unit>

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time and frequency, and WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing are mounted. . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a counter circuit 318 used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes two circuits). And a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each start port, winning port, variable winning port, front frame door opening sensor, and inner frame opening sensor. And a sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a lower plate full sensor and outputting a comparison result with an amplification result or a reference voltage to the counter circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device For example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, a predetermined symbol display device, A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the general-purpose display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, a general-purpose reservation lamp 216, a first special figure reservation lamp 218, a second special figure reservation lamp 220, a high-probability medium) A driving circuit 330 for performing display control of the lamp 222 and the like, and various solenoids 332 for opening and closing a predetermined movable member, for example, the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232, the door member 234a of the variable winning port 234, and the like. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the above is connected.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the counter circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the counter circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the counter circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the second special figure starting port 232 has won a ball, the counter circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control section main processing described later is started).

The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300.
<First sub-control unit>

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effects data, RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and for measuring time, frequency, etc. The counter timer 412 is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138), and a shielding device 246. A drive circuit 432 for performing drive control, a shielding device sensor 430 that detects the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button detection sensor 426 that detects pressing of the chance button 136, a shielding device sensor 430, and a chance button detection sensor The sensor circuit 428 that outputs the detection signal from the 426 to the basic circuit 402, and the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal from the CPU 404 are read, and the display image is generated using the work area of the VRAM 436 to decorate A VDP 434 (image) that displays an image on the symbol display device 208. Are connected Oh and display processor), the.
<Second sub-control unit>

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and frequency 512 is installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, and an image display A ROM 506 storing data and the like is provided.

The basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, and a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. Is output to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table frame lamp drive for controlling the game table frame lamp 542 The circuit 540 is connected to a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.
<Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control unit are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.
<Type of design>

  Next, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed using FIGS. 49 (a) to 49 (c). The types of special maps and common maps to be explained FIG. 4A shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special figure.

  The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the ball has entered the second special figure start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start port sensor has detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” by repeating all lighting of seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 displays “fluctuation display of special figure 2” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Do. These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display according to the present invention. Then, when the variation time determined before the variation start of the special figure 1 (corresponding to the variation time referred to in the present invention) elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the special symbol form of the special figure 1. When the variation time determined before the start of variation 2 (this also corresponds to the variation time according to the present invention) has elapsed, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special diagram 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display referred to in the present invention, hereinafter, after the “variable display of special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed. The series of displays up to is referred to as symbol variation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. FIG. 10A shows 10 types of special drawings from “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure J” as stop symbol forms in the symbol variation stop display, and the white portions in the figure are turned off. The location of the segment to be displayed is shown, and the black-colored portion indicates the location of the segment.

  “Special Figure A” is a 15-round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, the determination as to whether or not the big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the decision as to whether or not it is a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, both shift to the time-saving state. Although the time reduction will be described in detail later, the state that shifts to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal high probability state, and the state that does not shift to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal low probability state. “Special figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and “Special figure B”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state. These “special chart A” and “special chart B” are symbols that give a relatively large profit amount to the player.

  “Special figure C” is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure C” is 2R compared to “Special Figure A” which is 15R. “Special figure D” is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden time reduction, and is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure D” is 2R compared to “Special Figure B” which is 15R.

  “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R jackpot symbol suddenly called normal, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. These “special drawing E” and “special drawing F” are both 2R and are in a state in which they do not shift to the time-saving state.

  “Special figure G” is the first small hit symbol, and “Special figure H” is the second small hit symbol, both of which are in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit here corresponds to the same as the big hit with no short time at 2R. That is, “Special Figure G” and “Special Figure H” are in the same state as “Special Figure F”, but the effects displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 are different in both cases. By providing “G”, “Special Figure H”, and “Special Figure F”, the interest of the game is enhanced.

  In addition, “Special Figure I” is a first off symbol, and “Special Figure J” is a second off symbol, and the profit amount given to the player is a relatively small profit amount.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, symbols other than “Special Illustration A” are prepared as 15R special jackpot symbols, and the same applies to other symbols such as 15R jackpot symbols.

  FIG. 49 (b) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure start port 230 or the second special view start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special view start port 230; or On the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special symbol start port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Displayed in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →... “Decoration display of decorative pattern” is performed. When the 15R jackpot of “special drawing B” is notified, a symbol combination (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration”) corresponding to the 15R jackpot corresponding to the 15R jackpot in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. 1 ”or“ decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2 ”). When notifying the 15R special jackpot of “special drawing A”, a combination of three symbols of the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” or “decoration 7—decoration 7—decoration 7”). Etc.) is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, the 2R big hit called “hidden probability change” of “special drawing E”, the 2R big hit called “special drawing F” suddenly normal, or the first small hit of “special drawing G”, “special drawing H” When notifying the second small hit, “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in order to notify 2R jackpot called “sudden probability change” of “special drawing C” or 2R jackpot called “sudden time reduction of“ special drawing D ”,“ decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5 ”is set. Stop display.

  On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of “Special Figure I” and the second deviation of “Special Figure J”, the symbol combination other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. 5B is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

FIG. 49 (c) shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes of “normal map A”, which is a winning symbol, and “general symbol B”, which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that a sphere has passed through the general-purpose start opening 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the deviation of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 6C, the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.
<Main control unit main processing>

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input resets by a reset interrupt and executes the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, to the WDT 314 The operation is permitted and the initial value is set. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value. In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 9v), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), the step is performed. The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312 and a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption), and the state before power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to an initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of an amusement store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is turned on (indicates that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. In addition, a transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

In step S115, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the ordinary figure winning random number counter and the special figure random value counter, the ordinary figure timer random number value, and the special figure timer, respectively. Two random number counters for generating each random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a normal timer random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal timer random value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. Note that the initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.
<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>

  Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT is periodically updated (so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 48, winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal) is stored. In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the ordinary drawing starting port 228. Is determined to have passed. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been awarded to the winning ports 226 and 234 and the starting ports 230, 232, and 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal winning random number value used in the main control unit 300, Two random number counters for generating the special figure 1 random value and the special figure 2 random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next time, in addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the random number value of FIG. 1 and the counter for acquiring the random value of FIG. 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated. In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 are timed. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed and stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215, winning prize counter update processing is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when winning holes 226, 234 and starting holes 230, 232, 228 are won, the RAM 308 stores the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value is read out, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, and the variable winning port 234. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S203. When a winning is made at the first special figure starting port 230 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is stored in the special counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318. And a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random value as a special figure 1 random value and storing it in the corresponding random value storage area. When a winning is made to the second special figure starting port 232 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is sent from the winning counter value storage register of the counter circuit 318 to the special figure 2 winning random number value. And a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random value as a special figure 2 random value and storing it in the corresponding random value storage area. If there is a win at the general figure starting port 228 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is obtained as a normal figure winning random number value from the random number counter for generating the normal figure winning random number value. Store in the corresponding random value storage area. When there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening.

  In step S219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the hit symbol display mode When the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured so as to display the off symbol when the hit flag is off. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines the symbol of either the winning symbol (general symbol A shown in FIG. 49 (c)) or the off symbol (general symbol B shown in FIG. 49 (c)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 232a is opened to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is out of play, the usual figure out flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure off flag is on, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable time is stored as a normal map variable time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Next, in step S225 and step S227, special figure state update processing for special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. First, special figure state update processing (special figure 2 state update process) for special figure 2 is performed. This is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed in accordance with the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on. Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game).

  In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 includes a 15R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first off flag, a second off flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a normal figure. A flag for each probability variation flag is prepared. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), the 15R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag 49, the special figure A and 15R jackpot flags shown in FIG. 49 (a) are on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and the common figure probability fluctuation flag is on. Special figure B, 2R jackpot flag is on, special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and special figure probability fluctuation flag is on. Special figure C, 2R big hit flag is on, special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, general figure probability When the fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, and when the common figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure E, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability Fluctuation flag is off When the fluctuation flag is also off, special figure F, when the first small hit flag is on, special figure G, when the second small hit flag is on, special figure H, when the first off flag is on The special segment I and the second off-set flag are turned on, the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on / off so that the respective modes of the special diagram I are turned on. Is set to indicate that the special figure 2 stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), a 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), a sudden probability variation symbol (special symbol C), and a sudden time-short symbol symbol (special symbol). D), hidden probability variation (special E), suddenly normal (special F), first small hit (special G), second small hit (special H), first off symbol (special) Any one of the symbols I) and the second off-set symbol (special symbol J) is confirmed and displayed. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not (details will be described later), the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state).

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, the special figure 2 is in operation and waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Alternatively, the door member 234a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234 until a winning of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the variable prize opening 234. In addition to outputting a signal to be held at the same time, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234, and a closing period is stored in a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment) and finished, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) In other words, the effect standby period is stored in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for a period during which an image for informing the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Set the information indicating. Also, if the normal probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, the time reduction number 100 is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. If the usual time probability variation flag is set to OFF, the time reduction number is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned ON. The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is a normal high probability state. There is a higher probability of hitting a general-purpose variable game in the high-probability state than in the low-probability state. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal figure variable game and the fluctuation time of the special figure variable game are shorter in the normal figure high probability state than in the normal figure low probability state. Further, in the normal high probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special start port 232 tends to be longer than in the normal low probability state. In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a large number of games will be placed in the second special figure starting port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls are entered during the big win game. There is a problem that a ball enters and the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases, resulting in an increase in euphoria. This is to solve this problem.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of place, the out-of-game flag is turned on as will be described later. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed as step S229 and step S231. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. Further, the notification of the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the second special figure starting port 232 is notified. However, it is performed in preference to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the first special figure starting port 230. The special drawing related lottery process will be described in detail later.

  In step S233, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (In this embodiment, command types such as basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command are specified. Possible information), bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information such as the value of the 15R jackpot flag or 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, and the like. In the case of the symbol variation stop command, the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, and the like are included. In the case of a jackpot round number designation command, the value of the special variation probability flag, the number of jackpot rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 232, winning of the variable winning port 234 Includes presence or absence.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the value of the 15R big hit flag or 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the special figure 1 related lottery process, and the special figure 2 related are stored in the RAM 308 as command data. Information indicating the timer number selected in the lottery process, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the 15R big hit flag, the value of the 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described large winning opening release setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In the above-mentioned big winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increasing process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a full tray error is monitored. When the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the normal symbol display device 210 and the first special symbol display via the display circuits 324, 326 and 330. Display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S239, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241.

  In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to.

On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.
<Processing of First Sub-Control Unit 400>

The process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 4C is a flowchart of the timer variable interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 4D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.
<First sub-control unit main process>

  First, in step S301 of the main process of the first sub control unit 400, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is substituted into the timer variable. In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S307, processing such as reading effect data corresponding to the command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when update of the effect data is necessary, effect data update processing is performed.

In step S311, the chance button detection sensor 426 that detects the pressing of the chance button 136 is monitored. When the pressing of the chance button 136 is detected, the effect data updated in step S309 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the pressing of the chance button 136. Perform the change process. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a button reception period is provided in which the pressing operation of the chance button 136 can be received during the variable display of the special figure and the decorative symbol. In this button reception period, timing is started when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation (for example, when t ₀ seconds in FIG. 57B has elapsed).

  Further, at the start of the button reception period, effect data for notifying the player that the pressing operation of the chance button 136 can be received is prepared, and in the image control process described later, for example, FIG. ) (In this example, display of an image simulating the chance button 136) is performed. In addition, when it is detected that the chance button 136 is pressed during the button reception period, effect data for performing the advance notice is prepared, and, for example, as shown on the right side of FIG. A notice is made (in this example, the text “Gekiatsu!” Is displayed). Then, after the button reception period (for example, 6 seconds) elapses, the time measurement is ended, and a process for deleting the notification of the button reception period and the notice is performed.

  In step S313, if there is a command to VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to VDP 434 (details will be described later). In step S315, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S317, if there is a command to the various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 420. In step S319, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

In step S321, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S303.
<First sub-control unit command reception interrupt process>

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.
<First sub-control unit timer interrupt processing>

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). Execute in the cycle.

In step S501 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub control unit main process shown in FIG. Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In subsequent step S503, transmission of a control command to second sub-control unit 500 set in step S319, update processing of a random number value for production, and the like are performed.
<First Sub-Control Unit Image Control Process>

  Next, the image control process in step S313 in the main process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605. If not, a transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it.

  In step S605, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 sets parameters according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

In step S607, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404. In step S609, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611. If not, the generation end interrupt signal is determined. Wait for input. In step S611, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.
<Processing of Second Sub-Control Unit 500>

The process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 8C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.
<Second sub-control unit main process>

  First, in step S701 of the main process of the second sub control unit 500, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S701. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S703, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. In step S707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S709, an effect control process is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S707, the effect data corresponding to this command is read from the ROM 506, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

In step S <b> 711, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520. In step S713, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to step S703.
<Second sub-control unit command reception interrupt process>

Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.
<Second sub-control unit timer interrupt processing>

  Next, the second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and a timer interrupt process is performed in response to this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle.

In step S901 of the second sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 in the second sub control unit main process shown in FIG. Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S903 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, an effect random number update process is performed.
<Data table of main control unit 300>

  Next, a data table stored in advance in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 and a special drawing related lottery process will be described.

  54 is a diagram showing an example of a special figure 1 fluctuation time determination table for determining the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 and a special figure 2 fluctuation time determination table for determining the fluctuation time of the special figure 2. FIG. . These special figure 1 variation time determination table and special figure 2 variation time determination table include a special symbol stop symbol, a special symbol variation time, a random number selection range, an effect mode on the decorative symbol display device 208, and a table. It is the data table which linked | related and memorize | stored the number.

  The main control unit 300 refers to the special figure 1 variation time determination table in the special figure 1 related lottery process described above, and selects a table number based on the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game. For example, if the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is a big hit and the special figure A or the special figure B is selected as the stop symbol of the special figure 1, the table 1 is selected as the table number. Subsequently, the main control unit 300 selects a specific variation time by lottery using a random value from one or a plurality of variation times corresponding to the selected table. For example, when the table number is Table 1 and the acquired random number value is 500, the variation time 15000 ms (per normal reach) corresponding to the random number selection range 0 to 1000 is selected.

Further, the main control unit 300 refers to the special figure 2 variation time determination table in the special figure 2 related lottery process described above, and selects a table number based on the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game. For example, when the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is successful and the special figure I or special figure J is selected as the stop symbol of the special figure 2, for example, the table 9 is selected as the table number. Subsequently, the main control unit 300 selects a specific variation time by lottery using a random value from one or a plurality of variation times corresponding to the selected table. For example, when the table number is Table 9 and the acquired random number value is 55000, a fluctuation time of 10,000 ms (normal reach deviation) corresponding to the random number selection range 50001 to 60000 is selected.
<Notice production>

  Next, details of the effect (a series of notice effects related to the notice) displayed by the decorative symbol display device 208 in accordance with the determination result of the special figure related lottery process (steps S229 and S231) will be described. This effect includes a predetermined effect (hereinafter also referred to as “notice”) that suggests to the player the result of the determination of success / failure during the display of the decorative symbols. Further, this effect includes a predetermined effect (hereinafter also referred to as “notification”) that prompts the player to operate the chance button 136 in order to make the above notice. That is, in the series of notice effects displayed by the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect (notification) that prompts the player to operate the chance button 136 is first performed, and when the chance button 136 is operated by the player, the decorative symbol is displayed. During the fluctuation display, the result is changed to an effect (notice) that suggests the result of the success / failure determination to the player. At this time, an effect (notification) that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 may be set according to the result of the success / failure determination, thereby fulfilling a function (notice function) that suggests the result of the success / failure determination to the player. The chance button 136 is set so that the operation becomes effective when operated within a predetermined reception period. The button reception period is notified to the player in various notification modes.

  Specifically, the main control unit 300 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on in the special drawing related lottery processing (steps S229 and S231). When the big hit flag is ON, one symbol is determined from a plurality of big hit symbols (in the present embodiment, special drawings A to F). If the big hit flag is not on, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is on. When the small hit flag is ON, one symbol is determined from a plurality of small hit symbols (in the present embodiment, special drawings G to F). When neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is on, one symbol is determined from a plurality of missed symbols (in this embodiment, special diagrams I to J). When the stop symbol of the special figure is determined, the change time is determined by the above-described special figure change time determination table (see FIG. 54) according to the stop symbol. Further, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), a symbol change start command including at least information on the determination result (stop symbol of the special symbol) and the variation time is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400, in the above-described effect control process (step S309), the determination result (the special symbol stop symbol) included in the symbol variation start command received from the main control unit 300 and the variation time, The notice lottery processing is executed based on the notification mode determination table stored in advance in the ROM 406 for each stop symbol and variation time of the special figure and the random number value obtained from a predetermined random number counter.

  For example, when the 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B) and the fluctuation time for super reach A (45000 ms) are received from the main control unit 300, the table number 2 is selected from the plurality of notification mode determination tables shown in FIG. The notification form determination table for Super Reach A is selected, and the notice lottery process is executed. Next, using the selected notification mode determination table, it is determined which effect is to be performed by random number lottery. For example, if the random number value is 29 in the super reach A per notification mode determination table, a notification mode whose mode changes from notification B to D is selected. Further, for example, when the first deviation symbol (special symbol I) and the super reach A variation time (40000 ms) are received from the main control unit 300, a table is selected from the plurality of notification mode determination tables shown in FIG. The super reach A of No. 12 selects the notification mode determination table for deviation, and executes the notice lottery process. Next, using the selected notification mode determination table, it is determined which effect is to be performed by random number lottery. For example, if the random number is 29 in the notification mode determination table for super reach A deviation, the notification mode in which the mode of notification F continues and the mode does not change in the middle is selected.

  Specifically, the first sub-control unit 400 executes a notice lottery process as shown in FIG. First, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the determination result obtained from the main control unit 300 is a big hit (whether the stop symbol is a special symbol A to F). If it is a big hit, the process proceeds to step S1003.

In step S1003, the lottery of the notification mode is performed based on the jackpot table in the notification mode determination table. The notification mode determination table is determined based on the jackpot symbol received from the main control unit 300 and the variation time. For example, the jackpot table of table number 2 in the notification mode determination table shown in FIG. 56 is a notification mode determination table for Super Reach A selected in the special figure 1 variation time determination table of FIG. In the case of reach, details are omitted, but a notification mode determination table is prepared in the same manner. Furthermore, in step S1003, the lottery of the notification mode of the remaining time of the notice button reception period is performed based on the notification mode determination table for super reach A in FIG. That is, in the case of a big hit through Super Reach A, when the random number value is 0 to 4, the “mode of continuing the notification F (mode in which the notification does not change)” is selected as the notification mode, and the random value is 5 to 19 Select “mode switching from notification A to notification E”, select “mode switching from notification B to notification D” when the random number is 20 to 49, and select “notification” when the random number is 50 to 99 A mode of switching from C ₁ to notification C ₂ is selected. In this embodiment, since the numerical value range of the random number value is set to 0 to 99, for example, the probability of selecting “mode of continuing notification F” as the notification mode is 1/20 (= 5/100). Yes, when the determination result of the special figure is a big hit, the probability that “the mode in which the notification F is continued” is most selected among all the notification modes is low.

  In step S1005, it is determined whether it is a predetermined fluctuation time. If so, the process proceeds to step S1007, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1009. Here, the predetermined variation time is a lottery using a special figure determination result (stop symbol) and a random number value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the table shown in FIG. 54 in the special figure related lottery process. It means the variation time of the special figure determined by. In the present embodiment, in the next step S1007, a lottery of the notification mode is limited to a case where an effect relating to losing, normal reach losing, super reach A losing or super reach B losing is performed, excluding shortening or super shortening. It has come to be. In the present embodiment, when the stop symbol of the special figure is a small hit, the notification mode is determined from the loss table.

In step S1007, the lottery of the notification mode is performed based on the deviation table in the notification mode determination table. For example, the outlier table of table number 12 in the notification mode determination table shown in FIG. 56 is a notification mode determination table for super reach A selected in the special figure 1 variation time determination table in FIG. Similarly to the case of, a notice mode determination table for notice is also prepared in the case of other reach or loss. Furthermore, in step S1007, the lottery of the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period for notice is performed based on the notification mode determination table for super reach A in FIG. That is, in the case of deviation from Super Reach A, when the random number value is 0 to 49, “notification F is continued” is selected as the notification mode, and when the random number value is 50 to 79, “notification from notification A” is selected. "Mode switching to E" is selected. When the random number value is 80 to 94, "Mode switching from notification B to notification D" is selected. When the random number value is 95 to 99, "Notification C ₁ to Notification C ₂ " is selected. “Mode to be switched” is selected. Note that the probability of selecting “mode switching from notification C ₁ to notification C ₂ ” as the notification mode is 1/20 (= 5/100), and if the determination result of the special figure is not a big hit, “notification C ₁ probability aspect switched to notification C ₂ "is the most selective of all the notification manner from is low. In step S1009, a command is transmitted to various devices that execute a notice (for example, VDP 434 that controls the display image of the decorative symbol display device 208), and this control flow ends.

Of the notification modes described above, in the notification mode that switches from notification X to notification Y, the first notification mode is referred to as the first notification mode, and the notification mode that switches thereafter is referred to as the second notification mode. Moreover, at least the notification period is set in each aspect of the above-described notifications A to F. For example, the broadcast A is one second broadcasting period, informing B is broadcast period 2 seconds, the notification C ₁ and C ₂ are broadcasting period is 3 seconds, the notification D is broadcasting period is 4 seconds, the notification E is broadcasting period is 5 seconds The notification F is set such that the notification period is 6 seconds. And when winning the mode switched from the first notification mode to the second notification mode, a notification period according to the first notification mode (hereinafter also referred to as a first notification period) and a notification period according to the second notification mode (hereinafter referred to as the first notification mode). , Which is also referred to as a second notification period) is set to coincide with the button reception period.

Further, although not shown in particular, in the advance notice lottery process, the details of the advance notice are determined based on the determination result received from the main control unit 300, the predetermined advance notice lottery table stored in the ROM 406 in advance, and the random number described above. (For example, if the button is pressed, the character display of “It ’s hot!” Or “...” is displayed).
<Example 1 of notification mode of remaining time>

  Example 1 of the notification mode of the remaining time of the reception period of the chance button 136 notified by the decorative symbol display device 208 as a result of the notice lottery process will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58. Here, when the determination result is 15R big hit (special figure B) and the fluctuation time is 45000 ms (per super reach A), in the notification mode determination table for super reach A shown in Table No. 2 shown in FIG. An example will be described in which a notification mode that switches from “B” (first notification mode) to “B” (second notification mode) is won.

  As described above, the chance button 136 is enabled to accept operations only during a preset period (button reception period). The button reception period is displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in a format that shows the remaining time (here, a rectangular meter), and the length of the remaining time of the button reception period is notified by the remaining amount of the meter. The The notification mode can be set in various modes using parameters such as a notification period, a color of the meter, an initial amount of the meter at the start of notification, a decrease amount (decrease rate) per unit time of the meter, and the like.

In the notification B mode in the first embodiment, the meter is displayed in the reference color (for example, blue) during the notification period of T ₂ seconds (for example, 2 seconds). For example, as shown in FIGS. 58 (b) to 58 (d), the meter is displayed in a state where it partially overlaps the front surface of the decorative symbol that is changing. For example, as shown in FIG. 58 (b), the meter is displayed as full when the notification starts in the notification B mode, and gradually decreases as time elapses. The decreasing speed of the meter is set to coincide with the actual decreasing speed during the button reception period (actual decreasing speed of the remaining time).

In the notification D mode, the meter is displayed in a special color (for example, red) during the notification period of T ₄ seconds (for example, 4 seconds). The meter is displayed partially overlapping the front of the changing decorative symbol. At the notification start time in the notification D mode, the remaining amount of the meter immediately before (the notification end time in the notification B mode) is maintained, and gradually decreases as time elapses. The decrease rate of the meter is set to coincide with the actual decrease rate during the button reception period.

  In FIGS. 57 and 58, (a) is the time when the special figure and decorative symbol change start, (b) is the time when the button reception period starts, and (c) is the remaining time during the button reception period. This is the time when the notification mode changes, and (d) is the time when the reception of the button reception period ends.

In this example, as a first notification mode, the meter is displayed in a reference color during a notification period of T ₂ seconds (for example, 2 seconds). The meter is displayed partially overlapping the front of the changing decorative symbol. At the start of reception, the meter is full and gradually decreases with time. The rate of decrease of the meter matches the actual rate of decrease during the button acceptance period. That is, for example, when the button reception period is 6 seconds, the meter decreases to 2/3 when 2 seconds have elapsed since the start of reception.

When the notification period according to the first notification mode ends, the mode is switched to the second notification mode, and the meter is displayed in a special color during the subsequent notification period of T ₄ seconds (for example, 4 seconds). The rate of decrease of the meter is the same as in the first notification mode. Therefore, the decrease rate is constant over the entire button reception period. However, in the notification D mode, the remaining amount of the meter at the time immediately before the switching is continued, so that the remaining time notification starts from a state where the remaining amount of the meter is 2/3.

  When the button reception period ends, the meter display disappears, and the display returns to the state in which the changing decorative symbol is displayed on the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  If the player operates the chance button 136 while notifying the button reception period by the meter, the meter disappears and a notice as shown on the right side of FIG. 58 is displayed. In this case, the letters “It ’s super hot!” Suggesting that the determination result is a big hit. By giving a notice that “It ’s super hot !!”, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the big hit.

  In detail, in the first embodiment, when an operation of the chance button 136 by the player is accepted, any one of “...”, “Super hot?”, Or “Super hot !!” is displayed. Is set to be. For example, when the mode of notification B → D is selected, the case classification based on the random number value is further divided. For example, when the random number value is 20 to 24, “... In the case of 34, “Gekiatsu ??” is displayed, and in the case where the random number value is 35 to 49, “Gekiatsu !!” is displayed. Note that the same setting is performed when a notification mode other than the notification B → D is selected.

  According to such a notification mode of the first embodiment, the player can grasp the remaining time of the button reception period, and may or may not press the chance button 136 at a desired timing. Is possible. In particular, when the notification mode is changed halfway with the passage of time (for example, in the case of the notification mode in which the random number is won at 5 to 99 for 15R big hit, the notification is won at the random number of 50 to 99 at the time of loss. As for the timing of pressing the chance button 136, “Press immediately after the reception becomes valid”, “Press when the notification mode changes”, “Press at any timing of the player”, “Press There is an advantage that the range of choices such as “No” is widened and the game becomes diverse. In other words, since the execution of the notice depends on the player's operation of the chance button 136, the range of the game is particularly widened in this respect, and the interest of the game may be further enhanced.

  In addition, it is possible to increase the interest of the game by amplifying the player's sense of expectation for the big hit by switching the notification mode. Further, there are cases where it is possible to reduce the operation of the useless chance button 136 by the player and increase the durability of the chance button 136. Further, if the meter color is changed before and after the notification mode is changed, the range of effects is widened, and an effect of prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 may be expected.

Also, as shown in FIG. 56, since the probability of winning each notification mode is set differently in the case where the result of the determination of success / failure is different from that in the case of the big hit, the expectation given to the player in the case of the big win On the other hand, the probability that the feeling is increased is increased, while the probability that the feeling of expectation given to the player is decreased in the case of a loss is increased, and a difference is produced between the two. In this respect, the interest of the game can be further enhanced.
<Example 2 of notification mode of remaining time>

  Next, Example 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. Similarly to the first embodiment, the second embodiment is similar to the first embodiment, in the notice table shown in FIG. 56, when the result of the determination is 15R big hit (special figure B) and the variation time is 45000 ms (per super reach A), The case where the notification mode that switches from “1 notification mode)” to “notification D (second notification mode)” is won will be described as an example. However, in the second embodiment, the notifications when the buttons are pressed are displayed separately in the notification period (first notification period) according to the first notification mode and the notification period (second notification period) according to the second notification mode. This is different from the first embodiment in that it is set to.

  In FIGS. 59 and 60, (a) is a decorative symbol variation start time, (b) is a button reception period reception start time, and (c) is a notification mode of the button reception period remaining time. (D) is the reception end point of the button reception period.

In this example, as a first notification mode, the meter is displayed in a reference color (for example, blue) during a notification period of T ₂ seconds (for example, 2 seconds). The meter is displayed partially overlapping the front of the changing decorative symbol. At the start of reception, the meter is full and gradually decreases with time. The decrease rate of the meter is set to coincide with the actual decrease rate during the button reception period. That is, for example, when the button reception period is 6 seconds, the meter decreases to 2/3 when 2 seconds have elapsed since the start of reception. When the chance button 136 is operated during the first notification period, a notice (first notice) “...” is displayed. Thereafter, the notice continues until the end of the button acceptance period, and the notice disappears at the end of acceptance.

If the chance button 136 is not operated during the first notification period, the second notification mode is switched when the first notification period ends, and the meter is turned on during the subsequent notification period of T ₄ seconds (for example, 4 seconds). Display in a special color (for example, red). The speed at which the meter decreases is the same as in the first notification mode. When the chance button 136 is operated during the second notification period, a notice “second notice” is displayed. Thereafter, the notice continues until the button reception period ends, and the notice display disappears at the end.

  If the chance button 136 is not operated even during the second notification period, the meter display continues until the button reception period ends, and the meter display disappears when the button reception period ends, and the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The display returns to the state in which all the decorative symbols that are changing are displayed. That is, if the chance button 136 is not operated over the first and second notification periods, the advance notice is not performed.

  It should be noted that the first notice of “...” And the second notice of “Gekiatsu !!!!” are the aforementioned notice lottery based on the determination result and the variation time obtained from the main control unit 300. It is set by processing. The first notice gives the player low expectations, while the second notice gives the player high expectations.

  In detail, in the second embodiment, in the same manner as in the first embodiment, when an operation of the chance button 136 by the player is accepted, “...”, “Super hot?”, “Super hot!” "Is set to be displayed. For example, when the mode of notification B → D is selected, the case classification by the random number values 20 to 49 is further finely divided. For example, when the random number value is 20 to 24, “...” is displayed when an operation is received at the time of notification B, while “Super hot !!” is displayed when the operation is received at the time of notification D. Is set to When the random number is 25 to 34, “Gekiatsu ??” is displayed when an operation is accepted at the time of notification B, while “Gekiatsu!” Is displayed when the operation is accepted at the time of notification D. Has been. When the random number value is 35 to 49, it is set so that “super hot !!” is displayed when an operation is accepted for both the notification B and the notification D. Note that the same setting is made when another notification mode is selected.

  In the second embodiment, the meter is displayed in the reference color in the first notification period, and the set notification has a lower or equivalent expectation than the notification in the second notification period. On the other hand, in the second notification period, the meter is displayed in a special color, and the set notice has a higher or equivalent expectation than the notice in the first notice period. As the display color of the meter, the special color has a greater impact on the player than the reference color. That is, in each notification period, the expectation suggested by the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period is associated with the expectation suggested by the notice. Thereby, the expectation given to the player can be adjusted by a combination of the notification mode and the notice, and there is an advantage that the interest of the game can be further enhanced.

Further, the player may be able to grasp the contents of the notice without operating the chance button 136 by understanding that the remaining time notification mode corresponds to the contents of the notice. That is, the player who is making a big hit may not be able to press the chance button 136 because he / she is conscious of paying out the game ball (moving the game ball to the box). Further, there may be a disadvantage such as spilling a ball paid out when the chance button 136 is operated. However, if the notification mode of the remaining time also functions as a notice that suggests the result of the success / failure determination and the contents of the notice can be inferred without pressing the chance button 136, the player can pay out the game ball. You may be able to concentrate and increase your expectations for the next game.
<Example 3 of notification mode of remaining time>

  Next, Example 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. Example 3 is an example of a notification mode in which the meter is temporarily stopped. In the table shown in FIG. 56, the determination result is 15R big hit (special figure B) and the fluctuation time is 45000 ms (per super reach A). An explanation will be given by taking as an example a case where the notification mode that switches from “notification A (first notification mode)” to “notification E (second notification mode)” is won. The button reception period is set to a predetermined number of seconds (here, 6 seconds). 61 and 62, (a) is the reception start time of the button reception period, (b) is the time when the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period is changed, and (g) is the button reception period. This is the end of acceptance.

  In the notification A mode, the notification period is 1 second, a full-fill meter is displayed in a reference color (for example, blue), and the button reception period (apparent reception period) for notifying the player is the actual button reception period. Half of this (here 3 seconds). Here, by making the rate of decrease of the meter twice the rate of decrease in the actual button reception period, it is possible to make the player have the illusion that it is shorter than the normal button reception period. As a premise of this, in normal times, the amount of decrease (decrease rate) per unit time of the meter that is initially filled up is set to match the decrease rate of the actual button reception period, and the game is repeated. It is preferable that the player can recognize that the button reception period is normally set to a fixed length (here, 6 seconds). According to BGM, the player may be able to recognize sensuously that the button reception period is normally about 6 seconds. If there is such a precondition, even if the actual button acceptance period is set to 6 seconds, it is normal to reduce the full meter by 1/6 per second, for example 1 second. If it is decreased by 1/3, the player can be given the illusion that the current button reception period is 3 seconds. Further, if the time is decreased by 1/5 per second, the player can be given an illusion that the current button reception period is 5 seconds.

  In the mode of the notification E, the notification period is 5 seconds, a meter with an arbitrary remaining amount is displayed in a reference color (for example, blue), and the meter is temporarily stopped for a predetermined time (here, 3 seconds) immediately after the notification is started. After that, in order to match the bottom of the book, the decrease speed of the meter is faster than the normal button reception period (speed that decreases by 1/6 per second) (here, speed that decreases by 1/3 per second) Decrease and report remaining time.

  That is, first, when the notification starts in the first notification mode, a full tank meter is displayed in the reference color. Next, during the first notification period, the meter is decreased by 1/3 in 1 second.

  When the first notification period ends, the second notification mode is switched. In the second notification mode, the reduction of the meter for the first 3 seconds is stopped. Therefore, the meter remains in the state of 2/3 remaining until 4 seconds elapse from the reception start time of the button reception period. Next, when 4 seconds elapse, the meter starts decreasing again, and decreases by 1/3 per second. Accordingly, the remaining amount of the meter is reduced to 1/3 when 5 seconds have elapsed, and the remaining amount of the meter becomes 0 when 6 seconds have elapsed, that is, at the end of the button reception period. In the third embodiment, in order to make up for the temporary stoppage of the meter, the decrease rate of the meter is made faster than the decrease rate of the normal button reception period, particularly in the second notification period.

  Thus, in the third embodiment, the actual remaining time length of the button reception period and the remaining time length suggested by the meter are set differently. Accordingly, by switching from the first notification mode to the second notification mode, the decrease in the meter is temporarily stopped, and the player can be illusioned that the remaining time has increased, thereby amplifying the expectation and being surprised. There are cases where there is an effect that the interest of the game can be enhanced by giving.

In addition, even if the remaining time of the button reception period different from the actual one is notified in either one of the first and second notification modes, the book bottom can be adjusted in the other notification mode, so the effects related to various notices Can be done. In the third embodiment, when the chance button 136 is operated during the button reception period, for example, it is preferable that a notice similar to that in the first embodiment is given.
<Example 4 of notification mode of remaining time>

  Next, Example 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64. Similarly to the first and second embodiments, in the fourth embodiment, in the notification mode determination table for notice shown in FIG. 56, the determination result is 15R big hit (special figure B) and the fluctuation time is 45000 ms (per super reach A). An explanation will be given by taking as an example a case where a notification mode switching from “notification B (first notification mode)” to “notification D (second notification mode)” is won. However, the contents of the notifications A to F are different from those of the first and second embodiments, and the fourth embodiment is an example in which the remaining amount of the meter increases when the notification mode is switched. The button reception period is set to a predetermined number of seconds (here, 6 seconds). 63 and 64, (a) is the reception start time of the button reception period, (c) is the time when the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period is changed, and (g) is the button reception period. This is the end of acceptance.

  In the notification B mode of the fourth embodiment, the notification period is 2 seconds, the full tank meter is displayed in a reference color (for example, blue) at the time of notification start, and the button reception period for notification to the player (apparent reception) Period) is half of the actual button reception period (here, 3 seconds). Here, as in the third embodiment, by making the rate of decrease of the meter double the rate of decrease of the actual button reception period, the player is given the illusion that the button reception period is shorter than the actual button reception period. It is like that.

  In the notification D mode, the notification period is 4 seconds, and when the notification starts, a full tank meter is displayed in a reference color (for example, blue), and the player receives the illusion that the meter has recovered after returning to the original button reception period. Let Thereafter, the rate of decrease of the meter is set slower than the rate of decrease in the mode of notification B, and the remaining time is notified.

  That is, first, when the notification starts in the first notification mode, a full tank meter is displayed in the reference color. Next, during the notification period of the first notification mode, the meter is decreased by 1/3 per second. This allows the player to recognize that the current button reception period is 3 seconds. When the first notification period ends, the mode is switched to the second notification mode. At this time, return the meter to full. Then, the full meter is decreased by 1/4 per second. This allows the player to recognize that the remaining time of the button reception period after switching to the second notification mode has increased to 4 seconds. The remaining amount of the meter becomes 0 at the end of the reception of the button reception period.

  According to the notification in the notification mode of the fourth embodiment, the remaining amount of the meter increases at the time of switching from the first notification mode to the second notification mode, and the decrease rate of the meter in the second notification mode is Since it is slower than the rate of decrease in the first notification mode, it is possible to make the player have the illusion that the remaining time of the button reception period has increased, to amplify the expectation, and to give a surprise and enhance the interest of the game There is an effect that can be.

  In addition, since the rate of decrease in the button reception period is different between the first notification mode and the second notification mode, even if the notification of the button reception period different from the actual is performed in either one of the first and second notification modes. In the other notification mode, the bottom of the book can be adjusted and various notices can be made.

In the above example, the meter display is returned to full when the notification mode is switched. However, if the remaining amount of the meter immediately after switching is greater than the remaining amount of the meter immediately before switching, The remaining amount of the meter (in other words, the initial amount of the meter in the second notification mode) is not limited to a full tank. Further, in the fourth embodiment, when the chance button 136 is operated during the button reception period, for example, it is preferable that a notice similar to that in the first embodiment is given.
<Example 5 of notification mode of remaining time>

  Next, Example 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66. FIG. Similarly to the first, second and fourth embodiments, this embodiment 5 also has a determination result of 15R big hit (special figure B) and a fluctuation time of 45000 ms (per super reach A) in the notification mode determination table shown in FIG. An explanation will be given by taking as an example a case where a notification mode switching from “notification B (first notification mode)” to “notification D (second notification mode)” is won. However, the contents of the notifications A to F are different from those of the above-described embodiment, and the fifth embodiment is an example in which the remaining amount of the meter is increased when the notification mode is switched and the color is changed and displayed. is there. The button reception period is set to a predetermined number of seconds (here, 6 seconds).

  65 and 66, (a) is the reception start time of the button reception period, (c) is the time when the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period is changed, and (g) is the button reception period. This is the end of acceptance.

  The color of the meter is associated with the sense of expectation for the big hit, and the expectation is low for the reference color (for example, blue), and the expectation is high for the special color (for example, red). This is the same as in the second embodiment.

  In the notification B mode of the fifth embodiment, while the notification period is set to 2 seconds, a fully-filled meter is displayed in the reference color at the start of notification, and then the game is performed while gradually reducing the remaining amount of the meter. It is set so as to correctly inform the user of the remaining time of the actual button reception period. Here, by making the rate of decrease of the meter equal to the rate of decrease in the actual button reception period (that is, the rate at which the meter decreases by 1/6 per second), the player can correctly set the actual button reception period. It is supposed to be recognized.

  In the notification D mode, the notification period is set to 4 seconds, the full meter is displayed in a special color at the start of the notification, and then the actual button is displayed to the player while gradually reducing the remaining amount of the meter. It is set so that the remaining time of the reception period is notified correctly. In this case, the remaining time is reported at the same rate as the actual button reception period (that is, the rate at which the meter decreases by 1/4 per second).

  That is, first, when the notification starts in the first notification mode, a full meter is displayed in the reference color. Next, during the notification period of the first notification mode, the meter is reduced by 1/6 per second. When the notification period of the first notification mode ends, the mode is switched to the second notification mode. At this time, the meter is returned to the full state and the color of the meter is changed from the reference color to the special color. Then, the full meter is decreased by 1/4 per second. Accordingly, the remaining amount of the meter becomes 0 at the end of the reception of the button reception period.

  Even with the notification as in the fifth embodiment, the remaining amount of the meter increases when switching from the first notification mode to the second notification mode, so that the player has an illusion that the remaining time of the button reception period has increased. It is possible to amplify a sense of expectation and to give a surprise and enhance the interest of the game.

  In addition, since the rate of decrease in the button reception period is different between the first notification mode and the second notification mode, even if the notification of the button reception period different from the actual is performed in either one of the first and second notification modes. Since the other information mode can be adjusted to the bottom of the book, it is possible to make various notices.

  Further, the meter color is changed from the reference color to the special color, so that the expectation for the big hit is increased.

In the above-described example, the meter display is returned to full when the notification mode is switched. However, as in the fourth embodiment, the remaining amount of the meter immediately after the switching is greater than the remaining amount of the meter immediately before the switching. If so, the remaining amount of the meter immediately after switching (in other words, the initial amount of the meter in the second notification mode) is not limited to full. In the fifth embodiment, when the chance button 136 is operated during the button reception period, for example, it is preferable that the same notice as in the second embodiment is given.
<Embodiment 6 of notification mode of remaining time>

  Next, Example 6 will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. In the notification mode determination table shown in FIG. 56 as well, this example 6 is “notification B (first notification mode)” when the determination result is 15R big hit (special figure B) and the fluctuation time is 45000 ms (per super reach A). An example in which a notification mode that switches to “notification D (second notification mode)” is won will be described as an example. The sixth embodiment is an example in which the remaining amount of the meter increases when the notification mode is switched, and the operation condition of the chance button 136 for displaying the notice is displayed in the first notification period and the second notification period. Are set differently. In addition, although the content of each alerting | reporting AF is preferable if it is set similarly to the thing of Example 4, it does not restrict to this in particular.

  In FIGS. 67 and 68, (a) is the time when the special figure and decorative symbols start to change, (b) is the time when the button reception period starts, and (c) is the remaining time during the button reception period. This is the time when the notification mode changes, and (d) is the time when the reception of the button reception period ends.

Aspects of the notification B of Example 6, with the notification period is set to T _B seconds (e.g. 2 seconds), the full meter by the broadcast start time is displayed in the reference color (e.g. blue), then meter It is set so that the remaining amount of the actual button reception period is properly notified to the player while gradually decreasing the remaining amount. Here, by making the decrease rate of the meter equal to the decrease rate of the actual button reception period, the player can correctly recognize the actual button reception period.

Aspects of the notification D, together with the notification period is set to T _D s (e.g. 4 seconds), the full meter by the broadcast start time is displayed in the reference color, then, while gradually decreasing the remaining amount of the meter The player is set to correctly notify the remaining time of the actual button reception period. Here, the remaining time is reported at the same speed as the actual remaining time.

First, a full meter is displayed in a reference color at the start of notification in the first notification mode. Next, during the notification period of the first notification mode, the meter is decreased by [1 / (T _B + T _D )] by a predetermined amount per second. When the notification period of the first notification mode ends, the mode is switched to the second notification mode. At this time, return the meter to full. Thereafter, the full meter is decreased by a predetermined amount (by 1 / T _D ) per second, and the remaining amount of the meter is set to 0 at the end of the reception of the button reception period.

  In the first notification period, the operation condition of the chance button 136 is a single operation. If the chance button 136 is not operated once during the first notification period, the second notification mode is switched when the first notification period ends, and the meter is displayed in the reference color during the second notification period. At the same time, the operation condition of the chance button 136 is switched to continuous hitting (a plurality of continuous operations). The decreasing rate of the meter is faster than that in the first notification mode. During the second notification mode, the contents of the effect screen are selected according to the number of operations of the chance button 136 and the random value. When the operation screen of the chance button 136 is received and the effect screen is displayed, the effect screen is continuously displayed until the button reception period ends. Then, at the end of the button reception period, the screen returns to the state in which the changing decorative symbol is displayed on all the screens of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The selection of the effect screen during the second notification period will be described in detail. For example, in the notification mode determination table shown in FIG. 56, if the random number is 20 to 49 and the notification B → D mode is won, When the numerical value is 20 to 39, when the chance button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times or more (for example, 10 times or more), an effect screen “success!” Is displayed, while the chance button 136 is displayed once or more. If the operation is performed less than a predetermined number of times, an effect screen “Sorry ...” is displayed. When the random number is 40 to 49, if the chance button 136 is operated one or more times, an effect screen “Sorry ...” is displayed.

  If the chance button 136 is not operated even during the second notification period, the meter display continues until the button reception period ends, and the meter display disappears when the button reception period ends, and the decorative symbol display device The screen returns to the state in which the decorative pattern being changed is displayed on all the screens 208.

  The notification as in the sixth embodiment also has the effect of giving the player the illusion that the button reception period has increased for a moment. In addition, since the operation condition of the chance button 136 changes with time, there is an advantage that the range of games is widened.

In addition, since the operation conditions of the chance button 136 differ with the passage of time, the range of games can be expanded and the interest of the game can be enhanced.
<Seventh Embodiment of Notification Mode of Remaining Time>

  Next, Example 7 will be described with reference to FIGS. The seventh embodiment is an example in which the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period is determined in combination with other notices executed before and after the button reception period.

  In the seventh embodiment, the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period and the content of the notice executed before and after the button reception period are a table stored in advance in the ROM 406 and a random number value obtained by a predetermined random number lottery. To be determined.

  For example, when the determination result is a big hit and the fluctuation time of FIG. 1 is the fluctuation time for Super Reach A, a decorative pattern is stored using a table stored in the ROM 406 in advance as shown in FIG. The outline (basic matter) of the contents of the effect relating to the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period displayed on the display device 208 and the advance notice before and after the button reception period is determined. For example, when the random number value 27 is acquired by a predetermined random number lottery in the table, the notice C corresponding to the random number selection range “20 to 49” is selected. The notice C includes information for changing the notification mode of the button reception period from the notification B mode as the first notification mode to the notification D mode as the second notification mode. In the table, different information is set for each random number selection range. The same applies to other tables.

  Next, lottery is performed in detail for each random number selection range in the above table. For example, based on a table stored in the ROM 406 in advance as shown in FIG. 71 (b) and random number values acquired in a predetermined random number lottery. Thus, the detailed contents of the notice (hereinafter also referred to as “preceding notice”) to be performed before the button reception period are determined. For example, when the random number 22 included in the random number selection range “10 to 54” in the table is acquired, an effect screen with a balloon “?” On the character image of the princess is selected. In the table, different information is set for each random number selection range.

  Next, a lottery is performed in detail for each random number selection range in the above table. For example, based on a table stored in advance in the ROM 406 as shown in FIG. 71 (c) and a random number value obtained by a predetermined random number lottery. Then, the detailed contents of the first notification mode are determined. For example, when the random number value 73 included in the random number selection range “0 to 89” in the table is acquired, a mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color) is selected as the mode of the notification B. In the table, different information is set for each random number selection range. Further, the table is set so that the mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color) is more easily selected than the mode in which the meter is displayed in red (special color).

  Next, a lottery is performed in more detail for each random number selection range in the above table. For example, based on a table stored in advance in the ROM 406 as shown in FIG. 71 (d) and a random number value obtained by a predetermined random number lottery. Thus, the detailed content of the second notification mode is determined. For example, when the random number value 61 included in the random number selection range “20 to 99” in the table is acquired, a mode in which the meter is displayed in red (special color) is selected as the mode of the notification D. In the table, different information is set for each random number selection range. Further, the table is set so that the mode in which the meter is displayed in red (special color) is more easily selected than the mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color).

  Next, a lottery is performed in more detail for each random number selection range in the above table. For example, based on a table stored in the ROM 406 in advance as shown in FIG. 71 (e) and a random number value obtained by a predetermined random number lottery. Thus, the detailed contents of the notice (hereinafter also referred to as “follow-up notice”) to be performed after the button reception period are determined. For example, when a random number value 35 included in the random number selection range “10 to 99” in the table is acquired, an effect screen that displays “Gekiatsu !!” as the reach character display notice after the button reception period is selected. Is done. In the table, different information is set for each random number selection range. In addition, the table is set so that the effect screen displayed as “Gekiatsu !!” is more easily selected than the effect screen displayed as “reach”.

  More specifically, for example, if the determination result is a big hit, the fluctuation time in FIG. 1 is the fluctuation time for Super Reach A, and the notice C is won in the table shown in FIG. A series of effects as shown in 69 and FIG. 70 are performed.

In the example shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, the period of t ₂ ~t ₄ is configured as a button acceptance period. In the button reception period, the remaining time of the button reception period is notified in the same manner as in the first embodiment.

First, the advance notice is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the period from t ₁ to t ₂ before the button reception period. The content of the advance notice is such that an effect screen with a balloon “?” On the character image of the princess is displayed as a notice that the expectation to the big hit is low. Next, the button acceptance period begins. Here, as notification manner of the remaining time of the button acceptance period it has won notification manner of switching from the first notification manner at the time of t ₃ to the second notification manner. And in a 1st alerting | reporting aspect, the meter of a full tank is displayed in blue (reference | standard color) with a low expectation to jackpot at the time of alerting | reporting, and a meter is gradually reduced as time passes. In the second notification mode that follows, the meter is displayed in red (special color) with a high expectation for a big hit, and the meter is gradually reduced as time passes.

  When the button acceptance period ends, the meter display disappears and the decorative symbol is in a reach state, and at this time, a subsequent notice is displayed. Here, the content of the subsequent notice is displayed as “Gekiatsu !!” as a notice with high expectation for the big hit.

  In the first notification mode, since the meter is displayed in a reference color of blue, the expectation of jackpot is low. On the other hand, in the second notification mode, since the meter is displayed in a special color of red, the expectation of big hit is high. That is, in this example, the first notification mode is easily set to a low-expectation notification mode and the second notification mode is a sense of expectation in association with the jackpot expectation feeling before and after the button reception period. It is easy to set to a high notification mode.

  Note that at least the following five patterns are conceivable when the notification mode during the button reception period is associated with the notice before and after the button reception period.

  In the first pattern, setting is made so that the notice before the button reception period (expectation; low) → during the button reception period (expectation; low → low) → the notice after the button reception period (expectation; low) . In the second pattern, it is set so that the notice before the button reception period (expectation; low) → during the button reception period (expectation; low → low) → the notification after the button reception period (expectation; high) . In the third pattern, setting is made so that the notice before the button reception period (expectation; low) → during the button reception period (expectation; low → high) → the notice after the button reception period (expectation; high) .

  In the fourth pattern, it is set so that the notice before button reception period (expectation; high) → during button reception period (expectation; high → high) → notice after button reception period (expectation; low) . In the fifth pattern, it is set so that the notice before the button reception period (expectation; high) → during the button reception period (expectation; low → low) → the notice after the button reception period (expectation; high) .

  According to the first pattern, the player's expectation for jackpot may be lowered, and the difference from when the expectation for jackpot is high may be made clearer. In addition, when a big hit occurs when the expectation is low, the player may be able to amplify the joy of the player. According to the second and third patterns, the player's sense of expectation for jackpot may be gradually increased. According to the fourth pattern, there is a case where the player's feeling of expectation for the big hit is not raised too much, and the disappointment when the big hit is not made can be reduced. According to the fifth pattern, since the player's expectation for jackpot is lowered and then increased, the player's expectation for jackpot may be raised and lowered, and eventually the expectation can be further increased. is there.

In the example shown in FIGS. 69 and 70 of the seventh embodiment, the notice before and after the button reception period is performed using the decorative symbol display device 208. However, for example, the effect movable body 224 or an arbitrary lamp is used. It is good also as what is performed by other production | presentation apparatuses. In this case, however, the expectation suggested by the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period and the expectation suggested by the notice are set in association with each other.
<Eighth embodiment of notification mode of remaining time>

  Next, Example 8 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the preconditions of Example 8 will be described. When the determination result is a 15R special big hit (probability big hit), the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed by the decorative symbol display device 208 with a symbol combination indicating 15R big hit (normal big hit). After that, there is a case where a re-lottery effect is made to change to a combination of decorative symbols indicating a 15R special jackpot (however, since it is determined internally whether it is probabilistic or non-probable, actually re-drawing Not.) At this time, the period from when the decorative symbol starts to change until it stops is divided into, for example, three periods: (1) before the change starts to reach, (2) during reach, and (3) during redraw. It is possible to make a separate notice for each of these three periods. Further, in the re-lottery, as shown in FIG. 54, the fluctuation time is set to be longer for 5000 ms than the reach of each reach. This is because the winning variation time includes the time for performing the re-lottery regardless of the probability change or non-change probability.

  In Example 8, when notifying the remaining time of a button reception period in any two or more of each said period (1)-(3), the alerting | reporting aspect in each period (1)-(3) or At least two or more expectations given to the player by the notice are related. Further, in the eighth embodiment, the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period and the content of the notice executed before and after the button reception period are a random number value obtained by a table stored in advance in the ROM 406 and a predetermined random number lottery. It is determined based on.

  For example, when the determination result is a big hit and the fluctuation time of FIG. 1 is a fluctuation time for Super Reach A (for example, 45000 ms), a table stored in the ROM 406 in advance as shown in FIG. Thus, the outline (basic matters) of the contents of the effects relating to the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the notices performed before and after the button reception period are determined. For example, when the random number value 27 is acquired by a predetermined random number lottery in the table, the notice C corresponding to the random number selection range “20 to 49” is selected. The notice C includes information for changing the notification mode of the button reception period from the notification a mode as the first notification mode to the notification b mode as the second notification mode before reaching the period (1). Information to change from the notification c mode as the first notification mode to the notification d mode as the second notification mode during the reach of (2), as the first notification mode during the re-lottery of the period (3) The information to be changed from the notification e mode to the notification f mode as the second notification mode is included. In the table, different information is set for each random number selection range. Although not shown in particular, a table corresponding to each case such as a table in the case where the result of the determination is a big hit and the fluctuation time in FIG. Is remembered.

  Next, lottery is performed in more detail for each random number selection range in the above table. For example, based on a table stored in advance in the ROM 406 as shown in FIG. 75B and a random number value obtained by a predetermined random number lottery. Thus, the detailed contents of the first notification mode before reach in period (1) are determined. For example, when the random number value 22 included in the random number selection range “0 to 49” in the table is acquired, a mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color) is selected as the mode of the notification a. In the table, different information is set for each random number selection range. In the table, the probability that the mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color) is selected and the probability that the mode in which the meter is displayed in red (special color) are selected are set to be the same.

  Next, the lottery is performed in more detail for each random number selection range in the above table. For example, based on the table stored in the ROM 406 in advance as shown in FIG. 75C and the random number value acquired in the predetermined random number lottery. Then, the detailed content of the 2nd alerting | reporting aspect before reach | attainment of a period (1) is determined. For example, when the random number value 13 included in the random number selection range “10 to 39” in the table is acquired, a mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color) and the meter is increased by a predetermined amount as the mode of notification b. Selected. As an aspect of the notification b, the aspect that “the meter increases by a predetermined amount” is set so that the expectation given to the player is slightly higher than the aspect that “the meter does not increase”. In the table, different information is set for each random number selection range. Further, the table is set so that the mode in which the meter is displayed in red (special color) is more easily selected than the mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color).

  Next, a lottery is performed in more detail for each random number selection range in the above table. For example, based on a table stored in advance in the ROM 406 as shown in FIG. 75D and a random value obtained by a predetermined random number lottery. Thus, the detailed contents of the first notification mode during the reach of period (2) are determined. For example, when the random number value 61 included in the random number selection range “0 to 89” in the table is acquired, a mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color) is selected as the mode of the notification c. In the table, different information is set for each random number selection range. Further, the table is set so that the mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color) is more easily selected than the mode in which the meter is displayed in red (special color).

  Next, a lottery is performed in more detail for each random number selection range in the above table. For example, based on a table stored in the ROM 406 in advance as shown in FIG. 75 (e) and a random number value obtained by a predetermined random number lottery. Thus, the detailed contents of the second notification mode during the reach of period (2) are determined. For example, when the random number value 35 included in the random number selection range “30 to 99” in the table is acquired, a mode in which the meter is displayed in red (special color) is selected as the mode of the notification d. In the table, different information is set for each random number selection range. Further, the table is set so that the mode in which the meter is displayed in red (special color) is more easily selected than the mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color).

  Next, a lottery is performed in more detail for each random number selection range in the above table. For example, based on a table stored in the ROM 406 in advance as shown in FIG. 75 (f) and a random number value obtained by a predetermined random number lottery. Thus, the detailed contents of the first notification mode during the re-lottery of period (3) are determined. For example, when the random number value 35 included in the random number selection range “20 to 99” in the table is acquired, a mode in which the meter is displayed in red (special color) is selected as the mode of the notification e. In the table, different information is set for each random number selection range. Further, the table is set so that the mode in which the meter is displayed in red (special color) is more easily selected than the mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color).

  Next, a lottery is performed in more detail for each random number selection range in the above table. For example, based on a table stored in advance in the ROM 406 as shown in FIG. 75 (g) and a random number value obtained by a predetermined random number lottery. Thus, the detailed contents of the second notification mode during the re-lottery of period (3) are determined. For example, when the random number value 35 included in the random number selection range “0 to 49” is acquired in the above table, a mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color) is selected as the mode of the notification f. On the other hand, for example, when the random value 70 included in the random number selection range “50 to 99” in the table is acquired, a mode in which the meter is displayed in red (special color) is selected as the mode of the notification f. In the table, different information is set for each random number selection range. In the table, the probability that the mode in which the meter is displayed in blue (reference color) is selected and the probability that the mode in which the meter is displayed in red (special color) are selected are set to be the same.

  More specifically, for example, if the determination result is a big hit, the fluctuation time in FIG. 1 is the fluctuation time for Super Reach A, and the notice C is won in the table shown in FIG. A series of effects as shown in 72 and FIG. 73 are performed.

In the example shown in FIGS. 72 and 73, the period before 0 to t ₃ seconds reach _(1), t 3 ~t ₇ seconds duration in reach _{(2), t} 7 _{~t 11} seconds redrawing The middle period (3), t ₁₁ seconds and later is set as the period during the big hit round. In addition, the button reception period is notified in all periods, and the expectation feelings suggested are set in association with each other. Basically, one game is a game from the start of the change until the change is stopped and the symbol is fixed. However, if the game is a big hit, one game is taken until the big hit round ends.

  First, in the first button reception period before the decorative symbol stops, the meter is displayed in blue (reference color) in the first notification mode, and the meter color continues to be blue (reference color in the second notification mode). ) And the remaining amount of the meter is increasing. That is, although the expectation level has increased from a low level to a low level, the expectation of the big hit given to the player is still low. If the chance button 136 is operated during this button reception period, for example, a notice “...” Shown in FIG.

In addition, when the chance button 136 is operated during the first notification period of t _{0 to} t ₁ seconds and when the chance button 136 is operated during the second notification period of t _{1 to} t ₂ seconds. As described in the second embodiment, the content of the notice may be different. For example, when the chance button 136 is operated during the first notification period of t _{0 to} t ₁ second, “...” is displayed, and the chance is displayed during the second notification period of t _{1 to} t ₂ seconds. When the button 136 is operated, “Super hot!” May be displayed.

During the second button reception period during reach, when t ₅ seconds elapses, the first notification mode changes to the second notification mode, and the meter color changes from blue to red (special color). As a result, the expectation for the big hit shifts from a slightly low state to a high state. When the determination result is 15R special big hit (probable big hit) or 15R big hit (ordinary big hit), a combination of decorative patterns for big hits determined in advance at time t ₇ seconds (for example, “decoration 2-decoration” 2-decoration 2 "combination), and in other cases, it stops at a predetermined combination of decorative symbols for removal (for example, the combination of" decoration 2-decoration 1-decoration 2 "). When the determination result is 15R special jackpot or 15R jackpot, a re-lottery is performed, and the third button reception period starts.

  Note that, during the second button reception period, for example, as in the first embodiment, the content of the notice that is given when the chance button 136 is operated during the first notification period and the chance button during the second notification period. The content of the notice to be performed when 136 is operated may be set to be the same. Alternatively, similar to the second embodiment, different contents may be set. Further, the 15R special jackpot and the 15R jackpot are the determination results of whether or not the profit amount given to the player is a relatively large profit amount.

In the third button reception period, when the time t ₉ seconds elapses, the first notification mode is switched to the second notification mode. At this time, when the mode in which the meter is displayed in blue is selected as the second notification mode in the table shown in FIG. 75 (g), the display shown on the right side of FIG. Is selected, the display shown on the left side of FIG. 73 (k) is performed.

  Thereafter, regardless of which mode is selected, if the chance button 136 is not operated during the button reception period, the effect image shown in (l) of FIG. 72 is displayed, and after that, the 15R special jackpot is won. If it is, a predetermined symbol combination (for example, a combination of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”) in which the decorative symbol indicates 15R special jackpot, or a predetermined symbol combination (for example, “decoration 2” -Stop at the combination of “decoration 2—decoration 2”. On the other hand, if the 15R jackpot is won, the game stops with a predetermined symbol combination (for example, a combination of “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”) in which the decoration symbol represents 15R jackpot. Even if the 15R special jackpot is won, the decorative symbol may not stop at the symbol combination indicating the 15R special jackpot at this time, but may stop at the symbol combination indicating the 15R jackpot. In that case, a special change promotion effect is made during the big hit round or at the end of the big hit round, or the special figure change game enters the special change state of the special figure high-precision normal figure high-precision after the big hit round without performing the positive change promotion production. It is set to be.

In the period during redrawing (3), if the chances button 136 is operated during a first broadcasting period of t ₈ ~t ₉ seconds, redrawing in from the time of accepting the operation of chance buttons 136 Until the period (3) is completed, any combination of decorative symbols (for example, a combination of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” indicating 15R special jackpot if 15R special jackpot is won, or When the 15R big hit is won, a combination of “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” indicating the 15R big hit) is performed (see the left side of FIG. 74 (k)). On the other hand, when the chance button 136 is not operated, as described above, when t ₉ seconds elapses, the button reception period is switched from the first notification mode to the second notification mode (FIG. 74 ( k) See center or right side).

If the chance button 136 is not operated during the first notification period and the chance button 136 is operated during the second notification period of t _{9 to} t ₁₀ seconds, the operation from the time when the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted. Any combination of decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” indicating 15R special jackpot if 15R special jackpot is won, etc.) If the winning combination is 15R jackpot, a combination of “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2” indicating 15R jackpot, etc.) is performed to stop display.

  Since the time for performing the re-lottery is fixed at 5000 ms as described above, the time when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in an arbitrary combination is appropriately adjusted according to the timing of the operation of the chance button 136.

  In this way, when notifying the remaining time of a plurality of times in one game, it is possible to variously change the sense of expectation for the big hit given to the player. In particular, the expectation given to the player can be adjusted in detail by appropriately setting the notification mode of each period or the expectation based on the notice in association with each other.

  In other words, for example, when all of the notices are low expectations for the player, the player's expectation for the big hit (especially 15R special big hit) is lowered and the distinction from the case where the expectation is high is clarified. There are cases where it is possible. In addition, when a big hit (especially a 15R special big hit) is achieved with a low expectation, the player's joy may be further amplified.

In addition, when a notice changes from a low expectation to a high notice for a player, the player's expectation for a big hit (especially a 15R special big hit) may be gradually increased. In addition, if the player changes from a high-anticipation notice to a low-anticipation notice, the player's expectation for the big hit may not be raised too much, and the disappointment when the big hit is not possible may be reduced. . Further, if all the notices are highly anticipated for the player, the player's expectation for the big hit (especially the 15R special big hit) may be further increased.
<Others>

  It should be noted that the game table of the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is needless to say that various changes can be made without departing from the gist of the present invention.

  For example, the notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period may be a notification mode as shown in FIG. In this example (Embodiment 9), a full-filled meter is initially displayed only in a reference color (for example, blue). For example, when the button reception period is 6 seconds, the meter is decreased by 1/6 per second. Go.

  When one second has elapsed from the start of notification, a partial area of the meter is changed to a special color (for example, red). The position of the special area changed to the special color is also moved as the meter decreases with the passage of time.

  The player presses the chance button 136 at the timing when the base end portion (here, the left end portion) of the meter is the reference color [timing (b), (c), (d) and (f) in FIG. 76]. In such a case, a notice with a low expectation (for example, a notice "..." shown in FIG. 58) is displayed. On the other hand, when the player presses the chance button 136 at the timing when the base end of the meter is in a special color [timing (e) in FIG. 76], a notice with a high expectation (for example, as shown in FIG. 58). "Advance notice!" Is displayed. In this way, there are cases where the range of games can be expanded by setting the notification mode so that a highly anticipated notice cannot be seen unless the chance button 136 is pressed in a timely manner.

  The first mode of displaying a meter with only the reference color is referred to as a first notification mode, and the mode of displaying a meter having a special color special area is referred to as a second notification mode.

  In this example, as shown in (c-1) or (c-2) of FIG. 76, the size of the special area changed to the special color can be arbitrarily set. Furthermore, as shown in (c-3) of FIG. 76, the position of the special area at the time of changing to the special color can be reset to an arbitrary position. As a result, the timing at which the player presses the Chang button 136 can be changed.

  Moreover, Examples 1-9 of the notification mode of the above-mentioned remaining time can be combined appropriately. Further, for example, in the first to ninth embodiments of the notification mode of the remaining time described above, the level of expectation to the big hit given to the player is changed by changing the color of the meter. Thus, the level of expectation to the big hit may be changed by changing the blinking mode and displaying. Further, for example, in the first to ninth embodiments of the above-described remaining time notification mode, the notification is performed by accepting the operation of the chance button 136, but the operation of the operation means other than the chance button 136 is accepted. A notice may also be made. Moreover, you may provide the aspect which switches from the 1st alerting | reporting aspect to the 2nd alerting | reporting aspect, and also the 3rd alerting | reporting aspect as a notification aspect of the remaining time of a button reception period. That is, as a notification mode of the remaining time of the button reception period, at least a pattern in which the notification mode does not change with the passage of time and a pattern in which the notification mode is switched in two stages of the first to second notification modes are provided. What is necessary is just to exclude the structure further provided with the pattern which a notification aspect switches in three steps or more.

  Further, in the first to ninth embodiments of the notification mode of the remaining time described above, it is described that the meter is decreased by a predetermined amount per second. However, the unit time may be decreased by a predetermined amount per unit time. It is not limited to 1 second. Furthermore, in Examples 1 to 9 of the notification mode of the remaining time described above, the remaining time of the button reception period is expressed in the form of a rectangular meter. For example, the form in which the hands of the clock advance or the form in which the sand of the hourglass falls Of course, it may be expressed in other formats.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 77, the gaming table according to the present invention includes a plurality of reels 1002 which are provided with a plurality of types of symbols and are driven to rotate, and a start lever 1004 for instructing rotation of the reels. A stop button 1006 for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, lottery means (lottery prize internal lottery) for determining whether or not a plurality of types of internal winnings are successful, and lottery means The combination of symbols displayed by the reel stop control means (reel stop control processing) for stopping the stop of the rotation of the reel based on the lottery result and the reels stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means A determination means (winning determination process) for determining whether or not the symbol combination is predetermined corresponding to the winning combination, and when the symbol stop mode is a predetermined winning mode, In addition to payout control means (medal payout process 1008) for performing game medium payout processing for paying out game media corresponding to the award mode, the effect means 1010 for executing effects based on the lottery results of the lottery means is provided. The means detects a launch device 1014 that launches a ball into a predetermined game area 1012, a winning port 1016 configured to be able to enter a ball launched from the launch device, and a ball that has entered the winning port 1016 A means 1018, a payout means 1020 for paying out a ball when the detecting means 1018 detects a ball, a variable display device 1022 for variably displaying a predetermined symbol (identification information), and a position where the variable display device 1022 is shielded The variable display device 1 is provided with a possible shutter 1024 and a movable body 1026 that operates in a predetermined operation mode, and when a game ball enters the winning opening and wins. 22 is stopped displayed after varying the design, is also suitable in the slot machine 1000 "is a rendering device 1010, such as to produce a game.

That is, the gaming machine of the present invention has at least a result determination result (for example, the main control unit 300) for determining whether or not the game is correct when a predetermined condition for determining whether or not the condition is satisfied, and the result of the determination on whether the result is correct. In the case of a determination result (for example, big hit), the second advantage is higher than the first advantage from the first control state where the advantage for the player is the first advantage. Control state transition means (for example, the main control unit 300) that shifts the control state to the second control state, operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, the chance button 136), and the result of the success / failure determination Notice means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400 and the decorative symbol display device 208) for performing an effect including a notice, and the notice means enables the player to accept the operation of the operation means. The remaining time notifying means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400 and the decorative symbol display device 208) for notifying the remaining time of the reception period in a predetermined notification mode, and the operation by the player during the reception period Specific notice means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400 and the decorative symbol display device 208) for making a predetermined notice suggesting the result of the determination of success or failure when an operation of the means is accepted, The notification mode has a first notification mode and a second notification mode different from the first notification mode, and the remaining time notification means has a predetermined time and the remaining time is predetermined. The remaining time is notified in the first notification mode until the length is reduced, and the predetermined condition is not satisfied after the predetermined time has elapsed (for example, the notification shown in FIG. 56). In the mode determination table When the “notification F” is won), the first notification mode is continued and the remaining time is notified. On the other hand, when the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, in the notification mode determination table shown in FIG. “A → E” or “Notification B → D” or “Notification C ₁ → C ₂ ” is selected to notify the remaining time by switching from the first notification mode to the second notification mode. I just need it.

  In the above gaming machine, the first notification mode and the second notification mode are set according to the result of the determination of success or failure and function as a notification similar to the notification performed by the specific notification means. Is preferred.

  Further, in the above gaming machine, the remaining time notification means indicates the remaining time to be notified in each of the first notification mode and the second notification mode according to a result of the determination of success / failure ( For example, when the determination result is determined based on the notification mode determination table and the result of the determination is the specific determination result, the remaining time to be notified by each of the first notification mode and the second notification mode is determined. It is preferable to make a determination based on a specific table (for example, a jackpot table of the notification mode determination table) among the predetermined tables.

  In the above gaming machine, the operation means can accept at least one of a single operation and a plurality of consecutive operations by the player, and the specific notice means is the predetermined notice means. Until the predetermined time elapses, and a notice is given on the condition that the one-time operation is accepted, and after the predetermined time elapses, the notice is given on the condition that the plurality of consecutive operations are accepted. Preferably it is done.

  Further, in the above gaming machine, the remaining time notification means makes the remaining time notified by at least one of the first notification mode and the second notification mode different from the actual length of the remaining time. It is preferable.

  At this time, the remaining time notifying means sets the predetermined length as the first length, and when the remaining time to be notified in the first notification mode is reduced to the first length, When the condition is satisfied, the first notification mode is switched to the second notification mode, and the remaining time to be notified in the second notification mode is longer than the first length. It is preferable to increase it.

  Further, the remaining time notifying means notifies the remaining time by the remaining amount of the meter, and notifies the meter decreasing speed to be notified by the second notification mode by the first notification mode. It is preferable to make it faster than the decrease rate.

  Note that the jackpot referred to in the present invention means that the next special figure variation game is a special figure high-precision ordinary figure high-precision [for example, 15R special big hit (see special figure A in FIG. 49A), 2R big hit (sudden probability change; FIG. 49). (See special figure C in (a))], special figure high-precision normal figure low accuracy [eg 2R big hit (hidden probability change; see special figure E in FIG. 49 (a))], special figure low-precision normal figure high accuracy [eg 15R big hit (see special figure B in FIG. 49 (a)), 2R big hit (sudden time reduction; see special figure D in FIG. 49 (a))], and special figure low-precision normal figure low-precision [eg 2R big hit (sudden normal) ; Refer to the special figure F in FIG. 49 (a))].

In addition, the miss in the present invention is that the next special figure variation game is a special figure low probability normal figure low accuracy and does not apply to the above [for example, small hits (see special figures G and H in FIG. 49 (a)) and Misalignment (see special figures I and J in FIG. 49A)].
<Embodiment 3>

Hereinafter, a gaming machine (for example, a ball game machine such as the pachinko machine 100 or a spinning game machine such as a slot machine) according to the third embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. Note that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 78 to 144 are used only in the description of the third embodiment in principle, and even in the case where overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the description of the present embodiment is omitted. The reference numerals shown in FIGS. 78 to 144 are given priority.
<Overall configuration>

  First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 to which the present invention can be applied will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface (player side).

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. . The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. A store clerk at the store (amusement store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104 and is provided with a main body opening sensor 1041 for detecting that the main body 104 is opened.

  The front frame door 106 has a locking function and is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via a hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable. Is a door member having an opening 116. The store clerk of the amusement store can also open and close the front frame door 106, and a front frame door sensor 1061 for detecting that the front frame door 106 is opened is also provided. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A space in which the game area 124 is provided is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. In the description here, a light source that uses an LED is also referred to as a lamp.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with the ball storage tray is opened by pressing an opening lever 1081 that can be operated with the front frame door 106 opened. Further, a door sensor with ball storage tray 1082 for detecting that the door with ball storage tray 108 is opened is also provided. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player The ball launching handle 134 for launching into the game area 124, the effect button 136 for changing the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 80) by the player's operation, and the effect button 136, An effect button lamp 138 that causes the exit button 136 to emit light, a ball lending operation button 140 that gives a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the game store, and a return of the player's balance to the card unit A return operation button 142 for giving an instruction, and a ball rental display unit 144 for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit are provided. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a lower plate full tank detection sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is filled with game balls. Furthermore, a cross key 141 is also provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. . While the ball launching handle 134 is continuously being fired by the player, the launching device 110 sends the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every time a predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses. Fire towards.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104. 78, the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

  FIG. 79 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 78 viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is positioned below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The payout device 152 is detachable and is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when mounted at a predetermined position. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152. In other words, the payout device 152 is a kind of a ball feeding device that applies a driving force to a game ball and conveys the game ball.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined grant. Based on the establishment of the condition, the player is given (paid out) with an amount of game value (game ball) corresponding to the grant condition.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, the main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 (see FIG. 81) that performs the overall control processing of the game, and the processing information generated by the main control section 300 are displayed. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 81) that performs control processing related to the production, and the first sub-control unit 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control section 500 (see FIG. 81) that performs the control process related to the effects, and the payout control section 600 that performs the control process related to the game ball payout ( 81) and a payout board case 172 for storing a payout board 170 having an error release switch 168 for releasing an error by the operation of a game clerk, A launch board case 176 that houses a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control unit 630 (see FIG. 81) that performs control processing relating to the above, and a power management unit 660 (see FIG. 81) that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines In addition, a power supply board case 184 that houses a power supply board 182 that includes a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game shop clerk and a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when operated. , And a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit.

  FIG. 80 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200 shown in FIG. 80, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are provided, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. In the effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed substantially at the center, and a normal symbol display device 210, a special symbol display device 212, a normal symbol hold lamp 216, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided around the decorative symbol display device 208. Is arranged. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is an image display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In the pachinko machine 100, the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, in the pachinko machine 100, as will be described later, the fourth symbol of the usual figure and the fourth symbol of the special figure are displayed in the left corner of the effect display area 208d. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general-purpose display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general-purpose display. In the pachinko machine 100, the general-purpose display device 210 is composed of 7-segment LEDs. The special figure display device 212 is a display device for displaying a special figure. In the pachinko machine 100, the special figure display device 212 is configured by 7 segment LEDs. These general map display device 210 and special map display device 212 correspond to an example of a notification means.

  In addition, the display area (here, the size of 7 segments is equivalent) of the ordinary figure display device 210 and the special figure display device 212 (notification means) and the display area (here, display) of the decorative symbol display device 208 (symbol display means) The display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is larger. Further, in the pachinko machine 100, the general map display device 210 and the special figure display device 212 cannot display a moving image, whereas the decorative symbol display device 208 can display a moving image.

  The multi-purpose hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of predetermined first variable games (a general-purpose variable game to be described later in detail) that are held. In the pachinko machine 100, a predetermined number of general-purpose variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four).

  The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp (notification means) for performing notification indicating the current symbol control state. This high-probability lamp 222 is configured so as to give a notification indicating the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on until the start of the big hit game, and thereafter does not notify the current symbol control state. Yes. In the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state immediately before the power is turned off is restored.

  In addition, a general prize opening 226, two ordinary drawing start gates 251 and 253, an ordinary figure electric accessory 252, a special figure starting opening 230, and a variable winning opening 234 are arranged around the production device 206. doing.

  In the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 78, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detecting sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (general) 79), the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 79 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls as prize balls to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In the pachinko machine 100, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for a prize may be referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player may be referred to as a “lending ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”. Of the plurality of general winning ports 226, only one general winning port 226 is disposed below the usual start gate 251. That is, the general winning opening 226 is disposed between the normal start gate 251 and the variable winning opening 234 provided at the lower center of the game board. Hereinafter, the general winning award 226 will be referred to as a central general winning award 226 when distinguished from other general award winning holes 226. Further, when the general figure starting gate 251 provided at the lower center of the game board is distinguished from the other general figure starting gate 253, it is referred to as a central common figure starting gate 251. Unlike the ball that entered the general prize opening 226, the ball that has passed the central opening gate 251 is not discharged to the amusement island side, and the ball can enter the central general prize opening 226. It is. However, even if a game ball passes through the central ordinary start gate 251, no prize ball will be paid out. The central normal start gate 251 corresponds to an example of a first entry area, and the central general winning opening 226 below the gate corresponds to an example of a second entry area.

  Here, the game performance of the pachinko machine 100 provided with the game board 200 shown in FIG. 80 will be briefly described. This pachinko machine 100 is a gaming machine that does not enter a game ball into the variable prize opening 234 and earns a ball out, but earns a ball out by entering the game ball into an ordinary electric accessory 252. In a normal state (a special figure low-probability normal figure low-probability state to be described later), first, when a game ball enters the central general figure start gate 251, aiming at the central general figure start gate 251 provided at the lower center of the game board. Then, whether or not the normal map is determined (first determination of correctness) is performed, and the general map display device 210 starts the variable display. In addition to the variable display of the general-purpose display device 210, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a variable display of the normal-pattern decorative symbol. That is, the decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol that represents the symbol displayed on the general symbol display device 210 in a form with enhanced performance.

  When winning is determined by the determination of whether or not the normal symbol is won, the universal symbol display device 210 displays a stop symbol (see FIG. 82 (c)) of a predetermined symbol form corresponding to the winning symbol, and a decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the hit is stopped and displayed. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen for instructing to make a right strike, and the general-purpose electric accessory 252 disposed in the right area of the game area 124 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 5.8 seconds). To do. In other words, the ordinary electric accessory 252 includes a movable member (here, a door member 2521) that can be freely opened and closed, and when the door member 2521 is opened, it is possible to win a prize at the special drawing start port 230. The door member 2521 is a member that changes the difficulty level of winning a prize to the special figure starting port 230. When the door member 2521 is closed, it is impossible to enter the special drawing starting port 230, and the closed state where the door member 2521 is closed is an open / close state in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, the state in which the door member 2521 is open is an open / close state in which winning is easy. Accordingly, the special figure starting port 230 has either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size) of the entrance (the entrance of the game ball). This is a variable start area in which the ease of entering a game ball changes from one size to the other size. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the usual start gates 251 and 253. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the normal start gates 251 and 253 or smaller than the size of the entrance of them (251 and 253). It should be noted that the closed state of the door member 2521 of the ordinary electric accessory 252 does not necessarily need to be completely closed, and may be in a state where it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball even if it is slightly opened. . The closed state of the door member 2521 of the general electric accessory 252 corresponds to an example of the first state, and the open state corresponds to an example of the second state. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, seven) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that has entered the special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. 80 is a variable starting means and can be said to be an attacker-type electric tulip (electric chew).

  When a game ball enters the general-purpose electric accessory 252 in a state where the door member 2521 is opened, the ball always enters the special figure starting port 230. Even if a plurality of game balls enter the special figure starting port 230 by opening the door member 2521 once, whether or not the special figure is determined (lottery) is performed only for the first ball that has entered. That is, in this pachinko machine 100, there is no special figure holding storage. Therefore, the game board 200 is not provided with a special figure holding lamp. In addition, a winning lamp 254 is provided in the vicinity (in this example, on the right side) of the ordinary electric accessory 252. The winning lamp 254 emits light (flashes) when there is a winning at the special drawing start port 230. Further, light is emitted (flashing) when the door member 2521 is closed. The winning lamp 254 corresponds to an example of a light emitting unit.

  The door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 opens for a predetermined time (here, 5.8 seconds), and a predetermined number of balls (here, ten balls) enter the general-purpose electric accessory 252 during the predetermined time. In this case, the door member 2521 is closed without waiting for the elapse of a predetermined time when the predetermined number of balls have entered. When the game ball enters the general-purpose electric accessory 252, whether or not the special figure is appropriate (lottery) is determined, and the special figure display device 212 starts the variable display. In addition to the variation display of the special figure display device 212, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an effect display. As described above, in the pachinko machine 100, the one-time opening of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 aims to acquire the right to determine whether or not the special drawing is one time and to increase the number of prize balls by winning one or more balls. Is.

  When the big win is won in the special symbol determination, the special symbol display device 212 displays a stop symbol of a predetermined symbol form corresponding to the big hit, and the decorative symbol display device 208 also produces an effect corresponding to the big hit. The variable start port 234 is opened for a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times or twice) for a very short time (for example, 0.1 second). Only one variable winning port 234 is arranged below the center of the game board 200 shown in FIG. The variable winning opening 234 includes a winning opening and a door member 2341 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid. The winning opening may be referred to as a big winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 may be referred to as an attacker. The variable winning opening 234 is kept closed until a jackpot game to be described later is started, and when the jackpot game is started, the state change is repeated between the open state and the closed state. That is, the variable winning opening 234 includes a predetermined first opening / closing state (here, the closed state) and a second opening / closing state (here, the opening state) in which the winning of the game ball is easier than the first opening / closing state. The variable winning means is capable of changing the open / closed state from one to the other. It should be noted that the closed state at the variable winning opening 234 does not necessarily need to be completely closed, and may be in a state where it is impossible or difficult to enter a game ball even if it is slightly opened. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as a winning ball. However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 100, since the open state of the variable winning opening 234 is extremely short (for example, 0.1 seconds), it is almost impossible to expect payout by entering the variable winning opening 234. The ball that entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  In the normal state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), if a big win is won in the special figure success / failure determination, it always shifts to the electric support state (also called short-time state, general figure high probability state). In the electric support state, first, the general-purpose starting gate 253 disposed in the right area of the game area 124 is aimed. A general electric accessory 252 is provided directly below the normal start gate 253. The right-hand general start gate 253 corresponds to an example of the first entry area, and the special-purpose start opening 230 that allows the game ball to enter when the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 immediately below the door is opened. This corresponds to an example of two approach areas.

  Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the normal start gate 253 is not discharged to the amusement island side, and no winning ball is paid out. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed the right-hand general map start gate 253, the normal map determination is made, and the general map display device 210 starts the normal map variable game.

  If the pachinko machine 100 is in the electric support state, it is easy to hit in the normal determination. If it is determined whether or not the normal figure is correct, the door member 2521 of the general purpose electric accessory 252 is opened again, and when the game ball enters the general purpose electric accessory 252, whether or not the special figure is appropriate is determined. In the pachinko machine 100, in the probability variation state (special figure high probability state) and the non-probability variation state (special figure low probability state), the probability of winning a big hit in the special figure success / failure judgment changes, but in either state, the big hit with high probability Is configured to win. If the big win is not won in the special figure determination (if it is a loss), the variable winning opening 234 is not opened. However, since it is in the electric support state, if the game ball passes through the right-hand general start gate 253, the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 is opened with a considerable probability. In this way, it is easy to win a special jackpot several times during the electric support state. In the pachinko machine 100, this electric support state corresponds to a special game state, and a bonus game is produced.

  In general, when winning a ball is not reduced, repeatedly winning a special bonus jackpot is called a ream. Therefore, even if it is in the non-electric support state, while it is in a probable variation state, repeatedly winning a special figure jackpot may be referred to as a recreational resort. However, in the game board 200 shown in FIG. 80, there is only one special figure starting port, and the special figure starting port 230 is not won unless the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 is opened. Therefore, here, it is referred to as consecutive resort that, during the electric support state, the jackpot with the electric support is repeatedly elected and the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 is repeatedly opened. For example, during the electric support state, a consecutive house is also established when a special jackpot with electric support of the special figure is won by one or more times. Special bonus jackpots are available with probability variation jackpots and non-probability variation jackpots. It is easy to win a jackpot with probability variation with a jackpot with probability variation and a jackpot with probability variation, but the number of times that a jackpot with probability variation can be acquired between the transition to the non-power support status after transition to the power support status. There are restrictions. Hereinafter, this probability variation limit is referred to as a limiter, and the above number is referred to as a prescribed number. Here, the specified number of times is 11. When the specified number of times is reached, the electric support state is changed to the non-electric support state and the non-probable change state is changed. That is, a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state which is a normal state is obtained. On the other hand, if the special figure wins a non-probable big hit before the specified number of times is reached, the limiter is reset and the number of wins with a probable big hit becomes zero.

  In the pachinko machine 100 having the above-described configuration, a plurality of types of times are prepared as the time until the result of determining whether or not the normal map is determined, that is, the variation time of the general map display device 210. A plurality of types of times are also prepared for the time until derivation, that is, the variation time of the special figure display device 212. In the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the normal figure is short, and when the game ball passes the right normal figure start gate 253, the determination result is immediately notified. When the special figure is a big hit, the fluctuation time of the special figure is not more than one opening period (here, 5.8 seconds) of the door member 2521 in the general-purpose electric accessory 252; It may become longer with a predetermined probability.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 80, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a game nail 238 are disposed in the vicinity of the winning opening and the starting opening, and the inner rail 204 At the bottom, an out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won any prize opening or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

The sphere accommodated in the upper plate 126 is supplied to the firing position of the firing rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the launch motor is driven with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the player's ball launch handle 134, and the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 146 and the launcher 148 into the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or start opening (The usual start gates 251 and 253, the special drawing start port 230) are won or reach the out port 240 without winning any winning port or start port.
<Directing device 206>

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll. In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are located behind the warp device 242 and the stage 244.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball naild by the game nail 238 and the like, and the passed ball enters the central normal start gate 251 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate this.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

The decorative lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 80, and the shielding device 246 correspond to the rendering means, and among these, the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponds to an example of the symbol display means. .
<Control unit>

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the payout of game balls, the launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of game balls, and the power supply management unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. Yes. In the pachinko machine 100, the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the second sub-control unit 500 are made of different circuit boards, but these three control units (300, 400, 500) The first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 may be composed of one common circuit board different from the circuit board of the main control unit 300. It may be a thing. Therefore, each of the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 can be regarded as a predetermined control means, or one of these three control units (300, 400, 500) combined. One can be regarded as a predetermined control means, or one combined with the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 can be regarded as a predetermined control means.
<Main control unit>

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time and frequency, and WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing are mounted. . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 includes a random value generation circuit 318 for deriving a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes two random value generation circuits). Lower plate for detecting that the main body opening sensor 1041, the front frame door sensor 1061, the ball storage tray-attached door sensor 1082, and the lower pan 128 shown in FIG. Receives signals output from various sensors 320 including a full tank detection sensor, a ball detection sensor provided inside each start opening, winning opening and variable winning opening, and disturbs the result of amplification and comparison with reference voltage. A sensor circuit 322 for outputting to the numerical value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the special figure display device 212, and the universal map display device 21 A drive circuit 326 for performing display control, a drive circuit 330 for performing display control of various status display units 328 (for example, the general map holding lamp 216, the high accuracy medium lamp 222, etc.) A drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 for opening and closing the door member 2521 of 252 and the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 and the like, and a drive circuit 335 for controlling the light emission of the prize lamp 254 are connected. Yes. Note that the light emission control of the winning lamp 254 may be performed on the first sub-control unit 400 side.

  The random value generation circuit 318 generates a random value used in the basic circuit 302. Random number generation in the random value generation circuit 318 can be broadly divided into two types of methods: counter mode and random number mode. In the counter mode, a numerical value that is counted up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random number. There are two more methods in the random number mode. The first method in the random number mode performs an operation using a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function) using a seed of random numbers, and derives the operation result as a random number. In the second method, a numerical value is read from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and the read numerical value is derived as a random number. The random value generation circuit 318 acquires an irregular value using white noise superimposed on a signal input from the various sensors 320 to the sensor circuit 322. The random value generation circuit 318 uses the acquired value as an initial value of a counter that counts up (down) in the counter mode, uses it as a seed of random numbers, or determines a read start position of the random number table. .

  When the sphere detection sensor among the various sensors 320 detects that the sphere has won the special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 sends a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Output. The random value generation circuit 318 that has received this signal latches the value at that timing of the random value generation circuit corresponding to the special figure starting port 230, and the latched value is incorporated in the random value generation circuit 318. This is stored in a random value storage register corresponding to the start port 230. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won a prize in the usual figure starting gates 251 and 253 (these two ordinary figure starting gates are collectively referred to as a usual figure starting area). The value at the timing of the random number generation circuit corresponding to the normal start area is latched, and the latched value is stored in the random value storage register corresponding to the normal start area built in the random number generation circuit 318. To do.

  Further, as the ball detection sensor referred to in this specification, specifically, a sensor for detecting a ball that has won a predetermined winning opening or starting opening such as a general winning opening 226, a special drawing starting opening 230, a variable winning opening 234, or the like. There is a sensor for detecting a sphere passing through the normal start gates 251 and 253.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information of the machine 100 (for example, information indicating the control state) is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power management unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this case), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302. The low voltage signal is an electric system abnormality signal indicating that there is an abnormality in the electric system for operating the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 corresponds to an example of an electric system abnormality signal output unit.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control section main processing described later is started). The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of game control means.

The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300.
<Sub control unit>

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and A RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like are mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The basic circuit 402 is connected to a ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effects data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 detects a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier), a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418, and pressing of the effect button 136 shown in FIG. An effect button detection sensor 426 and a sensor circuit 428 that outputs detection signals from various sensors to the basic circuit 402 are connected.

Furthermore, a second sub-control unit 500 for controlling the decorative symbol display device (liquid crystal display device) 208 and the shielding device 246 is connected to the first sub-control unit 400.
<Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply management unit>

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power management unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power management unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a direct current, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and supplies the predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500. The main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the launch control unit 630 are supplied with a predetermined voltage from the payout control unit 600. The power management unit 660 also stores a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the pachinko machine 100, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power management unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the launch control unit are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.
<Type of design>

  Next, with reference to FIG. 82 (a), a description will be given of the types of special figures that the special figure display device 212 of the pachinko machine 100 stops and displays.

  FIG. 82 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol mode (second symbol mode) of the special figure. The special figure variation game is started on the condition that the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 is opened and the ball detection sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure starting port 230. When the special figure variable game is started, the special figure display device 212 displays “variable display of special figure” (special figure variable game) which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Do. Then, when the variation time (first variation time) determined before the start of the variation of the special figure elapses, the special diagram display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special diagram. Hereinafter, a series of displays from the start of the “figure display of special figure” to the stop display of the stop symbol form of the special figure may be referred to as a special figure fluctuation stop display. This special figure variable stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  In FIG. 82 (a), 22 types of special charts from “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure W” are shown as stop symbol forms in the symbol variation stop display. In FIG. 82 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  In the pachinko machine 100, 20 types of big hit symbols ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure T") are prepared as the stop symbol forms of special figures. Any jackpot symbol is a jackpot symbol of a predetermined round (for example, 15 rounds or two rounds).

  The round here means the number of chances that a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls) can be obtained. In the pachinko machine 100, the number of operations of the variable prize opening 234 shown in FIG. 80 is represented, and the 15th round is one or more opening / closing operations of the variable prize opening 234 (one operation). This means that this operation continues 15 times. That is, one operation corresponds to an example of a specific change in which the open / close state changes from the first open / close state (here, the closed state) to the second open / close state (here, the open state). During the big hit game, the specific change is performed a plurality of constant times (15 times in the case of 15 rounds). Each round has a predetermined round end condition (for example, the entry of a game ball of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls), acquisition of a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls), elapse of a predetermined time from the start of the round, etc. 1 or more) is completed. A big hit game is in progress for a predetermined round.

  FIG. 82B is a table summarizing the characteristics of the special figure shown in FIG. When the special figure is a big hit in the normal gaming state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability), that is, in a state where the special figure is big hit in the non-electric support state, the door member 2521 of the general figure electric accessory 252 repeatedly opens and closes. The probability of performing is extremely low, and in FIG. 82 (b), it is marked as when the general electric component is released (initial). This means that the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 for which the determination of whether or not the special drawing is to be performed is performed once. At the time of the normal drawing electric component release (initial stage), the special figure A to the special figure P become a big hit with certainty. If it is with certainty change, it will shift to a state where the probability of winning a big hit is high in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state. The pachinko machine 100 shifts to a special figure low probability state during a big hit game, and when the big hit with probability change is won, it shifts to a special figure high probability state after the big hit game ends. On the other hand, special figure Q to special figure T are big hits without certainty.

  Also, at the time of releasing the ordinary electric charge (initial stage), if the special figure is a big hit, the time is given. That is, special figure A to special figure P will be a big hit with a time-saving until the next big hit, and special figure Q to special figure T will be given a short time while the symbol variation stop display of the special figure is performed 100 times. After any big hit game from special figure A to special figure T, the state shifts to a state with electric support (electric support) (hereinafter referred to as an electric support state). The electric support state is one of the control states prepared in the pachinko machine 100, and may be referred to as a time reduction state. The electric support state (short-time state) is started on condition that the big hit game ends. Strictly speaking, the “electric support state” is a state related to a general plan, and the “short-time state” is a state related to a special figure or a state related to a general figure and a special figure. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a time reduction flag. When the time reduction flag is set to ON, it is in the electric support state and is usually in a high probability state. Note that the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during the big hit game. In the normal figure high probability state, compared to the normal figure low probability state, it becomes easier to win the common figure variable game (general figure certain change). For example, the probability of winning the usual figure variation game is 1/60 in the low figure probability state (non-electric support state), but increases to 1 / 1.0003 in the high figure probability state (electric support state). To do. In addition, in the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the general figure change game is shorter than that in the non-electric support state (the general figure change short). For example, in the non-electric support state, the variation time of the usual game of 10 seconds is reduced to 1.5 seconds in the electric support state. The probability of entering the special figure starting port 230 increases due to the change of the universal figure and the change of the universal figure. In the pachinko machine 100, the normal figure change and the normal figure change are performed in the electric support state (short-time state), but the electric chew release period may be extended or the electric chew release number may be increased. From the above, in the non-electric support state, the game ball is less likely to enter the special figure starting port 230 than in the electric support state. That is, in the non-electric support state, the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 is likely to be closed, and the rate of entry of game balls into the special-purpose starting port 230 is low. On the other hand, in the electric support state, the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 is easy to open, and the rate of entry of game balls into the special-purpose starting port 230 is increased. Therefore, the non-electric support state corresponds to an example of a non-specific state (which also corresponds to a normal game state), and the electric support state corresponds to an example of a specific state (also corresponds to a special game state). The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a game state transition unit that shifts the game state between the normal game state and the special game state.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 100, there is a limit (limiter) on the number of times that a big hit with certain change can be obtained between the transition to the electric support state and the transition to the non-electric support state. . The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a probability variation counter that counts the number of times that a big hit with probability variation can be obtained. When the non-electric support state is shifted to the electrical support state, a specified number of times is set in this probability variation counter. Then, every time a jackpot with probability variation is obtained, the probability variation counter is decremented by one. This probability variation counter corresponds to an example of a specified number counter. When the limiter is set and the specified number of times has not been reached (when the limiter has not been reached), that is, until the number of jackpots with probability change after shifting to the electric support state reaches the specified number of times Then, special figure A to special figure P will be a big hit with certainty and with a short time until the next big hit. Further, in the special drawings A to P, the probability variation counter is not reset. On the other hand, when the limiter is not reached, the special figure Q to the special figure T are big hits with no probability change, and the probability variation counter is reset to the specified number of times, and the symbol variation stop display with a special time is 100 times. Granted while done.

  Further, when the probability variation counter reaches the specified number of times (here, the counter value becomes 0), that is, when the limiter is reached, the special figures A to H and the special figures Q and R are big hits without the probability variation, and the time reduction is A special symbol change stop display is given 100 times, and the probability variation counter is reset. On the other hand, when the limiter is reached, the special drawings I to P and the special drawings S and T are big hits with no probability change and no short time, and the limiter setting is completed and the normal game state is entered.

  To summarize the above, special maps A to P are in the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state from the first hit (when the electric figure electric component is released (initial)) to when the limiter has not reached (in the Renzhuang). Yes, special figure Q to special figure S are special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. When the limiter is reached, special figure A to special figure H and special figures Q and R are in a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state, and special figure I to special figure P and special figures S and T are special figures low. It is a low probability state. In this way, in the pachinko machine 100, the benefit given to the player based on the stop pattern aspect of the special figure is in the gaming state (when the general-purpose electric character is released (initial), when the limiter has not reached (during the consecutive resort) However, the stop symbol form of the special figure is common in different game states.

  In the pachinko machine 100, two types of lost symbols are also prepared. The special figure V shown in FIG. 82 (a) is the first lost symbol, and the special figure W is the second lost symbol. When the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 does not open / close. In addition to the big hit symbol and the lost symbol, a small hit symbol in which the control state (game state) does not change before and after the small hit game may be prepared. The special figure display device 212 corresponds to an example of a first symbol display means for informing a special figure determination result (second determination result).

  FIG. 83 (a) shows an example of the usual stop symbol mode (first symbol mode). There are two types of stoppage display modes of the usual figure of the pachinko machine 100: “common figure A” which is a winning symbol and “common figure B” which is a lost symbol. Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a sphere detection sensor, detects that a sphere has entered the normal map start area (the normal map start gates 251 and 253), the general map display device 210 displays that all seven segments are turned on. Then, the “variable display of ordinary figure” (ordinary figure fluctuation game) is performed by repeatedly turning on one central segment. Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, one of the symbols “general symbol A” which is a winning symbol and “general symbol B” which is a lost symbol is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 83 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  In the following, a series of displays from the start of the “variable display of the usual figure” to the stop display of the stop pattern form of the usual figure may be referred to as a usual figure change stop display. The universal symbol display device 210 corresponds to an example of a second symbol display means for notifying the normal decision determination result (first determination result).

  FIG. 83 (b) shows an example of a general-purpose decorative symbol. There are ten types of decorations of the pachinko machine 100, “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. Each symbol of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 on condition that a sphere has entered the universal symbol start area (normal figure start gates 251 and 253). In the display area, “decoration pattern” is switched in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. "Change display". That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbols in a variable manner separately from the general symbol display device 210. And the stop symbol mode which is a combination of a decoration symbol is stopped and displayed. When notifying the hit of a normal figure, combinations of decorative symbols in which three same decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, “decoration 1 -decoration 1 -decoration 1” or “decoration 2 -decoration 2”). -Decoration 2 "etc.) is stopped and displayed. When a combination of decorative symbols in which three identical decorative symbols are arranged is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 opens for a predetermined time (here, 5.8 seconds). On the other hand, in the case of notifying the usual figure, the combination of the decorative symbols other than the combination of the decorative symbols in which three of the same decorative symbols are arranged (for example, dissemination) is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. . Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a series of displays from the start of the “decorative symbol variable display” to the stop display of the decorative symbol stop pattern may be referred to as decorative symbol variation stop display.

In addition, the stop symbol mode (see FIG. 83 (a)) of the normal symbol and the stop symbol mode of one decorative symbol displayed in each of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the middle left and right of the decorative symbol display device 208 (same diagram) (See (b)) is larger for decorative designs (see (b) in the figure).
<Main control unit main processing>

  Next, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 81 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 81 is provided with a special figure determination random number counter, a special figure variation time determination random number counter, and a normal variation period determination random number counter. In addition, the RAM 308 stores special figure determination result, special figure determination result, special figure change time determination result, general figure determination result, general figure change period determination result, and general figure hold number. . Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a general-purpose holding storage section that is divided into a maximum number of areas (four in this example) that can hold the start of the determination of whether or not to determine the normal-use figure (lottery).

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 81 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input resets by a reset interrupt and executes the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG. 84 according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, to the WDT 314 The operation is permitted and the initial value is set. In the pachinko machine 100, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500 by the power supply control unit 660. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this case), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), the step is performed. The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312 and a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before power interruption (before power interruption), and the state before power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to an initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of a game store operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 2 (indicating that there has been an operation). If the RAM clear signal is ON (RAM clear is necessary), the process goes to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. A RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 81 has a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

In step S115, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, an initial value generating random number counter for generating an initial value of the special figure determining random number counter, a special figure changing time determining random value, and a normal figure changing period determining random value respectively The two random number counters for generating are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as the basic random number value is 0 to 20, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area provided in the RAM 308, 1 is added to the acquired value, and then stored in the original random number counter storage area. . At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.
<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>

  Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  A main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 81 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (here, about once every 4 ms), and the main control unit timer is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. Interrupt processing is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically changed (in this case, so as not to detect a processing abnormality) so that the WDT 314 count value exceeds an initial setting value (32.8 ms in this case) and a WDT interrupt does not occur. Restart once about every 2ms, which is the main controller timer interrupt cycle.

  In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 81 including various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and various kinds of data are stored in the RAM 308. The data is stored in a signal state storage area provided for each sensor 320. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the pachinko machine 100, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 81, winning determination pattern information (here, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal) is stored. In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (here, no detection signal before, detection signal from the previous time, detection signal from the current time). If it matches the information), it is determined that there has been a ball entry or passage to the general winning opening 226, the ordinary start gates 251 and 253, the special figure starting opening 230, and the variable winning opening 234. In other words, it is determined that there has been a winning at these winning ports 226, 234, the starting port 230, and the gates 251, 253. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (here, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the special figure determination random number counter used in the main control unit 300 is used. The special figure variation time determination random number counter and the normal figure variation period determination random number counter are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a certain random number value is 0 to 100, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Stored in the random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value obtained from a random number counter that fluctuates in a numerical value range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the obtained value is a previously set initial value stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. When the value is equal to (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter, and is set in the random number counter. In order to determine this, the initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update processing, the time for displaying a symbol on the general symbol display device 210 is displayed, and the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 is counted. Various timers are updated, including a special figure display symbol update timer, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening period, a predetermined closing time, a timer for measuring a predetermined end effect period, and the like.

  In step S215, winning prize counter update processing is performed. In this winning prize counter updating process, when winning prizes 226 and 234 and start opening 230 are awarded, the value of the number-of-scores storage area provided for each winning prize is read into the RAM 308 and 1 is added. The original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, when there is a winning in the usual figure start area (the usual figure start gates 251 and 253) and the number of the pending figure changing games is less than a predetermined number (here, 4), The predetermined start information is acquired. In other words, if the number of holds in the usual figure is less than the predetermined number, the usual prize winning random number value and the usual figure changing period determining random number value are acquired. The normal winning random number and the normal change period determining random number correspond to an example of start information in the present invention. The universal winning random value obtained here is a value obtained by processing a hardware random number (a value of hardware random number + a value of the R register + 1), and a random value for determining a normal variation period is a value obtained by processing a software random number ( Software random number value + R register value + 1). The random number value generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 81 includes a random number value storage register corresponding to the normal start area, a general variable period determining random number counter provided in the RAM 308, and a main control unit 300 that performs random number processing. The thing corresponds to an example of start information generating means (first start information generating means). The random number value (starting information) acquired here is stored as a set of starting information in a vacant area corresponding to the winning order (holding order) in the usual figure holding storage unit provided in the RAM 308. This general map hold storage unit can store start information acquired when a game ball enters the general map start area (general map start gates 251 and 253) up to a predetermined upper limit number (four in this case). It corresponds to storage means. At this time, the start information may be temporarily stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the value stored in the temporary area may be stored in the usual storage unit. In this case, the temporary area may be used as the start information storage means. Alternatively, the usual reserved storage unit and temporary area may be used as the starting information storage means. In addition, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 adds 1 to the value of the usual number of reservations stored in the RAM 308, and the number of usual reservations increases by one. Therefore, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a holding unit.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 does not have a special figure hold memory. A special figure winning flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. The special figure winning flag is turned off when the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 is closed. Therefore, immediately after the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 is opened, the special figure winning flag is off. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 obtains predetermined start information if there is a prize at the special drawing start port 230 and the special figure winning flag is off. That is, as the predetermined starting information, a special figure winning random number value, a special figure determining random value, and a special figure changing time determining random value are acquired. The special figure winning random number value obtained here is a value obtained by processing a hardware random number (hardware random number value + R register value + 1), and the special figure determining random value and the special figure variation time determining random value are: A value obtained by processing the software random number (the value of the software random number + the value of the R register + 1). In the random value generation circuit 318 shown in FIG. 81, a random value storage register corresponding to the special figure start port 230, a special figure variation time determination random number counter provided in the RAM 308, and a main control unit 300 for performing random number processing are combined. This corresponds to an example of start information deriving means (second start information deriving means). The special figure winning random number value, the special figure determining random number value, and the special figure variation time determining random value acquired here are stored as one set of starting information in the special figure starting information storage area provided in the RAM 308. The

  Further, in the winning acceptance process, when a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a winning (winning) at the normal start gates 251 and 253, the special drawing start opening 230, or the variable winning opening 234, the first sub In the transmission information to be transmitted to the control unit 400, winning acceptance information indicating presence / absence of winning (winning) of the normal figure starting gates 251 and 253, the special drawing starting opening 230, and the variable winning opening 234 is set.

  In addition, when there is a winning at the special figure starting port 230, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 causes the winning lamp 254 shown in FIG. 80 to emit light.

  Note that the normal start information is not acquired if the number of normal hold is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, and the process proceeds to step S219. Further, the special chart starting information is not acquired if the special chart winning flag is on, and the process proceeds to step S219.

  In step S219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. 81. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 81 are composed of 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the general diagram state update process in the middle of the normal map change display (the value of the above-mentioned general map display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the general map display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the general map display device 210 performs normal variable display (normal map variable game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. When the 7-segment LED constituting the general-purpose display device 210 is turned on / off, and the hit flag is off, the general-purpose display device 210 is configured to display a lost pattern. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the universal symbol display device 210 determines one of the winning symbols (the universal symbol A shown in FIG. 83 (a)) and the lost symbol (the universal symbol B shown in FIG. 83 (b)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game. Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later.

  FIG. 86 (a) is a diagram showing a table summarizing the operation modes of the general-purpose electric accessory 252. FIG. When the common figure flag is ON, in the common figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the general figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the setting of the RAM 308 is set. While the normal operation is set in the area, information indicating a predetermined opening period is set in the storage area of the door member opening period management timer provided in the RAM 308. In the pachinko machine 100, the storage area of the door member open period management timer is 5.8 in both the electric support state (normal high probability state) and the non-electric support state (normal low probability state). Set information indicating the release period of seconds. Therefore, the operation of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 in the electric support state and the operation of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 in the non-electric support state are the same, and the player sees the operation mode of the general-purpose electric accessory 252. It is not possible to determine whether or not the power support is in effect. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 is used for opening / closing driving of the door member 2521 until 5.8 seconds set here or until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (here, 10 balls) is detected in the special figure starting port 230. A signal for holding the door member 2521 in an open state is output to the solenoid (332). In the pachinko machine 100, the variable starting means (general electric accessory 252) is opened only once (second state) during one operation period, so this 5.8 seconds is an example of the second period. It corresponds to. In addition, a predetermined value is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command electric utility release setting process in the command setting transmission process (step S233). In addition, a predetermined value is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command normal operation process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  Further, in the processing that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door member opening period management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the normal operation set in the setting area of the RAM 308 is maintained. In addition, information indicating a predetermined opening period is set in the storage area of the door member closing period management timer provided in the RAM 308. In the pachinko machine 100, in the storage area of the door member closing period management timer, information indicating the closing period of 0.5 seconds is set in the electric support state (normal figure high probability state), and the non-electric support state (normal figure low) is set. In the probability state), information indicating a closing period of 60 seconds is set. That is, in the pachinko machine 100, 0.5 seconds corresponds to an example of the first period in the electric support state (general figure high probability state), and 60 seconds in the non-electric support state (general figure low probability state) corresponds to the first period. It corresponds to an example. Therefore, in the first period, the non-electric support state is longer than the electric support state. As described above, the electric support state here is an example of a specific state, and the non-electric support state is an example of a non-specific state. Compared to the non-specific state (non-electric support state), the specific state (electric support state) is more likely to cause the variable starting means (usually the electric accessory 252) to enter the second state (open state). The rate of entry of game balls into the starting opening 230) is high. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 outputs a signal for holding the door member 2521 in the closed state to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 2521 until the closing period set here elapses. In addition, a predetermined value is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command electric utility article closing setting process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  Then, in the process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing at which the door member closing period management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. Further, a predetermined value is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command normal operation non-operation processing in the command setting transmission processing (step S233).

  In the pachinko machine 100, the normal operation period is the first operation time (6.3 seconds here) in the electric support state (normal high probability state), and the non-electric support state (low normal probability state). Then, it becomes the 2nd operation period (here 65.8 seconds) longer than the 1st operation period. The RAM 308 is provided with an operation period timer for measuring the lapse of these operation periods (periods during normal operation), the normal operation is set in the setting area of the RAM 308, and the operation period timer is stored in the storage area of the operation period timer. Information indicating a predetermined period may be set. In the pachinko machine 100, the operation period is started based on the fact that a winning condition corresponding to an ordinary figure corresponding to an example of the first predetermined condition is established. Moreover, in the pachinko machine 100, the variable starting means (general-purpose electric accessory 252) is in the second state (open state) only once during one operation period. It may be a mode that turns. For example, the open state is maintained for 1 second simultaneously with the start of the operation period, the closed state is maintained for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds), and then the open state is maintained for 1.8 seconds, and the closed state is maintained for a predetermined period ( For example, the open state may be maintained for 2 seconds, and the closed state may be maintained for 0.5 seconds in the electric support state and 60 seconds in the non-electric support state. In this case, 2 seconds for maintaining the final second state (open state) corresponds to an example of the second period. Further, in the non-electric support state, 60 seconds for maintaining the closed state at the end of one operation period is the longest period longer than the period for maintaining the closed state (0.5 seconds in this example). It is.

  In this way, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that performs opening / closing control of the door member 2521 corresponds to an example of variable start control means that controls the universal electric accessory 252 that is variable start means.

  Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure variable game is lost, the usual figure lost flag is turned on. When the usual figure loss flag is on, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  Subsequently, in the step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is executed. First, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the usual figure variable game is being performed or whether the opening and closing control of the ordinary figure electric accessory 252 is being performed (the state of the usual figure is in operation). If it is also performed on one side, the general drawing related lottery process is terminated. On the other hand, if neither is performed, it is determined whether or not the number of pending custom-variable games is 1 or more. If it is above, the random number value for one set which is the start information stored in the past in the RAM 308 (general winning random number value and random number value for determining the normal variation period) is extracted. The starting information (a set of random values) that is still stored in the holding storage unit is transferred from the currently stored area to the adjacent area. That is, when the start information stored in the past is taken out from the general-purpose hold storage unit and the start-up information is stored in the general-purpose hold storage unit, the Nth oldest start information is stored in the general-purpose hold storage unit as N−1. This is the second oldest starting information. Also, 1 is subtracted from the usual pending number stored in the RAM 308. The main control unit 300, which performs processing for extracting one set of random values (normal winning value and random number for determining the normal variation period) from the normal figure holding storage unit of the RAM 308, starts information acquisition means (first start This corresponds to an example of information acquisition means). Next, a normal / unusual determination process is performed. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores a normal-use determination table.

  FIG. 86 (b) is a diagram showing a normal probability determination low probability table, and FIG. 86 (c) is a diagram showing a general probability determination high probability table.

  In the usual-time determination processing, the time reduction flag is referred to and the determination is made based on whether or not the current control state is the electric support state. If the time reduction flag is off (if it is in the non-electric support state), whether or not the normal time is determined using the low probability table shown in FIG. 86 (b), and if the time reduction flag is on (electric support) If it is in the state), the normal determination is performed using the high probability table shown in FIG. The determination of whether or not a common figure is made is performed based on a random number value for a common figure winning in the starting information extracted from the general figure holding storage unit of the RAM 308 (a possible range is 0 to 65535). The usual Atari probability is 1/60 in the low probability table shown in FIG. 86 (b) and 1 / 1.00003 in the high probability table shown in FIG. 86 (c), which is a considerably high probability. In the general figure winning, the center general figure starting gate 251 becomes main when in the non-electric support state, and when it is in the electric support state, the right-handed driving is promoted and the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 is easily opened. The usual starting gate 253 becomes the main. Therefore, the low probability table shown in FIG. 86 (b) is a table used when winning the central general chart start gate 251 and the high probability table shown in FIG. 86 (c) is a table used when winning the right general chart start gate 253. You can say that. Here, deriving “winning” or “losing” is equivalent to the normal-win / no-go determination (lottery), and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the normal-win / no-win determination processing here is the first win / fail determination means. It corresponds to an example. In addition, the success / failure determination result of “win” corresponds to an example of a specific first success / failure determination result.

  When the execution of the normal figure determination process is completed, the normal figure change period in the normal figure change stop display is determined. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a normal change period determination table.

  FIG. 87A is a diagram showing a low probability loss table for determining a normal variation period, and FIG. 87B is a diagram showing a low probability per table for determining a normal variation period. FIG. 87 (c) is a diagram showing a high probability loss table for determining a normal variation period, and FIG. 87 (d) is a diagram showing a high probability per table for determining a normal variation period.

  Even in the determination of the normal fluctuation period, the time reduction flag is referred to, and whether or not the current control state is the electric support state is determined. If the time reduction flag is off (if it is in the non-electric support state), the normal time fluctuation period is determined using the table at the low probability shown in FIG. 87 (a) and FIG. If is turned on (if it is in the electric support state), the normal fluctuation period is determined using the high probability table shown in FIGS. 87 (c) and (d). Also, based on the above-mentioned result of determining whether or not to have a normal figure, if it is a loss, the normal time fluctuation period is determined using the table at the time of the loss shown in FIGS. 87 (b) and (d). The normal change period is determined by using the winning table shown in FIGS. 87 (a) and (c). Further, the normal fluctuation period is determined on the basis of a random number value for determining a normal fluctuation period in the start information extracted from the normal figure holding storage unit of the RAM 308 (a possible range is 0 to 65535). In addition, the acquisition timing of the random number value for determining the normal fluctuation period is the timing of acquiring the start information, but may be the timing immediately before the start of the normal fluctuation. In addition, in the non-electric support state, if the result of determining whether or not the normal signal is lost, the normal time fluctuation period is determined based on the number of suspensions at that time. As described above, in the pachinko machine 100, a random number value for one set (a normal winning random number value and a random time value for determining a normal variation period) is held at the timing when it is taken out from the normal drawing holding storage unit provided in the RAM 308. From the relationship of subtracting 1 from the number, the minimum value of the number of reserved balls in the usual case is 0 and the maximum value is 3. As shown in FIG. 87 (b), if the random number value for determining the normal time period is in the range of 0 to 59000, if the number of hold of the normal time is 3, the normal time fluctuation period will be 3 seconds. When it is ˜2, it becomes a fluctuation period of 10 seconds. When the random number value for determining the normal change period is equal to or greater than 59001, it becomes a common normal change period regardless of the number of holds in the normal figure. Moreover, in the electric support state, even if the result of determining whether or not the normal figure is correct is lost, the common normal figure change period is set regardless of the number of hold of the normal figure.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 87 (c) and (d), in the electric support state, the normal figure change period is 1.5, regardless of whether the normal figure success / failure determination result is win or miss. A very short variation period of seconds. The usual figure change period in this electric support state is shorter than the opening period of the door member 2521 of the later figure electric accessory 252 described later. Moreover, the usual figure change period in the electric support state is shorter than the usual figure change period in the non-electric support state.

  Further, each table of FIGS. 87 (a) to 87 (d) shows an effect pattern of the general symbol decoration pattern on the decorative symbol display device 208, which is determined according to the length of the general symbol variation period. The information indicating the normal time change time determined here is included in the normal time change start command transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, as will be described later. The sub-control unit 400 specifically determines the effect mode of the general-purpose decorative symbol shown here based on the information indicating the normal time change time. Normal reach and super reach are included in the production form of the usual decorative pattern. In normal reach, generally, two symbol display areas (for example, the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c shown in FIG. 80) are displayed in a stopped manner, and the remaining one symbol display area (for example, the middle symbol display area 208b) is displayed. If the symbol display area that is variably displayed, that is, if the symbol display area that is variably displayed is a specific symbol (a symbol that is equal to the symbol display area that is stopped), the combination of predetermined jackpot symbols (FIG. 83) This is a state where the decorative combination shown in (b) is stopped and displayed. Super reach is a product obtained by adding special variation display to normal reach to improve the production effect (long reach, normal reverse reach, double line reach, etc.). In addition, there is also an aspect called special variation in the effect form of the decorative design. Special variation includes special multi-line reach, full rotation reach, special full rotation reach, etc. When simply referred to as reach, it means a variation pattern of decorative symbols including normal reach, super reach and special variation. This reach is the result of the success / failure determination that the result of the normal / failure determination in the common-map related process is the specific first success / failure determination result (a predetermined result with a high player's advantage). It is a notice effect that informs the player in advance before notifying the result of the success / failure determination, and whether or not to reach is determined after the determination of the success / failure.

  When the determination of the usual figure change period is finished, the usual figure related lottery process (step S223) is finished, and then the special figure state update process is executed (step S225). The special figure state update process performs one of the following eight processes according to the special figure state. For example, in the special figure state update process in the middle of the special figure symbol display to stop the special figure (the value of the special figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure display device 212 is turned on and off. Repeated lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed. By performing this control, the special figure display device 212 performs a special figure fluctuation display (special figure fluctuation game).

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the general command rotation start setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area described above, and the process ends.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a big hit flag and a lost flag. In the special figure state update process starting at the timing when the special figure variation display period has elapsed (the timing when the special figure display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), the special figure determination result in the special figure related lottery process (to be described later) ( On / off drive control of the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure display device 212 is performed based on the special figure stop symbol form), and a setting indicating that the special figure stop display is in progress is made in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the special figure display device 212 is any one of the jackpot symbol (special figure A to special figure T), the first lose symbol (special symbol V), and the second lose symbol (special symbol W). Performs a fixed display of two symbols. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a special figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the special figure that has been confirmed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure variable game is notified to the player.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the general command rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in a command setting transmission process (step S233) described later is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Also, if the result of the special figure variation game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the RAM 308 RAM 308 is set to wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for informing the player that a big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. The information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure standby time management timer provided in FIG. Further, 5H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the transmission information storage area described above in order to execute the general command winning effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  In the special figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (timing when the value of the special figure standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 0.1 second) Alternatively, the door member 2341 is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 until a winning of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable prize opening 234. In addition to outputting a signal to be held at the same time, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening period management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, 7H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command big prize opening release setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  Further, in the special figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening period management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the variable prize opening for a predetermined closing period (for example, 1 second) Information indicating the closing period in the storage area of the door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308, while outputting a signal for holding the door member 2341 in the closed state to the solenoid (332) for opening / closing driving of the door member 2341 of 234 Set. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure state update process that starts and closes the opening / closing control of the door member a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 rounds or 2 rounds), a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a decorative symbol display Information indicating the effect standby period is stored in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for a period during which an image informing the player that the big hit by the device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Set.

  As described above, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of variable winning control means for performing change control of the open / closed state of the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 during the big hit gaming state. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores an opening / closing pattern of the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 responds to the determination of whether or not the special figure variable game is successful from the ROM 306. Get the open / close pattern.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is also provided with a probability variation flag in addition to the time reduction flag, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 obtains the stop symbol form represented by the special figure determination result and the special figure determination result. At the same time as the end of the big hit game, based on the state of the game when the start information used for the game was acquired (when the regular electric component is released (initial), when the limiter is not reached (during the villa), or when the limiter is reached) The probability variation flag and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 are set to ON.

  Furthermore, 6H is additionally stored as transmission information (command type) in the above-described transmission information storage area in order to execute the general command end effect setting transmission process in the command setting transmission process (step S233).

  Further, in the special figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (the timing when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special area is not in operation in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set. Furthermore, if the result of the special figure variation game is a loss, the loss flag is turned on. When this loss flag is on, the special figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0) is also stored in the RAM 308. Set special figure inactive in the setting area. In the special figure state update process when the special figure is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next process.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 is completed, a special figure related lottery process (step S229) is performed. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the special figure related lottery process corresponds to an example of a second win / fail determination unit. In the special figure related lottery process (step S229), the lottery (first win / fail determination) is executed, the special figure to be stopped is determined, and the variable period (first variable period) in the special symbol variable stop display is determined. . First, it is determined whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, first, it is determined whether or not a predetermined success / failure determination prohibition condition is not satisfied. Here, it is determined whether or not the special figure display device 212 is in the special figure fluctuation display or in the stop display, and if it is in any display, the special figure related lottery process is terminated. . On the other hand, if neither is displayed, it is determined whether it is set during special figure operation or special figure non-operation, and if it is set during special figure operation, special drawing related lottery processing is If it is set and the special figure is not in operation, the determination result prohibition condition is not satisfied, and this time, it is determined whether or not a predetermined determination result condition is satisfied. In this determination, it is determined whether or not start information is stored in the special figure start information storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the starting information is not stored, the special drawing related lottery process is terminated, and if the starting information is stored, a predetermined success / failure determination condition is established.

  If the predetermined success / failure determination condition is satisfied, the starting information (the special figure winning random number value, the special figure determining random value, and the special figure changing time determining random value) stored in the special figure starting information storage area Is acquired, and special figure winning / failing determination (first winning / failing determination) processing is performed. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores a special figure determination table.

  FIG. 88 (a) is a diagram showing a special figure success / failure determination low probability table, and FIG. 88 (b) is a diagram showing a special figure success / failure determination high probability table.

  In the special figure success / failure determination process, the probability change flag prepared in the RAM 308 is referred to, and the determination is made based on whether or not the current control state is the special figure probability change state. If the probability variation flag is turned off (if the special figure low probability state), the special figure is judged using the low probability table shown in FIG. 88A, and the probability variation flag is turned on (the special figure high probability). State), whether the special figure is true or bad is determined using the high probability table shown in FIG. The special figure success / failure determination is performed based on the special figure winning random number value (the possible range is 0 to 65535) in the start information acquired from the special figure start information storage area of the RAM 308. Further, in the pachinko machine 100, when the specified number of times is reached (at the time of the limiter), the pachinko machine 100 shifts to an uncertain change state (a special figure low probability state). In this case, as shown in FIG. 88 (a), the special symbol winning / non-judgment determination is won with a 12.5% probability of winning without a short time, and the next special symbol's symbol change stop display with a probability of 12.5% To win a jackpot with a short time until the special symbol change stop display is made 100 times. In the pachinko machine 100, the special figure success / failure determination result is a big hit result with 25% establishment as shown in the special figure success / failure determination table in FIG. 88 (a) in the non-probable change state. As shown in the special figure determination table of 88 (b), the result is almost a big hit. This “big hit” special figure determination result corresponds to an example of a specific second determination result.

  When the execution of the special figure success / failure determination process is completed, a special figure determination process for determining a stop symbol form of the special figure is performed. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a special figure determination table.

  FIG. 88 (c) is a diagram showing a big hit special figure determination table. The big hit special figure determination table shown in FIG. 88 (c) also shows the number of times until the limiter is reached.

  In this special figure determination process, the special figure determination random number value (possible range is 0 to 65535) in the start information acquired from the special figure start information storage area of the RAM 308 is performed. Further, the special figure stop symbol form is determined based on the gaming state when the start information used when obtaining the special figure determination result is obtained. That is, if the special figure win / fail determination result is a big hit at the time of the release of the electric figure of the special figure (at the time of the initial common figure), the special figure A to the special figure with a probability of 96% based on the random number for special figure determination A special figure of P (with big change and a big hit symbol with a short time until the next big hit) is decided, and a special figure Q to a special figure T (no big change and with a short time of 100 times) with a probability of 4% ). In addition, when the number of times to reach the limiter is determined as any one of the special figures A to P, the jackpot with probability variation is obtained once, and the maximum number of times of jackpot with probability variation is obtained. (11 times) -1 times = 10 times. On the other hand, when the special figure is selected from any of the special figures Q to T, the maximum number of wins per jackpot with probability change is 11 times. Even if the special figure success / failure determination result is a big hit when the limiter has not been reached (during the consecutive day), the special figure A to the special figure P (with certainty and with a probability of 96%) based on the special figure determination random value. Decided to be one of the special charts in the jackpot symbol with a short time until the next jackpot), with a probability of 4%, any of the special charts Q to T (the jackpot symbol with no time change and 100 times the short-term) The special figure is decided. However, if the number of times to reach the limiter is determined as one of the special figures from A to P, it means that the jackpot with probability variation is obtained once, and it is subtracted once. When any of the special drawings in FIGS. Q to T is determined, the number is reset and the prescribed number of times 11 is set again. When the result of the special figure determination is a big hit when the limiter is reached, the special figure A to the special figure H, the special figure Q, and the special figure R have a probability of 53.3% based on the random number value for special figure determination. (Special jackpot design with no time variation and 100 times of time-saving) Decided to one of the special maps, with a probability of 4% Special maps I-P, S, T A special figure is selected from among the jackpot symbols without). In this case, the number of times until the limiter is reached is reset when it is determined as one of the special figures A to H, special figure Q, and special figure R, and the prescribed number of times is reset to 11 times. Is done. If any of the special maps I to P, S, T is determined, the number of times is zero.

  In other words, the number of times that the jackpot with probability change can be acquired between the transition to the non-electric support state and the non-electric support state is 11, and the non-probable change to the non-probable change state (special figure low probability state). When the big hit is pulled, 11 limiter times are set, and when the probable big hit is drawn, the limiter number is 10 times. In addition, when the non-probable big hit is drawn during the retreat, the number of limiters is reset, the prescribed number of times is set again, and a time reduction of 100 times is given. In other words, since the fluctuation of one special figure is allowed in the short time after the uncertain large hit, hitting at this time will add a ranger to resetting the limiter count. Furthermore, when the limiter arrives, even if a probability variation symbol is displayed, it is treated as a non-probability variation big hit, but if a time reduction is given at this time, a real villa will be added as will be described in detail later.

  When the execution of the special figure determining process is completed, the special figure fluctuation period in the special figure symbol symbol change stop display is determined. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 also stores a special figure change period determination table.

  FIG. 89 (a) is a diagram showing a jackpot table for determining the special figure fluctuation period at the time of normal high probability, and FIG. 89 (b) is a diagram showing a jackpot table for determining the special figure fluctuation period at the time of low figure probability, FIG. 6C is a diagram showing a typical high-probability special-figure variation period determination lose table, and FIG. 10D is a diagram showing a general-low-probability special map variation period determination lose table.

  In the determination of the special figure fluctuation period, the table shown in FIG. 89 is used based on the result of determining whether or not the special figure is appropriate and the electric support state (normal high probability state) or the non-electric support state (normal low probability state). To determine the special figure fluctuation period. Further, the special figure change period is determined based on a special figure change period decision random value (the possible range is 0 to 65535) in the start information acquired from the special figure start information storage area of the RAM 308. Note that the acquisition timing of the random number value for determining the special figure variation period is the timing at which the start information is acquired, but may be the timing immediately before the start of the special figure fluctuation. As shown in the table of FIG. 89 (a), in the pachinko machine 100, when the special figure success / failure determination result is a big hit in the electric support state, the special figure variation period has a predetermined short period (here). In 1 second). This predetermined short period is shorter than the opening period (5.8 seconds) of the door member 2521 of the ordinary electric accessory 252 and while the door member 2521 of the ordinary electric accessory 252 is opened once, In the meantime, the result of the special figure success / failure determination based on winning the special figure starting port 230 is often reported in the electric support state. In the electric support state, a fluctuation period of 120 seconds and a fluctuation period of 360 seconds are also prepared. The probability of a predetermined short period is higher than the probability of a long period such as 120 seconds or 360 seconds.

  On the other hand, as shown in the table of FIG. 89 (b), when the special figure determination result is a big hit in the non-electric support state, the special figure fluctuation period is uniformly a predetermined period (60 seconds in this case). become.

  In addition, as shown in the table of FIG. 89 (c), when the special figure determination result is lost in the electric support state, the fluctuation period of the special figure is uniformly 10 seconds. As shown in the table, when the special figure determination result is lost in the non-electric support state, the fluctuation period of the special figure is uniformly 60 seconds.

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 100, in the non-electric support state, the fluctuation time of the special figure is uniformly 60 seconds. In addition, only when the special figure success / failure determination result is a big hit in the electric support state, the special symbol variation stop display period for notifying the special figure success / failure determination result is made different, and the bonus game is produced. During the special game state, special figure determination is performed at different intervals.

  The information representing the variation period of the special figure is included in the special symbol variation start command transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, and the first sub control unit 400 that receives the command receives the decoration. When the fluctuation period is 120 seconds, the symbol display device 208 displays the premium A jackpot effect during the fluctuation period. When the fluctuation period is 360 seconds, the premium B jackpot effect is displayed during the fluctuation period. Is displayed.

  When the determination of the special figure variation period is finished, the special figure related lottery process (step S229) is finished, and then the command setting transmission process (step S233) shown in FIG. 85 is performed, and various commands are sent to the first sub-control unit. 400. The output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are command Type (here, basic command, special symbol variation start command, special symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, general figure hold increase Bits 0 to 10 are configured with command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. In the case of a special symbol variation start command, the command data indicates information indicating the special symbol stop symbol, information indicating the control state (information indicating the setting state of the time reduction flag and the probability variation flag), and the special symbol variation time. In the case of a special symbol variation stop command, the information includes special symbol stop symbol information, control state information, and the like. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, presence / absence of winning at the special figure starting port 230, presence / absence of winning at the variable winning port 234, and the like.

  Further, in the above-described general command winning effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the control state Set the information indicating. In the above-described general command end effect setting transmission process, command control data represents effect control information and control state stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period. Set the information. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the commands related to the effects transmits a control command related to the effects to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the received commands.

  Further, in the above-described general command special winning opening release setting transmission process, information indicating the number of winning rounds stored in the RAM 308, the current number of rounds, information indicating the control state, etc. is set in the command data. In the above-described general command big prize opening closing setting transmission process, information indicating the current round number stored in the RAM 308, information indicating the control state, and the like is set in the command data.

  Furthermore, in this step S233, general command usual figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command usual figure hold increase process, information indicating a control state is set in the command data of the general figure hold increase command.

  In addition, a main symbol variation start command indicating that the variation display of the normal diagram has been started is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400 as a command related to the general diagram. The command data of the normal symbol variation start command includes information indicating the result of determining whether or not the normal symbol has been received, information indicating the control state (information indicating the setting state of the time reduction flag and the probability variation flag), information indicating the common symbol variation time, Information indicating the value of the counter is included. Further, the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 release the normal figure fluctuation stop command indicating that the usual figure change display is stopped, and the door member 2521 of the usual figure electric accessory 252 is opened. A universal electric accessory opening start command indicating that it has started (doing), a universal electric accessory closing command indicating that the door member 2521 has been closed (doing), and the like are transmitted.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In this command setting transmission process, a command is also transmitted to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when turned on) in bit 7, and power-on information in bit 6. (In the case of ON, it indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), the current processing type (0-3) for encryption in bits 4-5, and the encrypted processing in bits 0-3 The number of payout requests is indicated.

  In step S235, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step 205 are read out to monitor whether there is a glass frame opening error or a lower pan full error, and so on. When a full tank error is detected, device information indicating whether there is a glass frame opening error or a lower pan full error is set in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. In addition, various solenoids 332 shown in FIG. 81 are driven to control the opening / closing of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 and the variable prize opening 234, and the general-purpose display device 210, special drawing via the drive circuits 324, 326, 330 Display data to be output to the display device 212, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port of the I / O 310. Further, when the door member 2521 of the general electric accessory 252 is closed, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 causes the winning lamp 254 shown in FIG. 80 to emit light. By the light emission of the winning lamp 254 when the door member 2521 is closed, there may be a case where a predetermined special effect, which will be described later, is made to appear to the player as an effect based on the electric chew winning.

  In step S239, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on in order to determine whether or not a power supply interruption (power interruption) has been detected. Then, when the low voltage signal is off (when the power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. When the low voltage signal is on (when the power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243.

  In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt termination process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return.

On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as a return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and processing at power-off such as initialization of an input / output port is performed. Thereafter, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.
<Processing of First Sub-Control Unit 400>

  The process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  First, in step S301 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initial setting in step S301 is executed. In this initial setting, initial setting of the I / O port 410 shown in FIG. 81, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, 0 is substituted into the timer variable.

  In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in S307, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. The effect control process will be described later in detail.

  In step S311, when the press of the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 79 is detected, the effect data updated in step S309 is changed to effect data in response to the press of the effect button 136.

  In step S313, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S315, if there is a command to the drive circuit 420 for the various lamps 418 in the effect data read in S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  The RAM 408 of the first sub control unit 400 is provided with a transmission area for setting a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500. If a control command is set in this transmission area, processing for transmitting the control command to the second sub-control unit 500 is performed (step S319), and the process returns to step S303.

  FIG. 90B is a flowchart showing the flow of the effect control process shown in FIG.

  In the first sub-control unit 400, in the command setting transmission process (step S233) shown in FIG. 85, the main control unit 300 sends a normal operation start command indicating the start of the normal operation period, and the general operation electric accessory 252. A general-purpose electric accessory closing command indicating the closing of the door member 2521, a symbol variation start command indicating the start of variation of the special figure, and the like are transmitted. The general operation start command includes information indicating the opening / closing pattern of the door member 2521 in the general electrical accessory 252. As shown in FIG. 86 (a), here, the opening / closing pattern of the door member 2521 is a pattern that opens once and closes once. However, the first sub-control unit 400 uses the information as follows. It is possible to recognize the last closing of the door member 2521 in the normal operation period of the rotation. That is, it is possible to recognize the closing immediately before the electric chew release end waiting time (here, 60 seconds) corresponding to an example of the first period. In the effect control process, first sub-control unit 400 first determines whether or not a special effect start condition is satisfied (step S3091). In other words, if no symbol change start command has been received between the reception of the general operation start command and the reception of the general electrical tool closing command representing the final closing, A start condition is satisfied, a special effect command is set in the transmission area provided in the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400 (step S3092), and the process proceeds to step S3093. On the other hand, if the special effect start condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S3093 without performing the process in step S3092. In step S3093, other effect control processing is performed, and the effect control processing ends. The special effect command set in step S3092 is transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the information transmission process of step S319 shown in FIG. When receiving the special effect command, the second sub-control unit 500 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the special effect command, and the decorative symbol display device 208 stores an image of a predetermined special effect described later. Is displayed.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 90C is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S331 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is set as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408, and this command reception interrupt process ends.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 90D is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (here, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by the timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle. Run with.

In step S341 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub control unit main process shown in FIG. Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S343 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, an effect random number update process or the like is performed, and this timer interrupt process ends.
<Processing of Second Sub-Control Unit 500>

  The second sub control unit 500 executes control of the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the control command transmitted from the first sub control unit 400. The second sub-control unit 500 is connected to an image control unit that displays an image on the decorative symbol display device 208. This image control unit has a VRAM (video RAM) and a GPU (graphics processing unit). The GPU reads the picture information and the like stored in the ROM of the second sub-control unit 500 based on the signal from the CPU of the second sub-control unit 500, and uses the display area (work area) of the VRAM to display the display image. The generated image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  More specifically, the CPU of the second sub control unit 500 first issues an image data transfer instruction. Here, first, the designation of the drawing areas of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM is swapped. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU sets ROM coordinates (ROM transfer source address), VRAM coordinates (VRAM transfer destination address) and the like in the GPU attribute register based on the position information table and the like, and then images from the ROM to the VRAM. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The GPU transfers the image data from the ROM to the VRAM based on the instruction set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the GPU outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU.

  Next, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal is input from the GPU. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM based on the image data transferred to the VRAM, the CPU stores information on the image data constituting the display image (VRAM coordinate axes, image size, VRAM coordinates). (Arrangement coordinates, etc.) to the GPU. The GPU sets parameters according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register. On the other hand, when the transfer end interrupt signal from the GPU has not been input, it waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

  Subsequently, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU instructs the GPU to start drawing an image. The GPU starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU.

  When a drawing instruction is performed, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the GPU based on the end of image drawing has been input. If the generation end interrupt signal is not input, the generation end interrupt signal is input. When a generation end interrupt signal is input, the scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1) to finish the process. To do.

  As described above, the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponds to an example of an image display unit. A combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 corresponds to an example of an effect control unit.

Further, the second sub control unit 500 also executes control of the shielding device 246 based on the control command transmitted from the first sub control unit 400.
Next, the game flow in the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail.

  91 is a flowchart showing a part of the game flow in the pachinko machine 100, and FIG. 92 is a diagram showing step by step the screen of the decorative symbol display device in the game flow shown in FIG. In FIG. 92, time elapses in alphabetical order from (a) to (f), and the same applies to the subsequent drawings. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 92, the fourth symbol 217 of the usual figure and the fourth symbol 218 of the special figure are displayed at the left corner of the effect display area 208d. In these fourth symbols 217 and 218, the white circle represents the changing display, the black circle represents the stopped display, and the same applies to the subsequent drawings.

  When the game is started, it is a normal game state (a special low-probability figure low probability state). The player makes a left turn aiming at the central normal start gate 251. Eventually, a prize is awarded to the central common figure starting gate 251 (step S501), and the common figure display device 210 starts symbol variation stop display. At the same time, as shown in FIG. 92 (a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, which is a liquid crystal display panel, the variation of the normal decorative symbol is started (step S502). In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the special symbol fourth symbol 218 is being stopped, but the regular symbol fourth symbol 217 is being displayed in a variable manner. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a reach effect using a normal decorative symbol may be performed (step S503). However, a reach effect is not performed, and the general symbol display device 210 causes a lost symbol (see FIG. 83A). ) Is stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of three decorative symbols in which the same decorative symbols are arranged (for example, disparity), and the process returns to step S501 ( Step S504).

  Even if the reach effect (step S503) as shown in FIG. 92 (b) and FIG. 92 (d) is performed, the symbol (see FIG. 83 (a)) is always stopped and displayed on the universal display device 210. The combination of decorative symbols in which the same three decorative symbols are arranged is not necessarily stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the process may proceed to step S504. On the other hand, if the result of determining whether or not the common figure is correct, the symbol (see FIG. 83 (a)) is stopped and displayed on the common figure display device 210, and as shown in FIG. 92 (d), the decorative symbol display device is displayed. In 208, a combination of decorative symbols in which three identical decorative symbols are arranged is stopped and displayed (step S505), and the winning of the normal-game variable game is notified. In addition, as shown in FIG. 92 (d), the universal symbol display device 210 stops displaying, and at the same time the universal symbol fourth symbol 217 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is also displayed as stopped. Along with the winning of the common figure variable game, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen for instructing to make a right-handed (step S506), and the general-purpose electric accessory 252 arranged in the right area of the game area 124 is displayed. The door member 2521 is opened for a predetermined time (here, 5.8 seconds) (step S507).

  Opening the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 makes it possible to win a special drawing start port 230, but if there is no win, the process returns to step S501 (step S508). A special figure win / no-go determination (special drawing lottery) is performed for one ball that has won a prize (step S509). When the special symbol determination is made, a bowling chance game is started on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIGS. 92 (e) and (f) (step S510). In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the fourth symbol 217 of the ordinary diagram is being stopped and the fourth symbol 218 of the special symbol is being variably displayed. If the result of determining whether or not the special figure is correct is lost, the special symbol display device 212 stops displaying the lost symbol (see FIG. 82 (a)), and also displays the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 92 (h). The image of the scene where the strike could not be taken is displayed (step S511). Here, the probability that the special figure determination is lost is 2/65536 (see FIG. 88A). On the other hand, if the special symbol win / fail determination result is a big hit, the special symbol display device 212 stops and displays one of the special symbols A to P, which is a big hit symbol (see FIG. 82 (a)). As shown in FIG. 92 (g), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an image notifying that the strike is taken and the bonus game is started (step S512). The probability that the special figure win / reject determination here is a big hit is 65534/65536, which is a very high probability (see FIG. 88 (a)). When winning the big win of the special figure, it always shifts from the non-electric support state (general figure low probability state) to the electric support state (general figure high probability state). Note that, as shown in FIGS. 92 (g) and (h), the special symbol display device 212 stops displaying, and at the same time, the special symbol fourth symbol 218 of the decorative symbol display device 208 also displays stopped.

  FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the flow of the game shown in FIG. 91, and FIG. 94 is a diagram showing step-by-step the screen of the decorative symbol display device when the initial hit is a big hit without any probability change.

  In the special figure variable game here, the probability of winning a jackpot with probability variation is 96%, and the probability of winning a jackpot without probability variation is 4% (see FIG. 88C). When winning the big hit without the probability change, a value of 11 is set in the probability change counter prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. As shown in FIG. 94 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 during the big hit game is displayed. Then, “remaining 11 times” is displayed as the remaining number of times that the jackpot with probability change can be obtained before the transition to the non-electric support state (step S513). In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 at this time also displays “in the middle of one consecutive villa” from the fact that the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 has been opened once (step S507 shown in FIG. 91). The On the other hand, when winning the jackpot with probability variation, a value of 10 is set in the probability variation counter (step S514).

  Since the control state has shifted to the electric support state, it is easy to win the normal determination, and the door member 2521 of the general electric accessory 252 is easy to open. For this reason, it is easy to determine whether or not a special figure is made. In the pachinko machine 100, if the special figure is determined to be in a non-probable change state, the player wins a big hit with a probability of 25%. Win a big hit. In the state where the number of remaining jackpots with probability change before the transition to the non-electric support state is more than 2 times, the probability of winning the jackpot with probability change and short time until next jackpot is 96%, There is a 4% probability of winning a jackpot with no chance and 100 time savings (see FIG. 88 (c)). For example, when the remaining number of times is 11 and the winning combination with probability variation and the next big hit with time reduction is won, the probability variation counter is set to 10 values obtained by subtracting 1 from the 11 values set so far. As shown in 94 (b), “decided 10 times” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the big hit game. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 at this time also displays “during 2 consecutive villas”.

  On the other hand, if a winning big hit with no probability change and 100 time savings is won, the probability changing counter prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is reset, and a big hit with probability changing is acquired before the transition to the non-electric support state. The remaining number of times that can be increased. Although resetting the probability variation counter is advantageous to the player, it is performed only with a probability of 4% as described above.

  FIG. 94 (c) shows a decorative symbol display device 208 during a big hit game when the remaining number of times is two. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 94 (c) displays “remaining twice” and “during 10 consecutive villas”, and also displays “add bonus if an extra chance strike is taken”. . When the remaining number of times becomes one, a bowling chance game is started on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the big hit game. The result of the special figure variable game that will be the big hit game here is a big hit with no probability change, but with a probability of 53.3%, it is a big hit with 100 time reductions, with a probability of 46.7% It is a big hit without time. If the result of the special figure variable game is a big hit without a short time, the bonus is ended (step S519), the state shifts to the non-electric support state, and also shifts to the non-probable change state, thereby entering the normal game state. . In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 94 (g), an image of a scene where the strike could not be taken is displayed. On the other hand, if the result of the special figure variation game is a big hit with a time reduction of 100 times, it shifts to the non-probable change state, but the electric support state is extended until the special figure change stop display is performed 100 times. .

  In the pachinko machine 100, when the special figure determination result is a big hit in the electric support state, as shown in FIG. The fluctuation period is often a short period of 1 second. However, the probability of 500/65536 is 120 seconds and the probability of 35/65536 is 360 seconds. Therefore, even if the bonus is won without any change during the bonus, the special period may have a long period of 120 seconds or 360 seconds. It should be noted that the special figure may be changed for a long period only when a big win without a certain change is won during the bonus. Since the time is attached even in the non-probable change state, the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 is easy to open, and it is easy to determine whether or not a special figure is appropriate. If the fluctuation period of the special figure is a short period (here 1 second), the determination result of the special figure is immediately notified, and for one opening of the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252, In many cases, the special figure variation game is performed only once. In other words, the number of times of opening the door member 2521 of the general electric accessory 252 is synchronized with the number of limiters of the probability change. However, if the fluctuation period of the special figure is long (120 seconds or 360 seconds in this case), the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 is opened several times while the special figure fluctuation game is performed once. The payout can be earned by paying out based on the winning at the special chart starting port 230 (here, 7 balls / 1 winning).

  As shown in FIG. 93, when the fluctuation period of the special figure is short, the process returns to step S513, and “decimal 11 times” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. The On the other hand, when the fluctuation period of the special figure is long, information indicating the fluctuation period of the special figure included in the special symbol fluctuation start command sent from the main control unit 300 (here, long-term information) ), The first sub-control unit 400 can open the door member 2521 of the general electric accessory 252 several times during the period from the transition to the electric support state to the transition to the non-electric support state. The prediction calculation is performed. Here, the prediction calculation is performed based on the fact that the one opening period of the door member 2521 of the ordinary electric accessory 252 is 5.8 seconds. When the fluctuation period of the special figure is the first long period (120 seconds in this case), the number of times is uniformly larger than the specified number of times. For example, the door member 2521 of the ordinary electric accessory 252 is predicted to open 5 times in 120 seconds, and the remaining number of times (specific identification) is 16 times obtained by adding 5 times as the predicted number to 11 times as the specified number. It corresponds to an example of information). Further, when the variation period of the special figure is the second long period (360 seconds in this case) longer than the first long period, display with a predetermined symbol or the like (for example, ????) is performed uniformly. You may do it.

Here, the predicted number of times is the number of times that the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 can be opened before shifting to the non-electric support state. In many cases, the fluctuation period of the figure is a short period, and the special figure fluctuation game is often performed only once for one opening of the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252. The first sub-control unit 400 displays the predicted number of times as the number of remaining times on the decorative symbol display device 208 by regarding the number of times that the big change with probability variation can be obtained before the transition to the non-electric support state. (Step S520). As can be seen from this, in the pachinko machine 100, if the extra chance is not taken into account, one special-figure variable game and one opening of the ordinary electric-powered object 252 are linked.
FIG. 95 is a diagram showing a modified example of the extra chance shown in FIG. 94 (c).

  FIG. 95 (a) shows a decorative symbol display device 208 during a jackpot game in a state where the number of remaining jackpots with probability change before the transition to the non-electric support state is five. . In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 95 (a), a display such as “Addition of a big bonus when a big bonus chance cup-in is made” is made.

  FIG. 95C shows a screen that is displayed when “Large Bonus Chance” is false, and displays “Sorry”. That is, the “big bonus chance” shown in FIG. 6A is a screen that is displayed when a big win without a certainty is won during the bonus, and the remaining number of times must be reset. However, in FIG. 5C, the remaining number does not change and “5 remaining” is still displayed.

  On the other hand, FIG. 95B shows a screen that is displayed when the “big bonus chance” is true, and displays “congratulations”.

  FIG. 95 (d) shows a screen displayed when the fluctuation period of the special figure is the second long period (for example, 360 seconds). What is the remaining number of times? ? ? It has become times.

  FIG. 95 (e) is a screen that is displayed when the fluctuation period of the special figure is the first long period (for example, 120 seconds). It is 16 times including 5 times that is the predicted number.

  As described above, during a bonus in the special game state, when a long production period (a special figure fluctuation period) is reached, an unusual production is performed. In addition, when the jackpot symbol of the special figure is stopped and displayed in the electric support state, the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 is often opened once per special figure variable game. 89, the premiere A production is 12 times and the premiere B production is 36 times. In the pachinko machine 100 described above, the variable prize opening 234 (attacker) is opened, but the number of game balls is increased by opening the door member 2521 of the general electric accessory 252. As for the number of winning balls, 0 balls are awarded when winning at the ordinary figure starting gates 251 and 253, 4 balls when winning at the variable winning opening 234 (Attacker), and 7 when winning at the ordinary figure electric accessory 252 (special drawing starting opening). 10 balls may be used when winning a ball or general winning opening 226. Satisfaction of the predetermined condition referred to in the present invention corresponds to the entry of a game ball into the winning opening and the start opening. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, a predetermined game value is obtained based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied. A game value giving means (game medium payout means (payout device 152) for paying out game media). Furthermore, a variable prize opening 234 (attacker) with a small number of prize balls is arranged downstream of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 (special drawing start port) with many prize balls. Although it is conceivable to reverse the positional relationship between the ordinary electric accessory 252 and the variable winning opening 234, in this case, the variable winning opening 234 having a small number of winning balls is won first. In the present embodiment, during the bonus in the special game state, the game ball leaked to the ball entering the ordinary electric game 252 can be won in the variable winning opening 234 (attacker), contributing to an increase in the number of winning balls. To do.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in the electric support state, the intervals (intervals based on 1 second, 120 seconds, and 360 seconds) for deriving the big hit with special figure probability change (specific first success / failure determination result) are different. As a result, the interest of the game is improved. In addition, the game characteristics of the present embodiment are so-called limiter machines (there is an upper limit on the number of probability variation consecutive games), and the number of game balls is increased by a general electric accessory 252 (electric chew). In other words, since the time between jackpots of the special figure is different, the number of times of opening the electric chew during that time is different, so that it is possible to change the amount of game balls to be increased. This game characteristic is advantageous as the player fits. Moreover, by deriving the hit of the normal symbol with high probability and in a short time, the electric chew can be released frequently, and the electric chew contributes to the game characteristics of increasing the game ball. Further, in the electric support state, it is possible to provide a difference in the opening frequency of the electric chew by giving a change (1 second, 120 seconds, 360 seconds) to the fluctuation time of the special figure. In addition, the probability of deriving the special figure jackpot until reaching the limiter is made high, so that the opening frequency of the electric chew and the obtainable game ball based on the opening frequency can be changed by the fluctuation time of the special figure. it can. In addition, by resetting the limiter, it becomes possible to make the result of the special figure more interesting in the game characteristic in which the number of game balls is increased by using the general-purpose electric accessory 252 (electric chew). In addition, the long fluctuation time of the special figure itself is advantageous for the player in the special game state, but by enabling the long fluctuation time to be determined at the time of resetting the limiter, the special figure can be obtained even after the end of the fluctuation. It becomes possible to continue the special gaming state until the derivation for the prescribed number of times. That is, it is possible to simultaneously give two advantageous states for the player, that is, limiter reset and long-term fluctuation. Furthermore, the interest of the game in the special game state may be improved by notifying the current number of consecutive resorts and the remaining number of times until the limiter. In addition, when notification based on the number of times the electric chew is opened, it may be linked to the ball and the interest may be further improved. Furthermore, the long-term fluctuation of the special figure is equivalent to the one-time special figure for the limiter, and is equivalent to the short-term fluctuation. May increase. The game performance in this embodiment is a limiter machine, so at any timing, it is not guaranteed to give a special game state more than the number of limiters. It is possible to notify the player as if a special game state more than the number of limiters is given by using the fact that there are more times than the number of times (limiter subtraction). That is, it is possible to link the outgoing ball and the notification. Furthermore, by setting the notification content to the remaining number of times until the limiter, even if the notification exceeds the specified number of times, it is possible to link the balls, so the interest of the game may be improved.

  It should be noted that the special figure variation period may be long only when the bonus is won without change during the bonus. Alternatively, even in the case of losing, a long-term variation period of a special figure may be used. Is possible.

  In addition, in the embodiment, the configuration of the game board 200 is such that the game ball is guided to both the ordinary electric game 252 and the variable prize opening 234 when the player makes a right turn (during a special game state). However, it is not limited to this. For example, the variable winning opening 234 (attacker) may be arranged at a place where it is difficult to win a prize with the firing strength during the special gaming state. In this case, it is possible to make the attacker not open during the long fluctuation period (large bonus) of the special figure.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the big hit probability at the time of low special figure is 1/4 and the next big hit can be realized because the number of time reductions given after adding (after non-probable big hit) is 100 times. At the same time, it is possible to increase the number of game balls by releasing the general electric accessory 252 during the 3/4 special figure loss.

  Further, the determination of the long-term fluctuation period of the special figure may be made to completely correspond to the stop pattern of the special figure at 1: 1.

In addition, the interval for deriving the big hit with special figure probability change (specific first success / failure determination result) can be varied depending on the period during the big hit game as well as the fluctuation time (effect time) of the special figure. For example, the interval can be made different by changing the time of the start effect or end effect of the big hit game or the effect of the interval between rounds. Also, the interval can be made different by changing the special display stop display period.
Subsequently, characteristic points in the present invention will be described.

  In the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, even if a game ball passes (wins) through the ordinary drawing start gates 251 and 253, the winning ball is not paid out. This corresponds to a non-profit entry area that does not grant the player to the player. In addition, when the game ball passes through the usual figure start gates 251 and 253 (wins), the player is given the benefit of being able to receive a lottery for the usual figure variable game. On the other hand, when a game ball enters (wins), a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of award balls are paid out at the central general winning opening 226 disposed below the central general starting gate 251, and the right side When a game ball enters (wins), a special figure start port 230 that allows a game ball to enter when the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 disposed below the start gate 251 is opened is also a predetermined number. (For example, 7 balls) prize balls are paid out. Therefore, the central general winning opening 226 and the special figure starting opening 230 correspond to a profit grant entry area in which a profit of paying out a prize ball is given to the player when the game ball enters.

  In the present embodiment, a normal symbol variation start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the normal symbol variation start command outputs a control command instructing the second sub-control unit 400 to cause the decorative symbol display device 208 to execute the normal symbol variation effect. The second sub-control unit 500 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the control command, and a predetermined effect image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as a general symbol variation effect. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the normal symbol variation start command instructs the sound source IC 416 shown in FIG. 81 to output a predetermined sound as a normal symbol variation effect, and the speaker 120 outputs a predetermined sound output. Done. Here, the display of the predetermined effect image executed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the predetermined sound output executed by the speaker 120 correspond to an example of the predetermined effect according to the present invention.

  Further, when a game ball enters the central general winning opening 226 or the special figure starting opening 230, as described above, the main control unit 300 sets winning reception information in the winning receiving process, and the winning reception information is the first sub-control. Transmitted to unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the winning acceptance information outputs a control command instructing the second sub-control unit 400 to cause the decorative symbol display device 208 to perform a prize ball payout appearance, and the second sub-control unit 500 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 based on the control command, and a specific effect image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as a prize ball payout appearance. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the winning acceptance information instructs the sound source IC 416 shown in FIG. 81 to output a specific sound as a prize ball payout appearance, and the speaker 120 outputs a specific sound. Here, the display of the specific effect image executed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the specific sound output executed by the speaker 120 correspond to an example of the specific effect according to the present invention.

  FIG. 96 is a time chart of the regular symbol variation effect and the prize ball payout appearance. In FIG. 96, time elapses from the left to the right in the figure, and the same applies to the subsequent time charts.

  When the ball detection sensor provided in the non-profit entry area which is the normal start gates 251 and 253 detects the entry of the game ball to the normal start gates 251 and 253, the detection signal is not detected. Changes to detection, and at the timing of (a) shown in the drawing, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the speaker 120 start a normal symbol variation effect (non-profit entry area entry effect).

  When a game ball that has passed through the central normal start gate 251 enters the central general prize opening 226, a ball detection sensor provided in the central general prize opening 226 detects the entry of the game ball and the detection signal is not detected. From the detection to the detection, at the timing of (a) shown in the figure, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the speaker 120 start a prize ball payout appearance (profit grant entry area entry effect), and (c) shown in the figure At the timing, the award-paying performance will end. On the other hand, the regular symbol variation effect started at the timing of (a) shown in the drawing continues even after the appearance of the prize ball payout finishes. That is, the execution period of the regular symbol variation effect is longer than the execution period of the prize ball payout appearance, and the execution period of the prize ball payout appearance is included in the execution period of the regular symbol variation effect.

In addition, if the number of holdings of the usual figure when the game ball passes through the usual figure starting gates 251 and 253 is less than a predetermined number (for example, 4), the main control unit 300 sends the first sub control unit 400 Send a pending increase command. The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the universal figure hold increase command outputs a control command that instructs the second sub-control unit 400 to cause the decorative symbol display device 208 to execute the general figure hold increase effect. Also good. In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the universal hold increase command may instruct the sound source IC 416 shown in FIG. 81 to output a predetermined sound as a general hold increase effect. By doing so, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as a general figure holding increase effect, and a predetermined sound output is performed on the speaker 120, and the display of these predetermined effect images is performed. Alternatively, the predetermined sound output may be a predetermined effect according to the present invention.
FIG. 97 is a diagram showing a specific example of a regular symbol variation effect and a prize ball payout appearance.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 97 (a), combinations of stop symbols of ordinary decorative symbols are displayed. In other words, this is a state in which the usual game is stopped. In this state, when the game ball passes through the central general diagram starting gate 251 (corresponding to the timing (A) shown in FIG. 96), the symbol variation display is started on the general diagram display device 210, and FIG. ), The decorative symbol display device 208 starts the usual decorative symbol variation display (corresponding to an example of a predetermined effect image). In addition, from the loudspeaker 120 (not shown), a normal variation sound indicating that the symbol variation display is performed on the universal symbol display device 210 is output. The decorative symbol change display and the normal change sound output correspond to an example of the normal symbol change effect. Further, the central universal start gate 251 corresponds to an example of a first entry area.

  Subsequently, when a game ball enters the central general winning opening 226 (corresponding to the timing of (A) shown in FIG. 96), as shown in FIG. In the center of the display screen of the symbol display device 208, a scary-faced panda character image 2081 (corresponding to an example of another image) uttering “Jara-Jara” is displayed in large size. That is, a panda character image 2081 with a scary face is displayed so as to cover the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a prize ball payout sound “Jarajara” imitating the payout sound is output from the speaker 120. Is done. The display of the scary-faced panda character image 2081 and the prize ball payout sound output “Jara Jara” correspond to an example of the prize ball payout appearance.

  In this specific example, a scary-faced panda character image 2081 covers a part of the decorative symbol variation display image, and a part of the decorative symbol variation display image (here, the middle symbol display area 208b) cannot be seen. ing. Also, a prize ball payout sound starts to sound from the middle of the usual figure fluctuation sound, and the usual figure fluctuation sound is heard by covering the usual figure fluctuation sound. In this way, the usual symbol variation effect changes depending on the appearance of the prize ball. As a result, the player is likely to notice that the prize ball payout appearance is given priority and the player is paying out the prize ball. In other words, since the player does not notice the generation of the winning ball, there are cases where the player can be made to think that the player has a better pedestal than the player who does not notice it. In addition, since the effect in which the player concentrates is changed, it becomes easier for the player to notice the occurrence of the prize ball. Furthermore, since the game ball that has passed through the central common figure starting gate 251 wins the central general winning opening 226, it is possible to enjoy the effect that the normal symbol variation effect and the normal symbol variation effect have changed with the same game ball. In some cases, the player can enjoy many effects with a small investment and improve the impression of the game table.

  FIG. 98 is a diagram showing a specific example of the general figure hold increase effect and the prize ball payout appearance in a state where the normal symbol variation effect is being performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (a), the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as the symbol variation display) is performed in the universal symbol display device 210. The decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Further, from the speaker 120 (not shown), a normal figure fluctuation sound indicating that the symbol fluctuation display is being performed in the universal figure display device 210 is output. That is, the regular symbol variation effect in the symbol variation display is performed.

  In this example, in the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208, a universal figure hold display corresponding to a set of start information stored in the universal figure hold storage unit of the RAM 308 is displayed in the universal figure hold storage unit. Are displayed side by side from the left in order from the oldest in the order in which the start information is stored (in order of winning). The general map hold display is a display indicating that the start information is stored or stored in the first start information storage means (the general map hold storage section of the RAM 308). In other words, a general map hold display is performed for each normal start information stored in the first start information storage means, and the number of the general map hold display corresponds to the general hold number. The decorative symbol display device 208 corresponds to an example of a first start hold display unit. Each time the first sub-control unit 400 receives a general-purpose hold increase command, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a hold-increase instruction for the general-purpose figure to the second sub-control unit 500, and the second sub-control unit 500 is based on the instruction. Then, the decorative symbol display device 208 is controlled to increase the number of the universal figure hold display by one. On the other hand, each time the first sub-control unit 400 receives a universal symbol variation start command that is a signal for the usual-time reservation, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a universal symbol hold decrease signal to the second sub-control unit 500, and the second sub-control The unit 500 controls the decorative symbol display device 208 on the basis of the ordinary figure reservation decrease signal, and decreases the number of ordinary figure reservation displays by one. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (a), two common figure hold displays are displayed. Hereinafter, the general map hold display representing the old general map hold (hereinafter referred to as the general map hold 1) is referred to as the first general map hold display 291 and the new general map hold (hereinafter referred to as the general map hold 2). The general map hold display representing) is referred to as a second general map hold display 292. Here, the usual number of holds is two.

  If the game ball passes through the central common figure start gate 251 while the symbol variation display is being performed, the symbol variation display is being performed here, and the number of holds of the regular symbol is also a predetermined number. Since it is less than 2, the starting information based on the current game ball passing through the central normal figure starting gate 251 is stored in the normal figure holding storage unit of the RAM 308, and the number of holding of the normal figure increases. A third common figure hold display 293 is additionally displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 98 (b). The third general map hold display 293 displayed here continues to be displayed until the general map hold 3 represented by the third general map hold display 293 is consumed. Further, at the same time as the third general map hold display 293 is additionally displayed, a general map hold increasing sound for notifying that the general hold has increased is output from the speaker 120 for a predetermined period. This general figure hold increase sound stops before the symbol variation display ends. The additional display of the third general map hold display 293 and the output of the general map hold increase sound correspond to an example of the general map hold increase effect.

  Subsequently, when a game ball enters the central general winning opening 226, the voice “Jara Jara” is displayed at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 on which the decorative symbol variation display is performed, as in FIG. 97 (c). A panda character image 2081 with a scary face that emits “” is displayed in large size, and a prize ball payout sound “Jara Jara” simulating a payout sound is output from the speaker 120 (see FIG. 98C). A scary face portion 2081a of the panda displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and a balloon portion 2081b "Jara Jara" is displayed in the effect display area 208d. In the example shown in FIG. 98, the display of the scary face panda character image 2081 and the output of the prize ball payout sound “Jara Jara” correspond to an example of the prize ball payout appearance.

  In this specific example, a scary face portion 2081a of the panda covers a part of the decorative symbol variation display image, and a part of the decorative symbol variation display image (in this case, the middle symbol display area 208b) is not visible. . In addition, a balloon portion 2081b called “Jarajara” covers most of each of the first general map hold display to the third general map hold display 291 to 293 displayed in the effect display area 208d. 293 is not visible. Also, from the middle of the general fluctuation sound indicating that the symbol fluctuation display is being performed, first, a general figure hold increasing sound that informs that the retention of the general figure has increased starts to sound. I hear overtones. Next, a prize ball payout sound also starts to sound, and a prize ball payout sound is heard over the usual figure fluctuation sound and the usual figure holding increase sound. In this way, the general symbol variation effect changes with the appearance of the prize ball payout, and the general symbol hold increase effect also changes with the appearance of the prize ball payment. As a result, it is possible to inform players who are concentrating on the production that the prize ball has been generated due to the effect of the production change, that is, the appearance of the prize ball payout, and improve the impression of the game stand There are cases where it is possible. That is, by covering a part of the effect image that has been performed so far with the effect image due to the appearance of the prize ball, it is possible to visually report that the prize ball has been generated, and to improve the impression of the game stand There are cases where it is possible. In addition, when the production sound from the speaker 120 is applied, it can be heard audibly that a prize ball has been generated.

In the above description, the prize ball paying appearance is covered with the usual symbol variation effect and / or the usual figure hold increase effect, but the ordinary symbol variation effect and / or the usual figure hold increase effect is included in the prize ball pay appearance. It may be an aspect that changes.
FIG. 99 is a time chart in which the regular symbol variation effect changes to a prize ball payout appearance.

  Also in the time chart shown in FIG. 99, when the ball detection sensor provided in the profit non-giving approach area which is the normal start gates 251 and 253 detects the entrance of the game ball to the normal start gates 251 and 253, The detection signal changes from non-detection to detection, and at the timing of (a) shown in the figure, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the speaker 120 start a normal symbol variation effect (profit non-given entry region entry effect). The

  When a game ball that has passed through the central normal start gate 251 enters the central general prize opening 226, a ball detection sensor provided in the central general prize opening 226 detects the entry of the game ball and the detection signal is not detected. In the decorative symbol display device 208 and the speaker 120, which has changed from detection to detection and performed the normal symbol variation effect at the timing of (a) shown in the figure, the normal symbol variation effect is ended, and a prize is given instead. Start ball paying appearance (profit grant entry area entry effect). Eventually, at the timing of (c) shown in the figure, the appearance of the prize ball payout ends.

  FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a specific example of changing from a regular symbol variation effect to a prize ball payout appearance.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 100 (a), a combination of stop symbols of ordinary decorative symbols is displayed. In other words, this is a state in which the usual game is stopped. In this state, when the game ball passes through the central general map starting gate 251 (corresponding to the timing (A) shown in FIG. 99), as shown in FIG. Is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of decorative symbols. In the variation display of the decorative symbols on the decorative symbol display device 208, the background screen is blank. In addition, the speaker 120 (not shown) outputs the first common figure fluctuation sound indicating that the symbol fluctuation display is performed on the common figure display device 210. The decorative symbol variation display and the first ordinary diagram variation sound output correspond to an example of a typical symbol variation effect.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 100C, the symbol “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. The display mode of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed here is the default display mode shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is continued. In addition, the output of the 1st usual figure fluctuation sound is continuing from the speaker 120. FIG.

  Subsequently, when a game ball enters the central general winning award 226 (corresponding to the timing of (A) shown in FIG. 99), as shown in FIG. The background screen of the symbol display device 208 changes from a non-patterned background screen to a predetermined background screen (here, a cross-hatched pattern background screen), and the decorative symbol (“decoration 6” of the left symbol display area 208a stopped and displayed earlier. The display mode of “)” also changes from the default display mode to a predetermined display mode (here, a black-colored display mode). Also, the display mode of the image indicating that the decorative symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, which is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, is also a predetermined display mode (here, a horizontal striped pattern display mode). ). Also, the normal fluctuation sound output from the speaker 120 is switched from the first normal fluctuation sound output so far to the second normal fluctuation sound. This display of the predetermined background screen and display of the predetermined design of the decorative pattern and the output of the second ordinary figure fluctuation sound are equivalent to an example of the appearance of the prize ball payout, and the effect is changed from the usual figure change effect to the prize ball payout appearance. Has changed. Note that this effect change can be regarded as a change in the usual symbol variation effect itself. In any case, based on the fact that a game ball has entered the central general winning award 226, an effect in which the normal symbol variation effect is changed is performed. Note that the decorative symbol that has changed to the predetermined display mode remains changed to the predetermined display mode until the symbol variation display on the universal symbol display device 210 ends, and the timing at which the symbol variation display ends, that is, the stop symbol is changed. At the timing of display, the display returns to the default display mode or further changes to another display mode. Also, the normal pattern fluctuation sound that has changed to the second general pattern fluctuation sound remains changed to the second general pattern fluctuation sound until the symbol fluctuation display on the general diagram display device 210 ends, and the symbol fluctuation display is When finished, the usual fluctuation sound itself stops ringing.

  As described above, a change in the regular symbol variation effect itself occurs due to the establishment of a prize ball payout condition (predetermined condition) such as winning a prize at the central general prize opening 226, and a game in which a prize ball is paid out. It may be easier for the person to notice, and the ball holding may be better, which may improve the impression of the game stand.

  FIG. 101 is a diagram illustrating a specific example in which the general figure hold increase effect changes in a state where the normal symbol variation effect is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 101 (a), a symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as the symbol variation display) is performed in the universal symbol display device 210. The decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Further, from the speaker 120 (not shown), a normal figure fluctuation sound indicating that the symbol fluctuation display is being performed in the universal figure display device 210 is output. That is, also in the specific example shown in FIG. 101, the general symbol variation effect in the symbol variation display is performed. Further, in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 101 (a), a first general map hold display 291 representing the general map hold 1 and a second general map hold display 292 representing the general map hold 2 are displayed. Is displayed.

  If the game ball passes through the central general figure starting gate 251 while the symbol variation display is being performed, the number of holdings of the normal figure increases here, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. A third common map hold display 293 is additionally displayed in the effect display area 208d. In FIG. 101 (b), three general map hold displays, a first general map hold display 291 to a third general map hold display 293, are displayed. In addition, it is displayed in a black display mode. Further, at the same time as the third general map hold display 293 is additionally displayed, the speaker 120 outputs a first general map hold increase sound for notifying that the general hold has increased for a predetermined period. The additional display of the third general map hold display 293 and the output of the first general map hold increase sound correspond to an example of the general map hold increase effect.

  Subsequently, when a game ball enters the central general winning opening 226, the display mode of the third general map hold display 293, which is the default display mode, changes to a predetermined display mode as shown in FIG. . That is, among the three general map hold displays 291 to 293 displayed in the default display mode, the display mode of only the third general map hold display 293 increased this time is a predetermined display mode (here, a horizontal stripe pattern). Change. In addition, the normal figure hold increase sound output from the speaker 120 is switched from the first normal figure hold increase sound output so far to the second general figure hold increase sound. The display according to the predetermined display mode in the third general figure hold display 293 and the output of the second general figure hold increase sound correspond to an example of the prize ball payout appearance, and the normal figure hold increase effect is changed to the prize ball payout appearance. The direction has changed. This effect change can be regarded as a change in the usual figure hold increase effect itself. In any case, based on the fact that a game ball has entered the central general winning award 226, an effect is produced in which the usual figure holding increase effect is changed. It should be noted that the third universal map hold display 293 changed to the predetermined display mode is digested with the hold of the third universal map hold even if the display changes to the predetermined display mode until the symbol variation display ends. The display 293 itself may remain changed to a predetermined display mode until it disappears. Further, the general figure hold increase sound that has changed to the second general figure hold increase sound continues to sound while changing to the second general figure hold increase sound, and stops ringing before the symbol variation display ends.

  As described above, due to the establishment of a prize ball payout condition (predetermined condition) such as winning a prize at the central general prize opening 226, here, a change occurs in the usual figure holding increase effect itself, and the prize ball is paid out. In particular, the player is likely to notice, the ball holding is considered good, and the impression of the game table may be improved.

  Next, in the specific example shown in FIG. 101, the third universal map hold display 293 changed to the predetermined display mode remains changed to the predetermined display mode at least until the symbol variation display ends. An example of returning to the default display mode before the symbol variation display ends will be described.

  FIG. 102 is a diagram illustrating an example of returning to the ordinary figure holding increase effect after the effect changes from the usual figure holding increase effect to the prize ball paying appearance.

  In the time chart shown in FIG. 102 (a), the usual figure hold increase effect (non-profit entry area entry effect) is started at the timing shown in FIG. The figure hold increase effect is temporarily changed to a prize ball payout appearance (profit grant entry area entry effect). Then, after a prize ball payout appearance is made for a predetermined period, at a timing shown in FIG.

  102 (b) is a diagram showing images displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 by layer at the timing of (a) shown in FIG. 102 (a). The images displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing (a) shown in FIG. 102A are a background image, an image indicating that the decorative symbol is being variably displayed, and three hold-display images. Become. Among these three hold display images, both the first map hold display 291 image and the second map hold display 292 image are images according to the default display mode, that is, a patternless black image. . On the other hand, the image of the third general map hold display 293 has changed to an image with black horizontal stripes on a white background due to the appearance of a prize ball.

  The background image is drawn on the first layer L1 displayed on the farthest side as viewed from the player, and the image indicating that the decorative design is variably displayed is the second layer one before the first layer L1. Draw at L2.

  The three images 291 to 293 displayed on hold in the usual map are drawn on the third layer L3 that is one before the second layer L2. All of the three ordinary-pending display images drawn on the third layer L3 are a patternless and black image (black circle image) 290b. The fourth layer L4, which is one level before the third layer L3, has a black horizontal stripe on a white background at a position overlapping the black circle image of the third map hold display 293 drawn on the third layer L3. An image 290w is displayed. Here, the fourth layer L4 is a layer displayed on the most front side when viewed from the player. The image of the third general map hold display 293 is obtained by overlapping a black circle image 290b drawn on the third layer L3 with an image 290w with black horizontal stripes drawn on the white layer drawn on the fourth layer L4, and a black circle image 290b. Cannot be seen, and an image 290w with black horizontal stripes on the white background drawn on the fourth layer L4 can be seen.

  In FIG. 102 (b), (B) is a diagram showing the images displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 by layer at the timing (C) shown in FIG. 102 (A). The image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing (b) shown in FIG. 102 (b) is also a background image, an image indicating that the decorative symbol is being variably displayed, and three reserved display images. Become. All of the three pending display images here are images (black circle images) in the default display mode. That is, the image of the third general map hold display 293 that has been changed due to the appearance of the prize ball payout is changed to the image (black circle image) in the default display mode by returning to the normal figure hold increase effect. In the drawing process of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing (c) shown in FIG. 102 (a), the first layer L1 to the third layer L3 in the drawing process of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing (b) are used as they are. Only the fourth layer L4 need not be drawn. By doing so, the image 290w with black horizontal stripes on a white background is not displayed, and the image of the third general map hold display 293 also returns to the black circle image, that is, the default display mode. In this aspect, it is possible to reduce the additional processing of drawing.

  Subsequently, in the specific examples so far, the prize ball payout appearance has been started at the timing when the game ball has passed the central general winning opening 226. .

  FIG. 103 is a diagram showing an example in which a payout for payball is started slightly after the timing at which a game ball passes through the central general winning opening 226.

  In the time chart shown in FIG. 103 (a), the usual figure holding increase effect (profit non-granting approach area entry effect) is started at the timing shown in FIG. 103 (a), and the game is shown at the timing shown in FIG. 103 (a). Although it is detected that the ball has passed through the central general winning opening 226, at this timing, the usual figure holding increase effect does not change to the prize ball payout appearance (profit grant entry area entry effect), or the elapse of a predetermined period, or Based on a predetermined opportunity that occurs thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. The predetermined opportunity here may specifically be that a predetermined effect (for example, super reach, etc.) is executed as a regular symbol variation effect. Then, after a prize ball payout appearance is made for a certain period of time, at the timing shown in FIG.

  103 (b) is a diagram showing, by layer, images displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing (c) shown in FIG. 103 (a). The image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing (c) shown in FIG. 103 (a) includes a background image, an image indicating that the decorative symbol is being variably displayed, and three hold-display images. Become. Of these three hold display images, the first map hold display 291 image and the second map hold display 292 image are both images according to the default display mode, that is, a patternless black image (black circle). Image). On the other hand, the image of the third general map hold display 293 is changed from a black circle image to an image in which a white horizontal stripe is added to a black circle due to the appearance of a prize ball.

  Also in this example, the background image is drawn on the first layer L1, and the image indicating that the decorative design is being variably displayed is drawn on the second layer L2.

  In addition, three images 291 to 293 displayed on the hold map are drawn on the third layer L3. Here again, all of the three general-purpose reserved display images drawn on the third layer L3 are a patternless and black image (black circle image) 290b. In the fourth layer L4, an image 290s with only white horizontal stripes is displayed at a position overlapping the black circle image of the third general map hold display 293 drawn on the third layer L3. In the image of the third common map hold display 293, the black circle image 290b drawn on the third layer L3 overlaps the image 290s of only the white horizontal stripe drawn on the fourth layer L4, and the white horizontal stripe is added to the black circle. Looks like an image. That is, a part of the black circle image 290b is covered with the image 290s of only white horizontal stripes, but the remaining part of the black circle image 290b is visible, and the black circle image 290b drawn on the third layer L3 The image 290s with only white horizontal stripes drawn on the fourth layer L4 is a single image.

  103 (b) is a diagram showing, by layer, images displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing (d) shown in FIG. 103 (a). The three on-hold display images here are also images (black circle images) in the default display mode. That is, the image of the third general map hold display 293 that has been changed due to the appearance of the prize ball payout is changed to the image (black circle image) in the default display mode by returning to the normal figure hold increase effect. In the drawing process of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing (d) shown in FIG. 103 (a), the first layer L1 to the third layer L3 in the drawing process of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the timing (c) are used as they are. Only the fourth layer L4 need not be drawn. By rubbing, the image 290s with only white horizontal stripes is not displayed, and the image of the third general map hold display 293 also returns to the black circle image 290b, that is, the default display mode. Also in this mode, it is possible to reduce the additional processing of drawing.

  In addition, in a state where a prize ball payout appearance is performed, for example, a state where a scary-faced panda character image 2081 uttered “Jara Jara” as shown in FIG. 97 (c) is displayed. When a game ball enters (wins a prize) in the central common figure starting gate 251 and wins a win in the usual figure determination based on the prize, a predetermined effect (for example, an effect instructing to make a right hand) Is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a predetermined effect is cast on the balloon portion 2081b "Jarajara" which is a part of the appearance of the prize ball payout appearance, and the prize ball payout appearance changes.

  Further, even when the effect of instructing to make a right hand is not performed, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the general symbol variation effect and stops displaying the decorative symbol indicating the result of determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct. In some cases, the player can recognize that the door member 2521 of the ordinary electric accessory 252 is opened.

  In the above description, the game ball has entered the central general start gate 251 and the lower central general winning opening 226 as an example, but the right general start gate 251 and the lower right general start gate 251 are arranged below it. The same applies to the special drawing starting port 230 that allows the game ball to enter when the door member 2521 of the general-purpose electric accessory 252 is opened. The same applies not only to the central general winning opening 226 below the central ordinary starting gate 251 but also to other general winning openings 226 and entry areas where prize balls are paid out.

  Further, in the above description, the production sound (for example, a prize ball payout sound) is output using the speaker 120, but the game ball paid out from the payout device 152 is output to the upper plate 126 or the upper plate 126. A collision sound generated by colliding with a stored game ball may be used as a production sound (for example, a prize ball payout sound). By doing so, since the collision sound is directed to the player from a direction different from that of the speaker 120, the player may be able to recognize the occurrence of profit more.

Then, the pachinko machine of 2nd Embodiment of this invention is demonstrated. In the following description, matters that overlap with the items described so far will be described again. In addition, components having the same names as those of the components described so far are described using the same reference numerals as those used so far.
FIG. 104 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 according to the second embodiment as viewed from the front.

  In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially in the center, and around the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, and the ordinary device. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”.

  The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLumin S3ence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be employed.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and in the present embodiment, are constituted by 7 segment LEDs. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are predetermined symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol that represents the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214 in an enhanced form. The display device 208 may also be a predetermined symbol display means.

  The universal figure hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of predetermined first variable games (detailed universal figure variable games to be described later) that are held, and in this embodiment, a predetermined number of common figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four).

  The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of predetermined second variable games (a special figure variable game to be described later in detail) that are being held. In the embodiment, it is possible to hold a special figure variable game up to a predetermined number (for example, four, eight for the first special figure and the second special figure). The term “hold” as used herein means that the start of various determination processes (such as lottery processes) based on start-up information described later is put on hold.

  The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp (notification means) for performing notification indicating the current symbol control state. This high-probability lamp 222 is configured so as to give a notification indicating the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on until the start of the big hit game, and thereafter does not notify the current symbol control state. Yes. In the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state immediately before the power is turned off is restored. This symbol control state will be described later, but the symbol control state here may be any one of a normal state, a short-time state (electric support state), and a probability variation state. It is good also as one state in the state without special figure certain change.

  In the present specification, the term “control state” will be used to describe the state inside the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100). The term “control state” includes the concept of a so-called gaming state.

  In addition, a general prize opening 226, a general figure starting opening 228, a first special figure starting opening 230, a second special figure starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are provided around the effect device 206. ing.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). 79), the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 79 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls as prize balls to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning may be referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player may be referred to as a “lending ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting region where the size of the entrance through which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 79 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball. At the same time, the special figure changing game is started by the first special figure display device 212. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which the size of the first special diagram starting port 230 does not change.

  In the present embodiment, only one second special figure start port 232 is disposed below the general view start port 228. That is, the second special figure starting port 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200. In the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, a pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid are provided. A combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure starting port 232 is provided. It corresponds to variable starting means, and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning a prize to the second special figure starting port 232. That is, when the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an open / close mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the universal figure change game is won and the universal figure display device 210 stops and displays the symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 are opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and the second special figure starting port 232 is opened. The ball can be entered (easy winning state), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 are open is an easy winning state. In other words, the second special figure starting port 232 has either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size) of the entrance (game ball entrance). A variable starting area in which the ease of entering a game ball, which changes from one size to the other, is equivalent to an example of a second starting area. The size of the large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. In the state where the pair of blade members 2321 are opened, out of the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special feature that is the variable start area is more than the game ball that has entered the first special figure start opening 230 that is the fixed start area. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232 in the figure. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special diagram starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  In the present embodiment, only one variable winning port 234 is disposed below the center of the game board 200. The variable prize opening 234 includes a variable prize opening and a door member 2341 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid. The variable winning opening may be referred to as a big winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 may be referred to as an attacker. The door member 2341 changes its state from any one of a predetermined closed state and an open state in which a game ball can easily enter the variable winning opening more than the closed state. Both the closed state and the open state are stationary states, and the closed state is a predetermined first stationary state. The closed state at the variable winning opening 234 of this embodiment is that the door member 2341 is on the player side of the game board 200. It is in a stationary state that matches the surface. On the other hand, the open state is a predetermined second stationary state, and the open state in the variable winning opening 234 of the present embodiment is rotated to the player side until the door member 2341 is substantially perpendicular to the game board 200. It is stationary. The variable winning opening 234 is kept closed until the big hit game is started, and when the big hit of the special figure is won and the big hit game is started, the state change is repeated between the open state and the closed state. The variable winning award 234 corresponds to an example of a winning device according to the present invention, and winning the special figure jackpot corresponds to an example of satisfying the second condition according to the present invention. Note that the closed state may be a state where the game ball is slightly opened to the extent that it is substantially impossible to enter, in addition to a completely closed state. Further, the variable winning opening is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 104 as long as it is a winning for the gaming ball by passing or entering the gaming ball. When the special figure variable game is won and the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

The sphere accommodated in the upper plate 126 is supplied to the firing position of the firing rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the launch motor is driven with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the player's ball launch handle 134, and the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 146 and the launcher 148 into the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or start opening (Outside the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232), winning out any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal start port 228, the out port 240 To reach.
<Directing device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball naild by the game nail 238 and the like. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate the ball.

  In this embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b imitating the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor and an elbow (not shown) that rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm 224b at a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

  The decorative lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122, the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect movable body 224, and the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 104 correspond to the effect means. Among these, the decorative symbol display device 208 is the image display means. It corresponds to an example.

In addition, about the circuit structure of the control part of the pachinko machine 100 in 2nd Embodiment, since it is fundamentally the same as the circuit structure of the control part of the pachinko machine of 1st Embodiment, description is abbreviate | omitted.
<Type of design>

  Next, using FIGS. 105A to 105D, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special maps and general maps to be described will be described.

  FIG. 105 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol mode (second symbol mode) of the special figure. The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the second special figure start port 232 has a ball. The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start port sensor which is a ball detection sensor detects that the ball has entered. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment “variable display of special figure 1” (special figure). (Floating game). When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment “variable display of special figure 2” ( (Special map variable game). Then, when the variation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 When elapses, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special symbol 2. Hereinafter, a series of displays from the start of the “figure display of the special figure 1 or 2” to the stop display of the special symbol form of the special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as a special figure fluctuation stop display. This special figure variable stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  In FIG. 105 (a), six types of special drawings from “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure F” are shown as stop symbol forms in the symbol variation display. In FIG. 105 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  In the present embodiment, four types of jackpot symbols ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure D") are prepared as the stop pattern form of the special figure. “Special figure A” is a 15 round (R) special jackpot symbol, and when special figure A is stopped and displayed, the control state thereafter becomes a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. “Special figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol with electric support, and when special figure B is stopped and displayed, the control state thereafter becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. “Special figure C” is a 4R jackpot symbol with probability variation, and when this special figure C is stopped and displayed, the control state thereafter becomes a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. "Special figure D" is a 4R big hit symbol, and when this special figure D is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state.

  The round here means the number of chances that a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls) can be obtained. In the present embodiment, the number of operations of the variable prize opening 234 shown in FIG. 104 is represented, and the 15th round is one or more opening / closing operations of the variable prize opening 234 (one operation). This means that this operation continues 15 times. That is, one operation corresponds to an example of a specific change in which the open / close state changes from the first open / close state (here, the closed state) to the second open / close state (here, the open state). During the big hit game, the specific change is performed a plurality of constant times (15 times in the case of 15 rounds). Each round has a predetermined round end condition (for example, the entry of a game ball of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls), acquisition of a predetermined amount of game value (predetermined number of balls), elapse of a predetermined time from the start of the round, etc. 1 or more) is completed. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, the determination as to whether or not the big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the decision as to whether or not it is a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The big hit with special figure A and the special figure big hit with special figure C have a high probability of winning a big hit in the next special figure variation game (special big hit or short-time big hit). Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In this embodiment, during the big hit game, the special figure low probability state is entered, and when the special figure A or special figure C is won, the special figure high probability state is maintained until the next big hit after the big hit game ends. Is done. On the other hand, when the special figure B or the special figure D is won, the special figure remains in a low probability state even after the big hit game ends. The special figure low probability state corresponds to an example of a first probability control state. In addition, a special figure high probability state after the jackpot game is finished is sometimes referred to as a special figure probability change. Is an example of a second stochastic control state. This special figure high probability state may be referred to as a probability variation state. In the present specification, the term “control state” will be used to describe the state inside the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100). The term “control state” includes the concept of a so-called gaming state. The transition of the probability control state is performed by the main control unit 300, and the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a probability control state transition unit.

  In addition, when the special figure A or the special figure B is won, after the big hit game is over, the state shifts to a state with electric support (electric support) (hereinafter referred to as an electric support state). The electric support state is a predetermined state in which the player's advantage is higher than the non-electric support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. Say. This power support state is one of the control states prepared in the pachinko machine 100, and may be referred to as a time-short state. That is, the electric support state (time-short state) is started on condition that the big hit game ends. Strictly speaking, the “electric support state” is a state related to a general plan, and the “short-time state” is a state related to a special figure or a state related to a general figure and a special figure. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is also provided with a time reduction flag. When the time reduction flag is set to ON, it is in the electric support state and is usually in a high probability state. In the normal figure high probability state, compared to the normal figure low probability state, it becomes easier to win the common figure variable game (general figure certain change). For example, the winning probability of the usual figure floating game is 1/101 in the usual figure low probability state (non-electric support state), but increases to 99/101 in the usual figure high probability state (electric support state). In addition, in the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the general figure change game is shorter than that in the non-electric support state (the general figure change short). For example, in the non-electric support state, the fluctuation time of the usual game of 10 seconds is reduced to 1.2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, compared to the non-electric support state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 tends to be long (electric chew releasing period extension). For example, in the non-electric support state, the electric chew release period of 0.3 seconds is extended to 1.7 seconds in the electric support state. Furthermore, the pair of blade members 2321 are more likely to open in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state (increase the number of times the electric chew is released). For example, a pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened only once in the non-electric support state per opening to the normal start port 228 is opened three times in the electric support state (for example, 3 to open for 1.7 seconds) Repeatedly, the closing time between opening is 1.6 seconds). The probability of entering the second special figure starting port 232 increases due to the extension of the electric chew release period and the increase in the number of electric chew release times. Note that the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the power is supported during the big hit game, a predetermined number of game balls are placed in the second special figure starting port 232 until the predetermined number of game balls are entered during the big hit game. In order to solve this, there is a problem that the number of game balls that can be entered during a big hit and the number of game balls that can be acquired increases, resulting in an increase in gambling. In the present embodiment, in the electric support state (short-time state), all of the normal figure change, the universal figure change, the electric chew release period extension, and the electric chew release frequency increase are performed. If any one is performed, a player's advantage will be in a high state and it may be in an electric support state (time-short state). Alternatively, if either one of the extension of the electric chew release period or the increase in the number of electric chew release is performed, the electric support state (short-time state) may be set. . In the non-electric support state, the game ball is less likely to enter the second special figure starting port 232 than in the electric support state. As described above, in the second special figure starting port 232, the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters changes from one of the small size and the large size to the other size. The entrance of the second special figure starting port 232 is larger in the electric support state over a longer period than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when the special figure A is stopped and displayed, the electric support state (ordinary figure high probability state) is maintained until the next big hit game is started after the subsequent big hit game is completed, and the special figure B is displayed. Is displayed, the power support state is maintained while the special figure variation game is performed 100 times after the big hit game that is subsequently performed, and the non-electric support state (ordinary figure low probability state) is maintained at the 101st time. Transition. On the other hand, when a big hit without special support (special figure C, special figure D) is won, it does not shift to the electric support state after the big hit game ends. In the non-electric support state, the entrance of the second special figure starting port 232 is kept small. On the other hand, as described above, in the electric support state, the entrance of the second special figure starting port 232 is large, and the entry rate of game balls is increased. That is, in the non-electric support state, the game ball enters the second special figure start port 232 that is the variable start area at the first approach rate, whereas in the electric support state, the game ball starts the second special figure start. It enters the mouth 232 at a second approach rate that is higher than the first approach rate. Therefore, the non-electric support state corresponds to an example of the first approach rate control state, and the electric support state corresponds to an example of the second approach rate control state.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the stop symbol of special figure E is prepared as a small hit symbol in addition to the big hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times), and the door member 2341 maintains the open state for a maximum of 1.5 seconds per operation. In opening the door member 2341 at the small hit, for example, when a game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (a predetermined number of balls) is acquired. As a result, the second and subsequent releases are not performed. During the small hit game, it shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit is a role in which the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and after the small hit game is finished, the control state returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game. In addition, you may prepare the small hit symbol (for example, 2nd small hit symbol etc.) other than "special EI".

  In the big hit game and the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 is opened or closed one or more times, and the player's advantage is relatively high.

  Moreover, the special figure F shown to Fig.105 (a) is a losing symbol. When the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 is not opened and closed, and the player's advantage is relatively low. It should be noted that a missing symbol (for example, a second lost symbol, etc.) other than “Special Illustration F” may be further prepared.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the hit control state (the big hit control state and the small hit control state) of the second advantage that the player's advantage is high, and the second advantage. A loss control state having a first advantage with a low advantage is prepared, and the pachinko machine 100 is in one of a hit control state (second control state) and a loss control state (first control state). Take control state. The transition of these control states is also performed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300, and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a special game state providing unit. In the small hit control state, although the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 opens and closes, it is almost impossible to expect a ball to enter the variable prize opening 234. It can also be regarded as a control state (first control state).

  In addition, the jackpot includes a jackpot that is relatively advantageous to the player and a jackpot that is relatively disadvantageous. In terms of the number of rounds, the 15R series jackpot (Special Figure A, Special Figure B) corresponds to an advantageous jackpot, and the 4R series jackpot (Special Figure C, Special Figure D) corresponds to an unfavorable jackpot. Further, in terms of whether or not there is a probability variation, the big hit by special figure A and the big hit by special figure C correspond to advantageous big hits, and the big hit by special figure B and big hits by special figure D correspond to disadvantageous big hits. The jackpot success / failure determination result that is relatively advantageous to the player corresponds to an example of a specific success / failure determination result, and the jackpot control state that is relatively advantageous to the player corresponds to an example of a special game state.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, symbols other than “special symbol A” are prepared as the jackpot symbol 1, and the same applies to other symbols such as the jackpot symbol 2.

  The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are notifying means for informing the determination result (lottery result), and the pattern mode ( This corresponds to an example of symbol display means for performing symbol variation display until the special symbols A to F) are stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 105 (b) shows an example of a decorative pattern of a special figure. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of “special decoration 1” to “decoration 10” as special designs in this embodiment. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure start port 230 or the second special view start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special view start port 230; or On the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special symbol start port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Displayed in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →... “Change display of decorative pattern of special figure” is performed. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variably displays the special symbol decorative symbols separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. And the stop symbol mode (effect symbol mode) which is a combination of the decorative symbols of the special symbol is stopped and displayed. In the case of notifying a big hit (special illustrations A to D), “decoration combination 1” (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration” in which three identical ornamental symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. 1 ”or“ decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2 ”). When notifying a promiscuous jackpot (Special Figure A or Special Figure C) in the normal gaming state (Special Figure Low Probability Low Figure) or a jackpot other than the normal gaming state (Special Figure Low Probability Low Figure Probability) In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, three “decorative symbol combinations 2” (for example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3”, “decoration 7—decoration 7—decoration 7”, etc.) in which three odd odd ornamental symbols are arranged. ) Is stopped. When notifying the small hit (special drawing E), “decorative symbol combination 3” (for example, “decoration 1 -decoration 3 -decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Further, when notifying “special drawing F” that is a loss, symbols other than “decorative symbol combination 1”, “decorative symbol combination 2”, and “decorative symbol combination 3” are displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A combination of decorative symbols (for example, loose eyes) is stopped and displayed. Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, from the start of the “variable display of the decorative symbol of the special symbol” until the stop symbol mode of the special symbol of the special symbol (for example, “decorative symbol combination 2”) is stopped and displayed. This series of displays is sometimes referred to as a special design decoration stop display.

  It should be noted that the stop symbol mode (see FIG. 105 (a)) of the special symbols 1 and 2 and the decoration of one special symbol displayed in each of the left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. As for the stop symbol mode of the symbol (see FIG. 5B), the decorative symbol of the special symbol (see FIG. 5B) is larger.

  FIG. 105 (c) shows an example of the usual stop symbol mode (first symbol mode). In this embodiment, there are three types of stop display modes for the normal symbol, “general symbol A” that is a winning symbol 1, “general symbol B” that is a winning symbol 2, and “normal symbol C” that is a lost symbol. . “Popular A”, which is a hit symbol 1, is a hit per symbol in which the opening time of the pair of blade members 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 is relatively short. “B” is a common figure in which the opening time of the pair of blade members 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 is relatively long. Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a sphere detection sensor, detects that the sphere has passed through the general start port 228, the general display display device 210 illuminates all seven segments and the central one segment. Repeat the lighting and perform “variable display of ordinary figure” (ordinary figure fluctuation game). Then, after the variation time has elapsed, any one of the three types of symbols is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 105 (c), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  In the following, a series of displays from the start of the “variable display of the usual figure” to the stop display of the stop pattern form of the usual figure may be referred to as a usual figure change stop display. The universal symbol display device 210 corresponds to an example of auxiliary symbol notification means.

  FIG. 105 (d) shows an example of a usual decorative pattern. There are three types of decorations for ordinary drawings in the present embodiment: ordinary figure decorations 1 to 3. An effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on the condition that the sphere has passed through the general-purpose start opening 228, that is, the general-purpose start-up sensor has detected that the sphere has entered the general-purpose start opening 228. In the predetermined area which is the central portion of the “Drawing decoration pattern change display”, the display is switched in the order of “decoration ○” → “decoration ◎” →. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbols of the general symbols in a variable manner separately from the general symbol display device 210. And the stop symbol mode (effect symbol mode) of the usual decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When notifying the hit symbol 1 (ordinary symbol A) of the ordinary figure, the “decoration ○” that is the ordinary ornament 1 is stopped and displayed in the predetermined area of the ornamental symbol display device 208. When notifying the hit symbol 2 (ordinary symbol B) of the ordinary figure, the “decoration ◎” which is the ordinary figure ornament 2 is stopped and displayed in the predetermined area. On the other hand, in the case of notifying the usual figure losing symbol (ordinary figure C), the “decoration ×” which is the common figure decoration 3 is stopped and displayed in the predetermined area. Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a series of processes from the start of the “variable display of the decorative symbol of the normal figure” to the stop display of the decorative symbol pattern of the normal figure (for example, the common figure decoration 2) is stopped. The display may be referred to as a normal decoration symbol change stop display.

In addition, the stop symbol mode (see FIG. 105 (c)) of the normal symbol A and the normal symbol B and the stop symbol mode of the single normal symbol displayed in the predetermined area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (the same figure). (See (d)), the usual decorative design (see (d) in the figure) is larger.
<Main control section control processing>

  Next, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 in the second embodiment is the same as the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 85 executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 in the first embodiment. The description is omitted because they are the same.

  Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing a flow of main controller timer interrupt processing in the second embodiment.

  The pachinko machine 100 in the second embodiment has two types of special drawings such as special figure 1 and special figure 2, and a lottery based on winning a prize to the second special figure starting port 232 (determination of whether or not special figure 2 is determined), This is prioritized over the lottery based on winning in the first special figure starting port 230 (judgment determination of special figure 1). In other words, in the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment, when a game ball enters the first special start area, the random number value is stored in the first random number storage area up to the maximum number of reservations, and the second special start A winning storage unit that stores up to the maximum number of reserved random numbers in the second random value storage area when a game ball is won in the area, both the first random value storage area and the second random value storage area When the random number value is stored in the first random number value storage area, the time when the random number value is stored in the first random number value storage area and the time when the random number value is stored in the second random number value storage area. The determination is made based on the random number value stored in the second random value storage area, the random number value is not stored in the first random value storage area, and the second random value storage is performed. If a random number value is stored in the area, the second value The determination is made based on the random number value stored in the numerical value storage area, the random number value is not stored in the second random number value storage area, and the random number value is stored in the first random number value storage area. In the case where it has been determined, there is provided a go / no-go determination means for making a go / no-go determination based on the random number value stored in the first random value storage area. In addition, the main control unit 300 notifies the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214, and wins a prize to the second special figure start port 232. Based on the determination result, the start information of FIG. 1 is used as the start information in which the determination result is not performed. In the state where only the start information of the special figure 1 of the start information of the special figure 2 remains, and the start information of the special figure 2 is newly stored, the newly stored start of the special figure 2 The notification of the result of the determination based on the information is performed prior to the notification of the result of the determination based on the startup information of FIG. Further, the start information acquisition means for acquiring start information, when start information is stored in both of the first start information storage means and the second start information storage means, the second start information When starting information is acquired from the storage means and the starting information is stored in one of the first starting information storing means and the second starting information storing means, the starting information is stored. The starting information is obtained from the information storage means.

  In the main control unit timer interrupt process in the second embodiment, special figure state update processing is performed for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2, but first, special figure state update process for special figure 2 (special figure 2). State update processing) is performed (step S1225), and then special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S1227). When the special figure state update process in step S1225 and step S1227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the special figure related lottery process corresponds to an example of the determination unit. The main control unit 300 first performs the process for the special figure 2 (the special drawing 2 related lottery process) (step S1229), and then performs the process for the special figure 1 (the special figure 1 related lottery process) (step S1231). ). As described above, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process before the special figure 1 related lottery process, so that the game ball enters the first special figure start port 230 at the same timing. The start information is acquired and the start information is acquired based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second special figure start port 232, the special condition 2 variable game start conditions, and the special figure 1 variable game start. Even if the conditions are satisfied at the same time, or if both the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 variable game start condition are satisfied, the special figure 2 variable game is changing first. Figure 1 Floating game does not start to fluctuate.

  Further, after the winning acceptance process S1217 is performed and before the special figure state update process is performed, the special figure prefetching process is performed (step S1224).

  FIG. 107A is a flowchart showing the flow of special figure prefetching processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300.

  First, in step S1224a, whether or not there has been an increase in the start information of special figure 2, that is, in the reserved storage unit of special figure 2 provided in RAM 308, start information about special figure 2 (special figure 2 winning random number value, jackpot It is determined whether or not special figure 2 random number values and special figure 2 variation time determination random number values) have been added. If they have increased (if they have been added), the start information of the increased special figure 2 is prefetched. Then, the stop symbol of the special figure 2 is determined in advance (step S1224b). In this step S1224b, first, the start information of FIG. 2 is prefetched from the holding storage unit of FIG. That is, with the winning of the second special figure starting port 232 as a trigger, the starting information generated based on the winning is prefetched. Therefore, the start information is prefetched before the start information is acquired in the determination of success (the special drawing 2 related lottery process in step S1229 shown in FIG. 106). The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that performs this prefetching corresponds to an example of start information prefetching means. In the prefetching here, only the winning portion (holding increment) is prefetched, but all may be prefetched. Note that pre-reading here means that the start information is read first before the validity determination (final lottery), but in the following explanation, the word “prefetching” is referred to as the result of the pre-judgment (final lottery). ) May be used to mean read.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a special figure appropriateness prior determination table shown in FIG. 107 (b) and a special figure advance determination table shown in FIG. 107 (c).

  When the start information is prefetched, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 pre-determines whether or not the result is determined in the future special drawing 2 related lottery process and the symbols to be stopped based on the preread start information. That is, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 first refers to the probability variation flag, and uses the special figure winning / pre-determining table shown in FIG. The possible numerical range is 0 to 65535), and it is determined in advance whether the determination result is a big hit determination result, a small hit determination result, or a loss determination result. . That is, whether or not the winning / failing determination result based on the starting information generated based on the winning at the second special figure starting port 232 becomes the big hit determination result (specific determination result or not). It is determined in advance. The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that performs this pre-determination corresponds to an example of a pre-determination unit, and the result of the pre-determination here is treated as a special figure 2 determination result.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores a special figure success / failure determination table having the same contents as the special figure success / failure prior determination table shown in FIG. 107 (b). Whether it is the special figure success / failure determination table or the special figure success / failure prior determination table shown in FIG. 107 (b), the big hit probability is 1/320 in the special figure low probability state (non-electric support state). On the other hand, in the special figure high probability state (electric support state), it rises to 1/32. On the other hand, the small hit probability is 1/100 in both the special figure low probability state (non-electric support state) and the special figure high probability state (electric support state).

  Next, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 uses the special figure advance determination table shown in FIG. 107 (c) to determine the big hit in the pre-read start information when the special figure 2 success / failure determination result is a big hit. Based on the special figure 2 random number value (possible numerical range is 0 to 99), the jackpot symbol that becomes the stop symbol is determined in advance. The pre-determination of the special figure here is also executed before the success / failure determination (the special drawing 2 related lottery process) based on the pre-read start information is performed, and the result of the pre-determination here is treated as the special figure 2 pre-determination result. . The pre-determination of the jackpot symbol here corresponds to pre-determining which type of jackpot is out of a plurality of types of jackpots prepared. In the second embodiment, only one type of small hit symbol and lost symbol are prepared. Therefore, if the special figure 2 determination result is a small hit or lost, it is unambiguous. Special figure 2 pre-determination results are obtained.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores a special figure determination table having the same contents as the special figure prior determination table shown in FIG. The special jackpot type of the special chart of the second embodiment will be described in detail with reference to the special chart pre-determination table shown in FIG. 107 (c). The jackpot symbol 1 (special chart A) or the jackpot symbol 2 (special chart B) In the jackpot game that is started with stop display, one round in which the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 is opened for 30 seconds (but closed when 10 balls are won in the variable prize opening 234) is performed 15 times. In the jackpot game that starts with the jackpot symbol 3 (special symbol C) or the jackpot symbol 4 (special symbol D) being stopped and displayed, the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 is opened for 30 seconds (however, the variable prize slot 234 is opened). One round, which is closed when 10 balls are won, will be held four times. The winning probability of jackpot symbol 1 (special symbol A) is the highest at 50%.

  In step S1224c following step S1224b, the stop symbol information (special figure 2 preliminary determination result) of special figure 2 obtained in step S1224b is stored in the special chart 2 preliminary determination result storage area prepared in the RAM 308, and in step S1224d. move on.

  On the other hand, if the start information in FIG. 2 has not increased in the determination in step S1224a, the process proceeds to step S1224d, and the pre-reading and pre-determination of the start information in FIG. 2 are not performed.

  In step S1224d, this time, whether or not there has been an increase in the start information of special figure 1 (special figure 1 winning random number value, jackpot special figure 1 random value, and special figure 1 variation time determining random value), ie, in RAM 308. It is determined whether or not one set of random values has been added to the reserved storage unit of the special figure 1 provided. If it has increased (if it has been added), the current control state is now the electric support state. Is determined with reference to the time reduction flag prepared in the RAM 308 (step S1224e). If the current control state is the non-electric support state (if the time reduction flag is off), step S1224f is determined. Proceed to

  In step S1224f, as in step S1224b described above, first, the start information of FIG. 1 is prefetched from the holding storage unit of FIG. Next, similarly to step S1224b, the special figure success / failure judgment result is obtained based on the pre-read start information (special figure 1 winning random number value) using the special figure success / failure judgment table shown in FIG. 107 (b). Subsequently, in the case where the special figure 1 hit pre-judgment result is a big hit, similarly to step S1224b, using the special figure pre-judgment table shown in FIG. The special figure 1 pre-determination result is acquired based on the random number value in FIG.

  In step S1224g following step S1224f, the stop symbol information (special figure 1 preliminary determination result) of special figure 1 obtained in step S1224f is stored in the special chart 1 preliminary determination result storage area prepared in the RAM 308, and shown in FIG. Return to the indicated main control unit timer interrupt process.

  Note that in this special figure prefetching process, only the stop determination of the special figure was performed in advance, but based on the random number for determining the special figure fluctuation time in the prefetched start information, the special figure fluctuation time in advance The determination may be performed, and the change time advance determination result (special figure change time advance determination result) may be stored in the advance determination result storage area. Further, instead of the variation time, the effect mode (variation pattern) in the decorative symbol display device 208 may be determined in advance. In the present embodiment, the variation time of the special figure and the effect form of the decorative symbol display device 208 are associated one-to-one, and the fact that the variation time is selected means that the variation pattern is selected. You can also. Further, the production modes may be divided into groups, and for example, only the group of “out of reach / normal reach lose” or the group of “reach A out of reach / reach B lose” may be selected. Or, it belongs to the group of reach production of “per normal reach, normal reach lose, per reach A, per reach B, per reach A, per reach B” or “super shortened lose, shortened lose, lose, chance all extinguished” It may be determined in advance whether it belongs to the group without reach.

  The predetermination information newly stored in the predetermination result storage area of the RAM 308 (information indicating the special figure predetermination result) is stored in the command data of the special figure pending increase command as information of the predetermined special figure 1 or special figure 2. It is included and transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400.

  On the other hand, if the start information in FIG. 1 has not increased in the determination in step S1224d shown in FIG. 107 (a), the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. No prior judgment is performed.

  In addition, even when the current control state is the electric support state (the time reduction flag is on) in step S1224e, the start-up information and the pre-determination are not performed in FIG. “Undetermined” information indicating that the determination of success / failure based on the start information of the special figure 1 and the preliminary determination of the stop symbol is not performed is stored in the special figure 1 preliminary determination result storage area (step S1224h), and FIG. Return to the main controller timer interrupt processing shown in. Note that, based on the start of the big hit game, the area in which the special figure 1 preliminary determination result is stored in the special figure 1 preliminary determination result storage area is rewritten to “undetermined” information. Further, in the second embodiment, if the undetermined information setting condition (in the power support state here) is satisfied, the start information itself is not prefetched, but prefetching is performed and no predetermination is performed. In addition, although prefetching and preliminary determination are performed, the result may not be sent from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400.

  In this embodiment, the main control unit 300 obtains the special figure advance determination result, but the main control unit 300 obtains the pre-read start information as a special figure pending increase command command without obtaining the special figure advance determination result. The first sub control unit 400 may be included in the data and transmitted to the first sub control unit 400, and the first sub control unit 400 may obtain a special figure preliminary determination result as necessary. However, since the normal state update is performed by the main control unit 300, if the first sub control unit 400 determines whether or not the electric support is being performed, the normal state is also changed to the first sub control unit 400. Must be sent and not efficient. Therefore, it is more efficient to execute the prior determination in the main control unit 300.

  After executing the special figure prefetching process described above, the main control unit 300 executes the special figure related lottery process (steps S1229 and S1231), and the same start information as the prefetched start information targeted by the special figure prefetch process. Based on the above, the special figure success / failure determination result using the above-mentioned special figure success / failure determination table, the special figure determination result using the above-mentioned special figure determination table, and the variation time of the special figure are obtained again.

  Here, a method for determining the fluctuation time of the special figure in the special figure-related lottery process (steps S1229 and S1231) will be described. In the following description, since it is the same for both the fluctuation time of FIG. 1 and the fluctuation time of FIG. 2, the description will be made without distinguishing both.

  In the special drawing related lottery process shown in FIG. 106 (steps S1229 and S1231), when a special figure determination result is obtained using the special figure determination table, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 responds to the special figure determination result. Then, a timer number representing the fluctuation time of the special figure is determined.

  FIG. 108A shows a table set selection table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  In this table set selection table, the relationship between the special figure determination result (special figure stop symbol), the special figure fluctuation count, and the timer selection table is defined. In the second embodiment, two types of tables are prepared as timer selection tables. The timer selection table is a table used for determining the fluctuation time of the special figure. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with an area (timer selection table information storage area) for storing information representing a timer selection table. The RAM 308 is also provided with a special figure variable game execution number counter for counting the number of executions of the special figure variable game. If the value of the special figure variable game execution number counter is larger than 0, the special figure display device 212 ends the variable display, and after the confirmed special figure is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, the special figure variable game is executed by the CPU 304. The value of the execution counter is decremented by 1.

  For example, in the special figure state update process (steps S1227 and S1229) at the timing when the special rendering stop symbol is the big hit symbol 2 and 15R big hit is won and the end effect period of the 15R big hit game ends, the special figure variable game execution number counter Is set to 100, and information representing the table 4 is stored in the timer selection table information storage area. Also, in the special figure state update process (steps S1227 and S1229) at the timing when the special figure stop display is finished, if the value of the special figure variable game execution number counter is larger than 0, the value of the counter is decremented by 1. The information representing the table 2 is continuously stored in the timer selection table information storage area until the counter value becomes zero. When the value of the special figure variable game execution number counter changes from 1 to 0, the pointer on the RAM 308 is advanced to set a value of 0 to the special figure variable game execution number counter, and in the timer selection table information storage area. Information representing the table 1 is stored. Then, in the special figure state update process (steps S1227 and S1229) at the timing when the special figure stop display is completed until the special figure determination result is switched, the value of the special figure variable game execution number counter is continuously set to 0, and the timer Information indicating the table 1 is continuously stored in the selection table information storage area. As a result, when the 15R big hit game ends, unless the big win or the small win is won, the variable time of the special figure is determined using the timer selection table 2 in the first 100 special figure variable games, and after the 101th, Using the selection table 1, the variation time of the special figure is determined.

  FIG. 108 (b) is a diagram showing a timer number determination table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 is defined in the timer number determination table shown in FIG. 108 (b) based on the random number value for determining the special figure variation time in the start information (possible range is 0 to 99). Determine the timer number. That is, the timer number is determined by a special figure determination result, a predetermined random number (for example, a random number for timer number determination), a hold number obtained by adding the hold number of FIG. 1 and the hold number of FIG. 2, and predetermined period information. This is performed based on a table (for example, a timer selection table), and is not based on the result of prefetching by the prefetching process or the result of prior determination.

The timer number is the time from when the special figure 1 display device 212 or the special figure 2 display device 214 starts changing the symbol until the stop symbol indicating the result of the determination of the success / failure is displayed, that is, the time during which the special symbol changes (Design variation display time). The main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a variation time determination unit that determines a variation time of a symbol. In addition, the time from when the decorative symbol display device 208 starts changing the decorative symbol of the special symbol until the stop symbol indicating the result of the determination of the success / failure is displayed (decorative symbol variation stop display time) is also displayed in this symbol variable display Adjusted to time.
FIG. 108 (c) shows the relationship between the timer number and the symbol variation display time.

  In the second embodiment, the decorative pattern variation pattern of the special symbol in the decorative symbol display device 208 is determined in accordance with the symbol variation display time. That is, the first sub-control unit 400 determines the variation pattern of the special symbol decoration pattern based on the timer number (design variation display time). FIG. 108 (c) also shows the relationship between the timer number and the variation pattern of the decorative pattern of the special drawing for reference.

  The timer 1 represents that the special figure fluctuation time is an extremely shortened fluctuation time of 2 seconds, and the timer 2 represents that the special figure fluctuation time is a shortened fluctuation time of 5 seconds. Note that the determination of the timer 1 or the timer 2 may be referred to as a special figure change. The timer 3 represents that the special figure fluctuation time becomes a normal fluctuation time (reference fluctuation time) of 10 seconds. Further, in the timers 1 to 3, the variation pattern of the special symbol decorative pattern in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 104 is not reached. The timer 4 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time becomes a fluctuation time of 12 seconds. When the timer 4 is determined, normal reach is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the special figure decorative pattern in the decorative symbol display device 208. The timer 5 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 40 seconds, and the timer 6 indicates that the special figure fluctuation time is 50 seconds. When the timers 5 and 6 are determined, the super-reach is selected as the variation pattern of the decorative pattern of the special graphic in the decorative graphic display device 208.

  This reach is determined to be a success / failure determination that the result of the success / failure determination (main lottery) in the special drawing related lottery process (steps S1229 and S1231) becomes a specific determination result (predetermined result with high player advantage). This is a notice effect that informs the player in advance before the result of the determination of whether or not the game is determined, and whether or not to reach is determined after the determination of the determination. The main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a notice control unit.

  In the second embodiment, the length of the period from the determination of whether or not a special figure is made to the notification of the result of the determination of the special figure (the special figure change time) ) Is long.

  As shown in FIG. 108 (b), when the special figure determination result is an out-of-order symbol ("Special Figure F"), if the number of holds is 0 to 2, the timer 3 without reach has a probability of 90%. If the hold number is 3 to 7, the non-reach timer 2 is determined with a probability of 98%. Further, when the table 1 is selected with the off symbol, the super-reach timer 5 or the timer 6 is determined with a probability of 1% regardless of the number of holdings.

  In addition, if the decision result is a big hit, regardless of the type of special figure (big hit symbols 1 to 4), regardless of the timer selection table, and regardless of the number of holds, the normal reach The timer 4 is determined with a probability of 2%, the super reach 1 timer 5 is determined with a probability of 32%, and the super reach 2 timer 6 is determined with a probability of 66%. The same applies when the special figure determination result is a small hit symbol.

  Next, the common figure relevant lottery process (step S1223) shown in FIG. 106 will be described. In the second embodiment, the starting information of the usual figure is the ordinary winning random number value and the winning ordinary random number value. In this general drawing related lottery process (step S1223), a general figure determination process is performed.

  FIG. 109 (a) is a diagram showing a normal / unusual determination table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  In the usual-time determination processing, the time reduction flag is referred to and the determination is made based on whether or not the current control state is the electric support state. This determination of whether or not a normal figure is made is performed based on a random number value for a normal figure winning (from 0 to 65535) in the start-up information extracted from the normal figure holding storage unit of the RAM 308. In the second embodiment, the typical attack probability is about 10% in the normal low probability state (non-electric support state), but is 100% in the normal high probability state (electric support state).

  When the execution of the normal-figure success / failure determination process is completed and the normal-figure success / failure determination result is a win, the normal-figure stop symbol determination process is executed. In addition, since there is only one type of misplaced symbol, the stop symbol of the ordinary diagram is unambiguously determined if the result of determining whether or not the usual figure is correct.

  FIG. 109 (b) is a diagram showing a common map determination table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  Here again, referring to the time reduction flag, whether or not the current control state is the electric support state is determined. This usual figure stop symbol determination process is performed based on the common figure random number value (possible range is 0 to 99) in the start information extracted from the ordinary figure holding storage unit of the RAM 308. In the low-probability state (non-electric support state), 90% of the winning symbols are awarded to symbol 1 (common symbol A), and 10% of the probability is winning symbol 2 (common symbol B). . On the other hand, in the normal figure high probability state (electric support state), the symbol 2 per common figure (normal figure B) is won with a probability of 100%.

  Here, referring to the common figure determination table shown in FIG. 109 (b), the common figure hit type of the second embodiment will be described in detail. Is stopped, the pair of blade members 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 is opened for 1.8 seconds (however, when 10 balls are won in the second special figure starting port 232, it is closed). On the other hand, when the symbol 2 per symbol is stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 210, the pair of blade members 2321 of the second special diagram starting port 232 is opened for 6.0 seconds (however, the second special diagram). It will be closed when 10 balls are won in the starting port 232).

In the second embodiment, the normal time fluctuation time is uniquely determined at a predetermined time according to the normal control state. For example, it is 10 seconds in a normal low probability state (non-electric support state), and 5 seconds in a normal high probability state (electric support state).
<Sub-control unit side control processing>

Next, the first sub-control unit main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 in the second embodiment is shown in FIG. 90 executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 in the first embodiment. Since it is basically the same as each process of the first sub-control unit, description thereof is omitted. Further, the processing in the second sub-control unit 500 is basically the same as that in the first embodiment, and thus description thereof is omitted.
Next, the prefetch notice in the second embodiment will be described in detail.

  First, in the second embodiment, a special figure 1 hold display area is prepared on the left side of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, that is, on the left side of the predetermined area where the normal decorative pattern is displayed. On the right side, a special figure 2 hold display area is prepared. In the special figure 1 hold display area, a hold display corresponding to one set of start information stored in the hold storage part of the special figure 1 provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is shown in FIG. Are displayed side by side from the left in order from the oldest in the order in which the start information is stored (in order of winning). The hold display is a display indicating that the start information is stored or stored in the start information storage means (the special storage section of the RAM 308). In the special figure 2 hold display area, a hold display corresponding to one set of start information stored in the hold storage part of the special figure 2 provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is displayed in the hold storage part of the special figure 2. Are displayed side by side from the left in order from the oldest in the order in which the start information is stored (in order of winning). That is, a hold display is performed for each start information stored in the start information storage means, and the number of hold displays corresponds to the hold number. The decorative symbol display device 208 corresponds to an example of a start hold display unit. In this embodiment, the default display mode in the hold display is a mode in which a round graphic is displayed without any pattern and in one color, and corresponds to an example of the first mode. Each time the first sub control unit 400 receives the special figure hold increase command, the first sub control unit 400 transmits a hold increase command to the second sub control unit 500, and the second sub control unit 500 performs the decoration based on the hold increase command. The symbol display device 208 is controlled to increase the number of pending displays by one. On the other hand, every time the first sub-control unit 400 receives a symbol variation start command that is a signal for the detention, the second sub-control unit 500 transmits a hold decrease signal to the second sub-control unit 500. Based on the signal, the decorative symbol display device 208 is controlled to decrease the number of the hold display by one.

  The prefetch notice in the second embodiment is an effect for giving a notice that there is a possibility that the result of the determination whether or not the lottery process is performed in the special drawing related lottery process (steps S1229 and S1231) shown in FIG. More specifically, in the present embodiment, a big hit that is relatively advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit in the 15R series: special figure A, special figure B) and a big hit that is relatively disadvantageous ( For example, 4R series big hits: special figure C, special figure D) are prepared, and the pre-reading notice is an effect for giving a notice that there is a possibility of an advantageous big hit. Note that the big hit with certainty (special drawing C) may be an advantageous big hit even in the big hit of the 4R system. The pre-reading notice in the second embodiment is a notice made based on the starting information (pre-reading starting information) acquired before the starting information is acquired in the special drawing related lottery process (steps S1229 and S1231). is there. That is, the pre-reading notice is performed based on a pre-determination result based on the pre-read start information.

  In addition, the prefetching notice here includes a false prefetching notice that falsely notices as if it is an advantageous jackpot even if the pre-determination result is not an advantageous jackpot. In other words, the pre-reading notice indicates that the result of the success / failure determination may be an advantageous jackpot, is a notice that suggests to the player, or that the result of the determination is an advantageous jackpot. It can be said that it is a notice to expect.

  In the second embodiment, it is possible to perform a prefetch notice effect using the hold display by changing the display mode of the hold display. The pre-reading notice effect using the hold display has an execution start timing when winning, and the execution area is within the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, when the special figure hold is 0 and there is a prize at the special figure starting ports 230 and 232, whether or not the special figure is determined based on the prize is determined immediately, and the symbol variation display of the special figure is also immediate. However, it is possible that the special figure hold display based on the winning is not performed, but it may be performed for a few seconds immediately after the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure based on the winning. In this case, the effect of the pre-reading notice is performed during the symbol variation display (the symbol variation display corresponding to the pre-read start information) for notifying the success / failure determination result based on the pre-read start information. The prefetching notice using the hold display corresponds to an example of a predetermined notice form of the prefetching notice, and the decorative symbol display device 208 corresponds to an example of the prefetching notice unit.

  In addition, by driving the effect movable body 224 and the shielding device 246, it is possible to perform a pre-reading notice effect by actuating an accessory. The pre-reading notice effect by the actuating of the accessory may be executed at the time of winning or at the time of stopping the symbol fluctuation, and the execution area is an area covering the decorative symbol display device 208. The symbol variation stop time in the pre-reading notice is when at least one of the symbol variation display corresponding to the pre-read start information and the symbol variation display before the symbol variation display is stopped. More specifically, if there is a winning with a hold of 0, the winning / failing determination based on the winning is immediately performed, and the special symbol variation display is also immediately started. When the symbol variation display corresponding to the information is stopped, the execution of the prefetch notice is started.

  It is also possible to perform a pre-reading notice effect by causing a design such as a specific character or symbol to appear on the decorative design display device 208. The execution start timing of the pre-reading notice effect using this specific symbol may be at the time of winning, or by the symbol variation start command after a predetermined time has elapsed after receiving the first symbol variation starting command after winning. The started symbol variation display may be in progress. Here, if there is a winning in a state where the hold is 0, the winning / failing determination based on the winning is performed immediately and the special symbol variation display is started immediately. The symbol variation display after a predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol variation display (design variation display corresponding to the pre-read start information) for notifying the determination result is started. When there is a winning in a state where the hold is 1 or more, the symbol variation display is performed before the symbol variation display. The execution area may be the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c in the decorative symbol display device 208, or a predetermined area for the effect display area 208d. Also good.

  Furthermore, it is possible to perform a pre-reading notice effect by changing the background image of the decorative symbol display device 208. The execution start timing of the prefetch notice effect using the background image is at the time of winning a prize, and the execution area is the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Note that the pre-reading notice effect is not limited to a notice using an image or an accessory, but may be a notice using sound or light.

  When the first sub control unit 400 receives the special figure hold increase command, the first sub control unit 400 performs a prefetch notice execution process in the effect control process in the first sub control unit main process. In this prefetching notice execution process, a prefetching notice using a hold display, a prefetching notice by actuating an accessory, a prefetching notice using a specific design, and a prefetching notice using a background image are determined in advance. Further, if the pre-reading notice using the hold display is used, the display form after the change according to the pre-reading notice is determined by lottery from a plurality of types of display forms of the hold display prepared in advance. If the pre-reading notice is due to the action of an accessory, one drive pattern is determined by lottery from drive patterns of a plurality of types of effect movable bodies 224 and shielding devices 246 prepared in advance. If it is a pre-reading notice using a specific symbol, a symbol to be made to appear in the pre-reading notice is determined by lottery from a plurality of types of symbols such as characters and symbols prepared in advance. If it is a prefetch notice using a background image, a background image used for the prefetch notice is determined by lottery from a plurality of types of background images prepared in advance.

  Also in the second embodiment, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the common symbol variation start command, the decorative symbol display device 208 executes the regular symbol variation effect. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the special symbol variation start command, the decorative symbol display device 208 also executes a special symbol variation effect.

  FIG. 110 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a general symbol variation effect, a special symbol variation effect, and a prefetch notice effect.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 110 (a) displays a combination of a special symbol decorative symbol and a predetermined region 208x where a normal decorative symbol is displayed in the effect display region 208d. Is displayed as a stop symbol of the usual decorative pattern. That is, the special figure variable game and the general figure variable game are stopped. In this state, when the game ball passes through the universal figure starting port 228, as shown in FIG. 110 (b), the symbol variation display is started on the universal figure display device 210, and the predetermined area 208x of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Then, the variation display of the general-purpose decorative symbols is started. In addition, from the loudspeaker 120 (not shown), a normal variation sound indicating that the symbol variation display is performed on the universal symbol display device 210 is output. The variation display of the general symbol decorative symbol and the output of the common symbol variation sound correspond to an example of the general symbol variation effect, and the general symbol variation effect corresponds to an example of the predetermined effect according to the present invention.

  Subsequently, when a game ball enters the first special figure starting port 230, a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, as shown in FIG. 110 (c), the symbol variation display is started on the special symbol display device 212, and the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. In the area 208c, the variation display of the special figure decoration symbol is started. Also, a special figure fluctuation sound indicating that the symbol fluctuation display is being performed on the special figure 1 display device 212 is output from the speaker 120. The variation display of the special symbol decoration symbol and the output of the special symbol variation sound correspond to an example of the special symbol variation effect. In addition, the pre-reading notice effect based on the pre-reading of the starting information stored in the special figure 1 holding storage unit of the RAM 308 is also executed by winning the first special figure starting port 230. Here, a pre-reading notice effect using a specific symbol is executed at the time of winning a prize at the first special figure starting port 230, and the princess character's symbol 2082 is displayed as a specific symbol in the lower area including the effect display area 208d. Move from left to right. Note that a pre-reading notice effect sound may be output from the speaker 120 while the princess character's symbol 2082 is moving.

  In the specific example described above, the special figure fluctuation sound starts to sound from the middle of the normal figure fluctuation sound, and the special figure fluctuation sound is heard over the normal figure fluctuation sound. In addition, the predetermined area 208x where the variation display of the general-purpose decorative symbol is performed is covered with the symbol 2082 of the princess character passing by the pre-reading notice effect for a moment, so that the variation display of the general-purpose decorative symbol is not visible for a moment. In other words, the pattern 2082 of the princess character enters the predetermined area 208x, thereby reducing the predetermined area 208x. Therefore, the general symbol variation effect corresponding to an example of the predetermined effect according to the present invention is changed by the special symbol variation effect or the prefetching notice effect.

  Here, the movement of the princess character's symbol 2082 is executed as a pre-reading notice effect, but it may be executed as a special symbol variation effect.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 110 (c ′), when a game ball enters the first special figure starting port 230, the middle area of the special figure decoration symbol is a predetermined area where the variation display of the normal figure decoration symbol is performed. It may be a special symbol variation effect that fluctuates over 208x. By doing so, the ordinary symbol variation effect changes according to the special symbol variation effect. It should be noted that the effect that the middle symbol of the special symbol decoration symbol is displayed in a variable manner over the predetermined area 208x is used to pre-read the starting information stored in the special symbol 1 holding storage unit of the RAM 308 by winning the first special symbol starting port 230. It may be performed as an effect of prefetching notice based on.

  Further, in FIG. 110 (c), the pre-reading notice effect based on the pre-reading of the starting information stored in the special figure 1 holding storage unit of the RAM 308 by winning the first special figure starting port 230 is a notice using a specific symbol. Although it is executed in a mode, it may be executed in a notice mode in which the effect movable body 224 is driven as shown in FIG. Also in this case, the forearm portion 224b that has been rotated covers the predetermined area 208x where the variation display of the regular symbol decorative symbol is performed, and the regular symbol variation effect changes due to the pre-reading notice effect.

  Also in the specific example in the second embodiment described above, the regular symbol variation effect changes here due to the establishment of a prize ball payout condition (predetermined condition) such as winning at the first special figure starting port 230. The player is more likely to notice that the payout is being made, the ball holding is likely to be good, and the impression of the gaming table may be improved. The same applies to the specific examples described below. In addition, since the change in the regular symbol variation effect is caused by the pre-reading notice effect, the player may generate a predetermined profit (here, payout of a prize ball) and the variable winning opening 234 may be in an advantageous state. Can be recognized at a time by a pre-reading notice effect (specific effect), which can enhance the player's interest in the game and improve the impression of the game stand compared to the case where each is recognized separately There is a case that can be made.

  FIG. 111 is a diagram showing a specific example of the regular symbol variation effect and the prefetching notice effect. Hereinafter, the description will focus on the differences from the specific example shown in FIG.

  Also in this specific example, when the game ball passes through the ordinary figure starting port 228, the ordinary symbol variation effect is started. In other words, in the predetermined area 208x of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable decorative symbol display is started, and the normal symbol changing sound is output from the speaker 120 (not shown).

  Subsequently, when a game ball enters the first special figure starting port 230, a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, a special symbol variation effect similar to the specific example shown in FIG. 110 is started, but pre-reading of the starting information stored in the special figure 1 holding storage unit of the RAM 308 by winning the first special figure starting port 230 is started. Based on the pre-reading notice effect based on it is also executed. The notice mode of the prefetch notice effect based on the prefetch here is a form using a background image. As shown in FIG. 111 (c), at the same time as the symbol variation display is started on the special figure 1 display device 212. The entire front screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes dark for a moment, and the normal symbol variation effect executed in the decorative symbol display device 208 and the special symbol variation effect started by the decorative symbol display device 208 are temporarily invisible. . That is, the regular symbol variation effect changes depending on the prefetching notice effect.

  Here, the switching of the background image is executed as the pre-reading notice effect, but it may be executed as a special symbol variation effect. That is, the background image of the decorative design display device 208 is switched to a dark background image (blackout image) for a moment before starting the variable display of the special design, and then the normal background image is restored. You may perform the change display of a symbol. Even with rubbing, the regular symbol variation effect changes according to the special symbol variation effect. The blackout image can also be used as a scene switching image, and such background image switching can also be viewed as a special symbol variation effect that also serves as a scene switching effect.

  In FIG. 111 (c), the background image is switched to a dark image (blackout image). However, as shown in FIG. 111 (c ′), the background image is switched to a bright image (here, whiteout image). Also good.

  Further, in FIG. 111 (c), the pre-reading notice effect based on the pre-reading of the starting information stored in the special figure 1 holding storage unit of the RAM 308 by winning the first special figure starting port 230 is a notice mode using the background image. However, it may also be executed in a notice mode in which the open shielding device 246 is closed as shown in FIG. Also in this case, the predetermined area 208x in which the variation display of the usual figure decorative symbol is performed is hidden by the left door 246a and the right door 246b of the shielding device 246, and the ordinary symbol variation effect is changed by the pre-reading notice effect. Note that switching to a white-out image and an effect effect that closes the left door 246a and the right door 246b can also be viewed as a scene switching effect.

  The background image may be a translucent image. Since it is translucent, it is possible to visually recognize the regular symbol variation effect and the special symbol variation effect, and thus it may be possible to prevent a decrease in the rendering effect.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, when the first sub control unit 400 receives the special figure hold increase command, the decorative symbol display device 208 executes a special figure hold increase effect.
FIG. 112 is a diagram showing a specific example of the regular symbol variation effect and the special figure hold increase effect.

  In FIG. 112 (a), the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as the symbol variation display) is performed on the special symbol display device 212, and the special symbol decoration symbol variation display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Yes. Also, three special figure hold displays are displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 112 (a). Hereinafter, the special figure hold display representing the oldest special figure hold (hereinafter referred to as special figure hold 1) will be referred to as the first special figure hold display 296, and the second old special figure hold (hereinafter referred to as special figure hold 2). ) Is called a second special figure hold display 297, and a special figure hold display representing the newest special figure hold (hereinafter referred to as special figure hold 3) is called a third special figure hold display 298. Here, the number of reserved special figures is three. On the other hand, the general symbol display device 210 is stopped and a stop symbol of the general symbol decorative symbol is displayed in a predetermined area 208x of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  When the game ball passes through the general symbol start port 228 while the symbol variation display is being performed, the regular symbol variation effect is started. In other words, in the predetermined area 208x of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable decorative symbol display is started, and the normal symbol changing sound is output from the speaker 120 (not shown).

  Next, when a game ball enters the first special figure starting port 230, a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, special figure hold increases. Hereinafter, the increased special figure hold will be referred to as special figure hold 4, and the special figure hold display representing the special figure hold 4 will be referred to as a fourth special figure hold display 299. When a game ball enters the first special figure starting port 230, a special figure holding increase sound is output from the speaker 120 (not shown), and the fourth black circle, which is the default display mode, is displayed from the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208. A track symbol 2991 on which the special symbol hold display 299 symbol is placed appears, and this track symbol 2991 moves to the left in the effect display area 208d. As a result, as shown in FIG. 112 (c), the pattern 2991 of the track passes through the predetermined area 208x where the variation display of the general-purpose decorative pattern is performed, and the general-purpose decoration design performed in the predetermined area 208x. The change display of is not visible for a moment. In other words, the predetermined area 208x becomes smaller when the track pattern 2991 enters the predetermined area 208x. Also in this specific example, the regular symbol variation effect changes due to the special symbol hold increase effect.

  The symbol of the fourth special figure hold display 299 of the black circle, which is the default display mode placed on the truck, is transported to the right side of the third special figure hold display 298, and then is lowered from the truck, and the fourth special figure hold display 299 is displayed. The figure hold display 299 is displayed on the right side of the third special figure hold display 298. When the fourth special figure hold display 299 is displayed on the right side of the third special figure hold display 298, a prefetch notice effect using the hold display is performed. Here, as shown in FIG. 112 (d), a light aura effect image 2992 representing a state in which light radiates radially from the black circle image is added to the black circle image which is the default display mode. The display mode has changed. This light aura effect image 2992 enters the predetermined area 208x where the variation display of the general-purpose decorative symbol is performed, and the predetermined area 208x is also reduced here. Therefore, the general symbol variation effect is also changed by the prefetching notice effect. The light aura effect image 2992 may be a translucent image. Since it is translucent, it is possible to visually recognize the regular symbol variation effect, so that it may be possible to prevent a decrease in the rendering effect of the regular symbol variation effect.

  The display form of the fourth special figure hold display 299 displayed on the right side of the third special figure hold display 298 may be changed to another display form. In FIG. 112 (d ′), the display form of the fourth special figure hold display 299 displayed on the right side of the third special figure hold display 298 is changed to a panda character image of a scary face. In addition, this character image is larger than the black circle image of the default display mode, and a part of the character image enters the predetermined area 208x, and here, the regular symbol variation effect is also changed by the pre-reading notice effect. The hold display that also serves as a pre-reading notice effect represents a hold that can be expected from a big hit if viewed from the player. By displaying the hold larger than the size of the default display mode, it becomes easy for the player to understand. In this way, the size of the hold display may be changed according to the expectation degree (reliability) of the prefetch notice. It should be noted that it may be displayed larger only for the first predetermined period of the hold display and thereafter displayed in the same size as the size of the default display mode.

  FIG. 113 is a diagram showing a specific example in which the general symbol variation effect itself changes. Hereinafter, the description will focus on the differences from the specific example shown in FIG.

  Also in this specific example, when the game ball passes through the ordinary figure starting port 228, the ordinary symbol variation effect is started. In other words, in the predetermined area 208x of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable decorative symbol display is started, and the normal symbol changing sound is output from the speaker 120 (not shown).

  Subsequently, when a game ball enters the first special figure starting port 230, a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls are also paid out as prize balls. In addition, as shown in FIG. 113 (c), a special symbol variation effect similar to the specific example shown in FIG. 110 is started. Furthermore, based on the start of the special symbol variation display, the background screen of the predetermined area 208x where the variation of the regular symbol decoration symbol is displayed changes, and the regular symbol variation effect itself changes. Here, the background image with no pattern is changed to a background image with an oblique stripe pattern.

  Further, as a change of the general symbol variation effect itself based on the start of the special symbol variation display, as shown in FIG. 113 (d), instead of the variation display of the regular symbol decoration symbol performed in the predetermined area 208x. The countdown display may be performed to change the display to, for example, 5 → 4 → 3 → 2 → 1 → ◯.

  When the special figure hold increases, a pre-reading notice effect based on the pre-reading of the start information stored in the special figure hold storage unit of the RAM 308 by winning at the special figure start opening is displayed as a variation display of the general-purpose decorative symbol. It may be executed in the predetermined area 208x where is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 113 (e), instead of the variable display of the general-purpose decorative design, a design such as a specific character or symbol (here, a panda character design with a scary face) is displayed in the predetermined area 208x. Is displayed.

  Further, in the above description, the variation display of the general symbol decoration symbol (general symbol variation effect) on the decorative symbol display device 208 is always performed. You may make it carry out by probability (for example, 10% or 0%). By doing so, the player's expectation for the regular symbol variation effect may be increased.

  Moreover, the sound production based on each production may include a silent production. This makes it easier for the player to notice that a profit (for example, a payout of a prize ball) has occurred. In addition, there is a case where it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the special figure is judged to be unacceptable without interfering with the special figure-related effect.

  In addition, you may be made not to perform a regular symbol change effect during electric support. If the electric support is in progress, the pair of blade members 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 is easy to open and a prize ball is likely to be generated, so that the player can concentrate on the effect based on the generation of the prize ball. There is a case.

  Here, an example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine has been described, but the present invention can also be applied to a rotating game machine (slot machine).

  In the above description, “a game ball can enter in a game stand that gives a player a predetermined game value based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, entry of a game ball into a winning opening or a start port). Starting information (for example, a normal winning random number and a random number for determining a normal variation period) based on a first approach area (for example, the central general map start gate 251) and a game ball entering the first entrance area ) Generating start information generating means (for example, a random value storing register corresponding to the general start area of the random value generating circuit 318 shown in FIG. 81, a normal variable period determining random number counter provided in the RAM 308, and A main control unit 300 for performing random number processing) and a determination unit for determining whether or not the vehicle is correct based on the start information generated by the start information generating unit (for example, main control for executing a normal determination process) 300 CPU 304), an effecting means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) for performing an effect, and a predetermined effect (for example, a normal symbol variation effect) on the effecting means based on the result of the determination on whether or not the winning / non-accepting means is present Effect control means (for example, a combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500) and a second approach area (for example, the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball) A central general winning opening 226), and the effect control means changes the predetermined effect to the effect means based on a game ball entering the second entry area during the predetermined effect. A game table characterized in that an effect (for example, an effect in which a normal symbol variation effect is changed by a prize ball paying appearance) is performed. Is explained.

  Here, the first entry area may be an area (for example, a gate) through which a game ball passes. That is, the first entry area may be provided in a game area where a game ball rolls, and the game ball may roll further in the game area even if the game ball enters. The predetermined condition may not be satisfied even if a game ball enters the first entry area.

  Further, the second entry area may be provided in the game area, and the game ball may be guided to the back side of the game area when entering.

  In addition, the second approach area is easy to enter the game ball from the first state in which it is difficult to enter the game ball based on the result of the success / failure determination by the success / failure determination means being a specific result of the success / failure determination. A variable start port that changes state to the second state may be included.

  Furthermore, the predetermined effect may be an effect by image display, an effect by sound, or an effect by light.

  In addition, the effect obtained by changing the predetermined effect here may be an effect in which the predetermined effect itself is switched to another effect, or an effect in which a part of the predetermined effect is changed. Alternatively, it may be an effect in which some or all of the predetermined effects are covered with other effects.

  Also, giving a predetermined game value to a player is exemplified by paying out game media.

  Further, in the description so far, “the effect control means causes the effect means to perform a specific effect (for example, appearance of a prize ball payout) that affects the predetermined effect in order to change the predetermined effect. A game stand characterized by being. Is also explained.

  Further, in the description so far, “the effect means includes an image display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) for displaying an effect image, and the effect control means has a predetermined effect image (for example, a decoration for a normal figure). By displaying the graphic display) on the image display means, the predetermined effect is displayed on the image display means, and a part or all of the predetermined effect image is displayed as an effect obtained by changing the predetermined effect. An image (for example, see FIG. 97 (c)) covered with a part or all of another image (for example, a panda character image 2081 with a scary face) is displayed on the image display means. Amusement stand. Is also explained.

Here, the effect control means may cause the image display means to display an effect image that is wholly or partially translucent as the specific effect.
Further, the effect means includes sound output means for outputting a predetermined sound,

  The production control means causes the sound output means to output the predetermined sound to cause the sound output means to perform the specific production, and the specific output that is output in parallel with the predetermined sound. The sound may be output to the sound output means. By doing so, the player may be able to recognize the occurrence of profit by the sound based on the specific performance.

  Further, the sound output means includes a ball tray capable of storing a game ball, and the collision based on the game ball paid out from the game ball payout means colliding with the game ball stored in the ball dish or the ball tray A sound may be output as the specific sound. By doing so, the collision sound is directed to the player from a direction different from that of the speaker, so that the player may be able to recognize the generation of profit more.

  In addition, in the description so far, “the first entry area (for example, the central universal start gate 251) is provided in the game area (for example, the game area 124) where the game ball rolls, The game area is further rolled, and the second entry area (for example, the central general winning opening 226) is entered by a game ball after entering the first entry area of the game area. A game table characterized by being provided at a possible position. Is also explained.

  Further, in the description so far, “a winning device (for example, a variable winning port 234) that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that a predetermined second condition is satisfied (for example, winning a big win of a special figure). The effect control means causes the effect means to perform an effect that suggests that the predetermined second condition is highly likely to be satisfied as the specific effect (for example, an effect of a pre-reading notice). A game stand characterized by being. Is also explained.

  Hereinafter, the start information generated based on the entry of the game ball into the first entry area is referred to as first start information, and the determination of success / failure based on the first start information is set as the first success / failure determination. The correctness determination means for performing the first correctness determination is used as the first correctness determination means.

  Also, second start information (for example, a special figure) generated based on a game ball entering the second entry area (for example, the first special figure start port 230, the second special figure start port 232). Second starting information storage means (for example, RAM 308) for storing a winning random number value, a big hit special figure random value, a small hit special figure random value, a lose special figure random value, and a special figure variation time determination random value. 2 and the second start information stored in the second start information storage means, and whether or not it is determined based on the acquired second start information. The second success / failure determination means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) for making a determination and deriving the second success / failure determination result, and when the symbol variation display is finished and the symbol variation display is finished, the second success / failure The symbol variation display that stops and displays the symbol form representing the judgment result is performed. The second symbol display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214) and the second symbol display means stop display the symbol pattern representing the specific second determination result. Control state transition means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) that shifts the control state from the normal control state to the big hit control state and the second determination result based on predetermined second start information by the second determination unit. The second success / failure determination means provides a pre-reading notice effect for notifying that there is a possibility that the result will be the specific second success / failure determination result (for example, a big success / failure determination result). A pre-reading notice effecting means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) that executes at a predetermined execution probability based on the predetermined second starting information acquired before acquiring the starting information; Before The effect means includes the prefetch notice effect means, and the effect control means causes the prefetch notice effect means to perform the prefetch notice effect as the specific effect. Good.

  In addition, the variable symbol means (for example, variable prize opening 234) that is opened after the second symbol display means stops displaying the symbol form indicating the specific second success / failure determination result (for example, special figure big hit determination result). The aspect provided with this may be sufficient.

  The pre-reading notice effect unit executes a pre-reading notice effect for notifying that the result of the determination on the basis of predetermined start information by the determination unit may be the specific determination result. Alternatively, it may be one that executes a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the information based on the predetermined starting information acquired before the determination unit determines that the predetermined starting information is acquired.

  Further, the prefetching notice effect means may start the prefetching notice effect before the appropriateness determination means makes a determination as to whether or not based on the predetermined start information.

  In addition, there is provided a symbol display unit that performs symbol variation display for each starting information stored in the starting information storage unit from the start of symbol variation until the symbol mode corresponding to the determination result is stopped and displayed. If it is an aspect, the pre-reading notice effect control means may use the predetermined start information in at least one of the symbol variation display corresponding to the predetermined start information and the symbol variation display executed prior to the symbol variation display. A pre-reading notice effect may be executed for notifying that the result of the determination based on whether or not the result is the specific determination result.

  In addition, the pre-reading notice producing unit may determine whether or not the notice of whether or not the result of the determination based on the predetermined start information by the determination unit may be the specific determination result may be executed. A pre-reading notice effect that is determined before the determination of whether or not based on the predetermined start information may be executed.

  Further, the prefetching notice effect means may execute the prefetching notice effect based on the predetermined start information stored in the start information storage means, or the prefetch notice effect. The command may be executed based on receiving a command indicating that the predetermined start information is stored in the start information storage means.

  Also, a predetermined number of game balls are encapsulated as encapsulated balls, the encapsulated spheres are fired into a game area to play a game, and a predetermined game value is given to a player based on the fact that the encapsulated balls have won a predetermined entry area. It is also possible to use an enclosed ball type gaming machine that can be used by circulating the encapsulated ball that has won the predetermined entry area or the enclosed ball that has not won the prize to the game area. Further, the gaming value may be a predetermined number of game ball number data that can be launched into the game area, and the effect control means is based on the fact that the game ball number data is given to the player, You may make the said production | generation means perform the production | generation which changed this predetermined production (For example, the production which the regular symbol fluctuation production changed by a prize ball paying appearance). Further, the effect control means may display an image indicating the predetermined number of the predetermined number of game ball number data on the image display means as the specific effect.

Subsequently, a pachinko machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention will be described. In the following description, matters that overlap with the items described so far may be omitted or redundantly described, but the components having the same names as the names of the components described so far are used. Will be described with the same reference numerals used so far.
FIG. 114 is a schematic front view of the gaming board 200 according to the third embodiment as viewed from the front.

  A game board 200 shown in FIG. 114 is a game board that makes a right turn during the electric support and the big hit game. In the game board 200, a general start port (gate) 228 is provided in each of the left region and the right region. The normal start port 228 corresponds to an example of an entry area, and the ball that has passed the normal start port 228 rolls in the game area 124 without being discharged to the game island side. The general start port 228 provided in the left region can be used to open the electric long during the non-electric support state (details will be described later), and the general start port 228 provided in the right region is It is possible to aim to open the electric Chu during the electric support state.

  Further, the first special figure starting port 230 and the second special figure starting port 232 are provided below the central portion of the game area 124. Both the first special figure start port 230 and the second special figure start port 232 are start areas into which game balls can enter, but the second area (the right side in the game area) rolls due to the arrangement of the game nails 238 and the like. The game ball is configured so that it is difficult or impossible to enter the first special figure starting port 232. On the other hand, even if the second special figure starting port (electrical chew) 232 is a game ball that rolls in the first area (left side in the game area), it rolls in the second area (right side in the game area). Even a game ball can be entered. The second special figure starting port 232 is provided directly below the first special figure starting port 230, and in the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, there is a pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid. Is provided. The combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure start port 232 corresponds to variable start means (variable start region), hereinafter referred to as an electric Chu (electric tulip), and the pair of blade members 2321 open. Is referred to as electric chew release. When the pair of blade members 2321 is closed (first state), the game ball is difficult to enter, and when the pair of blade members 2321 is open (second state), the game ball is easy to enter. . The electric chew is a starting region in which the state can be changed at least between the difficult-to-enter state and the easy-to-enter state. It should be noted that the size of the reception hole for the game ball of the electric chew when the pair of blade members 2321 is open is less than the size of five game balls.

Further, the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 is provided below the electric chew, and the door member 2341 is moved to be in a state where a winning can be achieved. That is, the variable winning opening 234 is a winning area (winning means) whose state can be changed at least between a winning impossible state and a winning possible state. It should be noted that the size of the game ball receiving port of the attacker in the state where the door member 2341 is opened is the size of five or more game balls. In the game board 200 shown in FIG. 114, the game balls that roll in the first area (the left side in the game area) are difficult to enter the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 due to the arrangement of the game nails 238 or the like. It is configured to be impossible, and the player needs to make a right strike during the big hit game.
<Type of design>

  Next, using FIGS. 115A to 115D, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special maps, common maps, and decorative symbols will be described.

  FIG. 115 (a) shows an example of a stop symbol mode (second symbol mode) of a special symbol that is stopped and displayed after the variable display of symbols in the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214. FIG. FIG. 115 (a) shows ten types of special drawings from “Special drawing A” to “Special drawing J”. In FIG. 115 (a), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  In the present embodiment, six types of jackpot symbols ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure F") are prepared as the stop pattern modes of special figures. “Special Figure A” and “Special Figure B” are 15 round (R) special jackpot symbols, and “Special Figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol (suddenly probable). When these symbols (special illustrations A, B, E) are stopped and displayed, the control state thereafter becomes the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. "Special figure C" and "Special figure D" are 15R jackpot symbols (15R normal jackpot). When the special figure C or the special figure D is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R big hit symbol (hidden probability variation). When the special figure F is stopped and displayed, the control state thereafter becomes a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state.

  In this embodiment, during the big hit game, the special figure low probability state is entered, and when the special figure A, special figure B, special figure E, and special figure F are won, the big hit is next. Until then, the special figure high probability state is maintained. On the other hand, when the special figure C and the special figure D are won, the special figure low probability state remains even after the big hit game ends.

  Also, after the end of the 15R big hit game and after the big hit game due to sudden probability change, the state shifts to a state with electric support (electric support) (hereinafter referred to as an electric support state). Even in the present embodiment, in the electric support state (short-time state), the universal figure change, the universal figure change, the electric chew release period extension, and the electric chew release frequency increase are all performed. If any one is performed, a player's advantage will be in a high state and it may be in an electric support state (time-short state). Alternatively, if either one of the extension of the electric chew release period or the increase in the number of electric chew release is performed, the electric support state (short-time state) may be set. . In the non-electric support state, the game ball is less likely to enter the second special figure starting port 232 than in the electric support state. In this embodiment, when special figure A, special figure B, or special figure E is stopped and displayed, the electric support state (ordinary figure high probability) until the next big hit game is started after the subsequent big hit game is finished. State) is maintained, and when special figure C or special figure D is stopped and displayed, the electric support state is maintained while special figure variable game is performed 100 times after the end of the big hit game to be performed thereafter. Shifts to the non-electric support state (ordinary low probability state). On the other hand, when a big hit without special support (Special Figure F) is won, the game does not shift to the electric support state after the big hit game ends. As will be described later, the special figure F is a symbol that is selected in the special figure 1 but not selected in the special figure 2.

  In this embodiment, in addition to the big hit symbol, two types of stop symbols are prepared as small hit symbols. The special figure G shown in FIG. 115A is the small hit symbol 1 and the special figure H is the small hit symbol 2. Any of the small winning symbols is a stop symbol mode in which the profit amount given to the player is a relatively small profit amount. Note that, as will be described later, the small hit symbol is a symbol that is selected in the special figure 1 but is not selected in the special figure 2.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, two types of stop symbols are prepared as lost symbols. Special figure I is a losing symbol 1, and special figure J is a losing symbol 2.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the jackpot control state of the second advantage with a high player's advantage and the first advantage with a lower advantage than the second advantage. A non-hit control state is prepared, and the pachinko machine 100 takes one of the control states of the big hit control state (second control state) and the non-hit control state (first control state). The main control unit 300 also performs the transition of these control states, and the main control unit 300 corresponds to an example of a control state transition unit.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as the 15R special jackpot symbol, symbols other than the two types of symbols “special symbol A” and “special symbol B” are also prepared. Symbols other than the two types of symbols “Fig. C” and “Special D” are also prepared, and a plurality of types of symbols are also prepared for the jackpot symbol of sudden probability change and the jackpot symbol of hidden probability change.

  FIG. 115B is a diagram showing an example of a special decorative pattern. There are ten types of decoration patterns of special drawings in the present embodiment, “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. When the reserved digest condition is satisfied, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208 a, 208 b, and 208 c of the decoration symbol display device 208. “Decoration display change” is performed to switch the display in the order of “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variably displays the special symbol decorative symbols separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. And the stop symbol aspect (2nd symbol aspect) which is a combination of a decoration symbol is stopped and displayed. The variation display and stop display of the decorative symbol of the special figure are synchronized with the variation display and stop display of the symbol on the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214.

  When a 15R special jackpot ("Special Figure A" or "Special Figure B") or a 15R special jackpot ("Special Figure C" or "Special Figure D") is notified, the same decorative design is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A combination of three decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1”, “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”, etc.) is stopped and displayed. The combination of these decorative symbols is a combination of decorative symbols with a jackpot fixed with probability change. Further, among these combinations of decorative symbols, combinations of decorative symbols in which three of the same odd number of decorative symbols are arranged (for example, “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”). Is a combination of 15R special jackpot-decorated decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed only in the case of 15R special jackpot that is "Special Figure A" or "Special Figure B". Further, when notifying the hidden probability change ("Special Figure F") or the small hits ("Special Figure G", "Special Figure H") of the 2R big hits, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed with " A combination of decorative symbols such as “decoration 1 -decoration 2 -decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. Further, when a sudden probability change (“special drawing E”) in the 2R jackpot is notified, a combination of decorative symbols such as “decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5” is stopped and displayed. A combination of decorative symbols such as “decoration 1 -decoration 2 -decoration 3” and a combination of ornamental symbols such as “decoration 1 -decoration 3 -decoration 5” may be referred to as chance eyes. In addition, when notifying the special symbol I or the special symbol J, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c may be combined with a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of the decorative symbols described above (for example, a variety of symbols). Eye) is stopped.

  Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of the “variable display of the decorative symbol of the special symbol” until the stop symbol mode (combination of decorative symbols) of the decorative symbol of the special symbol is stopped is displayed as the special symbol. It may be referred to as a variable display of decorative patterns for use. The variation display of the special-purpose decorative symbol is performed under the control of the first sub-control unit 400.

  As described above, the special symbols 1 and 2 shown in the stop symbol mode (see FIG. 82 (a)) and one special symbol displayed in each of the left and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. The decorative pattern of the decorative pattern (see (c) of the figure) is larger in the decorative pattern of the special figure (see (c) of the figure).

  FIG. 115 (c) is a diagram showing an example of a general-purpose stop symbol pattern (first symbol pattern) that is stopped and displayed after the symbol variation display in the general symbol display device 210. In the present embodiment, two types of winning symbols (“Typical A” and “Typical B”) and one type of off-set symbol (“Typical C”) are prepared as the stop symbols for the normal. . “Common map A” is the winning symbol 1 and “Utsu figure B” is the winning symbol 2. Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a sphere detection sensor, detects that the sphere has passed through the general start port 228, the general display display device 210 illuminates all seven segments and the central one segment. Repeat the lighting and perform “variable display of ordinary figure” (ordinary figure fluctuation game). Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, the usual stop symbol form shown in FIG. 115 (c) is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 115 (c), the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  Hereinafter, the display from the start of the “variable display of the normal figure” to the stop display of the stop pattern of the normal figure may be referred to as a normal variable display. The universal symbol display device 210 corresponds to an example of an auxiliary symbol notification unit, a first symbol display unit, or a simple symbol display unit.

  In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 also displays a variation of the normal decorative symbol. FIG. 115 (d) is a diagram showing a stop symbol form of a usual decorative symbol. Although the decorative display of the normal symbol will be described in detail later, the stop symbol mode shown in FIG. 4D is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 after the variable symbol variable display of the general symbol is displayed. In other words, when the universal symbol display device 210 stops displaying the winning symbol 1 (“common symbol A”) shown in FIG. 10C, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “general symbol” shown in FIG. In the case where “decoration 1” is stopped and displayed, and the normal symbol display device 210 stops and displays the winning symbol 2 (“common symbol B”) shown in FIG. ) Is displayed in a stopped manner, and in both cases, the hit of the general map is notified. In addition, when the universal symbol display device 210 stops and displays the off symbol (“common symbol C”) shown in FIG. 10C, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the “general symbol decoration” shown in FIG. 3 ”is stopped and the usual deviation is notified. It should be noted that the normal symbol variation display in the general symbol display device 210 and the normal symbol variation display in the decorative symbol display device 208 may be synchronized or may not be synchronized.

  Next, the normal / no-go determination in the present embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, left-handed is performed in the non-electric support state, and right-handed is performed in the electric support state. When left-handed in the non-electric support state, whether or not the normal game is successful is determined based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the general game start opening (gate) 228 provided in the left region. Further, when the player makes a right turn in the electric support state, whether or not the normal game is successful is determined based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the general game start opening (gate) 228 provided in the right region. Even when the game ball passes through the normal start port 228 provided in the right area even though it is in the non-electric support state, it is left even though it is in the electric support state. Even if the game ball passes through the general start port 228 provided in the left area, the determination of whether or not the normal map is made is performed. However, if the usual-pending digestion condition is not satisfied, whether or not the usual-plot is successful is not performed. The requirement to establish the “Usu” hold-up condition here is when there is a hold of the “Usu”, the electric chew is not operating, and the “Utsu” variable game is not being played, and the “Usu map” is not displayed. This is a requirement that holds true. In addition, when there is no holding of the usual figure, when the electric chew is not operated, and the usual figure variable game is not being performed and the usual figure confirmation display is not being performed, the figure is opened through the start opening (gate) 228. This is a requirement that holds even when the ball passes.

  The normal / unusual determination table is also stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 in this embodiment.

  FIG. 116 (a) is a diagram showing a low probability table for determining whether or not a normal figure is reached, and FIG. 116 (b) is a diagram showing a high probability table for determining whether or not a normal figure is appropriate.

  In the present embodiment, when a general-purpose random number acquisition condition is satisfied, one set of random values (starting information) is stored in a general-purpose holding storage unit provided in the RAM 308. The requirement for establishment of the common figure random number acquisition condition here is a requirement established based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the common figure start port (gate) 228. In other words, in a state where the number of ordinary holds is less than a predetermined upper limit, this is a requirement that is established when a game ball passes through the general opening 228, and in a state where the number of ordinary holds is a predetermined upper limit, This is a requirement that does not hold even if a game ball passes through the normal start port 228. In the present embodiment, a universal winning random number value and a universal determination random number value are stored as random number values (starting information) for one set in the universal figure storage unit.

  In the usual-time determination processing, the time reduction flag is referred to and the determination is made based on whether or not the current control state is the electric support state. If the time reduction flag is off (if it is in the non-electric support state), whether or not the normal time is determined is determined using the low probability table shown in FIG. 116 (a), and if the time reduction flag is on (electric support). If it is in the state), the normal determination is made using the high probability table shown in FIG. 116 (b). The determination of whether or not a common figure is made is performed based on a random number value for a common figure winning in the starting information extracted from the general figure holding storage unit of the RAM 308 (a possible range is 0 to 65535). The hit probability of the usual figure is 65532/65536 in the low probability table shown in FIG. 116 (a) and 655341/65536 in the high probability table shown in FIG. 116 (b). Although it is almost equivalent to the determination of whether or not to win, the probability of winning per normal figure is higher in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state. Here, deriving “winning” or “losing” is equivalent to the normal-win / no-go determination (lottery), and the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the normal-win / no-win determination processing here is the first win / fail determination means. This corresponds to an example of (auxiliary success / failure determination means). In addition, the usual “hit” hit determination result corresponds to an example of a specific hit determination result.

  When the determination of whether or not the usual figure is completed is completed, the stop symbol form of the ordinary figure is determined. In addition, it is good also considering the determination of a common figure and the determination of the stop symbol aspect of a common figure together as the determination of a normal figure's success / failure (first success / failure determination).

  FIG. 116 (c) is a diagram showing a common figure determining low probability table, and FIG. 116 (d) is a figure showing a common figure determining high probability table.

  Also in the common map determination process, the time stamp flag is referred to, and the general map determination is performed based on whether or not the current control state is the electric support state. If the time reduction flag is turned off (if it is in the non-electric support state), the general decision is made using the low probability table shown in FIG. 116 (c), and if the time reduction flag is turned on (in the electric support state) If there is, the common map is determined using the high probability table shown in FIG. 116 (d). In this common figure determination process, it is performed based on a common figure decision random number value (acquisable range is 0 to 99) in the start information extracted from the common figure holding storage unit of the RAM 308. In the low-probability state (non-electric support), 99% of the winning symbols are awarded to Symbol 1 (Normal Diagram A), and 1% of the probability is awarded to Symbol 2 (Normal Diagram B). . On the other hand, in the normal figure high probability state (electric support state), the symbol 2 per common figure (normal figure B) is won with a probability of 100%. Since there is only one type of lost symbol, the common symbol determination process based on the common symbol determination random number value may be omitted.

  The determination as to whether or not the usual figure is true may be derived from “winning” or “losing”. Alternatively, the determination as to whether or not a normal figure is acceptable may be derived up to a general symbol.

  The fluctuation time is recorded for reference in both the common figure determination table shown in FIG. 116 (c) and the common figure determination table shown in FIG. 116 (d). In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the usual figure in the ordinary figure display device 210 is uniformly 1 second in the electric support state, and is uniformly 20 seconds in the non-electric support state. Therefore, the usual fluctuation time is a relatively short first fluctuation time in the electric support state, and a relatively long second fluctuation time in the electric support state. In addition, when the standard random number acquisition condition is established, the random number value for determining the standard variable period is acquired together with the standard random number value and the standard random number value, and the variable time of the standard figure is determined by lottery. Also good.

  Next, an opening / closing operation of the pair of blade members 2321 performed by the main control unit 300, that is, an opening / closing pattern of the electric chew will be described.

  FIG. 117A is a diagram for explaining an open / close pattern of an electric chew in the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment.

  If the result of the usual figure determination is ordinary figure A, after the ordinary figure decoration 1 is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the electric Chu opens once for 0.3 seconds. Even in the pachinko machine in the second embodiment, the launch interval of the game balls by the launcher 110 is 0.6 seconds. In the case of the hit pattern of the usual figure A, one opening time of the pair of blade members 2321 is a game It is shorter than the launch interval of the spheres, and even if it is elected per the usual figure of Fig. A, it is virtually impossible to enter the electric Chu, and it is almost impossible to acquire the exit ball. Hereinafter, the winning of the usual figure A and the opening of the pair of blade members 232a may be referred to as electric Chu short opening. This electric chew short open (corresponding to the first open pattern) stochastically becomes an electric chew open pattern in the non-electric support state.

  When the result of the universal figure determination is normal figure B, after the universal figure decoration 2 is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the electric Chu first opens for 0.3 seconds, After a 0.5 second closure time, a 5 second release is performed. That is, the electric Chu performs a specific operation (opening / closing operation of the pair of blade members 232a) for 5.8 seconds. Hereinafter, the winning of the normal figure B and the opening of the pair of blade members 232a may be referred to as electric tulong opening. With this electric-chu-long opening (corresponding to the second opening pattern), it is expected that the player will enter the electric chew, and it can be highly expected that he will get out. In the electric Chu long opening, the blade member 2321 may be opened at least longer than the firing interval or longer than the normal fluctuation time in the electric support state, and the first 0.3 second opening is omitted. Then, only the second long opening may be performed. This electric-chu-long opening stochastically becomes an electric-chu opening pattern in the electric support state.

  If there is a predetermined number of balls before the predetermined opening time elapses, the electric chew is closed at that time.

  In the case where the universal figure determination result is the universal figure C, after the universal figure decoration 3 is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the electric chew does not open and maintains the closed state.

  Next, a first effect (hereinafter referred to as a normal drawing effect) performed on the sub-control unit side (second sub-control unit 500) will be described. The ordinary drawing effect in this embodiment includes at least one effect of a changing effect, a finalizing effect, and an operating effect, or includes a predetermined area in the decorative symbol display device 208. It is sufficient that the effect is performed in the area. The changing effect is an effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 during the normal symbol change display by the general symbol display device 210, and the finalizing effect determines the stop symbol pattern of the normal diagram by the general symbol display device 210. This is an effect performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during display, and the in-operation effect is an effect performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the operation of the electric chew. In addition, these effects are effects in which an effect related to the result of determination of whether or not a special figure (for example, a notice per universal figure) and an effect related to the result of whether or not a special figure is determined (for example, a special figure big hit notice) are added. There may be an effect related to the result of the determination of whether or not the special drawing is performed instead of the effect related to the result of the determination of whether or not the normal drawing is received. As will be described in detail later, the general drawing effect is executed in an area including a predetermined area provided between the area for displaying the hold icon of FIG. 1 and the area for displaying the hold icon of FIG. .

FIG. 117 (b) is a diagram for explaining several examples of common drawing effects in the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment.
(A)-(f) are the change display patterns in a non-electric support state.

  (A) is a variation display pattern (the above-mentioned variation effect) of the usual decorative pattern. In the effect shown in (a), high-speed fluctuations are repeated in the order of general decoration 1, general decoration 2, and general decoration 3, and after 3 seconds, the decorative pattern of the general graphic representing the result of determining the general graphic is stopped and displayed.

  (A) is also a variation display pattern (the above-mentioned variation effect) of a normal decoration symbol. In the effect shown in (a), high-speed fluctuation is repeated in the order of general decoration 2, general decoration 2, and general decoration 3, and the decorative pattern of the general graphic representing the general graphic determination result is stopped and displayed after 15 seconds. In this effect, many ordinary decorations 2 are displayed during high-speed fluctuations, so that the degree of expectation for opening the electric tulong is improved.

  (C) is also a variation display pattern (the above-mentioned variation effect) of the usual decorative pattern. In the effect shown in (c), high-speed fluctuation in which the general decoration 2 is continuously displayed is repeated and stopped after 10 seconds. In this effect, since only the ordinary figure decoration 2 is displayed continuously, the stop display also becomes the ordinary figure decoration 2. Therefore, when this effect is started, the electric tulong release is confirmed.

  (D) is also a variation display pattern (the above-described variation effect) of the usual decorative pattern. In the production shown in this (d), repeated high-speed fluctuations in the order of Ordinary decoration 1, Ordinary decoration 2, Ordinary decoration 3, and "Gekiatsu", which represents the special jackpot notice, repeated 10 seconds later, One of the decorative symbols stops. Therefore, there is a case where the decoration pattern of “Gekiatsu” is stopped and displayed. In this case, the expectation of opening the electric tulong does not increase, but the expectation of the big hit of the special figure increases and the interest of the game is improved. . In other words, there is a case where not only the electric chew opening but also a big hit can be expected.

  (E) is also a variation display pattern (the above-described variation effect) of the usual decorative symbol. In the production shown in (e), high-speed fluctuations were repeated in the order of Ordinary decoration 2 and “Gatsu Atsu”, which represents the special jackpot notice, and after 10 seconds, either the Ordinary decoration 2 or “Geki Atsu” One of the decorative symbols is stopped. In this effect, half of the special figure jackpot notice is displayed during high-speed fluctuations, so there are cases in which not only the electric chew release but also the special figure jackpots can be expected from the high-speed fluctuation.

  In the variation display pattern shown in (f), a “latent” decorative symbol representing a 2R jackpot notice that is a latent probability change of a special figure, a “surprise” decorative pattern representing a 2R jackpot notice that is a sudden probability change of a special figure, High-speed fluctuation is repeated in the order of the “big hit” decorative symbol representing the special 15R jackpot notice, and any decorative symbol is stopped and displayed after 5 seconds. When this effect is started, the opening of the variable prize opening 234 is confirmed.

  The variation display pattern described above may be such that the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in accordance with the end timing of the regular symbol variation display by the universal symbol display device 210. In particular, in the case of a normal figure, since the electric chew is released thereafter, the timing of the end of the symbol variation display by the general diagram display device 210 is matched with the timing of the production end of (a) to (e), It is preferable to notify the player of the opening of the electric chew. On the other hand, in particular, in the case of a deviation from the usual figure, it is not always necessary to make the timings coincide with each other, and any timing during the 20-second symbol variation display by the universal figure display device 210 may be used. For example, the general symbol effect may be started before the start of the symbol variation display by the general symbol display device 210, or may be continued until after the symbol variation display by the general symbol display device 210 is completed. Furthermore, since the effect shown in (f) is an effect related to the result of determination of whether or not a special figure is appropriate, it may be performed during a period when the symbol variation display by the general figure display device 210 is not performed. In addition, the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed after the decorative symbol variation display may be a decorative symbol representing a fake general symbol determination result or a fake jackpot notice.

  (Ki) is an example of the effect during operation. In the effect during operation shown in (ki), after the symbol variation display by the universal symbol display device 210 in the non-electric support state, the decoration symbol in which the character of the frog is carrying a peace sign is displayed on the ornament symbol display device 208. The In the non-electric support state, in many cases, the winning of the electric chew short is won, but during the electric chew short opening, the operating effect shown in (ki) is suddenly executed for a moment. In addition, when electing to open the electric Chu long, the in-operation effects shown in (ki) are executed for 5.8 seconds during which the electric Chu opens and closes. The in-operation effects shown in (ki) may be executed only while the electric Chu is open for 5 seconds, or only while the electric Chu is initially open for 0.3 seconds ( An effect during operation shown in (g) may be executed. Hereinafter, an effect in which a decorative symbol in which the Tono-sama character is performing a peace sign is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 may be referred to as an electric chew release notification effect.

  The in-operation effects shown in (ki) may be executed immediately after the final display of the general map B by the general map display device 210 is completed (immediately before the electric chew operation).

  In addition, not only in the non-electric support state but also in the electric support state, even when the electric tulong release is won, the in-operation effects shown in (ki) may be executed. In this case, after the symbol variation display for 1 second is performed, in many cases, the electrified long open is won, and during the 5.8 seconds during which the electrified opens and closes, the in-motion effects shown in (ki) are executed. do it. In addition, when the winning of the electric chew short is won, it may be executed for a moment during the opening of the electric chew short for 0.3 seconds.

  Moreover, the production time (first time) of the variable display pattern shown in FIGS. 117 (b) (a) to (e) is the production of the electric chew release notification production pattern shown in (ki) of FIG. 117 (b). Since it is a time longer than the time (second time) and the usual decorative symbol variation display effect is performed in a relatively long effect time, the expectation for the opening of the electric chew may be improved.

  (K) is an example of the effect of the jackpot notice of the special figure fluctuation. The effect shown in (K) is executed in an area including a predetermined area in the decorative symbol display device 208 regardless of the symbol variation display by the general symbol display device 210 or the electric chew operation. In other words, even when the symbol variation display by the general symbol display device 210 is not being performed or the electric chew is not being operated, it is executed during the symbol variation display by the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214. This is an effect of notifying that the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display, and an effect of notifying that the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the variation display as if it is stopped ( So-called fake notice effects) are also included. Here, the “Hidden” decorative symbol that represents the 2R jackpot notice that is the special probability of the latent figure change, the “Random” decorative symbol that represents the 2R jackpot notice that is the sudden probability of the special figure, and the 15R jackpot notice of the special figure The high-speed variation is repeated in the order of the “big hit” decorative symbol and the “super hot” decorative symbol indicating the special symbol big hit notice, and one of the decorative symbols stops and displays after 8 seconds. Note that a decorative pattern of a picture may be used instead of the decorative pattern of a character.

  117 (b) may be executed after the respective effects (a) to (f) and (c) shown in FIG. 117 (b). That is, the electric chew release notification effect may be performed in combination with the variable display pattern. Furthermore, the electric chew release notification effect may not be executed when the electric chew short is opened, but may be executed when the electric chew long is opened. By doing so, only when the electric chew is open advantageous for the player, the electric chew release notification effect is performed, and it may be possible to increase the player's expectation. In addition, when the general map A is stopped and displayed, the effects (a) to (f) and (c) shown in FIG. 117 (b) are not executed, and the electric chew is released. The notification effect is also not executed, and each of the effects (decorative symbol variation display effect) shown in FIG. 117 (b) is executed when the normal figure B is stopped and displayed. Later, an electric chew release notification effect may also be executed. By doing so, the decorative symbol variation display effect can be performed only when the electric chew is advantageously opened, and it may be possible to increase the player's expectation.

  In addition, the ordinary drawing effect may be an effect of displaying the ordinary figure decorative symbol shown in FIG. 115 (d) as a finalized effect without performing the fluctuation display of the ordinary decorative symbol (the above-described changing effect). In addition, the effect during the finalization may be performed, and in the case of the usual figure, the effect of performing the electric chew release notification effect may be used. In addition, even if it is per map, it may be an effect that performs an electric chew release notification effect only for the general map B where the electric chew long open is performed, or in the sense of performing a rare display in a very short time, It may be an effect of performing an electric chew release notification effect only for the usual figure A in which the electric chew short open is performed.

Next, a general drawing effect determination process executed by the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing the flow of the ordinary drawing effect determination process.

  The first sub-control unit 400 is transmitted with a normal change start command from the main control unit 300. 118 is started when the first sub-control unit 400 receives this common figure change start command. The usual figure change start command includes information indicating the current control state (whether or not the electric support state is set) and a usual figure determination result. The first sub-control unit 400 also receives a general-purpose hold increase command from the main control unit 300. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the general-purpose hold increase command, the general-purpose effect determination process is started. It may be.

  First, it is determined whether or not the non-electric support is in effect based on the information indicating the current control state included in the general figure change start command (step S601). The determination process ends. If it is in the non-electric support state, it is determined whether or not the ordinary drawing effect is executed (step S602). In the determination here, for example, if the usual figure determination result included in the ordinary figure change start command is the ordinary figure B, the ordinary figure effect is executed. Further, even if the ordinary map determination result is the ordinary map C, it may be executed as a fake ordinary drawing effect. Further, a dedicated random number may be acquired, and a lottery for whether or not to perform a normal drawing effect may be performed. In particular, when the normal map determination result is the normal map C, the execution of the fake general map effect may be determined by a lottery process. Alternatively, if the special symbol variation start command is received and the special symbol variation is being executed, the regular symbol effect may be performed. In this case, it is preferable to execute a general drawing effect including a special jackpot notice effect. In addition, when the symbol variation of the special figure is being executed and the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed due to the symbol variation, the jackpot notice effect of the special symbol may be executed as a general drawing effect, Even if the jackpot symbol is not stopped and displayed, the jackpot notice effect of a fake special symbol may be executed. In addition, the execution of the special bonus jackpot notice here may be executed when an effective / not effective lottery is performed and the lottery is won.

  If the ordinary drawing effect is not executed, the ordinary drawing effect determining process is ended. If the ordinary drawing effect is executed, it is determined whether or not it is during a predetermined period (step S603). In the present embodiment, during the special figure jackpot game (when the attacker opens / closes), or during the production of the special figure with a high expectation level (for example, during the super reach in the variation display of the special figure decoration symbol) The execution of the effects (a) to (e) and (c) shown in 117 (b) is refrained. The predetermined period here is during a special hit game of a special figure and during a performance with a high expectation level of the special figure jackpot. If it is not during this predetermined period, an effect pattern is selected from all the effect patterns ((a) to (ku)) shown in FIG. 117 (b) (step S604), and the process proceeds to step S606. 117 (b) may be executed after each of the effects (a) to (e) shown in FIG. 117 (b). Only the electric-chu release notification effect may be executed without executing any of the effects (a) to (e) shown in FIG. If it is not during the predetermined period, an effect pattern may be selected from effects other than the electric chew release notification effect ((a) to (e) and (ku) shown in FIG. 117 (b)).

  On the other hand, if it is during the predetermined period, an effect pattern of only the electric chew release notification effect shown in FIG. 117 (b) is selected (step S605), and the process proceeds to step S606. In this way, during the big hit game, the decorative symbol variation display effects of (a) to (e) and (ku) shown in FIG. There may be cases where it is only the presentation time of the notification effect and the player can be concentrated on the big hit game.

  In step S606, information representing the effect pattern selected in step S604 or step S605 is set in the ordinary drawing effect command and transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, and the ordinary drawing effect determining process ends. The second sub-control unit 500 that has received the ordinary drawing effect command controls the decorative symbol display device 208 based on information representing the effect pattern included in the ordinary drawing effect command, and sets a predetermined area in the decorative symbol display device 208. A general drawing effect is executed in the area that includes it.

  As described above, in this embodiment, if the current control state is the electric support state, the ordinary drawing effect is not executed by the determination in step S601. In addition, when the current control state is the electric support state, instead of not uniformly executing the ordinary drawing effect, perform a lottery to determine whether or not to execute the ordinary drawing effect with a predetermined probability. Also good. As described above, in this embodiment, the ordinary drawing effect is an effect that is more easily executed in the non-electric support state than in the electric support state. Since the non-electric support state is a state in which it is difficult for a game ball to win the electric chew, there is a case where it can be expected that the game ball wins the electric chew. On the other hand, since the electric support state is a state in which a game ball is likely to win the electric chew, there is a possibility that the player's expectation will not be improved so much even if the usual drawing effect is performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, during a predetermined period such as during a big hit game, the changing effect and the determined effect are not uniformly performed according to the determination in step S603, and only the electric chew release notification effect is performed. In addition, during the predetermined period, instead of uniformly executing the changing production and the finalizing production, perform a lottery to determine whether or not to execute the changing production and the finalizing production with a predetermined probability. Also good. Further, during the predetermined period, the changing effect or the determined effect may not be performed, and the normal drawing effect may not be performed uniformly. Or, even if it is performed, it is possible to perform a lottery to determine whether or not to execute, and to execute only the electric chew release notification effect with a predetermined probability. That is, the first effect may be an effect that is easier to execute in the non-hit control state than in the big hit control state. Winning of a normal chart is also a factor that improves the chances of a special chart's success determination (big win lottery), so the player can be expected by performing the general drawing performance in a non-hit game There is. Also, in general, there are more attacker balls than electric chews. When the electric chew is placed on the upper or upstream side of the attacker, the opening of the electric chew during the big hit game will win the attacker. May be disturbed. For this reason, it may be possible to reduce the dissatisfaction of the player by making it difficult to perform the usual drawing effect during the big hit game.
Here, the determination of whether or not a special figure is appropriate will also be described.

  In the present embodiment, when the special figure starting information acquisition condition is satisfied, one set of random value (starting information) is stored in the special figure 1 holding storage unit or the special figure 2 holding storage unit provided in the RAM 308. The requirement for establishment of the special figure random number acquisition condition here is a requirement that is established based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first special figure starting port 230 for the special figure 1. That is, in the state where the number of holdings in FIG. 1 is less than the predetermined upper limit number, it is a requirement that is satisfied when a game ball enters the first special figure starting port 230, and the number of holdings in FIG. In a certain state, it is a requirement that does not hold even if a game ball enters the first special figure starting port 230. The special figure 2 is a requirement established based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second special figure starting port 232 (electric Chu). That is, in the state where the number of holdings in the special figure 2 is less than the predetermined upper limit number, it is a requirement that is satisfied when a game ball enters the second special figure starting port 232, and the holding number in the special figure 2 is the predetermined upper limit number. In a certain state, it is a requirement that does not hold even if a game ball enters the second special figure starting port 232. In the present embodiment, the special figure 1 winning random number value, the special figure 1 decision random value, and the special figure 1 variation time decision random value are stored as one set of random value (starting information) in the special figure 1 holding storage unit. To do. Further, the special figure 2 winning random number value, the special figure 2 determined random value, and the special figure 2 variation time determining random value are stored as one set of random value (starting information) in the special figure 2 holding storage unit.

  FIG. 119 (a) is a diagram showing a high probability table for determining whether or not a special figure is present, and FIG. 119 (b) is a diagram showing a low probability table for determining whether or not a special figure is present. These tables are stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

  When the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 retrieves the start information from the holding storage unit of the RAM 308, the CPU 304 refers to the probability variation flag, and if the probability variation flag is on, the special diagram high probability state exists. 1 is based on which random number range in the high probability table for success / failure determination shown in FIG. 119 (a) belongs to the winning random number value (both possible numerical range is 0 to 65535). Deriving "big hit" or "losing". On the other hand, if the probability variation flag is off, it is in the special figure low probability state, so that any random number in the high probability table for success / failure determination shown in FIG. Based on whether it belongs to the range, “big hit” or “losing” is derived as the special figure 2 win / fail judgment result.

  In this embodiment, the big hit probability is about 1/400 in the special figure low probability state, whereas it is about 1/40 in the special figure high probability state.

  In the present embodiment, the small hit is not in the special figure 2 but only in the special figure 1. Accordingly, if the result of the determination of success / failure using the special figure 1 winning random number value is a loss, a small hit determination is performed.

  FIG. 119 (c) is a diagram showing a table for determining small hits stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

In the small hit determination only in the special figure 1, the special figure 1 winning random number value is used again to perform the small hit determination.
In addition, like FIG. 1, you may provide a small hit in special figure 2. FIG.

In this way, “big hit”, “small hit”, or “lack” is derived as the special figure 1 determination result. Further, “big hit” or “losing” is derived as the special figure 2 determination result.
Next, the symbol of the special figure is determined based on the special figure determination result.

  FIG. 119 (d) is a diagram showing a special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. This special figure determination table includes a special symbol stop symbol pattern (FIG. 115 (a) for each big hit (special illustration A to special figure F), small hit (special illustrations G and H), and deviation (special illustrations I and J). ))) Is specified. Special figure 2 does not have a random number range corresponding to each of special figure F to special figure H. In special figure 2, the big hit is 15R special big hit (special figures A and B), 15R normal big hit. (Special figure C, D), suddenly a 2R big hit symbol (special figure E), which is a probable change, and no small hit.

  The CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 is a special figure 1 random value or a special figure 2 random value out of one set of random values previously acquired from the special figure 1 reservation storage part or the special figure 2 reservation storage part of the RAM 308. A special figure is determined using a numerical value (a numerical range that can be taken together is 0 to 99).

  The winning probability of the 15R special jackpot (Special Figures A and B), which is the most advantageous for the game, is 70% in the case of Special Figure 2, whereas it is 30% in the case of Special Figure 1. 2 is a big hit which is more advantageous than that of FIG. Thus, in this embodiment, the special figure 2 is more likely to generate a big hit advantageous to the player than the special figure 1.

  The determination of whether or not the special figure is true may be derived from “big hit”, “small hit”, or “lack”, or may be derived from “big hit” or “lack”. Alternatively, whether or not a special figure is appropriate may be derived up to a special figure symbol.

  Next, specific examples of effects in the present embodiment will be described. First, a description will be given with reference to FIGS. 120 to 124. 120 is a diagram showing a 1/5 portion of a specific example of the effect in the present embodiment, FIG. 121 is a diagram showing 2/5 part of a specific example of the effect in the present embodiment, and FIG. 122 is a diagram showing the present embodiment. FIG. 123 is a diagram showing a 4/5 portion of a specific example of the effect in the present embodiment, and FIG. 124 is a diagram showing a specific example of the effect in the present embodiment. FIG. 120 is a diagram illustrating a 5/5 portion, and FIGS. 120 to 124 are examples connected to one another.

  120 to 124 show a decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. Also, below the decorative symbol display device 208, a general-purpose display device 210, a first special figure display device 212, and a second special figure display device 214 are shown. The common figure display device 210 is a seven-segment display device shown on the rightmost side, the second special figure display device 214 is a seven-segment display device shown on the leftmost side, and the first special figure display device 212 is 7-segment display device shown in the center. In these 7-segment display devices, only the horizontal segment at the center in the vertical direction is lit while the symbol is changing. In addition, the location of the segment where the black part is lit is shown.

  In addition, between FIGS. 120A and 120A, a state in which the game ball B is about to pass through the general opening 228 is shown. Furthermore, FIG. 120 (ki), (ku), FIG. 121 (ke), (ko), FIG. 122 (su), (ta), FIG. 123 (d), FIG. 124 (no), (e), An electric Chu (second special figure starting port 232 and a pair of blade members 232a) is shown.

  Further, a special figure 1 hold display area 281 is prepared on the left side of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a special figure 2 hold display area 282 is prepared on the right side thereof. Further, a special drawing effect area 283 corresponding to an example of the predetermined area described above is provided between the special figure 1 hold display area 281 and the special figure 2 hold display area 282. That is, the general drawing effect area 283 is provided in the center portion of the effect display area 208d.

Whether the special figure 1 hold display area 281 or the special figure 2 hold display area 282, the hold icon is displayed on the normal drawing effect area 283 side (center side) as the old hold icon. That is, in the special figure 1 hold, the first hold icon representing the first hold with the oldest winning timing is displayed on the left side of the ordinary drawing effect area 283, and in the special figure 2 hold, the first winning icon with the oldest winning timing is displayed. A second hold icon representing 2 hold is displayed on the right side of the ordinary drawing effect area 283. In the special figure 1 hold display area 281 shown in FIG. 120A, one special figure 1 hold icon (first special figure 1 hold icon) 2811 indicating that there is one special figure 1 hold is shown. Has been. The default mode of the special figure 1 hold icon is a black circle. The first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 is displayed on the left side of the general drawing effect area 283. In addition, in the special figure 2 hold display area 282 shown in FIG. 120 (K), there is one special figure 2 hold icon (first special figure 2 hold icon) 2821 indicating that there is one special figure 2 hold. It is shown. The default mode of the special figure 2 hold icon is a white circle different from the default mode of the special figure 1 hold icon so that it can be distinguished from the special figure 1 hold icon. The first special figure 2 hold icon 2821 is displayed on the right side of the general drawing effect area 283.
Furthermore, the pachinko machine of this embodiment is also a special figure 2 priority change machine.

  The state shown in FIG. 120A is a non-electric support state, there is no special figure 2 hold, and one special figure hold is left, and the first special figure display device 212 displays a symbol variation display. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variable display shown in FIG. 1 is displayed. On the other hand, the symbol display device 210 does not perform symbol variation display, and the symbol of the usual symbol decoration 3 as the previous result is still displayed in the symbol effect area 283 of the ornament symbol display device 208. . When the general symbol display device 210 does not perform symbol variation display, no symbol may be displayed in the general symbol effect area 283.

  Here, since the player is in the non-electric support state, the player is left-handed, and eventually, one game ball B passes through the general game start port 228 provided in the left region, and the general game display device 210 Then, the symbol variation display is started.

  In the ordinary drawing effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The variation display pattern of the usual decorative pattern here is the variation display pattern shown in (a) of FIG. Further, in this decorative symbol display device 208, a character C1 of a haniwa that imitates a cactus appears as an effect of a big hit notice of Special Figure 1. The character C1 is displayed larger than the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the foot portion hides a part of the normal drawing effect area 283 where the variable display is performed. As a result, it is difficult to visually recognize the fluctuation display of the usual decorative pattern, and the interest of the game is improved. However, the symbol variation display on the general-purpose display device 210 can be viewed well. In addition, you may hide all the usual drawing effect area | regions 283 by the character C1.

  In the decorative design display device 208 shown in FIG. 120 (c), the character C1 disappears, and the display of the decorative design shown in FIG. By the disappearance of the character C1, the symbol variation display in the normal drawing effect area 283 can be visually recognized well.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 120D, the decorative symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is developed into super reach, and the decorative symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is small in the left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. A housemaid character C2 appears as an effect of super reach. Super reach itself is a type of jackpot notice, and the super reach production also corresponds to the jackpot notice. The character C2 is also displayed larger than the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the foot portion hides a part of the normal drawing effect area 283 where the variable display is performed. As a result, it is difficult to visually recognize the fluctuation display of the usual decorative pattern, and the interest of the game is improved. However, the symbol variation display on the general-purpose display device 210 can be viewed well. Note that the general drawing effect area 283 may be entirely hidden by the character C2. Further, when the super reach is developed, the hold icon that has been displayed so far (here, the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811) disappears. Here, although part of the general drawing effect area 283 is hidden by the character C2, the variation display of the decorative pattern of the special figure 1 is not moved to the left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the A part may be hidden by the variable display of the decorative pattern of the special figure 1. The mode of hiding a part or all of the general drawing effect area 283 by the variation display of the special symbol decoration pattern is not limited to the super reach, and any timing may be used as long as the special diagram variation display is in progress.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 120 (o), a disappointing presentation is performed in which the decorative symbol that stops in the middle symbol display area 208b is the decoration 7 in the state where the maiden character C2 appears. At 120 (f), the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212 is finished, the stop symbol is displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is a combination of the decorative symbols that are out of place “decoration 6-decoration 7”. -Decoration 6 "is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, the symbol variation display in the general symbol display device 210 is also ended, and the non-electric support state is displayed, but the general symbol B is stopped and displayed in the general symbol effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208. The fluctuation display is ended, and the general decoration 2 corresponding to the general map B is stopped and displayed. As a result, the electric long opening is performed.

  In FIG. 120 (ki), the electric chew long open is started, and in the general drawing effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the electric chew release notifying effect shown in (ki) of FIG. 117 (b) is displayed. An effect in which a decorative design that is signed is displayed). In addition, the suspension of the remaining one special figure 1 is exhausted, the first special figure display device 212 starts the symbol variation display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variation display of the special symbol 1.

  In FIG. 120 (ku), a game ball enters an electric chew that has been in an open state for 5 seconds, and the holding in FIG. 2 increases by one. Display of one special figure 2 hold icon 2821 (first special figure 2 hold icon 2821) indicating that there is one special figure 2 hold in the special figure 2 hold display area 282 of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is started. In addition, the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212 is ended, the stop symbol is displayed, and the decoration symbol display device 208 displays “decoration 5 -decoration 3 -decoration 4” which is a combination of the decorative symbols that are not included. Stopped display.

  Next, the first hold of the special figure 2 represented by the first special figure 2 hold icon 2821 shown in FIG. 120 (k) is digested, and the second special figure display device 214 starts the symbol variation display, and the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, the variation display of the decorative pattern of the special figure 2 is started. Moreover, in the electric Chu, the opening for 5 seconds is continued, two game balls enter the electric Chu, and the holding of the special figure 2 increases by two. In the special figure 2 hold display area 282 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (K), a first special figure 2 hold icon 2821 and a second special figure 2 representing that there are two hold of the special figure 2. A hold icon 2822 is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a princess character C3 appears as an effect of the big hit notice of the special figure 2. The character C3 is also displayed larger than the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the foot portion hides a part of the general symbol effect area 283 where the electric chew release notification effect is performed. . As a result, it is difficult to visually recognize the electric chew release notification effect in the usual decorative design, and the interest of the game is improved. In other words, the normal drawing effect (in this case, the electric chew release notification effect) is difficult to visually recognize due to the predetermined effect (big hit notice effect) of the special figure 2 based on the entrance of the electric chew release. Players are more likely to perform during special symbol fluctuations (during special symbol decoration fluctuations) that occur when winning a prize while opening an electric chew (in this case, a jackpot announcement effect) In some cases, the entertainment of the game may be improved by giving priority to the effect that the player is interested in and making the other (here, the electric-chu release notification effect) difficult to see. In addition, as described with reference to FIG. 119 (d), in the symbol variation of special figure 2 performed here, the 15R special jackpot advantageous to the player is more likely to occur than the symbol variation of special figure 1. Therefore, there are cases where the character C3 that gives notice of the occurrence of an advantageous jackpot can be conspicuous. Note that the general drawing effect area 283 may be entirely hidden by the character C3. On the other hand, in the general map display device 210, the general map B remains stopped and displayed, but the general map display device 210 can be seen well.

  In FIG. 121 (ko), the opening of the electric chew ends for 5 seconds, and the electric chew returns to the closed state. In addition, the electric chew release notification effect in the general symbol effect region 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (K) is also terminated, and here, no symbol is displayed in the normal symbol effect region 283. Further, in the decorative design display device 208, the character C3 disappears, and the decorative design of FIG. Since the character C3 has disappeared, no symbols are displayed, but the normal drawing effect area 283 can be viewed well.

  In addition, between FIG. 120 (i)-FIG. 121 (ko), the game ball passes through the usual figure starting port 228, and the usual figure hold is accumulated.

  The symbol change display is started in the general symbol display device 210 shown in FIG. 121 (sa), but no symbol is displayed in the general symbol effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (sa). In addition, the usual display of decorative symbols is not executed. This is because, in the determination in step S602 shown in FIG. 118, it is decided not to perform the ordinary drawing effect because the ordinary figure determination result included in the ordinary figure change start command is the ordinary figure A. . Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of the decorative symbol of the special figure 2 is developed into super reach, and a female character C2 appears as an effect of super reach. This character C2 is also displayed larger than the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the foot part hides a part of the general drawing effect area 283, making it difficult to see the normal drawing effect area 283. And the fun of gaming is improved. No symbol is displayed in the general drawing effect area 283, but it is difficult for the player to know whether or not the variation display of the decorative symbol of the general symbol is being performed, and the interest of the game is improved.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (h), a big hit announcement effect is performed in which the decorative symbol that stops in the middle symbol display area 208b is the ornament 7 in the state where the maiden character C2 appears. In FIG. 122 (s), the symbol variation display of the second special symbol display device 214 is finished, the special symbol A which is the 15R special jackpot symbol is displayed, and the special symbol A is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. “Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the above, is stopped and displayed. Also, the symbol variation display on the diagram display device 210 is ended and the diagram A is stopped and displayed. However, in the diagram representation area 283, the variation display of the diagram decoration is not performed and the diagram display is not performed. No symbol is displayed even if the symbol variation display in the apparatus 210 is completed. As a result of the general map display 210 being stopped and displayed as a result of the general map display A, an electric chew short circuit is released. However, there is no single ball during one open period of 0.3 seconds. There is no change in the number of holds.

  Eventually, 15R big hit game is started and the player switches from left-handed to right-handed. 122 (C) shows the state of the 1R-decorated symbol display device 208. FIG. In the central area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a big hit effect where a panda character appears is performed. In addition, during the big hit game, the hold icons (the first special figure 2 hold icon 2821 and the second special figure 2 hold icon 2822 here) that have been displayed so far disappear, and a predetermined area including the normal drawing effect area 283 (here) In the normal drawing effect area 283 and the special map 1 holding display area 281), an effect different from the normal drawing effect (first effect) is performed. In this example, the character “Now in a single villa” is displayed in the special figure 1 holding display area 281 and the face of the character in the single villa is displayed in the normal drawing effect area 283. Has been done. By doing so, the ordinary drawing effect area 283 can be used effectively. Further, even during the big hit game, as long as there is a holding of the usual figure (as long as there is an entry to the ordinary figure starting port 228), the symbol variation display on the ordinary figure display device 210 is performed. However, in the ordinary drawing effect area 283, the notification of the number of consecutive resorts is performed, and the variation display of the decorative symbol of the ordinary drawing is not performed (see step S603 shown in FIG. 118). In the universal symbol display device 210 shown in FIG. 122 (C), the symbol variation display is started. In addition, the effects different from the usual drawing effect performed in the lower area are the remaining round number notification effect, the current round (digestion round) number notification effect, the attacker winning ball number notification effect, the attacker open remaining time notification effect, and the attacker release elapsed time. It may be a notification effect, an effect of encouraging a winner in an attacker, or the like. Further, even during the big hit game, the hold icon may be displayed without erasing, and an effect different from the ordinary drawing effect (for example, the number of consecutive resort times notification effect) may be performed only in the ordinary drawing effect region 283. However, it may be performed only in the area adjacent to the normal drawing effect area 283 (for example, the hold display area). Further, even during a big hit game, when a win for the normal drawing effect execution lottery is won, etc., the normal drawing effect may be performed in the normal drawing effect area 283.

  FIG. 122 (sole) shows a state of the 8R decoration symbol display device 208. Even in this decorative symbol display device 208, the effect during the big hit is continued and the notification of the number of consecutive resorts is also continued. Also, in the general-purpose display device 210 shown in FIG. 122 (G), the symbol variation display that has been performed so far is terminated, and the general-purpose B is stopped and displayed. As a result, the electric long opening is performed.

  In FIG. 122 (ta), the electric-chu-long opening is started, and in the ordinary drawing effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the electric-chu opening notification effect (Mr. The effect of displaying the decorative symbol in which the character of the person is performing a peace sign is executed (see step S605 shown in FIG. 118). That is, in the ordinary drawing effect area 283, since the decorative display of the usual drawing has not been changed, the electric chew release notification effect is suddenly started. While the electric Chu long is released, four game balls enter the electric chew, and the holding of the special figure 2 increases by four. However, the hold icon is not displayed during the big hit game.

  FIG. 122 (ta ′) is a diagram showing a modification of FIG. 122 (ta ′), and in FIG. 122 (ta ′), the sound output from the speaker 120 is not performed without the electric-chu release notification effect in the normal drawing effect region 283. An electric-chu opening notification effect is announced to notify that the electric-chu is open. In the ordinary drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 122 (ta ′) where the electric chew release notification effect has not been performed, the number of consecutive resorts notification effect continues. Since there are more award balls in the attacker than in the electric chew, there may be a case where no positive electric chew release notification effect is required.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 123 (h), an end effect of the big hit game is performed, and it is notified that the jackpot game is promoted to the probable state after the end of the big hit game. The symbol variation display is also started in the universal symbol display device 210 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 123 (tsu) shows the state of the decorative symbol display device 208 immediately after the end of the big hit game. In the special figure 2 holding display area 282 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of holdings in the special figure 2 that has increased by entering the electric chew at the timing of FIG. First to fourth special figure 2 hold icons 2821 to 2824 are displayed.

  On the upper side of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 123 (T), a character display “probability change” indicating the probability change state is performed. In other words, an effect of informing game information is performed. Moreover, the electric support state continues until the next big hit. Also, in FIG. 123 (T), the symbol variation display by the second special symbol display device 214 is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variation display of the decorative symbol of the special symbol 2. On the other hand, the general-purpose display device 210 that has been performing symbol variation display until now displays a stop display, and the general-purpose display device 210 shown in FIG. Yes. The symbol change display of the usual figure stopped and displayed here is a symbol change display performed across the jackpot game, and is a symbol change display for notifying the result of the determination of whether or not the common figure is in the non-electric support state during the jackpot game. is there.

  Further, in the normal drawing effect area 283, the normal drawing effect is not performed because it is in the electric support state (see step S601 shown in FIG. 118), and this normal drawing effect area 283 functions as a display area for the digestion suspension icon. Yes. In other words, the first special figure 2 hold icon 2821 representing the first hold of the special figure 2 started here is a special drawing effect area which is a separate area from the special figure 2 hold display area 282 together with the symbol variation display of the special figure. It moves to 283, and then disappears in the general drawing effect area 283 before the symbol variation ends. In addition, in the special figure 2 hold display area 282, the hold icon, which has been the second special figure 2 hold icon 2822 so far, is shifted to the first special figure 2 hold icon display position on the right side of the general drawing effect area 283. Similarly, the hold icons after the second special figure 80 hold icon 2823 are also shifted to the left by one. In addition, the time (second movement completion time) in which the digestion suspension icon, which has been the first special figure 2 suspension icon 2821 so far, moves to the normal drawing effect region 283 (second region) where the digestion suspension icon is displayed. ) Is an undigested pending icon (holding icon which has been the second to fourth special figure 2 holding icons 2822 to 2824 until now) left in the special figure 2 holding display area 282 (first area). This is different from the time required to move to another position in the hold display area 282 (first movement completion time). Also, in order to make the player hold a hold icon (digestion hold icon) corresponding to the change for a long time and to make a strong impression that one hold has been consumed, the second movement completion time is more suitable for the first movement completion time. Longer than one movement completion time is preferable. Further, the ordinary drawing effect area 283 is a common destination for the digestion suspension icon of FIG. 1 and the digestion suspension icon of FIG. 2. The destination of the icon and the destination of the digestion pending icon of FIG. 2 may be provided separately.

  In FIG. 123 (g), the symbol variation display of the second special symbol display device 214 is finished, the stop symbol is displayed, and the decoration symbol display device 208 is “decoration 4—decoration 5”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols out of place. -Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, the general symbol display device 210 starts the normal symbol variation display. Note that the first special figure 2 hold icon 2821 (digestion hold icon) moved to the general drawing effect area 283 is disappeared, and in the electric support state, it is stochastically elected to open the electric long, so the normal figure display device Even if the symbol variation display is started in 210, the ordinary drawing effect is not performed (see step S601 shown in FIG. 118).

  Subsequently, the symbol variation display by the second special symbol display device 214 is started again, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable symbol variation display of the special symbol 2 again, and the decorative symbol shown in FIG. A princess character C3 appears on the display device 208 as an effect of the jackpot notice in FIG. The character C3 is also displayed larger than the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208, the foot portion hides a part of the general drawing effect region 283, and the head portion is “probably changing”. Part of the character display (game information notification effect) is hidden. In the ordinary drawing effect region 283 shown in FIG. 123 (na), the digestion pending icon 2820 is different from the default display mode, and the display mode of the jackpot notice (including the false jackpot notice) in the change (here, the face of the panda) However, it is difficult to visually recognize the character C3, and the interest of the game is improved. It should be noted that the digestion pending icon 2820 changes the display mode during or after the movement to the normal drawing effect area 283. Further, the game information notification effect is also difficult to visually recognize by the character C3, and the interest of the game is improved. Further, the universal map display device 210 shown in FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 123 (d), the character C3 disappears, and the variation display of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. Due to the disappearance of the character C3, the big hit notice by the digestion pending icon 2820 in the normal drawing effect area 283 can be visually recognized well. In FIG. 123 (D), the electric-chu-long opening has been started, but in the electric support state, the electric-chu-long opening effect is not performed since the electric-chu-long opening is stochastically selected. 118 (see step S601). While this electric Chulong is released, a game ball enters the electric Chu, and the holding in FIG. 2 becomes full (four).

  In the general pattern display device 210 shown in FIG. 123 (nu), the symbol variation display is started, but no symbol is displayed in the universal diagram effect area 283, and the variation display of the decorative symbol of the regular diagram is not executed. is there. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of the decorative symbol of the special figure 2 is developed into super reach, and a female character C2 appears as an effect of super reach. This character C2 is also displayed larger than the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the foot part hides a part of the general drawing effect area 283, making it difficult to see the normal drawing effect area 283. Yes. No symbol is displayed in the general drawing effect area 283, but it is difficult for the player to know whether or not the variation display of the decorative symbol of the general symbol is being performed, and the interest of the game is improved.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 123 (ne), a big hit announcement effect is performed in which the decorative symbol that stops in the middle symbol display area 208b is the ornament 6 in the state where the maiden character C2 appears. In FIG. 124 (no), the symbol variation display of the second special symbol display device 214 is terminated, the special symbol D which is the 15R normal jackpot symbol is displayed as a stop symbol, and the special symbol D is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. “Decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6”, which is a combination of the ornamental patterns corresponding to, is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the general symbol display device 210 shown in FIG. 123 (ne), the symbol variation display is terminated and the universal diagram B is stopped and displayed, but in the universal diagram effect area 283, the variation display of the decorative symbol of the ordinary diagram is performed. No symbol is displayed even when the symbol variation display on the general symbol display device 210 is completed. As a result of the general map B being stopped and displayed on the general map display device 210, in FIG.

  Eventually, the 15R jackpot game is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 124 (C) notifies that the jackpot game is finished and promotes to the electric support state (short-time state) after the jackpot game ends. ing. In the general-purpose display device 210 shown in FIG. 124 (C), symbol variation display is performed.

  FIG. 124 (h) shows the state of the decorative symbol display device 208 immediately after the end of the big hit game. In addition, the general-purpose display device 210 that has been performing symbol variation display until now displays a stop display, and the general-purpose display device 210 shown in FIG. Yes. The symbol change display of the usual figure stopped here is also a symbol change display performed across the jackpot game, and a symbol change display that informs the result of the determination of whether or not the common figure is in the non-electric support state during the jackpot game. is there. The control state shown in FIG. 124 (h) is the electric support state, and the normal drawing effect is not performed even when the result of the determination of whether or not the normal drawing is determined in the non-electric support state. However, here it is also possible to perform a general drawing effect.

  On the upper side of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 124 (f), a character display of “short time” indicating the electric support state is performed. In other words, an effect of informing game information is performed. Further, in FIG. 124 (f), the symbol variation display by the second special symbol display device 214 is started, and the decorative symbol variation display of the special symbol 2 is started by the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the symbol variation display is also started in the universal symbol display device 210 shown in FIG. In addition, if the 15R normal jackpot is won, the electric support state is maintained until the special symbol change display is performed 100 times after the big hit game is finished. In the state shown in FIG. 124 (F), the symbol of the first special symbol is maintained. Since the variable display is started, the remaining number of times that the power support state is maintained is 99 times. In the general drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 124 (f), since there is an electric support state, even if the normal symbol variation display by the general map display device 210 is started, the general drawing effect is not performed. The remaining number of states is displayed. That is, in the general game effect area 283 shown in FIG. 124 (F), an effect of notifying game information is performed. Since the opening of the electric chew can occur normally during the electric support state or the like, the interest of the game may be improved by displaying the remaining number of times of the electric support state instead of the ordinary drawing effect.

  In FIG. 124 (f), the symbol variation display of the second special symbol display device 214 is finished, the stop symbol is displayed, and the decoration symbol display device 208 is “decoration 4-decoration 5”, which is a combination of disparate ornament symbols. -Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed. Also, in the general diagram display device 210, the normal symbol variation display is ended and the general diagram B with the electric-chu-long open is stopped and displayed, but in the general diagram effect area 283, the symbol variation display in the general diagram display device 210 is displayed. No symbol is displayed even if is finished. As a result of the stoppage display of the general map B on the general map display device 210, in FIG. 124 (e), the electric tulong is released, and the hold of the special map 2 becomes full. In FIG. 124 (e), the symbol variation display by the second special figure display device 214 is started again, and the remaining number of times that the electric support state is maintained is 98 times. In the ordinary drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 124 (e), the numeral 98 is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 124 (ma), a princess character C3 appears as an effect of the special jackpot notice in FIG. The character C3 is also displayed larger than the middle symbol display area 208b of the decorative symbol display device 208, the foot portion hides a part of the general drawing effect region 283, and the head portion is referred to as “short time”. Part of the character display (game information notification effect) is hidden. The game information notification effect (number of 98) displayed in the general game effect region 283 shown in FIG. 124 (M) is also displayed in the game information notification effect (character display of “short time”) displayed above the decorative symbol display device 208. ) Is also difficult to visually recognize by the character C3, and the fun of the game is improved.

  Then, an example of the production | presentation which mixed the prefetch production | presentation in this embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 125 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect in which a prefetch effect is combined in the present embodiment in a stepwise manner.

  The state shown in FIG. 125 (a) is a non-electric support state, there is no special figure 2 hold, one special figure hold is left, and the first special figure display device 212 displays a symbol variation display. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays the variation of the decorative symbol of the special figure 1 and the special special figure 1 hold display area 281 shows the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 in the default display mode. Has been. In addition, the symbol display is performed on the general symbol display device 210, and in the general symbol effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable symbol display of the normal symbol is started.

  125 (a) shows a state in which the game ball B has entered the first special figure starting port 230, and the special figure 1 hold display area 281 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 125 (a). The second special figure 1 hold icon 2812 is additionally displayed in a pre-reading notice display mode different from the default display mode. That is, the display of the hold icon representing the second hold in FIG. 1 is started in the display mode of the old character. The pre-reading notice here is a notice that starts a notice regarding the result of the determination of whether or not the special graphic is received before the start of the symbol change for notifying the result of the determination of the appropriateness. In more detail, the start information is pre-read before the start of the symbol change of the special symbol, the result of the determination of whether or not the special symbol is determined in advance based on the start information, and the result of the determination on the success or failure based on the start information is notified. Before starting the symbol change, based on the previous determination result, it is foretold that the determination result based on the start information will be a big hit, or special figure A or special figure B, based on the start information Even if the determination result is out of place, or even if it becomes special figure I or special figure J, a notice (so-called fake) as if the determination result based on the start information becomes a big hit or special figure A or special figure B Including notice). In this case, the pre-reading notice is started from the start of displaying the hold icon (starting entrance timing), but the display is changed to the display form of the pre-reading notice after the display is once started in the default display form. Alternatively, the display mode may be changed to the display mode of the prefetching notice after the display is once started in a display mode different from the default display mode and the display mode of the prefetching notice. For example, the display state of the pre-reading notice may be changed at the timing at which the hold icon is shifted (the timing of the start of symbol change of the special symbol), or the display state of the pre-reading notice is changed when the chance button 136 is pressed. May be.

  In FIG. 125 (a), the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212 is terminated, the stop symbol is displayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is “decoration 5- "Decoration 3-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. In FIG. 125 (c), the symbol variation display by the first special symbol display device 212 that digests the first hold is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the special symbol 1 decoration. The symbol variation display has started. On the other hand, in the general diagram display device 210 shown in FIG. 125 (c), the symbol variation display that has been performed so far is terminated, and the general diagram B is stopped and displayed in the general diagram effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208. The change display of the decorative pattern of the ordinary figure is finished, and the ordinary figure decoration 2 corresponding to the ordinary figure B is stopped and displayed. As a result, the electric long opening is performed.

  In FIG. 125 (D), the electric chew long opening is started, and the electric figure opening notifying effect (the decorative symbol in which the character of Tono-sama is performing a peace sign is displayed in the universal drawing effect region 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208. Production) is being executed. In this electric chew release notification effect, Tono-sama's character is displayed larger than the ordinary drawing effect area 283, enters the special figure 1 hold display area 281 and displays the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 (in this case, a pre-reading notice display) A part of the mode hold icon) is hidden. As a result, the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 is difficult to visually recognize. In this way, when the player can be interested in the trend of the general drawing effect by intentionally hiding the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 whose display mode has been changed to the pre-reading notice mode with the normal drawing effect. There is. Further, the pre-reading notice is a future jackpot notice, and the player may be expected to open the electric chew by conspicuously presenting the current progressive drawing. Note that all of the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 may be hidden by the electric chew release notification effect. The Tono-sama character also enters the middle symbol display area 208b, and also hides a part of the decorative symbol of the special figure that is changing in the middle symbol display area 208b.

  FIG. 125 (A ′) is a diagram showing a modification of the prefetch notice. In FIG. 125 (a), the pre-reading notice effect is performed using the display mode of the hold icon. In FIG. 125 (a '), the display of the effect image in which the character of the niece is arranged in a large V shape. The pre-reading notice effect is performed by the character display “Pre-reading notice”. This pre-reading notice effect also enters the ordinary drawing effect region 283, but is partially hidden by the variation display of the decorative symbol of the ordinary drawing. On the other hand, the variation display of the usual decorative pattern may be hidden by the pre-reading notice effect.

  FIG. 125 (U ′) is a diagram showing a modification of the aspect of the general-purpose decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed. In FIG. 125 (c '), the symbol of the stop-displayed general drawing decoration 2 is displayed larger than the general drawing effect area 283, enters the special figure 1 hold display area 281 and the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 ( Here, a part of the hold icon) in the display mode of the prefetch notice is hidden. As a result, the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 becomes difficult to visually recognize, and the interest of the game is improved. It should be noted that the first special figure 1 holding icon 2811 may be entirely hidden by the fluctuation display of the normal decoration pattern or the stop-displayed universal figure decoration symbol. In addition, the stop-displayed general symbol decoration 2 also enters the middle symbol display area 208b, and also hides a part of the special symbol decoration symbol that is changing in the middle symbol display area 208b.

  FIG. 125 (d ') is a diagram showing a modification of the electric chew release notification effect. In the electric chew release notification effect in FIG. 125 (D '), the Tono-sama character is displayed larger than the ordinary drawing effect area 283 and enters the special figure 1 hold display area 281, but part of this Tono-sama character. Is hidden by the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 (here, the hold icon of the display mode of the pre-reading notice). The character of Tono-sama also enters the middle symbol display area 208b. However, a part of the character of Tono-sama is hidden by the special decorative pattern that is changing in the middle symbol display area 208b. As a result, it is difficult to visually recognize the electric Chu opening notification effect.

  Note that the pre-reading notice with the hold icon is a kind of continuous notice that is continuously performed over a plurality of symbol variation displays. In the special figure 2 priority variation machine, the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 2 may interrupt during execution of the continuous notice for the special figure 1, but the continuous notice is continued even in the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 2 that has been interrupted. . That is, the special figure 1 hold icon is displayed in the display form of the pre-reading notice, and even if the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 2 interrupts before the special figure 1 hold icon is put on hold, the graphic fluctuation display of the interrupted special figure 2 is being displayed. In addition, the special figure 1 hold icon continues to be displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice. In the example shown in FIG. 125 (D '), the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 in the display form of the pre-reading notice makes it difficult to visually recognize a part of the electric chew release notification effect. While maintaining the expectation, the look-ahead notice can be conspicuous and the expectation for the big hit may be able to be sustained.

  FIG. 126 is a diagram showing step by step an example of an effect in which a jackpot notice is mixed with an ordinary drawing effect in the present embodiment.

  The state shown in FIG. 126 (a) is a non-electric support state, and “decoration 5—decoration 3—decoration 4”, which is a combination of outlier ornament symbols, is stopped on the ornamental symbol display device 208. On the other hand, the general symbol display device 210 performs symbol variation display, but the symbol of the general symbol decoration 3 that is the previous result remains displayed in the general symbol effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208. , Fluctuating display of ordinary decorative patterns is not performed.

  In the first special symbol display device 212 shown in FIG. 126 (a), the symbol variation display is started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of the decorative symbol of the special symbol 1 is started. When the symbol variation display of the special figure is started, the variation display of the ordinary decoration pattern is also started in the ordinary drawing effect area 283. In other words, the general drawing effect (variable display of the decorative pattern of the ordinary figure) is started in accordance with the change of the special figure (variable display of the decorative pattern of the special figure).

  In FIG. 126 (c), the variation display of the decorative pattern of the ordinary drawing in the ordinary drawing effect region 283 is hidden by the character display effect “Katsuatsu”, which is a kind of special bonus jackpot notice effect. That is, the special bonus jackpot notice effect here is displayed over the lower area including the ordinary figure effect area 283, making it difficult to visually recognize the ordinary figure effect. The character display effect “Gekiatsu” here is a pre-reach notice, and may be an effect of notifying that the change display of the decorative pattern of the special drawing will be developed to reach. In this case, for example, the decorative display variation display pattern shown in FIG. 117 (b) is a high-speed display of the character “Gekiatsu”, which is a kind of special figure jackpot notice effect. It is a variation display pattern included in the variation. In the variation display of the usual decorative pattern, the character display “Gekiatsu” is displayed in the ordinary drawing effect area 283.

  FIG. 127 is a diagram showing step by step an example in which the usual display effect of the variable display pattern shown in (f) of FIG. 117 (b) is performed.

  The state shown in FIG. 127A is a non-electric support state, and “decoration 5—decoration 3—decoration 4”, which is a combination of extraordinary ornament symbols, is stopped on the ornamental symbol display device 208. Also, the symbol change display is not performed in the general symbol display device 210, and the symbol of the general symbol decoration 3 as the previous result is still displayed in the general symbol effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208. is there.

  In the first special symbol display device 212 shown in FIG. 127 (a), symbol variation display is started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, variation display of the decorative symbol of special symbol 1 is started. Also, the symbol variation display is started in the general symbol display device 210 shown in FIG. 127 (a), and the variable symbol variation display of the normal symbol is started in the general symbol effect region 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, the usual display effect of the variable display pattern shown in (f) of FIG. 117 (b) is performed.

  In the ordinary drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 127 (c), the character display of “latency” representing the notice of 2R jackpot, which is the probability change of the special figure, is displayed beyond the ordinary drawing effect area 283.

  In the ordinary drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 127 (D), the character display of “surprise” representing the 2R jackpot notice, which is a sudden change in the special figure, is displayed beyond the ordinary drawing effect area 283.

  In the ordinary drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 127 (e), the character display of “big hit” representing the special figure 15R jackpot notice is made beyond the ordinary drawing effect area 283.

  In FIG. 127 (f), the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212 is terminated, the second small hit symbol (special symbol H) is displayed as a stop symbol, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a special symbol. “Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration 3” corresponding to H is stopped and displayed. In the general symbol display device 210, the symbol variation display is continued. However, in the universal symbol effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of the regular symbol decorative symbol is displayed before the special symbol variation display is finished. In the normal drawing effect area 283, the characters “Hidden” are stopped and displayed.

  In this example, the ordinary drawing effect functions as a special jackpot notice, but the ordinary drawing effect in this example is also an effect executed in the ordinary drawing effect region 283.

  Here, the special drawing effect that functions as a special figure jackpot notice enters the special figure 1 hold display area 281 and the special figure 2 hold display area 282. Therefore, if the first special figure hold icon whose display mode is changed to the pre-reading notice mode is displayed in the special figure 1 hold display area 281 or the special figure 2 hold display area 282, the first special figure hold icon is Some or all of them are hidden by the usual drawing effects. The jackpot notice (especially the special chart variable game currently being executed) is a notice that can be expected to hit the jackpot ahead of the prefetching notice (future special chart variable game jackpot notice). Since it is possible to perform the ordinary drawing effect including the pre-reading notice more conspicuously, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

It should be noted that the character display displayed in the normal drawing effect area 283 may be in a form that fits within the normal drawing effect area 283. In addition, the start timing of the variation display of the ordinary design is changed so that the end timing of the variation display of the ordinary design coincides with or slightly before the end timing of the special symbol variation display. You may delay from the design variation display start timing of the display device 210.
FIG. 128 shows an example of other effects.

  128 (a) and (b) are examples in which the big hit announcement effect is performed by the effect using the effect movable body.

  The pachinko machine in this example is a pachinko machine having the effect movable body 224 shown in FIG. In the ordinary drawing effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 128 (a), the ordinary drawing effect is performed. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts to display the special symbol decorative symbols in a variable manner. Then, after the start of the normal drawing effect, the big hit announcement effect for notifying that the change display is a big hit is performed by the effect movable body 224 provided beside the decorative symbol display device 208. The production movable body 224 shown in FIG. 128 (a) includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b simulating the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor (not shown) that rotates the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. And a forearm motor (not shown) for rotating the forearm 224b at the position of the elbow. The effect movable body 224 is an accessory that can move at least the front side (player side) of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor. In FIG. 128 (a), the forearm portion 224b rotated upwards covers the normal drawing effect region 283 where the normal drawing effect is performed, and the normal drawing effect region 283 is hidden by the forearm portion 224b. The visual effects are difficult to see. In addition, there are cases where the operation of the production movable body 224 can be emphasized, and the interest of the game is improved. In addition, in the special figure 2 hold display area 282 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 128A, three special figure 2 hold icons 2821 to 2823 are displayed. These special figure 2 hold icons 2821 are displayed. Part or all of ˜2823 is also hidden by the forearm portion 224b, and the special figure 2 holding icons 2821 to 2823 are difficult to visually recognize. In addition, a large hitting notice effect using the effect movable body 224 and the effect image can be performed using the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the entertainment of the game is improved by the large scale effect.

  FIG. 128 (a) is a diagram showing a state continued from FIG. 128 (a). From the front of the normal drawing effect area 283 where the forearm portion 224b is further rotated upward and the normal effect effect is performed. The forearm 224b disappears. However, instead, an effect image (here, three shooting stars images) related to the operation of the effect movable body 224 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the ordinary drawing effect region 283 is hidden by the effect image. Has become difficult to see. In addition, three special figure 2 hold icons 2821 to 2823 are also displayed in the special figure 2 hold display area 282 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 128 (a). These special figure 2 hold icons 2821 are also displayed. Part or all of ˜2823 is also hidden by the forearm 224b or the effect image, and the special figure 2 reservation icons 2821 to 2823 are difficult to view. The effect image may be an image displayed before, during, or after the effect movable body 224 operates. Further, the effect movable body 224 is not necessarily exposed in front of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In addition, after the big hit announcement is started by the production movable body 224, the normal drawing production is not executed until the big hit announcement is completed. That is, in this example, the predetermined period in step S603 shown in FIG. 118 corresponds to the execution of the big hit notification by the effect movable body 224. By doing so, it may be possible to draw attention by a big hit announcement by the effect movable body 224.

  Further, the effect movable body 224 may make it difficult to visually recognize the normal drawing effect only with the effect image without performing the operation to the front side (player side) of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  51 (a) is an example in which a jackpot notice effect is performed by an effect using a tutorial.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 128 (a), the tutorial display is performed so as to overlap a part of the general drawing effect area 283 where the normal drawing effect is performed. In this tutorial display, a predetermined display (here, the character C1 of the jackpot notice in FIG. 120 shown in FIG. 120 (a)) is described. The ordinary drawing effect area 283 is hidden by the tutorial display image, and the ordinary drawing effect is difficult to visually recognize.

  FIG. 128 (I) is an example in which a plurality of effects hides the normal drawing effects and the hold icon. In this example, the plurality of effects are two effects, but may be three or more effects.

In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 128 (I), the special symbol decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the general symbol effect is displayed in the general symbol effect region 283. The first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 is displayed. It is displayed. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the character C1 (first special effect) of the jackpot notice and the other new character C4 (second special effect) shown in FIG. Has been. The other new character C4 may be, for example, a notice display indicating the advancement of reach, a one-announce notice display of 15R special big hit, a display prompting the user to press the chance button 136, or the like. In the example shown in FIG. 128 (I), these characters C1 and C4 hide a part of each of the normal drawing effect area 283, the hold icon, and the variation display of the special symbol decoration pattern. In addition, it is difficult to visually recognize the display mode of the hold icon and the decorative display of the special design.
Hereinafter, the third embodiment will be supplemented.

  An example in which it is difficult to visually recognize the symbol variation display (second symbol variation display) on the display device (for example, the ornament symbol display device 208) controlled by the sub-control means, that is, the ornament symbol variation display (for example, the general symbol effect). Is not only hidden by other effect display (for example, jackpot notice display, game information display, etc.), but includes other methods. For example, light may be emitted intensely around the decorative symbol display (more pronounced if it is a similar color), making it relatively difficult to see, or the decorative symbol variation display and other effect displays may be similar colors. It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize even when there is no overlap. Also, the device for displaying the decorative symbol variation display and other effects may be separate. For example, the main liquid crystal and the auxiliary liquid crystal may be used.

  Further, in addition to the case where the display of variation of the decorative symbol is difficult to visually recognize due to another effect display, the other effect display may be difficult to visually recognize due to the variation display of the decorative symbol. For example, a part of the pre-reading notice may be hidden by the variation display of the general-purpose decorative symbol, and other effects with low reliability may be made difficult to view by the variable display of the general-purpose decorative symbol. If the expectation of the big hit is low, the player may be more interested in directing the opening of electric Chu.

  Moreover, the structure which changes for every condition whether it makes it difficult to visually recognize another effect or makes it difficult to visually recognize the change display of a decoration symbol may be sufficient. A configuration that prioritizes an effect that a player can expect and makes it difficult to visually recognize the other, or a configuration that prioritizes an effect from which a result is derived first and makes the other difficult to view. .

  Other effects include a jackpot notice, look-ahead notice, reach effect (reach fluctuation), suggestion of game state such as hiding, etc., but at least a part may be a structure that makes it difficult to see the decorative symbol change display. . For example, the action of the accessory itself is not configured to make it difficult to visually recognize the decorative display of the decorative pattern due to the big hit notification by the action of the accessory, but it is difficult to visually recognize the variable display of the decorative pattern by the effect image that is generated at the same time. Also good.

  Moreover, the structure which becomes difficult to visually recognize at least one part of the electric-chu open | release alerting | reporting effect after the change display of a decoration symbol may be sufficient.

  Further, the decorative symbol variation display may be performed whenever the electric chew is long open in the non-electric support state, but may or may not be performed by performing a matter availability lottery.

Another effect may be a configuration in which the decorative symbol variation display and the hold display (hold icon) are difficult to visually recognize at the same time.
Moreover, the structure which performs the variable display of a decoration pattern at the time of electric Chu short open | release may be sufficient.

  Also, the decorative symbol variation display may not be performed during the electric support state, or the decorative symbol variation display may be performed during the electric support state.

  In addition, the decorative symbol change display is not only related to the result of the auxiliary success / failure determination (whether or not to determine the normal map), but also to other results such as the result of the determination of whether or not to assist (the determination of whether or not the special figure is accepted). It may be a variable display in which notices are mixed.

  In addition, the execution frequency of the decorative symbol variation display is compared with that in the electric support state and that in the non-electric support state, and the configuration is influenced by the launch strength (for example, right-handed and left-handed) due to game characteristics. May be.

  During the big hit game, it may be configured to display only the symbol variation display (first symbol variation display) on the display device (for example, the general symbol display device 210) controlled by the main control means. It is also possible to adopt a configuration that also displays the change of the above. Further, during the big hit game, the decorative symbols may not be displayed in a variable manner, and only the electric chew release notification effect may be performed.

  Further, while the big hit game and the electric support state, which are advantageous, are right-handed, the left-hand hit may be left during the big hit game, and the combination is arbitrary.

  In the past, the explanation was given for the special figure 2 priority fluctuation machine. However, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are alternately won in the winning order fluctuation machine or in the non-electric support state, and the electric chew is in the electric support state. It may be a game machine that is open and allows only special figure 2 winning. In particular, if it is in electric support, it will have the same effect as the priority change machine. Moreover, a simultaneous variable machine may be sufficient.

The so-called tutorial notice that performs the jackpot notice effect by the effect using the tutorial may make it difficult to visually recognize the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols, or vice versa. For example, highlight the tutorial notice that explains the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display (this makes it difficult to see the variable symbol display), and then stop the decorative symbol related to the description and It is also possible to explain.
In addition, the pre-reading notice may make it difficult to visually recognize the variation display of the decorative symbol.

Further, among the plurality of other effects described with reference to FIG. 128 (I), the first other effect may be configured to be hidden so that the player cannot see the decorative symbol variation display at all. Further, the first other effect may be configured to hide the first region of the decorative symbol variation display, and the second other effect may be configured to hide the second region. The decorative symbol variation display may display a plurality of characters, characters, etc. at the same time, and at least one of them may be hidden by other effects. Moreover, the structure which hides other effects may be sufficient.
Moreover, the structure which performs several fluctuation display of a decoration symbol simultaneously may be sufficient.

As described above, in the example described so far, when one effect conceals the other effect, even if not specifically refused, the other effect may conceal one effect. . Further, when one effect conceals a part of the other effect, even if not specifically refused, one effect may conceal all of the other effect.
In addition, the difficulty of visual recognition includes invisibility.

  Furthermore, the other effects such as the normal drawing effect and the jackpot effect may be a sound effect, a light effect, or an effect as shown in FIGS. 128 (a) and (b). An effect by a movable body may be used. In the case of an effect by sound, sounds overlap and one effect conceals the other effect according to the volume and pitch, that is, it becomes difficult to view the other effect.

  In the above description, “a start region (for example, electric Chu) that can be changed at least between an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) and a difficult-to-enter state (for example, a closed state), For example, it is possible to execute at least a first success / failure determination unit (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of executing at least a normal / failure determination and a second determination / non-permission determination (for example, determination of whether or not a special figure is present). When the second success / failure determination means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) and the second success / failure determination result is the big success / failure determination result, the control state is changed from the non-hit control state to the big hit control state. Game control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) that can be transferred to at least, and effect display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) that can execute at least effect display. The start area is at least a state from the difficult entry state to the easy entry state when the result of the first success / failure determination is a specific success / failure determination result (for example, per ordinary figure). The first success / failure determination means is more likely to derive the specific success / failure determination result in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state. The first effect is an effect including at least an effect display relating to the result of the first success / failure determination (for example, a normal drawing effect), and the effect display means includes the It is possible to display at least a second effect related to the result of the second success / failure determination (for example, a jackpot notice effect), and the second effect is a part or all of the period during the execution of the first effect. , Little of the first production In both cases, it is an effect that can make part of the display difficult to view (for example, FIG. 120 (a), FIG. 121 (K), etc.), and the first effect is in the non-electric support state rather than the electric support state. Is a performance that is easy to be executed (for example, step S601 shown in FIG. 118). Was explained.

  Note that a winning means (or winning area) (for example, an attacker) capable of changing at least the state between an easy winning state and a difficult winning state is provided, and the winning means (or winning area) is configured to determine whether or not the second success / failure determination is made. When the result is a jackpot winning / failing determination result, the state may be changed at least from the difficult-to-win state to the easy-to-win state.

  The jackpot control state may be a state in which the winning area is at least changeable from the difficult winning state to the easy winning state.

  Moreover, the aspect provided with the approach area (For example, a 1st approach area, in other words, a fixed entrance area, for example, a normal gate etc.) which cannot change a state may be sufficient.

  Moreover, the aspect provided with the 1st symbol display means (for example, the general symbol display apparatus 210) which can perform the 1st symbol fluctuation | variation display at least may be sufficient. The first symbol display means may be capable of displaying at least a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the first success / failure determination after performing the first symbol variation display. The first symbol display means may be one in which operation is suspended when the first holding condition is established, and the requirement for establishment of the first holding condition is that a game ball is placed in the entry area. It may be a requirement including that the has entered. More specifically, the establishment requirement of the first holding condition may be a requirement including at least that a game ball has entered the entry area.

  Moreover, the aspect provided with the 2nd symbol display means (for example, 2nd special figure display apparatus 214) which can perform at least 2nd symbol fluctuation | variation display may be sufficient. The second symbol display means may be capable of displaying at least a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the second success / failure determination after performing the second symbol variation display. Further, the second symbol display means may be one in which the operation is suspended when the second holding condition is established, and the requirement for establishment of the second holding condition is the start region (for example, The requirement may include that a game ball has entered the second entry area, in other words, an electric tulip that is a variable entry area. More specifically, the establishment requirement of the second holding condition may be a requirement including at least that a game ball has entered the start area.

The aspect provided with the effect display means (for example, sub-control means 400,500) which can control the said effect display means at least may be sufficient.
The first effect may be an effect including at least a change effect and an opening effect,

  The variation effect is an effect executed during the period in which the first symbol variation display is performed,

  The opening effect is an effect that is executed after a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the first success / failure determination of a specific (for example, hit) is displayed, for example, a period in which the start area is in the easy entry state. It may be an effect that is executed during the included period.

Further, the first effect may include a stop display effect that is executed during a period in which a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the specific first determination of success / failure is displayed.
The second effect may be a jackpot notice effect or a prefetch notice effect.

  In addition, “the effect display means is an image display means, and the image display means is capable of displaying at least the first effect in a predetermined display area (for example, the general drawing effect area 283), The image display means can display at least a third effect in a period including at least a part of the non-execution period of the first effect, and the third effect is also the first effect. It is an effect different from the second effect (for example, a game information notification effect that displays the remaining number of times of the electric support state), and the second effect is a part or all of the period during the execution of the third effect. A game table characterized in that it is an effect capable of making it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the third effect (for example, FIG. 124 (ma)). ”Was also explained.

  Note that the third effect may be a hold icon, or a display of the number of time savings or the number of consecutive resorts.

  Further, “the third effect is an effect including at least one of a jackpot notice display (for example, an appearance effect of the characters C1 to C3) and a game information display (for example, a character display“ probably changing ”). A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  The jackpot notice display here may be a display for notifying that the winning area is changed to the easy winning state, and includes a false display. The jackpot notice display may be a jackpot notice display that is displayed after the second determination is made, that is, after the second symbol variation display is started. It may be a pre-reading notice display in which the display is started before the determination of whether or not is made, that is, before the second symbol variation display is started.

  In addition, the game information display here is a display indicating the number of time reductions (the number of remaining times of the second symbol variation display or the number of digested times in the electric support state) or a display indicating the number of consecutive games (the number of executions of the big hit game) It may be.

  Further, “the image display means is capable of executing at least the jackpot notice display during the non-execution period of the first effect in the non-electric support state (for example, FIG. 121 (support) Etc.), and the image display means can execute at least the game information display during the non-execution period of the first effect in the electric support state (for example, FIG. ), A game table characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  “The first effect is an effect of one type of effect pattern selected from a plurality of types of effect patterns (for example, a plurality of patterns shown in FIG. 117 (b)), and the plurality of types of effects. One type of effect pattern of the patterns includes at least an image (for example, a general-purpose decorative pattern) related to the result of the first determination of success / failure, and an image of the jackpot notice display (for example, a decorative image called “Gekiatsu”). A game stand characterized by a variation display effect pattern (for example, a variation display pattern shown in (e) of FIG. 117 (b)) that sequentially displays a plurality of images. ”Was also explained.

  Further, in the above description, “a start region (for example, electric Chu) that can change at least between an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) and a difficult-to-enter state (for example, a closed state); First determination unit (e.g., CPU 304 of main control unit 300) capable of executing at least determination (e.g., determination of success / failure of normal map) and at least execution of second determination (e.g., determination of success / failure of special figure) When the possible second success / failure determination means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) and the result of the second success / failure determination is the big success / failure determination result, the control state is changed from the non-big hit control state to the big hit Game control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of at least shifting to the control state, effect display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) capable of at least performing effect display, The starting area is configured to change from the difficult entry state to the easy entry state when the first success / failure determination result is a specific success / failure determination result (for example, per common figure). At least the state change is possible, the effect display means can display at least the first effect, and the first effect includes at least an effect display relating to the result of the first success / failure determination. (For example, ordinary drawing effect), and the effect display means can display at least a second effect (for example, a jackpot notice effect) related to the result of the second success / failure determination, and the second effect. Is an effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the first effect during part or all of the execution of the first effect (for example, FIG. 120 (a) and FIG. 121). (K) etc.) Effect of the big hit are demonstrations likely to be performed toward the non-jackpot controlled state than the control state (e.g., step S603 shown in FIG. 118), the amusement machine, characterized in that. Was explained.

  “The first effect is an effect of one type of effect pattern selected from a plurality of types of effect patterns (a plurality of patterns shown in FIG. 117 (b)). Of these, the first effect pattern is an effect pattern that is more easily executed in the non-hit control state than the jackpot control state (for example, an effect pattern other than the electric chew release notification effect: a variable display effect) (FIG. 118). Step S604, step S605), and a game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  In addition, “the first effect pattern is an effect pattern (for example, a variable display pattern shown in (a) of FIG. 117 (b)) performed over a first time, and among the plurality of types of effect patterns The second effect pattern (for example, the electric chew release notification effect pattern shown in FIG. 117 (b) (ki)) is an effect pattern performed over the second time, and the first time (for example, 15 (Second) is a time longer than the second time (for example, 5.8 seconds). ”Was also explained.

  Further, “the starting region is an electric tulip, and the electric tulip includes at least a first opening pattern (for example, an electric chew short opening pattern) and a second opening pattern (for example, an electric tulong opening pattern). The opening pattern is a single opening pattern, and the second opening pattern is an opening pattern that is more advantageous to the player than the first opening pattern. The game table is capable of displaying at least the first effect when the electric tulip opens in the second opening pattern. ”Was also explained.

  The open pattern advantageous to the player here is an open pattern in which a game ball can easily enter the electric tulip, in other words, an open pattern in which a large number of outgoing balls can be obtained. For example, the open time is long. When the number of times of opening is large or the number of times of opening is plural, the opening pattern is such that the total opening time is long or the opening time of one time is long.

  Further, “the effect display means is capable of displaying at least the first effect in the second effect pattern during the jackpot control state (step S605 shown in FIG. 118). Amusement stand. ”Was also explained.

  Further, in the above description, “a start region (for example, electric Chu) that can change at least between an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) and a difficult-to-enter state (for example, a closed state); First determination unit (e.g., CPU 304 of main control unit 300) capable of executing at least determination (e.g., determination of success / failure of normal map) and at least execution of second determination (e.g., determination of success / failure of special figure) When the possible second success / failure determination means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) and the result of the second success / failure determination is the big success / failure determination result, the control state is changed from the non-big hit control state to the big hit Game control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of at least shifting to the control state, effect display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) capable of at least performing effect display, The starting area is configured to change from the difficult entry state to the easy entry state when the first success / failure determination result is a specific success / failure determination result (for example, per common figure). At least the state change is possible, the effect display means can display at least the first effect, and the first effect includes at least an effect display relating to the result of the first success / failure determination. (For example, ordinary drawing effect), and the effect display means is capable of displaying at least a pre-reading notice effect relating to the result of the second success / failure determination, and the first effect is being executed in the prefetching notice effect. A game table characterized in that it is an effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the pre-reading notice effect during part or all of the period (for example, FIG. 125 (D)). Was explained.

“The first effect is an effect of one type of effect pattern selected from a plurality of types of effect patterns (a plurality of patterns shown in FIG. 117 (b)). One type of effect pattern includes a plurality of images including at least an image related to the result of the first success / failure determination (for example, a general-purpose decorative pattern) and a jackpot notice display image (for example, a decorative image called “Gekiatsu”). A game table characterized by a variation display effect pattern (for example, a variation display pattern shown in (e) of FIG. 117B) for sequentially displaying images. ”Was also explained.
The one kind of effect pattern mentioned here may be the first effect pattern.

  Further, “a symbol display means (for example, the second special symbol display device 214) capable of displaying at least a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the second determination of success / failure after the symbol variation display is performed, and the symbol display means At least controllable symbol display control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300), and the symbol display control means holds the operation of the symbol display means when the holding condition is established. The effect display means is an image display means, and the image display means displays the first effect in a predetermined display area (for example, the normal drawing effect area 283). The image display means can display at least one hold icon (for example, the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811) for one hold. The image display means can display the hold icon at least in a hold display area (for example, special figure 1 hold display area 281), and the pre-reading notice effect is a display of the hold icon. It is an effect (for example, the example shown in FIG. 125) that displays the hold icon by changing the aspect, and the first effect is an effect of one type of effect pattern selected from a plurality of types of effect patterns. There is one kind of effect pattern of the plurality of kinds of effect patterns, wherein the effect image (for example, the effect image in which the character of Tono-sama is performing a peace sign) exceeds the predetermined display area and the hold display area A part or all of the on-hold icon displayed in the on-hold display area can be made difficult to see by part or all of the effect image. Pattern (e.g., FIG. 125 (pattern of electrically movable open notification effect shown in d)) is, the amusement machine, characterized in that. ”Was also explained.

  The one type of effect pattern mentioned here may be the second effect pattern or the first effect pattern.

  Further, here, the hold icon is limited, but the pre-reading notice effect may be an effect that does not use the hold icon. In this case, the image display means is configured to display the image in the second predetermined display area. The pre-reading notice effect may be displayed at least.

In addition, “at least a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the second determination of success / failure is displayed after a different start region different from the start region (for example, the first special figure start port 230) and the symbol variation display. Possible symbol display means, and as one of the symbol display means, a first symbol display means (for example, the first special symbol display device 212) and one of the symbol display means As two symbol display means, a second symbol display means (for example, the second special symbol display device 214) and a symbol display control means capable of controlling at least the first symbol display means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300). ), And the separate starting area is one in which the ease of entry of a game ball does not change, and the symbol display control means can at least control the second symbol display means, The symbol display The control means is capable of executing at least control of a first hold (for example, hold of special figure 1) for holding the operation of the first symbol display means when the first hold condition is established. And the symbol display control means controls the second holding (for example, holding of the special figure 2) for holding the operation of the second symbol display means when the second holding condition is established. Can be executed at least, and the establishment requirement of the first hold condition is a requirement including at least that the game ball has entered the separate starting area, and the establishment requirement of the second hold condition is a game A requirement that includes at least that the ball has entered the start-up area, and the symbol display control means starts the operation of the first symbol display means when the first holding digest condition is established. Is at least feasible and before The symbol display control means can execute at least control for starting the operation of the second symbol display means when the second reserved digest condition is established, The establishment requirement is a requirement at least including that the operation of the second symbol display means is suspended, and the establishment requirement of the first suspension digestion condition is that the operation of the second symbol display means is suspended. The requirement for establishing the first suspension digestion condition is a requirement that includes at least that the operation of the first symbol display means is suspended, and the effect display means includes: Image display means, and the image display means displays one first hold icon (for example, special figure 1 hold icon 2811) for a first hold display area (for example, a special hold display area (for example, special display area)). Figure 1 hold At least in the display area 281), and the image display means displays one second hold icon (for example, the special figure 2 hold icon 2821) for the second hold. Can be displayed at least in the hold display area (for example, special figure 2 hold display area 282), and the image display means can display the first display area in the predetermined display area (for example, general drawing effect area 283). An effect can be displayed at least, and the predetermined display area is an area located between the first reserved display area and the second reserved display area, and the first effect has a plurality of types. One type of production pattern selected from among the plurality of types of production patterns is a production image (for example, the character of Tono-sama Effect image) enters the reserved display area of at least one of the first reserved display area and the second reserved display area beyond the predetermined display area. It is an effect pattern (for example, an electric chew release notification effect pattern shown in FIG. 125 (d)) that makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the display area, and the pre-reading notice effect is the first hold It is an effect that changes the display mode of the icon to display the first hold icon (for example, the example shown in FIG. 125), and the prefetching notice effect changes the display mode of the second hold icon and This is an effect of displaying the second hold icon, and either the hold icon of the first hold icon or the second hold icon becomes difficult to visually recognize due to the effect image (for example, , The pattern of electrically movable open notification effect shown in FIG. 125 (d)), the amusement machine, characterized in that. ”Was also explained.
The game stand here is a so-called special figure 2 priority change machine.

  Further, the one kind of effect pattern referred to here may be the second effect pattern or the first effect pattern.

  Further, the predetermined display area referred to here may be an area sandwiched between the first hold display area and the second hold display area, or both hold display as viewed from the predetermined display area. The region may be a region provided at a position shifted from each other. The first reserved display area and the second reserved display area may be provided with an interval, and the predetermined display area may be provided at the interval.

  Further, “the effect display means is capable of displaying at least a third effect, and the third effect is an effect different from the first effect and the pre-reading notice effect (for example, for the change) The third effect is an effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the first effect during a part or all of the period during the execution of the first effect. A game table characterized by being (for example, FIG. 120 (a) or FIG. 121 (ke)). ”Was also explained.

  The third effect here may be an effect related to the result of the second success / failure determination (for example, a jackpot notice effect), or an effect that represents game information (for example, the number of short hours, the number of consecutive resorts, etc.). There may be.

  Further, in the above description, “a start region (for example, electric Chu) that can change at least between an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) and a difficult-to-enter state (for example, a closed state); First determination unit (e.g., CPU 304 of main control unit 300) capable of executing at least determination (e.g., determination of success / failure of normal map) and at least execution of second determination (e.g., determination of success / failure of special figure). When the possible second success / failure determination means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) and the result of the second success / failure determination is the big success / failure determination result, the control state is changed from the non-big hit control state to the big hit Game control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of at least shifting to the control state, and effect means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect movable body 2) capable of executing at least effects. 4), wherein the starting area is at least in a state where the entry difficulty state is changed to the entry easy state when the first success / failure determination result is a specific success / failure determination result. The effect display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) of the effect means is capable of at least effect display, and the effect movable means (for example, the effect means, for example) The effect movable body 224) can execute at least the effect operation, the effect display means can display at least the first effect, and the first effect is determined by the first success / failure determination. The effect moving means includes at least an effect display related to the result of the second effect (for example, ordinary drawing effect), and the effect moving means performs the effect operation of the second effect related to the result of the second success / failure determination (for example, FIG. And (a)) can be executed at least, and the effect display means can display related effects related to the effect operation of the second effect in the effect moving means (for example, the effect shown in FIG. 128 (a)). Display of the image) is at least executable, and at least one of the effect operation of the second effect and the related effect display is part or all of the period during the execution of the first effect, A game table characterized in that at least a part of the first performance can be made difficult to visually recognize (for example, FIGS. 128 (a) and (b)). Was explained.

That is, the effect means is a part or all of the first effect being executed by at least one of the effect operation of the second effect by the effect moving means and the related effect display by the effect display means. It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the first effect during the period.
The related effect display may be an effect image display.

  In addition, “the effect unit starts the first effect by the effect display unit first, and during the execution of the first effect, the effect operation of the second effect by the effect moving unit and the It is possible to make at least a part of the first effect difficult to view by at least one of the related effect displays by the effect display means, and the effect means first the second effect. A game characterized in that the first effect is not performed by the effect display means during the execution of the second effect (for example, FIGS. 128 (a) and (b)). Stand. ”Was also explained.

  That is, the first effect is started first, and during the execution of the first effect, at least one of the effect operation of the second effect and the related effect display is the first effect. It is possible to make at least part of the view difficult,

  The second effect is started first, and the first effect is not performed during execution of the second effect.

  Further, “a symbol display means (for example, the second special symbol display device 214) capable of displaying at least a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the second determination of success / failure after the symbol variation display is performed, and the symbol display means At least controllable symbol display control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300), and the symbol display control means holds the operation of the symbol display means when the holding condition is established. (For example, hold of special figure 2) can be executed at least, and the effect display means is image display means, and the image display means has one hold icon ( For example, the special figure 2 hold icon 2821) can be displayed at least, and the image display means displays the hold icon in a hold display area (for example, the special figure 2 hold display area 282). And at least one of the second effect production operation and the related production display can make at least a part of the reserved display area difficult to view ( For example, FIG. 128 (A) and (A)), a game table characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  Further, “a control state transition means (for example, that can shift the control state from a non-hit control state to a big hit control state when the result of the second success / failure determination is a specific second success / failure determination result (for example, CPU 304) of the main control unit 300, the jackpot control state is a state in which the winning area is at least changeable state from the difficult entry state to the easy entry state, the first effect is the jackpot control A game stand characterized in that the non-hit control state is more easily executed than the state (for example, step S603 shown in FIG. 118). ”Was also explained.

  Further, “the first success / failure determination means is that the electric support state is easier to derive the specific determination result than the non-electric support state, and the first effect is more than the electric support state. The game stand is characterized in that the non-electric support state is more easily performed (for example, step S601 shown in FIG. 118). ”Was also explained.

  That is, the electric support state may be a state in which a game ball easily enters the start area, and the non-electric support state may be a state in which the game ball does not easily enter the start area.

  Further, in the above description, “a start region (for example, electric Chu) that can change at least between an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) and a difficult-to-enter state (for example, a closed state); First determination unit (e.g., CPU 304 of main control unit 300) capable of executing at least determination (e.g., determination of success / failure of normal map) and at least execution of second determination (e.g., determination of success / failure of special figure). When the possible second success / failure determination means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) and the result of the second success / failure determination is the big success / failure determination result, the control state is changed from the non-big hit control state to the big hit After at least a game control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of shifting to the control state and a symbol variation display, at least a stop symbol corresponding to the second determination result is displayed. A game machine comprising possible symbol display means (for example, the second special symbol display device 214) and effect display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing at least effect display. The region is a region where at least a specific action can be performed when the result of the first success / failure determination is a specific success / failure determination result. An operation including an operation for changing the state to an easy state (for example, an opening / closing operation of a pair of blade members, more specifically, an electric-chu short opening operation or an electric-chu long opening operation), The first effect can be displayed at least, and the first effect is an effect that includes at least an effect (for example, ((b) of FIG. The effect display means is capable of displaying at least a second effect, and the second effect is an effect display performed during execution of the symbol variation display. (For example, display of characters C1 to C3), and the second effect is a part or all of the period during execution of the first effect, and at least a part of the first effect. A game stand characterized by an effect that can be difficult to visually recognize (for example, FIG. 121 (K)). Was explained.

  Here, the specific operation may be an operation of alternately repeating the difficult entry state and the easy entry state one or more times. Therefore, the second effect may be an effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the first effect when the start area is in the easy-to-enter state. May be an effect capable of making it difficult to see at least a part of the first effect before the state is changed from the difficult-to-enter state to the easy-to-enter state, and the starting area is in the easy-to-enter state. It may be an effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the first effect after the state is changed to the entry difficult state.

  In addition, after performing the first symbol variation display (for example, the normal symbol variation display), the first symbol display means (for example, the regular symbol) capable of displaying at least the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the first success / failure determination. The display device 210) includes the effects displayed during the first symbol variation display (for example, (a) to (f) of FIG. 117 (b)) as the first effects. The effect display means can display at least the effect (for example, confirmed) as the first effect during the display of the stopped symbol by the first symbol display means. Medium effect) can be displayed at least, and the effect display means displays, as the first effect, at least an effect (for example, an effect during operation) performed while the start area is executing the specific operation. Even if possible There.

  That is, the first effect may be an effect including at least one effect among the effect during change, the effect during determination, and the effect during operation.

  In addition, as another symbol display means (for example, a first special symbol start port 230) different from the start region and one of the symbol display means, a first symbol display means (for example, a first symbol display means) 1 special symbol display device 212), and as one of the symbol display means, second symbol display means (for example, second special symbol display device 214) and first symbol display means. At least controllable symbol display control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300), and the separate start area does not change the ease of entry of a game ball, and the symbol display control means includes: The second symbol display means is at least controllable, and the symbol display control means holds the operation of the first symbol display means when the first holding condition is established. At least one hold control The symbol display control means can execute at least a second holding control for holding the operation of the second symbol display means when the second holding condition is satisfied. The establishment requirement of the first holding condition is a requirement including at least that the game ball has entered the separate start area, and the establishment requirement of the second hold condition is that the game ball has the start area The second effect is an effect that is performed while the second symbol display means is executing the symbol variation display (for example, a jackpot notice effect for the variation). A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  The second effect mentioned here may be an effect of variable display of decorative symbols performed while the second symbol display means is executing the symbol variable display.

  In addition, “the first symbol display means is capable of displaying at least a first stop symbol (for example, special symbol F) corresponding to the result of the big hit determination after the symbol variation display. The second symbol display means is capable of displaying at least a second stop symbol (for example, the special symbol A) corresponding to the result of the jackpot success / failure determination after performing symbol variation display, It is more advantageous for the player as the jackpot control state when the second symbol display means displays the second stop symbol than when the first symbol display means displays the first stop symbol. A game table characterized by having a configuration (for example, FIG. 119 (d)) in which a large jackpot control state is easily started. ”Was also explained.

  Here, the game control means changes the control state from the non-big hit control state to the first big hit control state (for example, 2R big hit game when the first symbol display means displays the first stop symbol. The game control means can change the control state from the non-big hit control state to the second big hit when the second symbol display means displays the second stop symbol. It is possible to shift at least to a control state (for example, 15R special jackpot gaming state), and the second jackpot control state may be a control state that is more advantageous to the player than the first jackpot control state. .

  In addition, in the winning area (for example, attacker), the second symbol display means displays the second stop symbol more than after the first symbol display means displays the first stop symbol. The latter may be easier to perform a state change operation (for example, an opening / closing operation) that is advantageous to the player. For example, an operation with a large number of times of opening or an operation with a long opening time may be easily performed.

Further, “the symbol display control means is capable of executing at least a control for starting the operation of the first symbol display means when the first holding digest condition is established, and the symbol display control The means is capable of executing at least a control for starting the operation of the second symbol display means when the second reserved digestion condition is established, and the establishment requirement of the second reserved digestion condition is: , The requirement that at least the operation of the second symbol display means is suspended, and the requirement to establish the first suspended digestion condition is that the operation of the second symbol display means is not suspended The requirement for establishing the first suspended digestion condition is a requirement including at least that the operation of the first symbol display means is suspended, and the effect display means includes the second display Wrong or wrong At least a pre-reading notice effect (for example, an effect due to a change in the display mode of the hold icon) can be displayed, and the effect display means can execute at least a continuous notice effect as the pre-reading notice effect. The effect display means is capable of continuing at least the continuous notice effect during the interrupt symbol variation display, and the interrupt symbol variation display is performed when the second reserved digest condition is during the continuous notice effect. It is a symbol variation display that is started during the continuous notice effect by being established, and the prefetch notice effect (for example, the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 in the display mode of the prefetch notice) is being executed in the first effect. It is an effect that makes it difficult to view at least a part of the first effect (for example, the electric chew release notification effect) during part or all of the period (for example, , FIG. 125 (d ')), the amusement machine, characterized in that. ”Was also explained.
The game stand here is a so-called special figure 2 priority change machine.

  The effect display means is capable of displaying at least the first effect during execution of the prefetch notice effect.

  Subsequently, a pachinko machine according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described. The pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment is often in common with the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, and is the same as the pachinko machine of the third embodiment unless otherwise specified. In the following description, components having the same names as those of the components described so far will be described using the same reference numerals as those used so far.

  FIG. 129 (a) is a diagram showing the success / failure determination table of FIG. 1 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 129 (b) is a diagram showing the success / failure determination table of FIG. These tables are stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

In the fourth embodiment, whether the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, the winning probability of the jackpot is about 1/320 in the special figure low probability state and about 1/32 in the special figure high probability state. Compared to the pachinko machine of the third embodiment, the pachinko machine of the fourth embodiment is a pachinko machine with specifications that make it easy to win a big hit.
Also in the fourth embodiment, the small hit is not in the special figure 2 but only in the special figure 1.

  The special figure determination table is the same as that of the third embodiment shown in FIG. 119 (d), and the table set selection table is the same as that of the second embodiment shown in FIG. The timer number table is also the same as that of the second embodiment shown in FIG.

  Therefore, also in the fourth embodiment, the special figure 2 is more likely to generate a big hit advantageous to the player than the special figure 1.

  Further, the determination of whether or not the special figure is true may be derived from “big hit”, “small hit”, or “lack”, or may be derived from “big hit” or “lack”. Alternatively, whether or not a special figure is appropriate may be derived up to a special figure symbol.

  Further, the pre-reading notice is also executed in the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment. The pre-reading notice pre-reads the starting information before the start of the symbol variation of the special symbol, determines the result of the special symbol determination in advance based on the starting information, and notifies the result of the determination on the basis of the starting information Prior to the start, based on the determination result in advance, it is foretold that the determination result based on the start information will be a big hit or special figure A or special figure B, and the determination result based on the start information Even if it is off, or it becomes special figure I or special figure J, it is a notice (so-called fake notice) that the success / failure determination result based on the start information becomes a big hit or special figure A or special figure B ) Is also included.

  FIG. 130 (a) is a diagram showing a special figure 1 failure pre-judgment table used when pre-determining by pre-reading the start information of FIG. 1, and FIG. It is a figure which shows the table for special figure 2 this time prior determination used when pre-determining by pre-reading the starting information.

The special figure 1 success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 130 (a) is the same as the special figure 1 / failure determination table shown in FIG. 129 (a), and is shown in FIG. 130 (b). The use table is the same as the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 2 shown in FIG. Even if the preliminary determination is performed using the preliminary determination table shown in FIG. 130, the special determination related lottery process is performed again using the determination table shown in FIG. 129.
Moreover, in prior determination, it performs until prior determination of a special figure.
FIG. 130 (c) is a diagram showing a special figure prior determination table.

  The special figure prior determination table shown in FIG. 130 (c) is the same as the special figure determination table (see FIG. 119 (d)) used in the special figure related lottery process. The special figure determination process using the special figure determination table is performed.

  In advance determination, it is also possible to make a prior determination of the special figure based on the prior determination result of the fluctuation time by making a prior determination of the fluctuation time of the special figure without performing the preliminary determination of the special figure. Alternatively, instead of specifically predetermining the fluctuation time of the special figure, it is possible to predetermine trends of fluctuation times and groups of fluctuation times, and to make a pre-reading notice based on those prior judgment results. May be.

Further, whether or not to perform the pre-reading notice or in what form the pre-reading notice is performed is determined by the sub-control unit (400, 500), for example, by performing random lottery.
Next, the normal / bad determination in the fourth embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 131 (a) is a diagram showing a normal / unusual determination table stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

Also in the normal-time success / failure determination process in the present embodiment, the time / shortness flag is referred to, and whether or not the current control state is the power support state is determined. The normal control state is a low probability state if the hourly flag is turned off (if it is a non-electric support state), and is a high probability state if the hourly flag is turned on (if it is an electric support state). . The determination of whether or not a common figure is made is performed based on a random number value for a common figure winning in the starting information extracted from the general figure holding storage unit of the RAM 308 (a possible range is 0 to 65535). The usual Atari probability in the fourth embodiment is about 10% in the non-electric support state (low probability state) and 100% in the electric support state (high probability state). In the electric support state, it may be possible to win only for winning.
FIG. 131 (b) is a diagram showing a general-purpose determination table.

  In determining the common map, the standard map is determined based on whether or not the current control state is the electric support state with reference to the time reduction flag. If it is a non-electric support state, a common figure will be determined based on the common figure decision random number value (the range which can be taken is 0-99) among the starting information taken out from the common figure storage part of RAM308. In the fourth embodiment, the normal figure A is determined with a probability of 90% and the normal figure B is determined with a probability of 10% in the non-electric support state. In the universal figure determination table shown in FIG. 131 (b), an open state of the electric chew corresponding to the universal figure determination result is shown. When the map A is stopped and displayed on the map display device 210, the electric chew is released for a maximum of 1.8 seconds (electric chow short is released). On the other hand, when the normal figure B is stopped and displayed on the normal figure display device 210, the electric chew is released for a maximum of 6 seconds (electric chow long open). If a predetermined number of balls (10 balls in this case) are entered before a predetermined opening time elapses, the electric Chu is closed at that time.

  Moreover, in 4th Embodiment, if it is an electric support state, it will be decided by the general map B by all means. Therefore, the lottery based on the usual decision random number is not performed. Even if the general map B is stopped and displayed on the general map display device 210 in the electric support state, the electric chew is released for a maximum of 6 seconds (electric chew long open). Here, in the case where the general map B is stopped and displayed on the general map display device 210 in the non-electric support state, the electric chew is opened for the first time (for example, 4 seconds) at the maximum, and the general display is displayed in the electric support state. When the map A is stopped and displayed on the apparatus 210, the electric chew may be opened for a second time (for example, 6 seconds) at the maximum.

  In addition, when the result of determining whether or not the usual figure is correct is out of date, the figure becomes the ordinary figure C, so that the lottery based on the usual figure determined random value is not performed.

Note that, in the fourth embodiment, only in the electric support state, the determination of whether or not a normal figure is won is almost won. However, even in a non-electric support state, it may be won almost (or always). In this case, when the map A is stopped and displayed on the map display device 210 in the non-electric support state, the power Chu is opened only for a maximum of 0.1 seconds.
FIG. 131 (c) is a diagram showing a normal timer table.

  As shown in the normal time timer table of FIG. 131 (c), in the fourth embodiment, the normal symbol fluctuation time is uniformly 20 seconds (normal time in the non-electric support state) regardless of the normal time symbol. The timer is a timer 1), and in the power support state, it is uniformly 1 second (ordinary timer 2). In this way, since the non-electric support state is longer in the non-electric support state than the electric support state, it is possible to perform a long effect during the normal symbol change display in the non-electric support state, and enhance the effect There are cases where it is possible.

  Note that it is also possible to prepare a plurality of types of normal symbol variation times in the non-electric support state and determine the normal symbol variation times in the non-electric support state by random number lottery. In addition, a plurality of types (two types or three or more types) of symbol change time of the normal figure in the electric support state are prepared, and a random number lottery is selected from among them. The symbol variation time in the figure may be determined. Alternatively, the symbol variation time may be prepared for each ordinary symbol, and the symbol B may be selected more easily for the ordinary symbol B than for the ordinary symbol A. By doing so, it becomes easy to produce a turn effect before the usual figure B is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, the symbol B may be selected more easily in the normal figure B than in the normal figure A. By doing so, the player can be made more advantageous.

  Further, in the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment, the usual determination in advance is also executed based on the fact that the usual start information acquisition condition is satisfied. The requirement for establishing the usual start information acquisition condition here is a requirement established based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the usual figure start port 228. In other words, in a state where the number of ordinary holds is less than a predetermined upper limit, this is a requirement that is established when a game ball passes through the general opening 228, and in a state where the number of ordinary holds is a predetermined upper limit, This is a requirement that does not hold even if a game ball passes through the normal start port 228. The pre-judgment of ordinary drawings is the same process as the special-judgment pre-judgment.

  FIG. 132 (a) is a diagram showing a table for determining whether or not to determine whether or not to make a normal use, which is used when pre-determining by pre-reading the startup information of the normal.

The table for determining whether or not to make a normal determination shown in FIG. 132 (a) is the same as the table for determining whether or not to make a normal determination shown in FIG. 131 (a). Even if the preliminary determination is performed using the preliminary determination table shown in FIG. 132 (a), in the common drawing related lottery process, the determination of success / failure using the universal drawing determination table shown in FIG. 131 (a) is performed again. Is called.
Moreover, in prior determination, it is performed until the prior determination of a usual figure.
FIG. 132 (b) is a diagram showing a general-purpose advance determination table.

  The general map determination table shown in FIG. 132 (b) is the same as the general map determination table shown in FIG. 131 (b). However, in the general drawing related lottery process, the general map determination table is used again. The usual figure determination process was performed.

  Subsequently, a general drawing effect determination process executed by the first sub-control unit 400 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 133 (a).

  FIG. 133 (a) is a flowchart showing the flow of the universal drawing effect determination process in the fourth embodiment.

  The general drawing effect determination process shown in FIG. 133 (a) is also started when the first sub-control unit 400 receives a general diagram change start command from the main control unit 300. The usual figure change start command includes information indicating the current control state (whether or not the electric support state is set) and a usual figure determination result.

  First, it is determined whether or not it is during the prohibition period of the usual drawing effect (step S611). The prohibition period here is a period during power support. Note that this prohibition period may include at least one execution period among the specific effects described later. If it is during the prohibition period (during electric support), this ordinary drawing effect determination process ends, and the ordinary drawing effect (first effect) is not performed. Since the electric support state is a state in which a game ball easily wins an electric chew, there is a possibility that the player's expectation will not be improved so much even if the usual drawing effect is performed. However, if the electric support is in progress, the general drawing effect will not be performed uniformly. Even if the electric support is in progress, if the lottery with a predetermined probability is won, the normal drawing effect will be executed. May be.

  On the other hand, if it is not during the prohibition period (if it is during non-electric support), it is determined whether or not the normal drawing execution condition is satisfied (step S612). The requirement for establishing the general drawing production execution condition is a requirement that is established by winning the general drawing B shown in FIG. 115 (c). In addition, when the normal map B is stopped and displayed on the general map display device 210, the electric tulong release is executed, and this general drawing effect execution condition corresponds to the execution condition of the true normal drawing effect. Moreover, it is also a requirement that is established by winning the drawing A shown in FIG. 115C and winning the effect execution lottery with the first probability (for example, 1/10). When the map A is stopped and displayed on the map display device 210, the electric-chu short opening is executed, and this general drawing production execution condition is equivalent to the execution condition of the fake general drawing production for the electric-chu long opening. However, it corresponds to the execution condition of the true general drawing effect for the electric Chu release. Furthermore, it is also a requirement that is established by winning the drawing C shown in FIG. 115C and winning the effect execution lottery with the second probability (for example, 1/100). Note that the first probability may be a probability equal to or higher than the second probability or higher than the second probability. When the general map C is stopped and displayed on the general map display device 210, the electric chew is not opened and remains closed, and this general drawing performance execution condition corresponds to a false general drawing performance execution condition. In addition, here, the general drawing production execution condition is always satisfied if the winning figure B is won, but it may be established by winning the drawing execution lottery with a third probability (for example, 1/2). Good. The third probability may be a probability that is equal to or higher than the first probability or a probability that is higher than the first probability. If the general drawing effect execution condition described above is not established, this general drawing effect determination process is terminated.

  On the contrary, if the ordinary drawing effect execution condition is satisfied, it is determined whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied (step S613). The requirement for satisfying the predetermined condition here is a requirement that is satisfied when the specific effect is executed. Specific effects include effects during a big hit game, effects with a high expectation level for jackpots during special symbol changes (for example, super reach, notice effects), forced effects that occur every predetermined time, right-handed or button presses For example, an effect that prompts the player to perform an operation, an effect that prompts each button to be pressed, and the like. The compulsory effect is an effect that is performed by moving the decorative symbol to the corner if the special symbol is changing, and is an effect that is performed in the middle of the demo effect if the demonstration is being performed. Further, the effect of prompting the user to press the button may be, for example, an effect that notifies the button pressing timing for each button, an effect that notifies the button pressing reception period, or the remaining button pressing reception. It may be an effect that informs the period. If the predetermined condition is not established, the first ordinary drawing effect command is set in the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400 (step S614), the ordinary drawing effect determining process is ended, and if the predetermined condition is established. Then, the second ordinary drawing effect command is set in the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400 (step S615), and the ordinary drawing effect determining process ends. The ordinary drawing effect command set in the RAM 408 is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the information transmission process (step S319) shown in FIG. 90 (a), and the second sub-control unit 500 transmits the received ordinary command. Based on the effect command, the decorative symbol display device 208 is controlled, and the normal symbol effect is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The ordinary drawing effect based on the first ordinary drawing effect command is an effect executed over a relatively long effect time, and the ordinary drawing effect based on the second ordinary figure effect command is executed over a relatively short effect time. Production. For example, the start time of the general drawing production based on the second general drawing production command is later than the start time of the general drawing production command based on the first general drawing production command, and the production time is shortened. In other words, when the usual drawing effect is started while the specific effect is being executed, the effect time is shorter than when the usual drawing effect is started while the specific effect is not being executed. By doing so, there are cases where the production can be varied and the interest of the game can be enhanced. In addition, when a specific effect (for example, a big hit notice) is being executed, it is possible to attract a player's attention to the specific effect by shortening the effect time of the general effect, and a general effect including a result display. In some cases, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the stop display of the regular symbols, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In addition, 0 seconds are also included in the short production time here, and in the case of 0 seconds, the usual drawing production is not executed. In the case of 0 seconds, the second ordinary drawing effect command may not be transmitted, or the second ordinary drawing effect command may be a cancel command. Further, even if the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the first general drawing production command is not set uniformly, but in step S614, a lottery is performed, and the second general display is performed with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/20). You may make it set a figure production command.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment, it is easier to perform a normal drawing effect in the non-electric support state than in the electric support state. Since the non-electric support state is a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to win the electric chew, there is a case where it can be expected to win the game ball to the electric chew by executing the ordinary drawing effect.

  FIG. 133B is a flowchart showing the flow of the predetermined area notice effect determination process in the fourth embodiment.

  The predetermined area here is a predetermined area in the decorative symbol display device 208, and corresponds to, for example, a special figure holding display area. Also in the fourth embodiment, the special figure hold display area is provided in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, which is the same as in the third embodiment described above. However, in the third embodiment, the general drawing effect area provided between the special figure 1 hold display area and the special figure 2 hold display area where the normal drawing effect is performed is referred to as a predetermined area. In the embodiment, the special figure 1 hold display area or the special figure 2 hold display area is referred to as a predetermined area. Note that the predetermined area in the fourth embodiment is not limited to the special figure hold display area, and may be an area that includes an area close to or adjacent to an area where a general drawing effect is performed.

  The predetermined area notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 133B is also started when the first sub control unit 400 receives the special figure hold increase command from the main control unit 300. The notice effect here refers to a special bonus jackpot notice effect. The special bonus jackpot notice effect here is a prefetch notice effect based on the prior determination result described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 starts even when it receives any of the commands described so far, such as a special symbol variation start command, a universal symbol hold increase command, a universal symbol variation start command, a jackpot presentation start command, etc. You may do it. In these cases, the notice effect is not limited to the look-ahead notice effect, but may be a notice effect regarding the stop symbol of the symbol change, or may be a notice effect for notifying the development to reach. Further, it may be a notice effect or the like for giving a notice of a transition to the probability change state or the electric support state after the big hit.

  In step S621, it is determined whether it is during the prohibition period. The prohibition period in step S621 is a period during the normal drawing effect. If it is during the prohibition period (during the ordinary drawing production), the process proceeds to step S624.

  On the other hand, if it is not during the prohibition period, it is determined whether or not the notice effect execution condition is satisfied (step S622). The requirement for fulfilling the notice effect execution condition is a requirement that is established by winning the notice execution possibility lottery. If this notice effect execution condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S624.

  On the contrary, if the notice effect execution condition is satisfied, a predetermined area notice effect command is set in the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400 (step S623), and the process proceeds to step S624. The predetermined area notice effect command set in the RAM 408 is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the information transmission process (step S319) shown in FIG. 90 (a), and the second sub-control unit 500 transmits the predetermined area transmitted. The decorative symbol display device 208 is controlled based on the region notice effect command, and the notice effect is displayed in a predetermined area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In step S624, the other notice effect lottery process is executed, and the predetermined area notice effect determination process ends. Other notice effects are equivalent to notice effects (including pre-read notice) performed outside the predetermined area.

  Next, specific examples of effects in the fourth embodiment will be described. First, a description will be given with reference to FIGS. 134 and 135.

  FIG. 134 is a time chart showing an example of the effect in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 135 is a diagram showing a state of the decorative symbol display device and the like for each important point in the time chart shown in FIG. That is, the decorative symbol display device shown in FIGS. 135A to 135C corresponds to the periods A to K shown in FIG. In the time chart shown in FIG. 134, time (t) elapses from the left to the right in the figure.

  Under the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 135, a universal display device 210, a first special figure display device 212, and a second special figure display device 214, all of which are driven and controlled by the main control unit 300, are shown. Has been. In the figure used for description in the fourth embodiment, the positions of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are opposite to those used for the explanation in the third embodiment, and the first special figure is displayed. The display device 212 is shown on the leftmost side, and the second special figure display device 214 is shown on the right side. Further, the general map display device 210 is shown on the rightmost side. Furthermore, in the figure used for description in the fourth embodiment, a hold lamp that lights up as many as the number of hold is shown on each display device. That is, four first special figure holding lamps 218 are shown on the leftmost first special figure display device 212, and the second special figure display device 214 on the right (middle) thereof is on the second special figure display device 214. Four figure hold lamps 220 are shown, and four figure hold lamps 216 are shown on the rightmost map display device 210. These holding lamps are all controlled to be turned on by the main control unit 300. In the fourth embodiment, the maximum number of reservations in the usual figure is also the same as the maximum number of reservations in FIG. 1 and the maximum number of reservations in FIG. It should be noted that the maximum number of reservations may or may not be provided for both normal and special drawings. Even in the figure used for the description in the fourth embodiment, only the horizontal segment at the center in the vertical direction is lit and the black portion is lit during the symbol variation, as in the figure used for the description in the third embodiment. Indicates the location of the segment.

  On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 208 is driven and controlled by sub-control means (here, the second sub-control unit 500). A special figure 1 hold display area 281 is provided on the left side of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a special figure 2 hold display area 282 is provided on the right side thereof. Further, a special drawing effect area 283 corresponding to an example of the predetermined area described above is provided between the special figure 1 hold display area 281 and the special figure 2 hold display area 282. In each hold display area, the older hold icon is displayed on the universal drawing effect area 283 side (center side), which is the same as the decorative symbol display device 208 of the third embodiment shown in FIG. 120 and the like. Further, the default display mode of the special figure 1 hold icon is a black circle, and when a pre-reading notice effect is performed, the default display mode is changed to a predetermined display mode. Here, the pre-reading notice effect is performed by displaying the hold icon in the display mode of the old character. Note that a second predetermined display mode (for example, a character different from the old one) may be prepared and used in accordance with the reliability of the prefetch notice. For example, a pre-reading notice effect may be performed by displaying a hold icon in a predetermined display mode when the reliability for winning a big hit is really low and in a second predetermined display mode when the reliability is high.

  Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 135, the left symbol display area 208a displays a number display of the number of each hold and the fourth symbol in a vertical line. That is, a numerical display 284 representing the number of reserved figures in FIG. 1 is provided at the top, and a fourth symbol 285 in FIG. 1 is displayed below the figure. Below that, there is provided a numerical display 286 indicating the number of reserved figures in FIG. 2, and below that, a fourth symbol 287 of special figure 2 is displayed. Further below that, a number display 288 representing the number of holds of the usual figure is provided, and below that, the fourth figure 289 of the usual figure is displayed. The fourth symbol is for displaying the symbol variation. In the first special symbol display device 212 at the left end shown in FIG. 135 (a), the special symbol variation display is performed, and the other display devices 214, 210 is stopped. The 4th symbol 285 of the special figure 1 is lit in gray, and the other 4th symbols 287 and 289 are unlit. Each of the fourth symbols 285, 287.289 lights up in a predetermined color when the display devices 212, 214, 210 stop displaying the big hit symbol or the hit symbol, and during the big hit game or during the electric chew opening / closing operation May continue to light in a predetermined color.

  The state shown in FIG. 135 and FIG. 134 (a) is a non-electric support state, the number of holdings of special figure 1 is three, and the number of holdings of special figure 2 and ordinary figure is zero. Two hold icons are displayed in the special figure 1 hold display area 281 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 135A, and the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 representing the first hold of the oldest winning prize. Is displayed in the display mode of old and new characters, and a pre-reading notice effect is executed on the left side of the normal drawing effect region 283. In addition, the default image 283a is displayed in the normal drawing effect area 283. The default image 283a is an image displayed in the general drawing effect area 283 when the normal drawing effect is not performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 134A, the electric chew is not operating, and the electric chew (the pair of blade members 232) is in a closed state. Note that, as described above, the first special symbol display device 212 shown in FIG. 135 (a) displays a special symbol variation display, and this symbol variation display is continued beyond the timing of FIG. 135 (ku). To do.

  Here, since the player is in the non-electric support state, the player is left-handed, and eventually, three game balls B pass continuously through the general start port 228 provided in the left region, The number of holds increases to 3. As shown in (a) of FIG. 134, the general-purpose display device 210 starts the general-purpose symbol variation display and also starts the general-purpose effect. Here, the ordinary drawing effect is a usual drawing effect (hereinafter referred to as a first ordinary drawing effect) based on the first ordinary figure effect command set in step S614 of FIG. 133 (a). The usual symbol variation display is performed for 20 seconds. In the ordinary drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 135 (a), the variation display (high-speed variation) of the usual decorative pattern is started. In this case, the variation display of the decoration pattern of the ordinary figure is performed for 20 seconds by the variation display pattern (repeat of the ordinary figure decoration 1 → the ordinary figure decoration 2 → the ordinary figure decoration 3) shown in FIG. 117 (b). . In addition, the number display 288 of the number of usual holds shown in FIG. 135 (a) is 3, and the fourth figure 289 of the usual figure is also lit in gray.

  Eventually, as shown in (c) of FIG. 134, the general-purpose display device 210 ends the normal-pattern variation display, and a fixed display is performed. In other words, the general map display device 210 displays the stop symbol of the general map C (see FIG. 115C) for 0.6 seconds. The “symbol variation display period” may refer to a period from the start of the symbol variation display to the end of the fixed display. In the ordinary drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 135 (c), the ordinary figure decoration 3 which is the stop figure aspect of the ordinary figure decorative pattern (see FIG. 115 (d)) is set to 0 after the variation display of the ordinary figure decorative pattern. Displayed for 6 seconds. That is, the usual result display effect is performed. Note that the first ordinary drawing effect here is a relative display in which the decoration illustration of the ordinary drawing is displayed with reference to the result of determining the ordinary drawing in step S612 in FIG. 133, and then the result display effect of the ordinary drawing is performed. It is a production over a long first time (20.6 seconds). In addition, the 4th symbol 289 of the usual figure shown in FIG.

  When the confirmation display on the general-purpose display device 210 is completed, as shown in FIG. 134 (d), the general-purpose display device 210 starts the symbol variation display of the general-purpose figure again, but here, the general-purpose effect is not executed. . That is, in the determination in step S612 shown in FIG. 133, it is determined that the normal drawing effect execution condition is not satisfied, and therefore the normal drawing effect is not executed and the false normal drawing effect is not performed. A default image 283a is displayed in the ordinary drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. In addition, the number display 288 of the number of reserved figures in the usual figure shown in FIG. 135 (D) is 2, and the fourth figure 289 of the usual figure is also lit in gray.

  Eventually, as shown in (e) of FIG. 134, the general symbol display device 210 ends the normal symbol variation display, and a fixed display is performed for 0.6 seconds. A default image 283a is still displayed in the normal drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. That is, the usual result display effect is not performed. In addition, the 4th design 289 of the usual figure shown in FIG.

  When the confirmation display on the general-purpose display device 210 is completed, as shown in FIG. 134 (f), the general-purpose display device 210 starts the normal symbol variation display again, and this time, the general-purpose drawing start is also started. . Here, the usual symbol variation display is also performed for 20 seconds. In the ordinary drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 135 (f), the variation display (high-speed variation) of the usual decorative pattern is started. The general map production here is also the first general map production. In addition, the number display 288 of the number of usual orders shown in FIG. 135 (a) is 1, and the fourth figure 289 of the usual figure is also lit in gray.

  When 20 seconds have elapsed from the start of the normal symbol fluctuation display, as shown in FIG. 134 (ki), the normal symbol display device 210 ends the normal symbol fluctuation display and confirms for 0.6 seconds. Display is performed. The stop symbol of the general map B (see FIG. 115 (c)) is displayed on the general map display device 210 shown in FIG. 135 (ki), and the variation display of the decorative pattern of the normal map is displayed on the general map effect area 283. Subsequent to this, the usual drawing decoration 2 (see FIG. 115 (d)) corresponding to the usual drawing B is displayed, and the usual drawing result display effect is performed. In addition, an effect image (here, an effect image 283b) is also displayed so as to surround the ordinary drawing effect region 283 as a normal drawing effect. The effect image 283b enters the special figure 1 hold display area 281, and a part of the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 in the display form of the pre-reading notice which is the display form of the old character is hidden by the effect image 283b. ing. As a result, the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 is difficult to visually recognize. Note that the entire first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 may be hidden by the effect image 283b.

  Subsequently, as shown in (c) of FIG. 134, the electric chew long is released, and the electric chew is opened for 5 seconds. In the ordinary drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 135 (c), the electric chew release notification effect is executed following the usual result display effect with the effect image 283b. In the electric chew release notification effect here, a decorative design in which a character of Tono-sama with a balloon saying “electric chew is open” has a peace sign is displayed. With the balloon “opening electric chew”, the player knows that the game ball can enter the electric chew, and can grasp the launch timing of the game ball. In addition, the character's hand extends beyond the normal drawing effect area 283, enters the special figure 1 hold display area 281, and the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 (here, the pre-reading notice) Part of the hold icon) in the display mode is hidden. As a result, the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 is difficult to visually recognize. This electric chew release notification effect can also be regarded as one of the usual result display effects. Note that all of the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 may be hidden by the electric chew release notification effect. In addition, a balloon “During electric Chu open” also extends beyond the general drawing effect area 283, and this balloon enters the special figure 2 hold display area 282.

  As described above, the first special figure 1 holding icon 2811 whose display mode has been changed to the pre-reading notice mode is dared to be hidden by the normal drawing effect such as the effect image 283b or the electric-chu release notification effect. You may be interested in the trends. Further, the pre-reading notice is a future jackpot notice, and the player may be expected to open the electric chew by conspicuously presenting the current progressive drawing.

  The first ordinary drawing effect here refers to the result of determining the ordinary drawing in step S612 in FIG. 133, displays the variation of the decorative pattern of the ordinary drawing, and then displays the result of the ordinary drawing with the effect image 283b. And then the electric-chu release notification effect, which is an effect over a relatively long second time (25.6 seconds).

  Subsequently, although not shown in FIG. 135, as shown in FIG. 134 (K), when the electric chew long release is ended, the electric chew release notification effect is also ended, and the normal symbol variation display is started. However, the usual drawing effect is not executed.

  136 is a time chart showing the continuation of the example shown in FIG. 134, and FIG. 137 is a diagram showing a state of the decorative symbol display device and the like for each important point in the time chart shown in FIG. That is, the decorative symbol display device shown in (S) to (C) of FIG. 136 corresponds to the period (S) to (C) shown in FIG. In the time chart shown in FIG. 136, time (t) elapses from the left to the right in the figure.

  After the symbol variation display of special figure 1 performed in FIG. 135 is finished and the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, the first special feature of the display mode of the pre-reading notice which is the display mode of the old character shown in FIG. The hold of the special figure 1 represented by the hold icon 2811 in FIG. 1 is consumed, and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. In accordance with the symbol variation display of the special figure 1, the decorative symbol display device 208 also starts the variation display of the decorative symbol of the special figure 1 and develops into super reach. The predetermined condition shown in FIG. 136 is the predetermined condition in step S613 of FIG. 133, and the predetermined condition is being established during the production of the super reach with high expectation of the big hit. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (sa), a state of development to super reach is shown. Super reach itself is a type of jackpot notice, and the super reach production also corresponds to the jackpot notice. In the production of the super reach here, the background image of the decorative symbol display device 208 changes, the decorative symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 in the reach state moves to the left corner and is displayed small, and the female character C2 Appears. Note that the hold icon disappears when it evolves into super reach. Note that even when the hold icon display control is performed and only the player cannot see the hold icon, it is assumed to be “disappear” or “erase” in this specification. The same applies to “hidden” and “hidden”. However, the numerical displays 284, 286, and 286 at the left end are not erased (visible). Each fourth symbol 285, 287, 289 is also displayed.

  Again, since the player is in a non-electric support state, the player is left-handed, and three game balls B pass continuously through the normal start port 228 provided in the left region, and ( As shown in FIG. 5B, the general symbol display device 210 starts the normal symbol variation display, and the regular symbol variation display is performed for 20 seconds. On the other hand, since the predetermined condition is established (the super reach is in effect), the effect based on the second general effect effect command set in step S615 of FIG. Will be executed), but at the start of the general symbol variation display in the general diagram display device 210, the second general diagram effect is not yet started, and the general diagram effect shown in FIG. A default image 283 a is displayed in the figure effect area 283. It should be noted that the ordinary drawing effect area 283 may be erased with the background image which is one of the effects of super reach, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the default image 283a is not displayed until the ordinary drawing effect is started. Also good.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 137 (sa), in the super reach character C2, the foot portion hides a part of the normal drawing effect area 283 where the normal drawing effect is not performed. As a result, the ordinary drawing effect region 283 is difficult to visually recognize.

  As shown in FIG. 136 (), when the end of the normal symbol variation display on the general diagram display device 210 is approaching (here, one second before), the second general diagram effect is displayed in the general diagram effect region 283. Is started. In the ordinary drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 137 (f), the variation display (high-speed variation) of the decorative symbol of the ordinary drawing is started. The variation display of the decorative pattern of the ordinary figure here is also the variation display pattern shown in (a) of FIG. 117 (b) (repeating the ordinary figure decoration 1 → the ordinary figure decoration 2 → the ordinary figure decoration 3). Since the time is short, the number of repetitions is small.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 137 (S), when the normal drawing effect is started in the normal drawing effect region 283, this time, the normal drawing effect region 283 hides the foot portion of the super reach character C 2. . As a result, the character C2 is difficult to visually recognize. It should be noted that the leg portion of the super reach character C2 may still hide a part of the ordinary drawing effect area 283, or the ordinary drawing effect area 283 may obscure the foot portion of the super reach character C2. It may not be hidden.

  Eventually, as shown in (su) of FIG. 136, the general symbol display device 210 ends the normal symbol variation display, and a fixed display is performed for 0.6 seconds. In the ordinary drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 137, the ordinary drawing decoration 2 is displayed for 0.6 seconds following the variation display of the ordinary decoration pattern, and the usual drawing result display effect is performed. . Also here, as the ordinary drawing effect, an effect image (here, the effect image 283b) is also displayed so as to surround the ordinary drawing effect region 283. The super reach character C2 is hidden by the effect image 283b up to the band portion. As a result, the super reach character C2 is more difficult to visually recognize. Note that all of the super reach character C2 may be hidden by the effect image 283b.

  It should be noted that the variation display time of the decorative pattern of the ordinary drawing in the second ordinary drawing effect (the period length of (f) in FIG. 136) is the fixed display time (the result display effect time of ordinary drawing: the period of (f) in FIG. 136) Long), or shorter or longer than the fixed display time.

  Subsequently, as shown in (C) of FIG. 136, the electric chew long is released and the electric chew is opened for 5 seconds. In the ordinary drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. 137 (se), following the usual result display effect with the effect image 283b, an effect similar to the electric chew release notification effect shown in FIG. 135 is executed. In the super reach character C2, the right body part is hidden by a balloon “During electric Chu release” in the electric Chu release notification effect. As a result, it is difficult to visually recognize the super-reach character C2. The electric chew release notification effect here can also be regarded as one of the usual result display effects. Note that all of the super reach character C2 may be hidden by the electric chew release notification effect.

  Note that the second ordinary drawing production here refers to the decision result in step S612 in FIG. 133, and displays a short variation display of the decoration pattern of the ordinary drawing, and then displays the result of the ordinary drawing with the effect image 283b. The effect is performed over a relatively short third time (for example, 6.6 seconds) in which the effect is performed and then the electric chew release notification effect is performed.

  Subsequently, although not shown in FIG. 137, as shown in FIG. 136 (S), when the electric-chu-long opening is ended, the electric-chu opening notification effect is also ended, and the normal symbol variation display is started. However, the usual drawing effect is not executed.

  Note that the start time of the second general drawing effect may be changed according to the start time of the symbol variation display of the special symbol. For example, a predetermined period including the start time of the second general drawing effect (for example, the front and back 5 seconds) ) May be controlled so that the start time of the second general drawing effect is synchronized with (at the same time as) the start time of the symbol variation display of the special symbol. Alternatively, control may be performed so as to be delayed from the start time of the symbol variation display of the special symbol, or may be controlled so as to be advanced. Further, in the period (c) in FIG. 136, an example in which the electric chew is kept open has been shown. However, the electric chew (the pair of blade members 232a) is opened and closed one or more times during the period (c). You may make it perform, and you may make at least one part of production | presentation display common at the time of opening or opening and closing and closing, or may make it different. For example, it may be a peace sign during opening or opening, a goo sign during closing or closing, or a blue kimono during opening or opening, even if the peace sign is continued. Yes, it may be red kimono when closed or during closing.

  FIG. 138 is a time chart showing a modification of the second ordinary drawing effect, and time (t) elapses from the left to the right in the figure.

  In the modified example shown in FIG. 138 (a), the second general drawing effect is not performed during the variation display of the usual decorative pattern (period (C)), and the fixed display is started (the beginning of the period (T)). ), The second general drawing production is started, and the electric chew release notification effect (this is also the result of the general drawing) is displayed as part of the second general drawing production even during the opening of the electric Chu long (period). A kind of production). In other words, the second ordinary drawing effect in this modification is configured only by the result display effect of the ordinary drawing, and the effect time is a relatively short fourth time (here, 5.6 seconds). Note that in the case of an ordinary figure out of date (ordinary figure C), only the result display effect of the ordinary figure in the final display is displayed, but since it is a very short time of 0.6 seconds, the ordinary figure is out of date (normal figure). In the case of FIG. C), the second general drawing effect may not be executed.

  In the second ordinary drawing effect in the modification shown in FIG. 138 (b), the second decoration is displayed both during the variation display (period (d)) and during the fixed display (period (nu)) of the decorative pattern of the ordinary figure. If the ordinary drawing effect is not performed and the electric Chulong opening is started (the beginning of the period (ne)), the second ordinary drawing effect is started. The production time of the second ordinary drawing effect in this modification is a relatively short fifth time (here, 5 seconds). Note that this second general drawing effect is not executed when the normal figure is out of place (normal figure C).

  In step S615 in FIG. 133, any one of the second general drawing effect at the third time, the second general effect at the fourth time, and the second general effect at the fifth time is selected. It may be determined by lottery whether to execute the second general drawing effect of time. Moreover, you may prepare the thing of production time other than said 3rd time-said 5th time as a 2nd common figure production.

  Further, the third time to the fifth time are all shorter than the usual symbol variation time (20 seconds here) in the non-electric support state. By doing so, there are cases where the production can be varied and the interest of the game can be enhanced. In addition, while the symbol variation display that is not performing the normal drawing effect, it is possible to attract the player's attention to other effects, and the player can display the stop display of the general symbol by performing the general drawing effect including the result display. May become easier to recognize and may increase the interest of the game.

  FIG. 139 is a time chart showing an example when the predetermined condition is changed from the established state to the unestablished state, and time (t) elapses from the left to the right in the figure.

  In the example shown in FIG. 139 (a), even if a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, super-reach is being executed) to a state where the predetermined condition is not satisfied (for example, super-reach end), the normal symbol variation display is started. It is an example which performs the 2nd general drawing effect determined at the time. That is, the same second general drawing effect as that shown in FIG. 136 is executed (period (F) to (E)).

  The example shown in FIG. 139 (b) is an example in which the ordinary drawing effect is started from the point in time when the predetermined condition is not satisfied. In this example, since the predetermined condition was established at the time of starting the normal symbol variation display, the second general diagram effect (the second general diagram effect shown in FIG. 136) that starts the effect from the beginning of the period (re). The same). However, the predetermined condition is not satisfied during the display of the variation of the ordinary decorative pattern, and the variation display of the ordinary decorative symbol is started from the middle of the variation display of the ordinary decorative symbol (the beginning of the period of (le)). ), The display of the variation of the decorative pattern of the usual figure is continued even during the period of (L), and thereafter, the result display effect of the usual figure with the effect image 283b is performed (period (B)), and then the electric chew release notification effect is produced. Perform (period (wa)).

  In addition, you may add a variation display of the usual decorative pattern for the period of (Le), or start the display control of the variation display of the ordinary decorative pattern from the beginning of the period (Li), While the predetermined condition is satisfied, it may be hidden and displayed when the predetermined condition is not satisfied.

  FIG. 140 is a diagram illustrating an example of the universal prefetching notice. This pre-reading advance notice effect may be executed when there is a common figure hold in the hold of the normal figure, or a special symbol hit pattern (for example, the general figure B of the electric tulong release) ) May be executed when there is a suspension of the usual figure, and it may be executed when a lottery with a predetermined probability is won (fake ordinary figure pre-reading notice effect). Moreover, even if there is a regular symbol per game in the hold of a normal figure, and even if there is a specific symbol hit in the hold of a normal diagram, it may be executed if a lottery with a predetermined probability is not won.

  140, the decorative image display device 208 displays an effect image (here, the effect image 283b) so as to surround the universal drawing effect area 283. The effect image 283b shown in FIG. 140 also enters the special figure 1 hold display area 281, and a part of the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 is hidden by the effect image 283b. In addition, a part of the decorative pattern of the special figure that is changing in the middle symbol display area 208b is also hidden by the effect image 283b.

  In this general-purpose pre-reading notice effect, when there are multiple holdings of the general drawing and the last holding of the general drawing is successful, the warning display is performed over the multiple times of the symbol change display of the normal drawing. It becomes a notice.

  Note that the pre-reading notice announcement for the special map may start after receiving the command for increasing the special figure hold (immediately after the increase of the special figure hold), but the specific effect (for example, the special figure jackpot notice or the special figure super reach) Etc.) may be started at the time when the specific effect is completed, or when the specific effect is started from the middle, the general-purpose prefetching notice effect is hidden. May be.

  FIG. 141 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a special figure jackpot notice effect is performed in the general drawing effect region 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 141 (a), the special figure 1, the special figure 2, and the usual figure are stopped. In addition, a default image 283a is displayed in the general drawing effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208. The number of holds in special figure 1 is 3, while the number of holds in special figure 2 and ordinary figure is both 0. In addition, the state shown in FIG. 141 is a non-electric support state.

  In FIG. 141 (b), the first special symbol display device 212 starts the special symbol variation display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the special symbol variation display. Note that the general-purpose display device 210 remains stopped. In this example, when the first general drawing effect is executed in the general symbol effect region 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display pattern shown in (d) of FIG. Repeatedly displayed.

  If the number of holdings of the usual figure is 0 at the time when the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the special figure jackpot notice effect may be started in the common figure effect region 283. The special jackpot announcement effect in the special figure effect area 283 is displayed when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and the lottery with the first predetermined probability is won, Even if the symbol is stopped and displayed, it is executed when the lottery with the second predetermined probability is won (a fake jackpot notice effect). In addition, you may perform as a pre-reading notice effect of a special figure. When the special figure jackpot announcement effect is started in the general drawing effect region 283, first, high-speed fluctuation is started in the general drawing effect region 283, and as shown in FIG. 141 (c), the general drawing effect region 283 before the reach development. The decoration character design of “Gekiatsu” is stopped and displayed. 141 (c), the decorative character design of “Gekiatsu” is displayed beyond the normal drawing effect area 283, and overlaps a part of the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811, and the first special figure 1 hold icon is displayed. 2811 is difficult to visually recognize. Note that the decorative character design “Gekiatsu” may be displayed in the general drawing effect area 283. In addition, in the case of a fake jackpot notice effect, a decorative character design of “sorry” may be stopped and displayed in place of the decorative character design of “gekiatsu”.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 141 (d), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of the special symbol decorative symbol develops into a reach effect. Even after the development of the reach production, the decoration character design “Gekiatsu” is stopped and displayed in the ordinary drawing production area 283. However, after the development of the reach production, the decoration character design of “Gekiatsu” may be erased. Alternatively, the default image 283a may be displayed in the normal drawing effect area 283.

  FIG. 142 is a diagram showing an example in which the advance notice effect to the specific effect of the special figure is performed in the general drawing effect region 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208. Differences from the example shown in FIG. 141 will be mainly described, and items not particularly noted are the same as those in the example shown in FIG.

  The specific effect referred to here is, for example, a super reach effect in the variable display of the decorative pattern of the special drawing. It should be noted that the advance notice advancement to the special effect of the special figure can be regarded as a big hit notice of the special figure.

  In the example shown in FIG. 142 as well, as in the example shown in FIG. 141, when the number of holdings of the usual figure is 0 when the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 1 is started, the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 1 is started. Then, high-speed fluctuation is started in the normal drawing effect area 283 (see FIG. 142 (b)).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 142 (c), after the occurrence of the normal reach, before the development of the super reach effect, the decoration character design of “Gekiatsu” is stopped and displayed in the general drawing effect region 283. The decorative character design of “Gekiatsu” shown in FIG. 142 (c) is also displayed beyond the ordinary drawing effect area 283, and overlaps a part of the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811, and the first special figure 1 hold icon is displayed. 2811 is difficult to visually recognize.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 141 (d), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the special symbol decorative symbol variation display develops into a super reach effect. After the development of the super reach production, the decorative character design of “Gekiatsu” disappears, and the default image 283a is displayed in the normal drawing production area 283. Further, a part of the base drawing effect area 283 is overlapped with a leg portion of the super reach character C2, and it is difficult to visually recognize the base drawing effect area 283.

  FIG. 141 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a special figure jackpot notice effect is performed in the general drawing effect region 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 141 (a), the special figure 1, the special figure 2, and the usual figure are stopped. In addition, a default image 283a is displayed in the general drawing effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208. The number of holds in special figure 1 is 3, while the number of holds in special figure 2 and ordinary figure is both 0. In addition, the state shown in FIG. 141 is a non-electric support state.

  In FIG. 141 (b), the first special symbol display device 212 starts the special symbol variation display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the special symbol variation display. Note that the general-purpose display device 210 remains stopped. In this example, when the first general drawing effect is executed in the general symbol effect region 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display pattern shown in (d) of FIG. Repeatedly displayed.

  If the number of holdings of the usual figure is 0 at the time when the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the special figure jackpot notice effect may be started in the common figure effect region 283. The special jackpot announcement effect in the special figure effect area 283 is displayed when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and the lottery with the first predetermined probability is won, Even if the symbol is stopped and displayed, it is executed when the lottery with the second predetermined probability is won (a fake jackpot notice effect). In addition, you may perform as a pre-reading notice effect of a special figure. When the special figure jackpot announcement effect is started in the general drawing effect region 283, first, high-speed fluctuation is started in the general drawing effect region 283, and as shown in FIG. 141 (c), the general drawing effect region 283 before the reach development. The decoration character design of “Gekiatsu” is stopped and displayed. 141 (c), the decorative character design of “Gekiatsu” is displayed beyond the normal drawing effect area 283, and overlaps a part of the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811, and the first special figure 1 hold icon is displayed. 2811 is difficult to visually recognize. Note that the decorative character design “Gekiatsu” may be displayed in the general drawing effect area 283. In addition, in the case of a fake jackpot notice effect, a decorative character design of “sorry” may be stopped and displayed in place of the decorative character design of “gekiatsu”.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 141 (d), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of the special symbol decorative symbol develops into a reach effect. Even after the development of the reach production, the decoration character design “Gekiatsu” is stopped and displayed in the ordinary drawing production area 283. However, after the development of the reach production, the decoration character design of “Gekiatsu” may be erased. Alternatively, the default image 283a may be displayed in the normal drawing effect area 283.

  FIG. 143 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the normal drawing effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208 functions as a display area for a reserved digest effect.

  In the ordinary drawing effect area 283 of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 143 (a), the electric chew release notification effect is performed, and the electric chew long open is performed. As a result, there are four balls in the electric Chu.

  In FIG. 143 (b), four special figure 2 hold icons 2821 to 2824 are displayed in the special figure 2 hold display area 282. A part of each of these four special figure 2 hold icons 2821 to 2824 is hidden by the electric chew release notification effect, making it difficult to view.

  In FIG. 143 (c), the symbol variation display of special figure 1 performed so far is terminated. In addition, the opening of the electric chew long is ended, the electric chew is closed, and the ordinary drawing effect is ended. However, a Tono-sama character is displayed in the general drawing effect area 283 shown in FIG. The pachinko machine in the fourth embodiment is also a special figure 2 priority change machine, and in this example, when there is a special figure 2 suspension, the Tono-like character continues to be displayed in the general drawing effect area 283. That is, in the general drawing effect area 283, when all the reservations for the special figure 2 are consumed, the Tono-sama character disappears and the default image 283a shown in FIG. 142 (a) is displayed. Note that if the game ball passes through the general drawing start port 228 before the special figure 2 is deferred, the Tono-sama character disappears in the general drawing effect area 283, and the normal drawing effect is preferentially executed. You may do it.

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 143 (d), the second special figure display device 214 starts the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure. The display style of the Tono-sama character displayed in the normal drawing effect area 283 may be changed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2. For example, if the default Tono-sama character has a display with a heel in both hands, but it is predicted that the jackpot symbol will be stopped on the digested suspended symbol variation display, the symbol variation display It changes into the display mode which lifted the bag which was held in both hands with the start. In addition, you may change from Tono to another character. In addition, the display in the general drawing effect area 283 may be changed every time the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is started.

  In the above description, when one effect conceals the other effect, the other effect may conceal one effect even if it is not particularly refused. For example, in the state shown in FIG. 137 (C), the electric-chu release notification effect hides a part of the super-reach character C2, but the super-reach character C2 is one of the electric-chu release notification effects. The part may be concealed so that the electric chew release notification effect becomes difficult to visually recognize. Further, when one effect hides the other effect, it may be hidden over the entire effect period of the other effect, or may be hidden only during a part of the entire effect period. Further, when one effect conceals a part of the other effect, even if not specifically refused, one effect may conceal all of the other effect. Further, the difficulty of visual recognition includes inability to visually recognize.

  Further, the other effects such as the ordinary drawing effect and the jackpot effect described above may be a sound effect, a light effect, and shown in FIGS. 128 (a) and (b). An effect by such an effect movable body may be used. In the case of an effect by sound, sounds overlap and one effect conceals the other effect according to the volume and pitch, that is, it becomes difficult to view the other effect.

  In the above description, “a start region (for example, electric Chu) that can change at least between an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) and a difficult-to-enter state (for example, a closed state); A determination unit (e.g., the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of executing at least the determination of whether or not the figure is displayed and a symbol that can display at least a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the determination as to whether or not the symbol has been displayed. A game machine comprising display means (for example, a general-purpose display device 210) and effect means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing at least an effect, wherein the start area is the determination of whether or not it is successful When the result is a specific success / failure determination result (for example, per common map), at least a specific operation (for example, opening / closing operation) can be performed. It is an operation including an operation for changing the state from the difficult entry state to the easy entry state, and the production means is capable of executing at least a first production (for example, an ordinary drawing production), and the first production is The start area is an effect including at least an effect (for example, an electric chew release notification effect) performed during execution of the specific operation, and the first effect is a first effect time (for example, a third effect time) Is an effect performed over a time (for example, 6.6 seconds), a fourth time (5.6 seconds), and a fifth time (for example, 5 seconds). A game table characterized by having a time shorter than a variable display time (for example, 20 seconds). Was explained.

  Here, the first effect may be an effect by display, an effect by sound, an effect by light, or an effect by a movable object. Further, the effect means may be an effect display means, for example.

  The specific operation may be an operation in which the difficult-to-enter state and the easy-to-enter state are alternately repeated one or more times. Therefore, the second effect may be an effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the first effect when the start area is in the easy-to-enter state. May be an effect capable of making it difficult to see at least a part of the first effect before the state is changed from the difficult-to-enter state to the easy-to-enter state, and the starting area is in the easy-to-enter state. It may be an effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the first effect after the state is changed to the entry difficult state.

  In addition, “the success / failure determination means is that the electric support state is more likely to derive the specific determination result than the non-electric support state, and the first effect is the non-electric support state than the electric support state. The game stand characterized in that the electric support state is an effect that is easier to be executed (step S611 shown in FIG. 133). ”Was also explained.

  In addition, “the symbol display means often displays the variation of the symbol for a longer time in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state (FIG. 131 (c)). A characteristic game stand. ”Was also explained.

  In addition, “the first effect is an approachable notification effect that notifies that a game ball can enter the start area when the result of the determination is a specific result (for example, FIG. 135 (ku) or the like. ”Was also explained.

  Further, “a second success / failure determination unit (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of executing at least a second success / failure determination (for example, whether or not a special figure is determined) and a result of the second success / failure determination are big hits. Game control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of at least shifting the control state from the non-hit control state to the big hit control state, It is possible to execute at least a second effect relating to the result of the second success / failure determination (for example, a special figure jackpot notice effect (including a pre-reading notice)), and the second effect is the first effect. A game table characterized by being an effect capable of making it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the first effect during a part or all of the execution period. ”Was also explained.

  Furthermore, in the above description, “a starting region (for example, electric Chu) that can change at least between an easy-to-enter state (for example, an open state) and a difficult-to-enter state (for example, a closed state), , A determination unit (e.g., the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of executing at least normal pattern determination, and after displaying a variation of the symbol, at least a stop symbol corresponding to the determination result can be displayed. And a display device (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing at least an effect. When the determination result is a specific determination result (for example, per common figure), a specific operation (for example, opening / closing operation) can be performed at least, and the specific operation , An operation including an operation of changing the state from the difficult entry state to the easy entry state, wherein the rendering means is capable of executing at least a first rendering (for example, a normal rendering), The effect is an effect including at least one effect among the effect during change, the effect during determination, and the effect during operation, and the effect during change is an effect executed during the symbol change display (for example, in FIG. 134). The effect during determination is an effect executed during display of the stop symbol by the symbol display means (for example, an effect during the period (K) shown in FIG. 134). Yes, the in-motion effect is an effect (for example, an effect in the period (c) shown in FIG. 134) performed while the start area is executing the specific operation, and the effect means is the first effect Different from directing A second effect (for example, a special bonus jackpot notice effect (including a pre-reading notice)) is executable, and the effect means performs at least the first effect during the execution of the second effect. It is possible to start (for example, FIGS. 137 (C) to (C)), and the production means can at least start the first production even when the second production is not being executed. (For example, FIGS. 135 (A) to (C)), the production time of the first production started during the second production non-execution (for example, the first time (20.6 seconds)). The game stand characterized in that the first effect production time (third time (for example, 6.6 seconds)) started during execution of the second production tends to be shorter. Was explained.

  Here, the first effect and the second effect may be an effect by display, an effect by sound, an effect by light, or an effect by a movable object. It may be. Further, the effect means may be an effect display means, for example.

  The second effect may be an effect that starts every predetermined time, or may be an effect that starts during an extra game state. Further, it may be an effect that prompts the player to perform an operation such as right-handed or pressing a button. Further, it may be an effect that prompts each button to be pressed. For example, for each button, it may be an effect that notifies the button press timing, an effect that notifies the button press acceptance period, or an effect that notifies the button press acceptance remaining period. Good.

  Further, “a second success / failure determination unit (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of executing at least a second success / failure determination (for example, whether or not a special figure is determined) and a result of the second success / failure determination are big hits. Game control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300) capable of at least shifting the control state from the non-hit control state to the big hit control state in the case where the determination result is a success / failure determination result. Is an effect including at least an effect related to the result of the second success / failure determination (for example, a super reach effect shown in FIG. 137). In addition, “the second effect is that when the result of the second success / failure determination is a jackpot success / failure determination result, the second success / failure determination result is a jackpot success / failure determination result. The second effect is an effect including an effect to be notified in advance (for example, the super reach effect shown in FIG. 137), and the second effect is the case where the result of the second success / failure determination is not the result of the jackpot success / failure determination. A game stand characterized by an effect including an effect of giving a notice as if the result of the second success / failure determination is a result of the success / failure determination of jackpot (a so-called fake jackpot notice effect). ”Was also explained.

  In addition, as another symbol display means (for example, a first special symbol start port 230) different from the start region and one of the symbol display means, a first symbol display means (for example, a first symbol display means) 1 special symbol display device 212), and as one of the symbol display means, second symbol display means (for example, second special symbol display device 214) and first symbol display means. At least controllable symbol display control means (for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300), and the separate start area does not change the ease of entry of a game ball, and the symbol display control means includes: The second symbol display means is at least controllable, and the symbol display control means holds the operation of the first symbol display means when the first holding condition is established. At least one hold control The symbol display control means can execute at least a second holding control for holding the operation of the second symbol display means when the second holding condition is satisfied. The establishment requirement of the first holding condition is a requirement including at least that the game ball has entered the separate start area, and the establishment requirement of the second hold condition is that the game ball has the start area The second effect is an effect that is performed while the second symbol display means is executing the symbol variation display (for example, a jackpot notice effect for the variation). A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  The second effect mentioned here may be a decorative display variation display effect (for example, a super reach effect) performed while the second symbol display means is executing the symbol variation display.

  In addition, “the first symbol display means is capable of displaying at least a first stop symbol (for example, special symbol F) corresponding to the result of the big hit determination after the symbol variation display. The second symbol display means is capable of displaying at least a second stop symbol (for example, the special symbol A) corresponding to the result of the jackpot success / failure determination after performing symbol variation display, It is more advantageous for the player as the jackpot control state when the second symbol display means displays the second stop symbol than when the first symbol display means displays the first stop symbol. A game table characterized by having a configuration (for example, FIG. 119 (d)) in which a large jackpot control state is easily started. ”Was also explained.

  Here, the game control means changes the control state from the non-big hit control state to the first big hit control state (for example, 2R big hit game when the first symbol display means displays the first stop symbol. The game control means can change the control state from the non-big hit control state to the second big hit when the second symbol display means displays the second stop symbol. It is possible to shift at least to a control state (for example, 15R special jackpot gaming state), and the second jackpot control state may be a control state that is more advantageous to the player than the first jackpot control state. .

  In addition, in the winning area (for example, attacker), the second symbol display means displays the second stop symbol more than after the first symbol display means displays the first stop symbol. The latter may be easier to perform a state change operation (for example, an opening / closing operation) that is advantageous to the player. For example, an operation with a large number of times of opening or an operation with a long opening time may be easily performed.

  Further, “the symbol display control means is capable of executing at least a control for starting the operation of the first symbol display means when the first holding digest condition is established, and the symbol display control The means is capable of executing at least a control for starting the operation of the second symbol display means when the second reserved digestion condition is established, and the establishment requirement of the second reserved digestion condition is: , The requirement that at least the operation of the second symbol display means is suspended, and the requirement to establish the first suspended digestion condition is that the operation of the second symbol display means is not suspended The requirement for establishing the first suspended digestion condition is a requirement including at least that the operation of the first symbol display means is suspended, and the effect display means includes the second display Wrong or wrong At least a pre-reading notice effect (for example, an effect due to a change in the display mode of the hold icon) can be displayed, and the effect display means can execute at least a continuous notice effect as the pre-reading notice effect. The effect display means is capable of continuing at least the continuous notice effect during the interrupt symbol variation display, and the interrupt symbol variation display is performed when the second reserved digest condition is during the continuous notice effect. It is a symbol variation display that is started during the continuous notice effect by being established, and the prefetch notice effect (for example, the first special figure 1 hold icon 2811 in the display mode of the prefetch notice) is being executed in the first effect. It is an effect that makes it difficult to view at least a part of the first effect (for example, the electric chew release notification effect) during part or all of the period (for example, , FIG. 125 (d ')), the amusement machine, characterized in that. ”Was also explained.

  The game stand here is a so-called special figure 2 priority change machine. The effect display means is capable of displaying at least the first effect during execution of the prefetch notice effect.

  Further, “the second effect is an effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the first effect during a part or all of the period during the execution of the first effect. A characteristic game stand. ”Was also explained.

The present invention can also be applied to a sealed pachinko machine. FIG. 144 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable. In a sealed pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 144, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium launched from the launching means 901 to the game area 902 can be discharged from the game area 902 and supplied to the launching means 901 again. In addition, a display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (award balls, rental balls, total number of balls, etc.) and other information is disposed below the game area 902 on the front of the game table. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in FIG.
In conventional game machines, it has been desired to further enhance the interest of the game.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and is intended to provide a gaming table capable of improving the interest of the player. According to this, the interest of the player can be improved.

  As described above, the gaming table (for example, pachinko machine 100) according to the embodiment described above has an operation means (for example, a chance button 136) provided at a position where the player can operate, and a plurality of types of displays. And at least one of the plurality of types of display is a first type of display (for example, the first operation unit image BG1, FIG. 30). One elapsed time notification image TG1), and at least one of the plurality of types of display is a second type of display (for example, an effect display including the variation icon CI in FIG. 30B), The display of the first type is a display related to the operation means, and the display of the first type is configured to be displayable when receiving an operation of the operation means. Type display is first The display includes a display (for example, the first operation means image BG1), and the first type display is a display including a third display (for example, the first elapsed time notification image TG1), The third display is a display whose display mode can be changed from the start position to the end position as time passes, and the second type of display is the second display (for example, FIG. 30 (b) is a display including the fluctuation icon CI), and the second type display is an effect display, and the display heading toward the end position in the third display because the operation means is not operated. The second display is configured to be erased when the second display overlaps with the partial display in the third display in a state in which the mode change is continued. It is a game stand characterized by.

  According to such a configuration, it may be possible to further prompt the player to operate the operation means. Further, since the operation means is not operated, the second display is displayed on a part of the third display before the change of the display mode of the third display (decrease display from the start position) reaches the end position. In the case of overlap, the partial display is erased, so that the player can be more focused on the display mode of the third display that is overlapped by the second display, and concentrated on the game. At the same time, it may be possible to further prompt the player who has not operated the operation means to operate the operation means.

  Further, the first type of display may be configured to be displayed when an operation of the operation means is received.

  The second display is a display executed when a display condition is satisfied, and the requirement for satisfying the display condition is a requirement not including that the operating means is operated. May be.

  The display means may be a means capable of displaying the second type of display prior to the first type of display.

  Further, the change in the display mode in the third display is a change in which the visibility is lower than that in the first state in the second state, and the second state is the second state. A state in which at least a part of the display of the type overlaps at least a part of the third display may be used.

  The first state may be a state where the second type display is not displayed on the display unit.

The second state may be a state where at least a part of the second display is displayed at a position overlapping at least a part of the third display.
The effect display may be a display including a big hit notice.

  The display means is means for not displaying the first type of display when the acceptance of the operation of the operation means is completed, and the display means is configured to display the first type display when the operation means is operated. It may be a means for ending the change of the display mode of the third display.

The first type of display is configured to be displayed when an operation of the operation unit is accepted, and the display unit is configured to display a third type of display (for example, FIG. g) is a means capable of displaying an “effect display that displays“ reach! ”, and the third type of display may be an effect display different from the second type of display.
The game machine may be a pachinko machine or a slot machine.

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the above-described embodiment is a gaming table including an operation unit (for example, a chance button 136) and a display unit (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208). The display means is capable of displaying at least a first display (for example, the first elapsed time notification image TG1 of FIGS. 32 and 33, the elapsed time notification image of FIG. 44, or the remaining time notification image). The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a second display (for example, an effect accompanying the common map change display of FIG. 32 or the hold icon PI3 of FIG. 33), and the first display and Is a display related to the operation means, and the first display is a display that can change at least the display mode over time, and the display mode changes in the first display. In the second state, the change is at least lower in visibility than the first state, and the second state is a state in which at least a part of the second display is the first display. It is a state in which it overlaps at least partly.

  The first state may be a state where at least the second display is not displayed on the display means.

  The first state may be a state in which at least a part of the second display is displayed at a position overlapping at least a part of the first display.

  By adopting such a configuration, the player may be able to focus on the first display and the second display that overlap each other and focus on the game. In some cases, the player can be further prompted to operate the operation means. Further, it may be possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the display relating to the operation means whose display mode changes with the passage of time, and to prompt the player to operate the game means. In addition, the player can watch the display means carefully and concentrate on the game, and can judge whether or not the operation is necessary, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  The first display is a display including at least a first image (for example, the first operation means image BG1 in FIG. 33), and the first display is a third image (for example, FIG. 33 is a display including at least the first elapsed time notification image TG1), and the second display is a display including at least a second image (for example, the hold icon PI3 in FIG. 33). The third image is a display whose display mode can be changed at least according to the passage of time, and the second state is a state in which the second image overlaps the third image. It is good also as a thing.

  By adopting such a configuration, there are cases where the player can be focused on the second image and the third image that overlap each other and can concentrate on the game. In some cases, the player can be further prompted to operate the operation means. Further, it may be possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the third image relating to the operation means whose display mode changes with the passage of time, and to prompt the player to operate the game means. In addition, the player can watch the display means carefully and concentrate on the game, and can judge whether or not the operation is necessary, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  The second image may be an image that overlaps at least a part of the third image in the second state.

  By adopting such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the third image relating to the operation means whose display mode changes with the passage of time, compared with the first image. There are cases where the operation of the means can be further urged. In addition, the player can watch the display means carefully from the difference in the visual aspect of the first image and the third image, and can concentrate on the game, and can judge whether or not the operation is necessary. There are cases where interest can be improved.

  The second display may be a display that overlaps only a part of the first display in the second state.

  In addition, at least a part of the first display may be a display that is at least difficult to visually recognize in the second state.

  By adopting such a configuration, the player can change the visual appearance of a part of the first display (overlapping area) and the other area (non-overlapping area), and the player can There are cases where the operation can be further encouraged. In addition, the player can watch the display means carefully because of the difference in the visual appearance of the first display, and can concentrate on the game, can judge whether or not the operation is necessary, and improve the interest of the game May be possible.

  Further, the display means may be means for not displaying at least the first display when reception of the operation of the operation means is completed.

  In addition, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100) according to the above-described embodiment is capable of executing at least a plurality of types of display and operation means (for example, the chance button 136) provided at least at a position where the player can operate. A display device (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208), wherein at least one of the plurality of types of display is a first type of display (for example, the first type in FIG. 30). Operating means image BG1, first elapsed time notification image TG1), and at least one of the plurality of types of display is a display of a second type (for example, a variation icon CI in FIG. 30), The display of the first type is a display related to the operation means, and the display of the first type is configured to be displayable at least when receiving an operation of the operation means. The first type of display is a display including at least a first display (for example, the first operation means image BG1 in FIG. 30), and the first type of display is a second display (for example, 30 is a display including at least the first elapsed time notification image TG1), and the second display is a display capable of changing the display mode from the start position to the end position according to the passage of time. The second type display is a display including at least a third display (for example, the fluctuation icon CI in FIG. 30), the second type display is an effect display, and the third type display The display is displayed with priority over the first display, the third display is displayed with priority over the second display, and the second display is displayed. The start position of the third display is greater than the second display. By displaying preferentially, it becomes more difficult for the player to see than when the third display is not displayed, and the change in the display mode of the second display is more than that of the second display. Since the third display is preferentially displayed, it is more difficult for the player to see than the third display. The first type of display is the second type of display. The second type of display may be displayed at least on the display means prior to the first type of display.

  The display means may be capable of displaying at least one of the first type display and the second type display.

  Further, the first display may include a display simulating the operation means.

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to further prompt the player to operate the operation means. When the second display (a part of the elapsed time notification image TG1) is used to notify the remaining time of the reception period of the operation means with a display that decreases from the start position, the start position of the second display is set to the second display. By displaying the third display (effect display) preferentially over the display of the player, it becomes more difficult for the player to see than when the third display is not displayed, and from the start position of the second display By changing the display mode toward the end position, the third display is displayed with priority over the second display, so that it is more difficult for the player to see than the third display. In some cases, it may be difficult for a player to visually recognize that the operation period of the operation means is being accepted, and the player may be further encouraged to operate the game means. In some cases, the player can focus more on the display mode hidden by the player and concentrate on the game. Further, in order to make it difficult to visually recognize the display mode at the start position of the second display (at the start of accepting the operation) and the change in the display mode from the start position to the end position of the second display. In some cases, the player can watch the display means carefully and concentrate on the game, can judge whether the operation is necessary, and can improve the interest of the game.

  Further, the effect display may include at least a jackpot notice.

  By adopting such a configuration, in the event of a big hit notice, the player can watch the display means carefully, concentrate on the game, can judge whether or not the operation is necessary, and improve the interest of the game May be possible.

The display means may not display at least the first type of display when acceptance of the operation of the operation means is completed.
In the following, we will add that we have explained so far.
(Appendix 1)

A first entrance through which a game ball can enter, start information deriving means for deriving start information based on the game ball entering the first entrance, and start information acquired by the start information acquiring means And a second entrance where a predetermined profit is generated based on the entry of the game ball. The game means is characterized by changing the predetermined performance based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second entrance during the predetermined performance.
(Appendix 2)

The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising: a profit granting unit that grants a predetermined profit to the player based on a game ball entering the second entrance. A game table characterized in that a specific effect that affects the predetermined effect is performed based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second entrance during the effect.
(Appendix 3)

The gaming machine according to appendix 1 or 2, wherein the presentation means includes display means for performing a predetermined display, and the display means has entered a game ball into the second entrance during the predetermined presentation. On the basis of this, a game table characterized in that a part of the display effect based on the predetermined effect is covered with a part of the display effect based on the specific effect.
(Appendix 4)

4. The game stand according to any one of appendices 1 to 3, wherein the first entrance and the second entrance are such that a game ball that has entered the first entrance enters the second entrance. A game stand characterized by being placed at a position where it can enter the mouth.
(Appendix 5)

The gaming machine according to attachment 2, further comprising a winning device that is advantageous to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the specific performance is highly likely to satisfy the predetermined condition A game stand characterized by a directing effect.
(Appendix 6)

A game value giving means for giving a game value to a player when a game value giving condition is established; a first entry area where the game value giving condition is not met even if the game ball passes; and a game ball A second entry area in which the game value provision condition is satisfied based on the entry of the ball, a determination unit that can determine whether or not the determination is true, and a determination of success / failure by the determination unit The pattern mode corresponding to the result includes at least notification means capable of stopping display after performing the variable display of the pattern, and image display means capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and is configured separately from the notification means. In a gaming machine provided with production means and production control means capable of controlling the production means, the success / failure determination condition includes at least that a game ball has passed to the first entry area. Yes, the production The control means is capable of causing the image display means to display a symbol fluctuation display for performing a stop display of a symbol corresponding to the result of the success / failure judgment by the success / failure judgment means after starting the symbol fluctuation display. The second approach area is one in which at least a game ball can enter when the result of the success / failure determination by the success / failure determination means is a specific result of the success / failure determination. It is possible to cause the effect means to execute at least a jackpot notice for notifying whether or not, and the jackpot is generated based on at least one condition that a game ball has entered the second entry area. The effect control means may make it difficult for the player to visually recognize at least a part of the symbol variation display during the display of the symbol variation display by the image display means. It is possible to cause the effect means to at least make the big hit announcement, and it is difficult for the player to visually recognize at least a part of the symbol fluctuation display by the image display means. A game stand that is easily visible to the player during the period.
(Appendix 7)

The gaming machine according to appendix 6, wherein the effect control means, during the stop display of the symbol by the image display means, the jackpot notice so that at least a part of the symbol is difficult to see from the player, It is possible for at least the effect means to perform the symbol stop display by the notifying means, even if at least a part of the symbol stop display by the image display means is difficult for the player to visually recognize. A game table characterized by being easily visible.
(Appendix 8)

The gaming machine according to appendix 6 or 7, wherein the effect control means is configured such that when a game ball enters the second entry area while the image display means is displaying the symbol variation display, An effect that does not make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the variable display can be performed at least by the effect means, and the jackpot notice does not make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the effect. Stand.
(Appendix 9)

The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 6 to 8, wherein the success / failure determination result includes a first success / failure determination result and a second success / failure determination result, and the notification means includes the success / failure determination result. Can be stopped and displayed when the result is the first determination result, and when the determination result is the second determination result, what is the first design aspect? A game table characterized by being capable of stopping and displaying different second symbol patterns.
(Appendix 10)

  The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 6 to 9, wherein the rendering means includes at least one of a first position that does not cover the symbol variation display by the image display unit from the front and the symbol variation display. A movable body that is movable to a plurality of positions including a second position that covers the part from the front, wherein the effect control means moves the movable body from the first position to the second position, thereby moving the movable body to the second position. A game table characterized in that it is possible to cause the movable body to make a big hit notice.

Note that the above description can be appropriately applied to the game tables described in other appendices and the game tables described in this specification.
(Appendix 11)

  A plurality of entry areas into which a game ball can enter and a determination of whether or not the game ball can be executed at least when a game ball enters a predetermined entry area including at least the first entry area among the plurality of entry areas. And means for determining whether or not the assisting ball can be determined when the game ball enters a second approaching area different from the predetermined approaching area among the plurality of approaching areas; After performing the display, after performing the symbol variation display, the first informing means capable of at least performing the first symbol variation display to stop display the symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the auxiliary success / failure determination, A second notifying unit capable of executing at least a second symbol variation display for stopping and displaying a symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the auxiliary success / failure determination, an effect unit including at least the second notifying unit, and at least the A game table comprising: production control means capable of controlling the exit means; and time reduction control means capable of controlling at least a time reduction state and a non-time reduction state in which a game ball is likely to enter at least the first entry area. In the first approach area, after the first symbol variation display is performed and the symbol mode corresponding to the result of the specific auxiliary success / failure determination among the results of the success / failure determination is stopped and displayed, the game ball The effect control means is capable of causing the effect means to at least execute a predetermined effect related to the result of the determination of success and the second symbol variation display, The effect control means executes at least the predetermined effect on the effect means so that at least a part of the second symbol change display is difficult to view during a predetermined period during execution of the second symbol change display. Let The first symbol variation display is easier to see even during the predetermined period, and the second symbol variation display is executed in the non-time reduction state than in the time reduction state. A game stand that is easy to be played.

The first entry area here is, for example, an electric Chu, and the predetermined entry areas are, for example, the second special figure start port 232 (electric Chu) and the first special figure start opening 230, and the second entry. The region is, for example, the general symbol start port 228, and the first symbol variation display is, for example, a common symbol variation display performed by the universal symbol display device 210 controlled by the main control unit 300, and the second symbol variation is displayed. The display is, for example, a normal decorative pattern variation display performed by the decorative symbol display device 208 controlled by the sub-control units 400 and 500.
(Appendix 12)

  The gaming machine according to appendix 11, wherein the second notification unit is an image display unit, and the predetermined effect can be executed at least by the image display unit, and the image display unit Has at least a predetermined display area in which the second symbol variation display can be executed, and the effect control means has at least a non-execution period of the second symbol variation display in the predetermined display region. A game table, wherein a display effect different from the second symbol variation display can be executed in a period including a part.

Here, the effect control means may be capable of causing the effect means to execute at least the predetermined effect so that at least a part of the different display effects is difficult to visually recognize.
(Appendix 13)

  The gaming machine according to attachment 12, wherein the different display effects that can be executed in the predetermined display area include at least one of a jackpot notice display and a game information display.

The jackpot notice display here includes a so-called prefetch notice. In addition, the game information display includes, for example, the number of time reductions, the number of consecutive games, the number of acquired game balls, the number of simulated consecutive times, and the like.
(Appendix 14)

The gaming machine according to attachment 13, wherein the presentation control means is capable of executing at least the jackpot notice during the non-execution period of the second symbol variation display in the non-time-saving state, The gaming table characterized in that at least the gaming information display can be executed during the non-execution period of the second symbol variation display in the time-shortening state.
(Appendix 15)

  The gaming machine according to appendix 14, wherein a specific second symbol variation display of the second symbol variation display includes a symbol relating to the result of the auxiliary success / failure determination and a symbol relating to the jackpot notice. A game table characterized by being capable of executing a second symbol variation display.

  The predetermined period in the gaming machine described in appendix 11 to appendix 15 may be a period including at least a part during execution of the second symbol variation display. The predetermined performance may include a jackpot notice that can at least tell whether or not a jackpot will occur. Further, the effect control means may not execute the second symbol variation display in the non-time-short state. In the predetermined display area, at least a notice regarding the symbol variation display of the special symbol 2 out of the second symbol variation display may be executed. Even if the special symbol 2 is interrupted during the execution of the second symbol variation display and the different symbol display is possible, the second symbol variation display can be performed with priority. Good. The notification during the electric chew operation can be executed, and the notification during the electric chew operation may be different depending on whether or not the second symbol variation display is executed. For example, the lamp control near the electric Chu may be different with and without the second symbol variation display. Specifically, the notification may be flashy with the second symbol variation display. The flashing notification here includes a long production period. The second symbol variation display may vary only the symbol related to the result of the auxiliary success / failure determination. Further, it may be a gaming machine that performs right-handed and left-handed, and the second symbol variation display may be more easily performed when left-handed. Further, the gaming machine may be left-handed in the non-electric support state and right-handed in the electric support state. The open pattern of the electric chew includes at least a first open pattern and a second open pattern, and the second open pattern is more advantageous than the first open pattern, and the second pattern The variable display may be executed at least when the second opening pattern is set.

Note that the above description can be appropriately applied to the game tables described in other appendices and the game tables described in this specification.
(Appendix 16)

It is equipped with electric Chu, winning / failing determining means (special figure), auxiliary winning / failing determining means (common figure), and jackpot game control means, and main common figure variation display (first symbol variation display) and sub-variable figure variation display. A game machine capable of performing (second symbol variation display), wherein the sub ordinary variation is difficult to see due to the second effect, and the main ordinary variation is the sub ordinary variation. A gaming table characterized in that even if it is difficult to visually recognize due to the second performance, it is easy to visually recognize, and the sub-normal variation is more likely to be performed outside of the big hit game than during the big hit game.
(Appendix 17)

The gaming machine according to appendix 16, wherein a specific sub-common figure change among the sub-normal figure fluctuations is more likely to be performed outside of the big hit game than in the big hit game. Amusement stand.
(Appendix 18)

The gaming machine according to appendix 17, wherein the sub-normal variation can be executed at least in a first variation time and a second variation time, and the second variation time is greater than the first variation time. The game table is characterized in that the variation time of is longer and the specific sub-normal variation is executable at a variation time including at least the second variation time.
(Appendix 19)

The gaming machine according to any one of appendix 16 to appendix 18, wherein the opening pattern of the electric chew includes at least a first opening pattern and a second opening pattern, and the first The second opening pattern is more advantageous for the player than the opening pattern (for example, a game ball is easy to enter), and at least the electric chew is released by the second opening pattern. A game stand, characterized in that it can be executed in some cases.
(Appendix 20)

  The gaming machine according to appendix 18 or 19, wherein the sub-common figure variation is executable during the jackpot game at a variation time including at least the first variation time. Stand.

  The specific sub ordinary change in the game machine described in Supplementary Note 16 to Supplementary Note 20 may not be performed in the first fluctuation time. In addition, the sub-normal change except the specific sub-normal change may not be performed in the second change time. In addition, the sub-normal map change performed in the first change time may be capable of performing an effect of notifying only the result of the auxiliary success / failure determination. In addition, the sub-usual change may not be performed during the jackpot game. Further, at least a part of the sub-normal variation may be a symbol variation display including a big hit notice. Furthermore, during the jackpot game, it may be possible to execute only the opening notification effect of electric Chu. Further, it may be a gaming machine that performs right-handed and left-handed, and a predetermined firing strength (for example, right-handed) may be easier to execute the sub-normal variation. Further, it may be a gaming table that can be played at the predetermined firing strength (right-handed) at least during a big hit game.

Note that the above description can be appropriately applied to the game tables described in other appendices and the game tables described in this specification.
(Appendix 21)

It includes a determination unit (special drawing), an auxiliary determination unit (general figure), a production unit capable of at least performing a pre-reading notice, and a production control unit capable of controlling at least the production unit. A gaming machine capable of performing a variable display (first symbol variation display) and a sub-normal symbol variation display (second symbol variation display), wherein the effect control means includes the pre-reading notice and the sub-normal diagram. It is possible to cause the effecting means to execute at least a change display, and when the sub-normal figure change is executed during execution of the pre-reading notice, the sub-normal figure change is at least one of the pre-reading notices. A game table characterized in that it is difficult to see the part.
(Appendix 22)

The gaming machine according to appendix 21, wherein at least a part of the sub-common figure variation is capable of executing a symbol variation display including a big hit notice.
(Appendix 23)

  The gaming machine according to appendix 21 or 22, wherein the rendering means includes at least an image display means, and at least the image display means is capable of executing the sub-normal variation and the prefetching notice, The display means has a predetermined display area in which the sub-normal variation can be executed, and the image display means has a pre-reading notice display area, and the predetermined sub-normal variation is included in the sub-normal variation. When a figure change is performed, the sub-normal figure change can be displayed beyond the predetermined display area, enters the prefetch notice display area, and makes at least a part of the prefetch notice difficult to view. A characteristic game stand.

The pre-reading notice is a holding change notice, and the image display means has a holding display area. When a predetermined sub-normal change is performed among the sub-normal changes, the sub-normal notice is displayed. The figure variation may be able to be displayed beyond the predetermined display area, enter the hold display area, and make at least a part of the hold prefetch notice difficult to view.
(Appendix 24)

The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 21 to 23, wherein the gaming machine is a special figure 2 priority change machine, and includes a reserved display area of special figure 1 and a reserved display area of special figure 2. And both reserved display areas are provided across a predetermined display area, and the sub-normal display variation can make it difficult to see at least a part of both reserved display areas. A gaming machine characterized in that only one of the pre-reading notice of FIG. 1 and the pre-reading notice of FIG.
(Appendix 25)

  The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 21 to 24, wherein the stage can be executed so that at least a part of the sub-normal variation is difficult to visually recognize. A game table.

  In the game tables described in appendix 21 to appendix 25, the sub-common figure variation is at least in a part of the on-hold display area among the plurality of on-hold display areas (for example, the first on-hold display area with the oldest winning timing). Some may make it difficult to view. Moreover, you may make the 1st hold | maintenance of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 hold display area difficult to visually recognize. Further, it may be difficult to visually recognize other hold such as the second hold. Further, when the electric chew is released and the special figure 2 is interrupted during the non-electric support state, at least a part of the suspension of the special figure 2 may be difficult to visually recognize due to the electric chew release notification effect. Further, during the non-electric support state, it is possible to (at least) make it difficult to visually recognize the reserved pre-reading notice in FIG. It may be possible. In addition, a specific reserved display area that is difficult to view due to the change of the sub-normal figure can perform the reserved display of special figure 1 and the special figure 2 in a winning order changing game machine. The function may be switched for each special figure change (during the non-electric support state). In addition, when the pre-reading hold display and the sub-normal figure change are performed at the same time, when the production (for example, super reach) is started during the special symbol decoration display, the sub-normal change May be left, and the pre-read hold display may be hidden, the sub-transition fluctuation and the pre-read hold display may be both hidden, the pre-read hold display may be left, The variation may be in a non-display mode.

In addition, even if it is the structural requirement contained only in each description of each embodiment and additional remarks demonstrated above, you may apply the structural requirement to other embodiment and additional remarks.
(Appendix 26)

It is provided with a main design variation display (first symbol variation display) including a determination unit (special drawing), an auxiliary determination unit (general drawing), a production unit, and a production control unit capable of controlling at least the production unit. ) And sub-general variation display (second symbol variation display) can be performed so that at least a part of the sub-general variation is difficult to see. An image display means and an effect movable means, wherein the effect move means is operable at least as the effect, and the sub-normal variation is at least performed by the image display means. In the image display means, the effect can display at least an image related to the operation of the effect moving means, and at least one of the effect moving means and the image operated as the effect. Amusement machine wherein a sub Hiroshizu difficult viewing the variation, characterized in that the.
(Appendix 27)

The gaming machine according to appendix 26, wherein, when the sub-normal variation has been made first, the sub-normal variation has been made difficult to visually recognize in the production, and the production has been performed first. The game machine is characterized in that the sub-normal variation using the image display means is not executed.
(Appendix 28)

The gaming machine according to appendix 26 or 27, wherein the image display means has a holding display area, and the effect makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the holding display area. A characteristic game stand.
(Appendix 29)

The game machine according to any one of appendices 26 to 28, wherein the sub-common figure variation is more likely to be performed during non-big hit games than during big hit games. Stand.
(Appendix 30)

  30. The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 26 to 29, wherein the sub-common figure change is more easily performed in a non-electric support state than in an electric support state.

  The effect in the game machine described in appendix 21 to appendix 25 may include at least a jackpot notice. Further, the effect moving means may be operable at least as a jackpot notice. Further, the effect moving means may be capable of at least an operation toward the front side (player side) of the image display means as the effect.

In addition, even if it is the structural requirement contained only in each description of each embodiment and additional remarks demonstrated above, you may apply the structural requirement to other embodiment and additional remarks.
(Appendix 31)

An electric Chu, a win / fail judgment means (special drawing), an auxiliary success / failure judgment means (common figure), an effect means, and an effect control means capable of controlling at least the effect means, and a main common map fluctuation display (first) And a sub-general variation display (second symbol variation display), wherein the effect control means provides the effect means with at least the effect and the sub-general fluctuation. It is possible to execute the effect so that it becomes difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the electric chew release notification effect after the sub-normal change, the electric chew release notification effect While running, it is allowed to enter the electric chew, and while the electric chew release notification effect is being performed with the effect in the special figure variation display based on entering the electric chew, it is difficult to see , Said Mei Hiroshizu variation is easy viewing, amusement machine, characterized in that.
(Appendix 32)

The gaming machine according to attachment 31, wherein the special figure 1 symbol fluctuation display means capable of executing at least the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 symbol fluctuation display capable of executing at least the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 2 A game stand characterized in that it makes it difficult to visually recognize a running electric-chu release notification effect by the effect during the symbol variation display of the special figure 2.
(Appendix 33)

The gaming machine according to appendix 31 or 32, wherein the special figure 2 is more likely to receive a big hit, which is more advantageous.
(Appendix 34)

  This game machine is a special figure 2 priority change machine, and includes at least a prefetch notice means capable of executing the prefetch notice of special figure 1 and executes at least the sub-normal figure change display during execution of the prefetch notice of special figure 1. It is possible, the electrification variation is won and the electric chew is released, and the prefetching notice is performed even if the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is interrupted, and the electric chew release notification effect is visually recognized by the effect display of the prefetching notice. A game stand characterized by difficulty.

  In the special figure 2 priority variation machine, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the electric chew release notification effect being executed with the effect in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 according to the entry into the electric chew. In addition, in the winning order variation machine, the electric chew release notification effect that is being executed in the state where the number of special symbols on hold is less than a predetermined number (less or zero) and the special symbol variation display is stopped is It may be difficult to view due to the effect in the symbol variation display of the special figure corresponding to the entry into the chew. In addition, special figure 89 can be won almost alternately during non-electric support, and during the electric support state, it is running on a game machine that can continuously win special figure 2 by releasing electric Chu through normal fluctuations. The electric chew release notification effect may be difficult to visually recognize with the effect in the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 corresponding to the winning. By doing so, it may be possible to notify that there is a possibility that the advantageous symbol variation display of FIG. Also, the attacker has a first big hit (unfavorable big hit) with a relatively short opening time, and a relatively long second big hit (advantageous big hit). The second jackpot may be more likely to appear than the second jackpot, or the first jackpot may not appear.

In addition, even if it is the structural requirement contained only in each description of each embodiment and additional remarks demonstrated above, you may apply the structural requirement to other embodiment and additional remarks.
(Appendix 35)

  A first entry area in which a game ball can enter; a second entry area in which a game ball can enter; When the second determination result is satisfied, the second determination unit that can execute the second determination, and the first determination unit after starting the symbol variation display. A game machine comprising: a notifying unit capable of executing a symbol variation display for performing a stop display of a symbol corresponding to the first determination result, and an effect unit including at least a display unit capable of executing the display. At least one of the requirements for establishment of the first condition includes at least the entry of a game ball into the first entry area, and the second entry area is the first success / failure determination result. If the result is a specific success / failure determination result, the time allowed for entry is limited. A game ball is allowed to enter, and at least one of the requirements for establishing the second condition includes at least that the game ball enters the second entry area, and the display The means is capable of displaying at least an effect display when the third condition is established, and the effect display includes at least a result display regarding the result of the first success / failure determination, The display means can display the effect display while the symbol variation display is being executed, and the display means can display the result display while the symbol stop display is being executed. The effect display is displayed over an effect time longer than the first effect time, and the first effect time is shorter than the display time of the symbol variation display. Features Gaming table.

Note that the first entry area is, for example, the ordinary map starting port 228, the second entry area is, for example, electric chew, and the first success / failure determination is, for example, the determination of whether or not the usual figure is present (normal drawing lottery), The second determination of success / failure is, for example, determination of success / failure of special figure (special drawing lottery).
(Appendix 36)

The gaming machine according to attachment 35, wherein the gaming state is configured to be able to shift to any one of a plurality of states, and the plurality of states include at least a first state, The second state includes at least a second state, and the second state has a higher probability that the first success / failure determination result becomes the specific success / failure determination result than the first state, and the display The means is characterized in that the effect display is easier to display during the period of the first state than the period of the second state.
(Appendix 37)

The gaming machine according to attachment 36, wherein the symbol variation display is performed over any one of a plurality of display times, and the plurality of display times includes at least a first display time. The plurality of display times include at least a second display time, the second display time is longer than the first display time, and the first state is The game table is characterized in that the display time is more likely to be the second display time than the second state.
(Appendix 38)

37. The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 35 to 37, wherein the result display indicates that the second entry area is when the first success / failure determination result is a specific success / failure determination result. The game table is characterized in that it includes at least an entry enable indication indicating that a game ball can enter.
(Appendix 39)

The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 35 to 38, wherein the directing means is capable of executing at least a jackpot notice for notifying whether or not a jackpot occurs, It is generated on the basis of at least one condition that a game ball has entered the second entry area, and the effect unit is configured to display at least a part of the effect display during the display of the effect display by the display unit. The jackpot notice can be executed at least so that it is difficult to see from the player, and the change display of the symbol by the notification means is difficult for the player to see at least part of the effect display by the display means. A game stand that is easily visible to the player during the period.
(Appendix 40)

  A first entry area in which a game ball can enter; a second entry area in which a game ball can enter; When the second determination result is satisfied, the second determination unit that can execute the second determination, and the first determination unit after starting the symbol variation display. A game machine comprising: a notifying unit capable of executing a symbol variation display for performing a stop display of a symbol corresponding to the first determination result, and an effect unit including at least a display unit capable of executing the display. At least one of the requirements for establishment of the first condition includes at least the entry of a game ball into the first entry area, and the second entry area is the first success / failure determination result. If the result is a specific success / failure determination result, the time allowed for entry is limited. A game ball is allowed to enter, and at least one of the requirements for establishing the second condition includes at least that the game ball enters the second entry area, and the display The means is capable of displaying at least an effect display when the third condition is established, and the effect display includes at least a result display regarding the result of the first success / failure determination, The directing means is capable of at least executing a jackpot notice for notifying whether or not a jackpot will occur, and the jackpot is generated based on at least one condition that a game ball has entered the second entry area. The effect display started when the jackpot notice is being executed is better than the effect display started when the jackpot notice is not executed. Serial in which production time tends to be shorter, the amusement machine, characterized in that.

In this case as well, the first entry area is, for example, the general map starting port 228, the second entry area is, for example, the electric chew, and the first success / failure determination is, for example, the determination of whether or not the normal figure is correct (normal map lottery). ), The second success / failure determination is, for example, determination of whether or not a special figure is present (special drawing lottery).
(Appendix 41)

  42. The gaming machine according to appendix 40, wherein the effect means displays at least the jackpot notice so that at least a part of the effect display is difficult for a player to visually recognize during display of the effect display by the display means. The symbol variation display by the notifying means is easy to see from the player even during a period when at least a part of the effect display by the display means is difficult to see from the player. A game table that features

  In addition, it may be a gaming machine according to the supplementary notes 35 to 41, and the non-electric support may be a gaming stand in which the electric chew can be selected with a shorter opening time than during the electric support. In other words, the possible entry time of the second approach area is any one of a plurality of times including at least a first time and a second time longer than the first time, The state may be such that the possible entry time is more likely to be the first time than the second state. By doing so, it may be possible to have an expectation that it will be a time other than the first time in the first state.

  In addition, the ordinary drawing effect may be performed more easily when the electric Chu long is opened than when the electric Chu short is opened. In other words, the display means is more likely to execute the effect display when the approachable time is the second time than when the accessible time is the first time. In this case, there may be a case where expectation can be given for the second time.

  Further, the time for the short normal drawing effect may be longer than the time for the short normal map change display. That is, the second state is such that the display time is likely to be the first display time than the first state, and the first effect time is longer than the first display time. There may be. Moreover, the said approach possible display may be displayed during the said approach possible time.

  Further, the display means has a display area capable of executing at least display, the display area includes at least a first display area, and the display means displays the effect display in the first display area. It may be possible to display in at least a part of the display area.

  Further, the display means may be capable of executing a notice display regarding the result of the second success / failure determination in at least a part of the first display area (example shown in FIG. 141). Further, at least a part of the effect display and at least a part of the notice display may be common. For example, the relationship between the variable display pattern shown in FIG. 117B (A) and the variable display pattern shown in (D) can be given.

  In addition, when performing a special drawing when the special figure is unchanged, the jackpot notice (for example, “Hatsuatsu”) may not be stopped, or even when the special drawing is not changed, A change display including a big hit notice (for example, “super hot”) may be displayed.

  Further, the ordinary drawing effect may be performed only during non-electric support, or may be performed only during a non-hit state.

  In addition, the effect display includes at least a first display (for example, variable display), and the effect display includes at least a second display (for example, a result display and an effect image display may be included). Yes, the effect display may include at least a third display (for example, an approachable display). Here, the third display may have a display area larger than the first display, may have a display area larger than the second display, The display area may be larger than the display.

In addition, even if it is the structural requirement contained only in each description of each embodiment and additional remarks demonstrated above, you may apply the structural requirement to other embodiment and additional remarks.
(Appendix 42)

  Symbol display means capable of performing at least symbol variation display, hold display means capable of displaying a hold icon, and first control means capable of at least performing display control of the symbol display means; And a second control means capable of at least controlling display of the hold icon by the hold display means, wherein the symbol variation display is performed after the symbol variation display is performed. The symbol pattern corresponding to the result of the determination of success / failure is stopped and displayed. The first symbol display means of the symbol display means is configured to display the symbol variation when the first symbol variation condition is satisfied. The second symbol display means of the symbol display means can perform at least the symbol variation display when the second symbol variation condition is satisfied. The first symbol variation condition includes at least that there is a ball in the first starting region of the starting region, and the second symbol variation condition is the starting It includes at least that there was a ball in the second starting area of the area, and the holding display means is a holding icon corresponding to the symbol fluctuation display in relation to the start of the symbol fluctuation display. It is possible to at least perform a first display relating to a certain digest pending icon, and the pending display means is a pending icon that does not correspond to the symbol variation display in association with the start of the symbol variation display. It is possible to perform at least a second display relating to the hold icon, and the hold display means is capable of displaying at least an undigested hold icon equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit number. The hold display means can display at least a plurality of undigested hold icons, and the first control means sends a command signal to the second control means in relation to the start of the symbol variation display. The second control means is capable of at least starting the first display in response to the reception of the command signal; and The control means is capable of at least starting the second display in response to the reception of the command signal, and the hold display means has at least a first display area. And the hold display means has at least a second display area, and the first display has a small amount of the digest hold icon from the first display area to the second display area. At least movement (hereinafter referred to as first movement). ), The digestion pending icon is erased in the second display area, and the second display displays the display position of the undigested suspension icon separately in the first display area. At least to the position (hereinafter referred to as second movement), and when the first hold increase condition is satisfied, the hold display means sets the first hold icon as the hold icon. The hold display means can display at least a second hold icon as the hold icon when the second hold increase condition is satisfied. The first hold increase condition includes at least that the first start area has been entered, and the second hold increase condition includes the second start area entry. There is a sphere If the first hold icon is the undigested hold icon, the first hold icon is displayed in the first symbol display means display area of the first display area. And when the second pending icon is the undigested pending icon, the second pending icon is displayed in the second symbol display means display area of the first display area, The display area for one symbol display means is a display area different from the display area for the second symbol display means, and the display area where the erasure is performed for the first hold icon is the second hold icon The first display is completed in a longer time than the second display, and the hold display means is an effect display by the undigested hold icon. The hold display means can also perform an effect display by the digestion hold icon, and at least all the undigested in the display area for the second symbol display means The hold icon completes the second movement at a second time, and at least the digestion hold icon in the display area for the second symbol display means has the first movement at the first time. The game table is characterized in that the first time is a time different from the second time. In addition, even if it is the structural requirement contained only in each description of each embodiment and additional remarks demonstrated above, you may apply the structural requirement to other embodiment and additional remarks.

  The configuration of the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment. For example, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the pachinko machine, For example, a plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols, a start lever for instructing rotation of the reels, and a stop button provided corresponding to each reel for individually stopping the rotation of the reels A lottery means for determining whether or not an internal winning of a plurality of types of winnings is won by lottery, a reel stop control means for performing stop control related to the stop of reel rotation based on the lottery result of the lottery means, and a lottery result Determining means for determining whether or not the symbol combination displayed by the reels stopped in advance is a symbol combination predetermined corresponding to the internal winning combination, and the symbol stop mode is predetermined. If a winning combination is also suitable, such as a slot machine and a dispensing control means for paying out game media payout processing game media corresponding to a predetermined winning mode.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention can be applied to an enclosed gaming machine. Here, the “enclosed game machine” is one that circulates and uses game balls enclosed in the game machine. In addition, the main control unit, the first sub control unit, and the second sub control unit may be configured as a single chip, or the main control unit and the first sub control unit may be configured to allow bidirectional communication. Good. Moreover, while enabling bidirectional communication between the main control unit and the first sub control unit, communication from the first sub control unit to the second sub control unit may be one-way communication.

  Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention only list the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done. In addition, in some cases, the content described in one configuration among a plurality of configurations described in the embodiments may be applied to other configurations to further widen the game.

  The game machine according to the present invention can be applied to game machines represented by a spinning machine (slot machine) and a ball game machine (pachinko machine).

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 100 Pachinko machine 136 Chance button 137 Setting operation part 208 Decoration symbol display apparatus 246 Shielding apparatus 300 Main control part 400 1st sub control part 500 2nd sub control part

Claims (11)

Operation means provided at a position where the player can operate;
Display means capable of performing multiple types of display;
A game machine equipped with
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a first type of display,
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a second type of display,
The first type of display is a display related to the operation means,
The first type of display is configured to be able to display when receiving an operation of the operation means,
The first type of display is a display including a first display,
The first type of display is a display including a third display,
The third display is a display capable of changing the display mode from the start position to the end position according to the passage of time,
The second type of display is a display including a second display,
The second type of display is an effect display,
Since the operation means is not operated, the second display overlaps a part of the display in the third display in a state where the change of the display mode toward the end position in the third display is continued. In such a case, the display is partly erased.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1,
The first type of display is configured to be displayed when receiving an operation of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1 or 2,
The second display is a display executed when a display condition is satisfied,
The requirement for establishment of the display condition is a requirement that does not include that the operation means has been operated.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 3,
The display means is means capable of displaying the second type of display prior to the first type of display.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 4,
The change in the display mode in the third display is a change in which the visibility is lower than that in the first state when it is in the second state.
The second state is a state in which at least a part of the display of the second type overlaps at least a part of the third display.
A game stand characterized by that. The game table according to claim 5,
The first state is a state where the display of the second type is not displayed on the display means.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand according to claim 5 or claim 6,
The second state is a state where at least a part of the second display is displayed at a position overlapping at least a part of the third display.
A game stand characterized by that. A gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 7,
The effect display is a display including a jackpot notice,
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 8,
The display means is means for not displaying the first type of display when the acceptance of the operation of the operation means is completed.
The display means is means for ending the change of the display mode of the third display when the operation means is operated.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claim 1 thru | or 9, Comprising:
The first type of display is configured to be displayed when receiving an operation of the operation means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a third type of display,
The third type display is an effect display different from the second type display.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 10, Comprising:
The game table is a pachinko machine or a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.